JP2019213984A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of making an execution mode of a special control state suitable.SOLUTION: A right-side area of a game area includes a first special electric winning device and a second special electric winning device. The first special winning electric device and the second special electric winning device are vertically disposed side by side. When winning/losing determination processing results in a jackpot to shift to an opening/closing execution mode, opening/closing control is executed to the first special winning device and the second special winning device. For details on an execution mode of the opening/closing control, the first special electric winning device and the second special electric winning device are simultaneously changed from a closed state to an open state at opening timing of each round game, and the first special electric winning device and the second special electric winning device are simultaneously changed from the open state to the closed state at completion timing of each round game. In this case, an interval period between the respective round games is set to be shorter than the shortest period required for allowing game balls existing in a position of the first special electric winning device to reach a position of the second special electric winning device.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 7

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as a kind of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, there is known a configuration in which a game state is shifted to a special control state based on a predetermined shift condition being satisfied, thereby giving a profit to a player.

  For the pachinko machine, specifically, a configuration in which a special control state is entered when a winning result is obtained by an internal lottery based on a game ball entering a ball entry portion provided in the game area, or a predetermined ball entry There is known a configuration in which a special control state is entered based on a game ball having entered a section. Then, when the state shifts to the special control state, for example, opening and closing of a ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and game balls are paid out based on the ball entry into the ball entry device (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2005-90555

  Here, in the gaming machines such as the above-described examples, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the interest of a game.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the invention according to claim 1 is provided in a game area where a game ball flows down, and the first state in which the game ball can enter or the game ball can easily enter the first state and the game ball entry A variable ball entry means provided switchably in each of a second state where the ball cannot be entered or the game ball is difficult to enter,
Special control means for executing special control for setting the variable ball-in means to the second state after setting the variable ball-in means to the first state;
Transition means for transitioning the gaming state to a special control state in which the special control is executed,
Acquisition corresponding ball entry means capable of entering a game ball at least in the predetermined game state,
Triggering ball entry means that enters a ball-enterable state in which a game ball can be entered based on that a game ball has entered the acquisition-compatible ball entry means,
With
A transition trigger to the special control state is generated based on a game ball having entered the trigger ball input means,
The present game machine is configured to execute the notification corresponding to the acquisition corresponding notification in a situation where the opportunity ball inputting means is in the ball enterable state based on a game ball having entered the acquisition corresponding ball inputting means. Means are provided.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to aim at the entertainment improvement of a game suitably.

It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. (A)-(j) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of a symbol display apparatus. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of a symbol display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure regarding discharge | emission of the game ball which flowed down the game area | region. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a success or failure lottery. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the low probability correctness table for 1st special figure, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the high probability correctness table for 1st special figure, (c) It is explanatory drawing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the low probability correctness table for 2 special figure, (d) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the high probability correctness table for 2nd special figure. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the distribution table for 1st special figures, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the distribution table for 2nd special figures. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed with the main side CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure which makes the main side CPU input the detection result of a entrance detection sensor. It is a flowchart which shows the entrance detection process performed by main side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electrical structure of the various apparatuses which communicate between a payout control apparatus and the said payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed with payout side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electrical structure of IC for management. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the input port of management side I / F. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the memory for correspondence. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the memory for log | history. It is a flowchart which shows the process for recognition performed with the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the management process performed with management side CPU. (A)-(d) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the information of the correspondence of the 1st-15th buffer and the kind of signal is stored in the memory for correspondence. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a management output process executed by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the log | history setting process performed with management side CPU. (A)-(e) It is a time chart which shows a mode that log | history information is stored in the memory for log | history. It is a flowchart which shows the process for data output performed with the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for external output performed with management side CPU. It is a front view of the game board which expands and shows the area | region in which the special electric prize winning device was provided. It is a perspective view of an opening / closing member. (A), (b) It is a perspective view of a passage formation body and an opening / closing member which show a mode that the entrance part of a 4th discharge passage part is opened / closed by an opening / closing member. It is a top view of the drive part for an opening / closing member and special power. (A), (b) It is the sectional view on the AA line of FIG. (A)-(e) It is a time chart which shows a mode that a winning a prize with respect to a 2nd operation port arises in opening / closing execution mode. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the execution mode of an opening / closing execution mode. (A1) to (b3) are time charts for explaining the execution mode of the opening / closing execution mode executed when the small hit result is triggered. It is a flowchart which shows the general-purpose power control process performed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric power control processing performed by a main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the hold information performed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation | variation start process performed by a main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure finalizing process performed by a main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special power start process performed by a main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special power release process performed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special power closing process performed by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special power ending process performed by the main CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the input port of the management side I / F in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for recognition performed with the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the management process performed with management side CPU. (A)-(h) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the information of the correspondence of 1st-12th buffer and the kind of signal is stored in the memory for correspondence. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electrical structure of management IC in 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the input port of management side I / F. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure information storage process performed with main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure response process performed in management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for external output performed with management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure response process performed in the management side CPU in 4th Embodiment. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the opportunity specific process performed in main side CPU in 5th Embodiment, (b) It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing performed in management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the opportunity specific process performed by the main side CPU in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing performed by the management side CPU in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the log | history setting process performed in the management side CPU in 8th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the memory for log | history in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the log | history setting process performed with management side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electric constitution of MPU of the main controller in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the entrance detection process performed by main side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electric constitution of the main controller in 11th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the input port of management side I / F. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the memory for log | history. It is a flowchart which shows the log | history setting process performed with management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for external output performed with management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the parameter management process performed with main side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of the signal path | route which transmits the detection result of each entrance detection sensor in 12th Embodiment to main side CPU and management IC. (A1)-(c2) It is a time chart for demonstrating the execution mode of the opening / closing execution mode in 13th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special power start process performed by a main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special power release process performed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special power closing process performed by a main CPU. It is a front view of the game board in a 14th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the entrance detection process performed by main side CPU. (A)-(e) It is a time chart which shows a mode that a game ball enters a 1st special entrance or a 2nd special entrance in an opening / closing execution mode. It is a front view of the game board in a 15th embodiment. (A), (b) It is sectional drawing on the AA line of FIG. 78. 78A is a sectional view taken along line BB of FIG. 78, and FIG. 78B is a sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 78. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the low probability correctness table for 1st special figure, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the high probability correctness table for 1st special figure, (c) It is explanatory drawing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the low probability correctness table for 2 special figure, (d) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the high probability correctness table for 2nd special figure. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the execution mode of an opening / closing execution mode. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a special power release setting process executed by the main CPU. It is a front view of the game board in a 16th embodiment. 6A is a flowchart illustrating a special power open setting process executed by the main CPU, and FIG. 6B is a flowchart illustrating a special power close setting process executed by the main CPU. (A)-(d) It is a time chart which shows a mode that a 1st special power winning device and a 2nd special power winning device are opened and closed. It is a longitudinal section of a game board for explaining the composition of the special prize winning device in a 17th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow prevention control processing performed by the main CPU. (A)-(d) It is a time chart for demonstrating the relationship between the opening / closing state of each special power winning device and the operation position of a flow prevention member. (A)-(c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the opening / closing state of each special electric winning device and the operation position of a flow prevention member. It is a front view of the game board in an 18th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the hold information of a general figure side performed by a main side CPU. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of a symbol display device. (A)-(e) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the reservation information of a general figure side is acquired. It is a front view of the game board in a 19th embodiment. (A), (b) It is the sectional view on the AA line of FIG. 95.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. In FIG. 2, the configuration in the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11. Have. The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting wooden plates to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility. In the pachinko machine 10, the outer frame 11 is not an essential configuration, and may be configured such that the outer frame 11 is provided in the island facility of the game hall.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. ing. An inner frame 13 of the gaming machine body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in front view.

  A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13 and can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated backward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view.

  The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at the rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. The door frame 14 has a function of locking the door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so as not to be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 17 provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlocking key.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

  The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed at the center of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front surface side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

  Here, the structure of the game board 24 is demonstrated based on FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24.

  An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. The inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26 provide guidance means. As a guide rail, it is configured. A game ball launched from a game ball launching mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by a guide rail.

  Incidentally, the game ball launching mechanism 27 includes a launch rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeding device 27b for supplying game balls stored in an upper plate 55a described later onto the launch rail 27a, and the launch rail 27a. And a solenoid 27c which is an electric actuator for firing the game ball supplied to the guide rail. When the launch operation device (or operation handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14 is rotated, the solenoid 27c is driven and controlled, and a game ball is launched.

  The game board 24 has a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning port 31, a special electricity winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing unit 37, a universal drawing unit 38, and the like. ing. A total of four general winning ports 31 are provided, and one is provided for each other.

  Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the game ball is not paid out. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning port 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. More specifically, the number of prize balls is determined when one game ball enters the first operation port 33 or when one game ball enters the second operation port 34. In the case where one prize ball is paid out and one game ball enters the general winning opening 31, ten prize balls are paid out and the special electric prize winning device 32 is executed. When one of the game balls enters, the payout of 15 prize balls is executed.

  The number of prize balls may be arbitrary. For example, the second actuation port 34 may have a smaller number of prize balls than the first actuation port 33, and the second actuation port 34 may be configured as the first actuation port. The number of prize balls may be larger than 33.

  In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 24a. In addition, the game board 24 is provided with a large number of nails 24b and various members such as a windmill in order to disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball as appropriate.

  Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the mode of discharging from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also from the game area PA after passing through the opening. A mode in which the game area PA continues to flow down without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 are provided. Entering a game ball into is also expressed as a prize.

  The variable display unit 36 includes a symbol display device 41 having a square display surface, and includes a center frame 36a so as to surround the periphery of the display surface of the symbol display device 41. In the center frame 36a, portions along the upper side, the left side, and the right side of the display surface of the symbol display device 41 protrude forward from the board surface of the game board 24, and the variable display unit 36 is located at the center of the game area PA. Is provided. Thereby, the game area PA includes an upper area PA1 located above the variable display unit 36, a left area PA2 located to the left of the variable display unit 36, and a right area PA3 located to the right of the variable display unit 36. , And a lower area PA4 located below the variable display unit 36. That is, the game ball fired in the game area PA first reaches the upper area PA1, but the game ball that has reached the upper area PA1 is in the order of the upper area PA1, the left area PA2, and the lower area PA4. The game ball flows down or flows down in the order of the upper area PA1 → the right area PA3 → the lower area PA4, and the game ball flowing down one of the left area PA2 and the right area PA3 does not flow down the other.

  The first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 are provided in a lower area PA4 which is an area below the variable display unit 36 in the game area PA. The lower area PA4 is continuous with the left area PA2, which is an area on the left side of the variable display unit 36 in the game area PA, downstream thereof, and is an area on the right side of the variable display unit 36 in the game area PA. It is continuous with the right area PA3 and downstream thereof. Therefore, a game ball that has flowed down from any position in the upper area PA1 which is an area above the variable display unit 36 in the game area PA can reach the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34. . For example, a game ball can reach the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 even when the firing operation device 28 is rotated so as to have the maximum operation amount. In addition, when the firing operation is performed with the aim of winning the first operating port 33, not only the first operating port 33 can be won, but also the second operating port 34 can be won. When the firing operation is performed with the aim of winning the second operating port 34, not only a winning in the second operating port 34 can occur but also a winning in the first operating port 33 can occur.

  The first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 are unitized as an operation port device in a state where the first operation port 33 is vertically arranged such that the first operation port 33 is above and the second operation port 34 is below. I have. When the first operating port 33 is not provided with a member for making the frequency of entering game balls into the first operating port 33 different, the left area PA2 is compared in a predetermined manner in which the game balls flow down. The probability of the game ball entering the first operating port 33 in the above is the same regardless of the game state. Therefore, the player can perform a firing operation aimed at entering a game ball into the first operating port 33 in any situation.

  A stage portion 36c is provided on the lower frame portion 36b, which is a portion of the center frame 36a below the display surface of the symbol display device 41, so as to extend laterally above the first operation port 33, A left frame portion 36d, which is a left portion of the symbol display device 41 in the variable display unit 36, is a warp passage that enables a game ball flowing down the left area of the variable display unit 36 to be guided to the stage portion 36c. Is formed. A horizontal central portion of the stage portion 36c exists vertically above the first operating port 33, and the central portion has a deriving portion 36f for deriving a game ball by its own weight below the stage portion 36c. Is formed. In this case, a game ball derived to the stage portion 36c and derived from a region other than the derivation portion 36f to a position below the stage portion 36c is difficult to enter the first operating port 33, but the derivation portion 36f The game ball drawn out of the stage portion 36c from below enters the first operating port 33 with a high probability.

  The second operating port 34 is provided with a general electric utility 34a as a guide piece composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state of the utility wire 34a, the game ball cannot win the second operating port 34, and the winning of the second operating port 34 becomes possible when the universal power 34a is opened.

  A through gate 35 is provided upstream of the second operation port 34 in the downflow direction of the game ball, more specifically, in the right area PA3. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and a game ball that has won the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after winning. As a result, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 can win the second working port 34.

  Based on the winning of the through gate 35, the common utility 34 a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is performed with a winning at the through gate 35 as a trigger, and a normal display of a general-purpose unit 38 provided at the lower right corner, which is a region where game balls do not pass in the game region PA, is displayed. The part 38a displays the variation of the pattern. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the electrification opening winning, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the fluctuation display of the general map display unit 38a is finished, the state shifts to the public power open state. In the public power open state, the general electric utility 34a is opened in a predetermined manner.

  The general map display unit 38a is constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and is not limited to this. A liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device , Or other types of display devices such as CRT or dot matrix display. In addition, as a pattern variably displayed on the normal map display unit 38a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or A configuration in which a plurality of colors are switched and displayed is conceivable.

  In the universal map unit 38, a universal map hold display section 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the universal map display section 38a. A maximum of four game balls won in the through gate 35 are reserved, and the number of the reserved balls is displayed by turning on the usual figure display unit 38b.

  A lottery is performed with the winning of the first working port 33 or the second working port 34 as a trigger. Then, the lottery result is clearly shown through a display effect in the symbol display device 41 of the special figure unit 37 and the variable display unit 36.

  More specifically, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a first special figure display section 37a and a second special figure display section 37b. In the first special figure display unit 37a, the winning display in the first operation port 33 is triggered and a lottery is performed, so that a variation display of the pattern is performed. Then, a result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. Further, in the second special figure display section 37b, the winning of the second operating port 34 is used as a trigger to perform a lottery, thereby performing a variable display of the pattern. Then, a result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. In addition, the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b are configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined mode, but it is not limited thereto. Instead, it may be constituted by another type of display device such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. In addition, as a pattern displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a plurality of types of characters , Or a configuration in which a plurality of colors are displayed.

  In the special figure unit 37, a first special figure reservation display part 37c and a second special figure reservation display part 37d are provided at positions adjacent to the first special figure display part 37a and the second special figure display part 37b. . The number of game balls winning in the first operation port 33 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the number of the reserved balls is displayed by lighting the first special figure reservation display part 37c. In addition, the number of game balls winning in the second operation port 34 is retained up to a maximum of four, and the retained number is displayed by turning on the second special figure reservation display part 37d.

  In detail, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and is a dot matrix display. May be.

  In the symbol display device 41, when the variation display of the pattern is performed on the first special figure display unit 37a based on the winning in the first operation port 33, the variation display of the symbol is performed in accordance with the variation display, and the second operation port is displayed. When the variation display of the pattern is performed on the second special figure display section 37b based on the winning of the symbol 34, the variation display of the pattern is performed accordingly. In addition, the symbol display device 41 performs not only a display effect triggered by winning a prize to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, but also a display effect in the opening / closing execution mode that shifts after winning the winning combination. Is called.

  The display contents when the symbol display device 41 performs the variable display of the symbol will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5. FIG. 4 is a diagram individually showing symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41, and FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a display surface of the symbol display device 41.

  As shown in FIGS. 4 (a) to 4 (j), the pattern, which is a kind of pattern, is composed of nine types of main symbols, each of which has a numeral “1” to “9”, and a shell-shaped pattern. It is composed of sub-designs. More specifically, the main symbols are configured by attaching numbers “1” to “9” to nine types of character symbols such as octopus.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 includes a main symbol and a sub symbol arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine kinds of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between the main symbols.

  That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and then between the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1”. In addition, a main symbol “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols by arranging 10 main symbols. Then, on the display surface, the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with a periodicity.

  As shown in FIG. 5B, three symbols are stopped and displayed on the display surface for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 9 symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It has become. As shown in FIG. 5A, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right down line L4, and a right up line L5 are set on the display surface.

  When symbols are displayed on the display surface in a fluctuating manner on the basis of winning in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled in a predetermined direction. Is started to be displayed. Then, the display is switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbol is statically displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . In addition, when the variation display of the symbol ends, if the result of the internal lottery is a 16R high-precision result described later, a combination of “7” symbols is formed on any of the activated lines, and the result of the internal lottery is displayed. If any of the 2R high accuracy results, 4R high accuracy results, 6R high accuracy results, and 10R high accuracy results described later, the same odd number combination other than the "7" symbol is displayed on any of the activated lines. If the result of the internal lottery is any of the 2R low-accuracy result, 4R low-accuracy result, 6R low-accuracy result, 10R low-accuracy result, and 16R low-accuracy result, which will be described later, If the same combination of even symbols is formed, and the result of the internal lottery is one of a first small hit result, a second small hit result, and a third small hit result, which will be described later, it is displayed on one of the activated lines. Not a combination of the same symbols The combination of predetermined symbol nor a combination of switch symbols (e.g., "3, 4 and 1 ') is formed.

  It should be noted that the display is started on one of the special figure display sections 37a, 37b and the symbol display device 41 based on the winning of one of the operation ports 33, 34, until a predetermined result is displayed and the processing is ended. Corresponds to one game time. Further, the variation display mode of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol columns, the direction of symbol variation display in the symbol column, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be appropriately changed. Also, the pattern that is variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-described pattern. For example, only a number may be variably displayed as the pattern.

  When a win is won by a lottery based on a prize in the first operating port 33, the mode shifts to an opening / closing execution mode in which a prize in the special power prize device 32 is enabled. Also, in the case where a big lottery or a small lottery is won by a lottery based on a prize in the second operating port 34, the mode shifts to an open / close execution mode in which a prize in the special electric prize device 32 can be made. As shown in FIG. 3, the special electric winning device 32 is provided in the right area PA3 in the game area PA. Therefore, a game ball flowing down the left area PA2 cannot win a prize in the special electric prize winning device 32. For example, the right operation area of the firing operation device 28 is rotated to the maximum operation amount. When the shooting operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the PA3, it is possible to win the special power winning device 32. The configuration of the special electric winning device 32 will be described later in detail.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for describing a configuration related to discharge of game balls flowing down the game area PA.

  As already described, a game ball that has entered any of the general winning opening 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a is discharged from the gaming area PA. In other words, the game ball that is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 and flows into the game area PA is any one of the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a. By entering the ball, the game area PA is discharged. A game ball that has entered one of the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a is guided to the back side of the gaming board 24.

  On the back surface of the game board 24, discharge passage portions 42 to 48 are formed corresponding to the general winning port 31, the special electric prize device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a, respectively. . The game balls that have flowed into the discharge passage portions 42 to 48 flow down the flow-in discharge passage portions 42 to 48, so that the game balls are led to the lower end portion of the game board 24 on the back side of the game board 24, and are discharged to a discharge ball collection portion (not shown). Collected. Then, the game balls collected by the discharge ball collection unit are discharged to the ball circulation device of the island facility where the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall.

  Various detection sensors 42a to 48a for detecting game balls are provided in the respective discharge passage portions 42 to 48. The discharge passage portions 42 to 48 and the detection sensors 42a to 48a will be described below. Since the four general winning ports 31 are provided as described above, the discharge passage portions 42 to 44 exist corresponding to each of the four. In this case, one detection sensor 42a is provided for each of the first discharge passage portion 42 corresponding to the leftmost general winning opening 31 and the second discharge passage portion 43 corresponding to the right general winning opening 31. 43a is provided. Specifically, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle position of the first discharge passage portion 42, and the detection range is provided in the middle position of the second discharge passage portion 43. The second winning opening detection sensor 43a is provided so as to be present. The game ball that has entered the leftmost general winning opening 31 is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a in the middle of passing through the first discharge passage portion 42, and the game that has entered the general winning opening 31 adjacent to the right side thereof. The ball is detected by the second winning port detection sensor 43 a while passing through the second discharge passage portion 43. Further, a third discharge passage portion 44 formed so as to join the two general winning holes 31 on the right side at a midway position is provided. The third discharge passage portion 44 has an entrance-side region corresponding to each of the two general winning ports 31, and has one exit-side region by joining the entrance-side regions on the way. are doing. The third prize opening detection sensor 44a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the exit side region in the third discharge passage portion 44. A game ball that has entered one of the two general winning ports 31 on the right side is detected by the third winning port detection sensor 44 a while passing through the third discharge passage portion 44.

  Corresponding to the special electric prize winning device 32, a fourth discharge passage portion 45 exists. A special electric detection sensor 45 a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the fourth discharge passage portion 45, and a game ball that has entered the special electric prize device 32 is in the middle of passing through the fourth discharge passage portion 45. It is detected by the special electricity detection sensor 45a. A fifth discharge passage portion 46 exists corresponding to the first working port 33. A first operation port detection sensor 46a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the fifth discharge passage portion 46, and a game ball that has entered the first operation port 33 passes through the fifth discharge passage portion 46. In the middle of passing, it is detected by the first working port detection sensor 46a. A sixth discharge passage portion 47 exists corresponding to the second working port 34. A second operation port detection sensor 47a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the sixth discharge passage portion 47, and a game ball that has entered the second operation port 34 passes through the sixth discharge passage portion 47. In the middle of passing, it is detected by the second working port detection sensor 47a. A seventh discharge passage portion 48 exists corresponding to the out port 24a. An out-port detection sensor 48 a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the seventh discharge passage portion 48, and a game ball that has entered the out-port 24 a passes through the seventh discharge passage portion 48. It is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a.

  In addition, the game ball which became the detection object by any one detection sensor 42a-48a among the various detection sensors 42a-48a is not made the detection object of the other detection sensors 42a-48a. A gate detection sensor 49a is also provided for the through gate 35, and a game ball passing through the through gate 35 in the middle of flowing down the game area PA is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a.

  As the various detection sensors 42a to 49a, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors are used, but any sensor can be used as long as it can individually detect game balls. The various detection sensors 42a to 49a are electrically connected to a main control device 60 described later, and the detection results of the various detection sensors 42a to 49a are output to the main control device 60. Specifically, the various detection sensors 42a to 49a output a LOW level signal in a situation where a game ball is not detected, and an HI level signal in a situation where a game ball is detected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 in which the game board 24 having the above configuration is attached to the resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 51 so that almost the entire game area PA can be viewed from the front. The window part 51 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 52 is fitted therein. Although the window panel 52 is colorless and transparent formed of glass, it is not limited to this, and it may be formed colorless and transparent of synthetic resin. As long as it is visible, it may be colored and transparent.

  A display light emitting unit 53 is provided above the window unit 51. In addition, a pair of left and right speaker portions 54 are provided for outputting sound effects corresponding to the gaming state. Further, below the window portion 51, an upper bulging portion 55 and a lower bulging portion 56 that bulge to the near side are arranged in parallel vertically. An upper plate 55 a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulge portion 55, and a lower plate 56 a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulge portion 56. The upper plate 55a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from a payout device 76 described later, and guiding the game balls to the game ball firing mechanism 27 side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 56a has a function of storing game balls that are surplus in the upper tray 55a.

  Next, the configuration on the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a main controller 60 that controls the main game is mounted on the back of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24). The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 accommodated in a board box 60a. In addition, you may provide the trace structure for giving the trace means for leaving the trace of the opening to the board | substrate box 60a, or leaving the trace of the open. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box 60a are unseparably coupled, and a configuration of a coupling portion that requires destruction of a predetermined part at the time of separation or an adhesive layer remains on an adhesion target at the time of peeling. A configuration is conceivable in which a seal seal that leaves a trace of being peeled is pasted so as to straddle the boundaries between a plurality of case bodies. Moreover, as a trace structure, the structure which apply | coats an adhesive agent with respect to the boundary between the some case bodies which comprise the board | substrate box 60a can be considered.

  The back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main controller 60. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 72 formed of a synthetic resin having transparency, and a payout mechanism portion 73 and a control device assembly unit 74 are attached to the back pack 72.

  The payout mechanism unit 73 includes a tank 75 in which game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 75. The game balls paid out from the payout device 76 are discharged to the upper plate 55a or the lower plate 56a through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 76. The payout mechanism unit 73 is provided with a back pack substrate having a power switch for performing ON and OFF operations of the power source, for example, while supplying a main power of AC 24 volts.

  The control device assembly unit 74 generates and outputs a predetermined power required by a payout control device 77 having a function of controlling the payout device 76 and various control devices, and is accompanied by an operation of the launch operation device 28 by the player. And a power source / launch control device 78 for controlling the launch of the game ball. The payout control device 77 and the power supply / launch control device 78 are arranged so as to overlap each other so that the payout control device 77 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

<Electric configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game and a power failure monitoring board 67 that monitors the power supply. An MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61. The MPU 62 incorporates a main side ROM 64, a main side RAM 65, and a management IC 66 in addition to the main side CPU 63 which is an arithmetic processing unit including a control unit and an arithmetic unit. In addition to the above elements, the MPU 62 incorporates an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like.

  The main ROM 64 is a memory (that is, non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory, and is used as a read-only memory. The main ROM 64 stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 63 and fixed value data.

  The main-side RAM 65 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage unit) that requires an external power supply for storage and holding such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The main RAM 65 is capable of random access, and has a faster read time than the main ROM 64 when compared with the same data capacity. The main RAM 65 temporarily stores various data for the execution of the control program stored in the main ROM 64.

  The management IC 66 is a management device that manages the entrance mode of the game balls in the game area PA based on the information supplied from the main CPU 63. Although details will be described later, the management IC 66 grasps the history of entering the game balls into the general winning port 31, the special electric prize device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a, The frequency of entering the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is determined according to the recognized winning history.

  The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 62 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 67 and a payout control device 77 provided in the main control device 60. A power supply / emission control device 78 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring board 67, and operating power is supplied to the MPU 62 via the power failure monitoring board 67.

  Various sensors such as various ball detection sensors 42 a to 49 a are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. As described above, the various winning detection sensors 42a to 49a are the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, the special electric detection sensor 45a, and the first operation opening detection sensor. 46a, second working port detection sensor 47a, out port detection sensor 48a, and gate detection sensor 49a. On the basis of the detection results of these entrance detection sensors 42a to 49a, the main CPU 63 determines whether or not to enter each entrance portion. Further, the main CPU 63 executes various lotteries based on winning in the first operating port 33 and various lotteries based on winning in the second operating port 34.

  A power failure monitoring board 67, a payout control device 77, and a sound emission control device 81 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. For example, a prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 based on the fact that a game ball has entered a prize ball-corresponding ball entry part corresponding to the payout of a game ball in the ball entry part. The Various commands such as a variation command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the sound emission control device 81.

  On the output side of the MPU 62, a driving unit 32b for a special electric power to open and close an opening / closing member 202 of the special electric winning device 32, which will be described later, , Special figure unit 37 and general figure unit 38 are connected. The special figure unit 37 includes a first special figure display section 37a, a second special figure display section 37b, a first special figure reservation display section 37c, and a second special figure reservation display section 37d. Are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Similarly, the universal map unit 38 is provided with a universal map display unit 38 a and a universal map hold display unit 38 b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 performs drive control of various drive units and various display units through the driver circuits.

  That is, in the open / close execution mode, the main CPU 63 controls the drive of the drive unit 32b for the special power so that the special power winning device 32 is opened and closed. In addition, in a case where the general-purpose part 34a is elected to be in the open state, the main CPU 63 controls the driving of the general-purpose driving part 34b so that the general-purpose part 34a is opened and closed. . In each game round, the main CPU 63 executes display control of the special figure display unit 37a. In addition, when the lottery result indicating whether or not to open the general electric utility 34a is clearly indicated, the main CPU 63 performs display control of the normal display portion 38a. In addition, when a prize is generated in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, or when the variable display is started in the special figure display sections 37a, 37b, the main CPU 63 sets the special figure reservation display section 37c, When the display control of 37d is executed and a winning in the through gate 35 occurs, or when the variable display is started on the general-purpose display unit 38a, the display control of the general-purpose reservation display unit 38b is executed by the main CPU 63. Is done.

  The power failure monitoring board 67 relays between the main control board 61 and the power supply / launch control device 78 and monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply / launch control device 78. The payout control device 77 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 76 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

  The power supply / launch control device 78 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, necessary operating power is generated for each of the main control board 61, the payout control device 77, and the like, and the generated operating power is supplied. Incidentally, the power supply / launch control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit for power interruption such as a backup capacitor. Power for storing and holding is supplied to the main side RAM 65 and the payout control device 77 of the control device 60. Further, the power source / launch control device 78 is responsible for the launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 27, and the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven when a predetermined launch condition is met.

  The sound emission control device 81 controls the display control device 82 while driving and controlling the display light emitting portion 53 and the speaker portion 54 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. It is. The display control device 82 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on the command received from the sound emission control device 81.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main CPU 63>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The main CPU 63 uses various kinds of counter information in the game to perform a jackpot occurrence lottery, the setting of the display of the special figure display units 37a and 37b, the setting of the symbol display of the symbol display device 41, the setting of the display of the ordinary figure display unit 38a, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, a winning random number counter C1 used for a lottery of a winning occurrence, a big hit type counter C2 used for determining a big hit type, and a symbol display device 41 are provided. Reach random number counter C3 used for reach generation lottery at the time of deviation and fluctuation, random number initial value counter CINI used for initial value setting of hit random number counter C1, and fluctuation display in special figure display units 37a and 37b and symbol display device 41 And a variation type counter CS for determining a period. Further, a general-purpose random number counter C4 used for a lottery to determine whether or not the general-purpose role object 34a of the second operating port 34 is in the general-purpose open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 65b of the main RAM 65.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. The information corresponding to the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is provided as acquisition information storage means in the main RAM 65 when a prize occurs in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. Is stored in the reserved special figure reservation area 65a. The special figure reservation area 65a includes a first special figure reservation area 85, a second special figure reservation area 86, and a special figure execution area 87.

  The first special map reservation area 85 includes a first area 85a, a second area 85b, a third area 85c, and a fourth area 85d, and a winning random number counter C1, Each numerical information of the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any of the areas 85a to 85d as the reservation information on the special figure side. In this case, the first area 85a, the second area 85b, the third area 85c, and the third area 85c are displayed in the first area 85a to the fourth area 85d in a case where a winning in the first operating port 33 occurs plural times consecutively. Each piece of numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the four areas 85d. By providing the four areas 85a to 85d in this manner, up to four winning histories of gaming balls to the first operating port 33 are stored on hold. It should be noted that the number that can be held in the first special figure holding area 85 is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be another number such as two, three or five or more. , May be singular.

  The second special map reservation area 86 includes a first area 86a, a second area 86b, a third area 86c, and a fourth area 86d. According to the winning history of the second operation port 34, a winning random number counter C1, Each numerical information of the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any one of the areas 86a to 86d as the reservation information on the special figure side. In this case, the first area 86a → the second area 86b → the third area 86c → the first area 86a → the fourth area 86c → the second area 86b → the third area 86c Numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the four areas 86d. Since the four areas 86a to 86d are provided in this manner, up to four winning prizes of gaming balls to the second operation port 34 are stored on hold. It should be noted that the number that can be held in the second special figure holding area 86 is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be two, three, five or more. , May be singular.

  The execution area 87 for the special figure stores the hold information of the target for performing the determination as to whether the special figure is appropriate or not or the distribution when starting the variable display in any of the special figure display units 37a and 37b. Area. Specifically, when the variable display of the first special figure display section 37a is started, the hold information stored in the first area 85a of the first special figure hold area 85 moves to the special figure execution area 87. Is done. On the other hand, when the variable display of the second special figure display unit 37b is started, the reservation information stored in the first area 86a of the second special figure reservation area 86 is moved to the special figure execution area 87.

  The information corresponding to the general-purpose random number counter C4 is stored in the general-purpose reservation area 65c when a prize has occurred in the through gate 35. The general-purpose reservation area 65c includes a first area 88a, a second area 88b, a third area 88c, and a fourth area 88d. Numerical information of the general-purpose random number counter C4 is set in accordance with the winning history of the through gate 35. Is stored in one of the areas 88a to 88d as the hold information on the general-purpose side. In this case, the first area 88a, the second area 88b, the third area 88c, and the fourth area 88a to the fourth area 88d when the winning in the through gate 35 occurs plural times consecutively. Numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of 88d. By providing the four areas 88a to 88d in this manner, up to four winning histories of gaming balls to the through gate 35 are stored on hold. It should be noted that the number that can be held in the ordinary figure holding area 65c is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be another plural number such as two, three or five or more. It may be. An execution area 89 for ordinary drawing is provided in the ordinary drawing holding area 65c. The execution area 89 for general drawing is an area in which the hold information of the target for performing the general-purpose open lottery process when the variable display is started on the general drawing display unit 38a is stored. Specifically, when the variable display of the general-purpose display section 38a is started, the hold information stored in the first area 88a of the general-purpose hold area 65c is moved to the general-purpose execution area 89.

  Each of the counters will be described in detail.

  First, the general-purpose random number counter C4 will be described. The ordinary random number counter C4 has a configuration in which, for example, one is added in order within a range of 0 to 250, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The ordinary random number counter C4 is updated periodically, and stored in the ordinary figure holding area 65c of the main RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed based on the stored value of the general-purpose random number counter C4 to determine whether to control the general-purpose part 34a to the open state.

  The pachinko machine 10 has only one support mode. Therefore, the probability of the winning in the ordinary power open state in the ordinary power opening lottery process using the ordinary number random number counter C4 and the manner of determining the variable display period in the case where the variable display of the pattern is performed on the general figure display unit 38a are as follows. It is constant irrespective of the game state, and the number of times the general electric role product 34a is opened in the general electric open state, one open period of the general electric role product 34a, and In the case where the open state occurs a plurality of times, the execution mode of the drive control of the general purpose duty object 34a such as the closed period from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is also constant regardless of the game state. It is. Accordingly, it is not necessary to change the display control mode of the general-purpose display unit 38a and the drive control mode of the general-purpose electrical component 34a according to the type of the support mode. And the data capacity can be reduced. In addition, since there is only one type of support mode, the normal gaming state in the present embodiment is a gaming state in which the winning / rejecting lottery mode is a low probability mode, and the high probability state in the present embodiment is a gaming state in which the winning / rejecting lottery mode is a high probability. It is a game state that is a mode.

  Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be described. For example, the winning random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 599 and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial random number counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the special figure reservation area 65a of the main RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34. Then, the determination of success / failure is performed using the value of the stored random number counter C1.

  The value of the random number to be won at the time of the success / failure determination is stored in the main ROM 64 as a success / failure table. In the success / failure table, as the success / failure results, a jackpot result, a small hit result, and a miss result are set. The jackpot result is an opportunity result that can be a trigger for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode in which the special power winning device 32 is controlled to be opened and closed, and can be a trigger for shifting to the success / failure lottery mode. The small hit result is a pass / fail result that is not a trigger for transition to the pass / fail lottery mode, while the transition to the open / close execution mode in which the special power winning device 32 is controlled to open / close is performed. The departure result is a pass / fail result that does not trigger a transition to the opening / closing execution mode and does not trigger a transition in the pass / fail lottery mode.

  The opening / closing execution mode executed when the jackpot result is obtained is a round number regulation mode executed with a predetermined number of round games as an upper limit. The round game continues until either one of the conditions that the number of times of opening and closing of the special power prize device 32 reaches the upper limit number and that a predetermined upper limit number of game balls win the special power prize device 32 is satisfied. It is a game. In the present embodiment, the special power winning device 32 is opened and closed once in one round game, and the open continuation period in each round game is set to 29 seconds. In addition, the maximum number of winnings in the special power winning device 32 is set to ten. In a situation where the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds. Is set to a time longer than the product of the firing cycle of the game balls and the winning upper limit number of one round game. Therefore, in each round game, it can be expected that the special prize winning device 32 will receive more game balls than the maximum winning number. Further, the number of round games executed in the round number regulation mode differs depending on the type of the jackpot result.

  In the opening / closing execution mode executed when the small hit result is obtained, the round game is not set, the number of times of opening and closing of the special power winning device 32 is the upper limit number, and the predetermined upper limit number of game balls is This is an opening / closing number regulation mode that ends when one of the conditions for winning the special electricity prize device 32 is satisfied. A plurality of types of opening durations in one opening of the special power winning device 32 in the opening / closing number regulation mode are set. Each of these open continuation periods is set to be longer than the launch cycle of the game balls (specifically, 0.6 seconds), but the launch cycle of the game balls and the upper limit number of winnings (specifically, 10) are set. There is a period less than the product and a period equal to or greater than the product of the launch cycle of the game balls and the winning upper limit number (specifically, 10). In the opening / closing execution mode executed when the small hit results, the number of balls held by the player can be increased although the number is smaller than in the opening / closing execution mode executed when the large hit results.

  As shown in the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 9A to 9D, the hit / fail table includes the first hold information stored in the first special figure holding area 85 based on the winning of the first operation port 33. The first special figure winning / failing table used at the time of winning / falling determination, and the second special information used at the time of winning / falling determination of the second reservation information stored in the second special figure holding area 86 based on winning in the second operating port 34. And a special map win / fail table. Further, the first special figure success / failure table includes a low-accuracy acceptance table and a high-accuracy acceptance table. Similarly, the second special figure success / failure table also includes a low-probability acceptance table and a high-accuracy table. There is a success / failure table. That is, the pachinko machine 10 refers to different winning / failing tables in the first holding information and the second holding information, and in any case, the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode are used as the success / absence lottery mode in the success / failure determination. Existing.

  Explaining each winning / failing table specifically, as shown in FIG. 9A, the low probability winning / failing table for the first special map has two random number values (for example, “5”, “305”) as a jackpot result. )), And the others are the values of random numbers that result in a miss. That is, when the winning / losing determination mode is set to the low probability mode and the winning / losing determination is performed on the first hold information, the winning result may be either the big hit result or the miss result, but the small hit result is not obtained.

  As shown in FIG. 9B, the number of random number values resulting in the jackpot is set to be larger in the high probability determination table for the first special figure than in the case of the low probability determination table for the first special figure. Specifically, the number is 20 (for example, “5”, “34”, “65”, “130”, “163”, “192”, “220”, “245”, “276”, “305”). , "334", "365", "392", "420", "470", "495", "520", "558", "575", "599"). In this case, the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that wins the big hit in the situation in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that wins in the situation in the high probability mode. Other values of the random numbers are the values of the random numbers resulting in the deviation. That is, when the winning / losing determination mode is set to the high probability mode and the winning / losing determination is performed on the first hold information, any one of the big hit result and the miss result is not a small hit result.

  As shown in FIG. 9 (c), in the second special figure low-accuracy table, the value of the random number resulting in the jackpot is the same as that in the first special figure low-accuracy table. On the other hand, the value of the random number other than the random number that results in the big hit is the value of the random number that results in the small hit. In other words, when the hit determination process is performed on the second hold information in the hit / reject lottery mode in the low probability mode, the result is either the big hit result or the small hit result. In addition, a first small hit result, a second small hit result, and a third small hit result are set as the small hit results. The first small hit result, the second small hit result, and the third small hit result differ in the execution mode of the open / close execution mode, which will be described later in detail. The winning probability of the first to third small hit results is 199/600, which is the same.

  As shown in FIG. 9D, the value of the random number resulting in the jackpot is the same as that of the high probability determination table for the first special figure. Therefore, the number of random number values resulting in the jackpot result is larger than that in the case of the low probability table for the second special figure. On the other hand, the value of the random number other than the random number that results in the big hit is the value of the random number that results in the small hit. That is, when the winning / rejecting determination is performed on the second hold information in the winning / rejecting lottery mode in the high probability mode, the result is either the big hit result or the small hit result. As in the low probability winning / failing table for the second special map, a first small hit result, a second small hit result, and a third small hit result are set as small hit results. The winning probabilities of the first to third small hit results are 193/600 or 194/600, which are substantially the same.

  As described above, when the second hold information triggers the determination of the success or failure, a small hit result can be generated. Open / close execution mode is likely to occur. Then, the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the small hit result allows the player to slightly increase the number of balls held.

  If the probability of a jackpot result is higher in the high probability mode than the low probability mode, the number and value of the winning random numbers are arbitrary, and in the situation of the low probability mode, the jackpot result In the situation where the value group of the winning random number counter C1 is in the high probability mode, only a part may be included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that is a big hit, or a configuration may not be included. .

  The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 29 and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically, and is stored in the special figure reservation area 65a at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. The plurality of jackpot results are set by providing a difference between the two conditions of the number of round games executed in the opening / closing execution mode and the winning / decreasing lottery mode in the winning / decreasing lottery means after the end of the opening / closing execution mode. I have.

  As shown in the explanatory diagrams of FIG. 10A and FIG. 10B, the distribution table includes 2R low-accuracy results, 2R high-accuracy results, 4R low-accuracy results, and 4R A high accuracy result, a 6R low accuracy result, a 6R high accuracy result, a 10R low accuracy result, a 10R high accuracy result, a 16R low accuracy result, and a 16R high accuracy result are set.

  The 2R low-accuracy result and the 2R high-accuracy result are executed twice in the round game in the open / close execution mode. The 4R low-accuracy result and the 4R high-accuracy result are executed in the round game in the open / close execution mode in 4 times. The accurate result and the 6R high accuracy result have the round game execution number of 6 times in the opening and closing execution mode, and the 10R low accuracy result and the 10R high accuracy result have the round game execution number of 10 times in the opening and closing execution mode, and the 16R low accuracy result. And the 16R high accuracy result indicates that the number of round games executed in the open / close execution mode is 16 times. The 2R low-accuracy result, the 4R low-accuracy result, the 6R low-accuracy result, the 10R low-accuracy result, and the 16R low-accuracy result are based on the success / failure lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and the success / failure lottery mode before shifting to the opening / closing execution mode. In either case, the mode is the low probability mode. This low-probability mode is the next jackpot result, and at least continues until it shifts to the opening / closing execution mode. On the other hand, the 2R high accuracy result, the 4R high accuracy result, the 6R high accuracy result, the 10R high accuracy result and the 16R high accuracy result, In either case, the mode is the high probability mode. This high-probability mode will be the next jackpot result, and will at least continue until it shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  As the distribution table, as shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, the first special information used for the distribution determination of the first hold information acquired based on the winning in the first operating port 33. A distribution table for the figure and a distribution table for the second special figure used for determining the distribution of the second hold information acquired based on the winning in the second operating port 34 are set.

  The distribution table for the first special map will be described in detail as shown in FIG. 10 (a). As shown in FIG. Result, 4R low accuracy result, 4R high accuracy result, 6R low accuracy result, 6R high accuracy result, 10R low accuracy result, 10R high accuracy result, 16R low accuracy result and 16R high accuracy result are set. In the distribution table for the first special map, “0 to 1” corresponds to the 2R low-accuracy result, “2 to 5” corresponds to the 2R high-accuracy result, and “6 to 7” corresponds to the 4R. "8-11" corresponds to 4R high accuracy result, "12-13" corresponds to 6R low accuracy result, "14-17" corresponds to 6R high accuracy result "18-19" correspond to the 10R low accuracy result, "20-23" correspond to the 10R high accuracy result, and "24-25" correspond to the 16R low accuracy result. "26-29" corresponds to the 16R high accuracy result. In this case, the probabilities of the 2R low-accuracy result, the 4R low-accuracy result, the 6R low-accuracy result, the 10R low-accuracy result, and the 16R low-accuracy result are respectively about 6.7%, The probability of 6R high accuracy result, 10R high accuracy result and 16R high accuracy result is about 13%, respectively. On the other hand, in the distribution table for the second special map, as shown in FIG. 10B, 16R low-probability results and 16R high-probability results are set as types of the jackpot results to be distributed. In the distribution table for the second special map, “0-9” corresponds to the 16R low-accuracy result, and “10-29” corresponds to the 16R high-accuracy result. In this case, the probability of a 16R low-accuracy result is about 33%, and the probability is 2R low-accuracy result, 4R low-accuracy result, 6R low-accuracy result, 10R low-accuracy result, and the like in the distribution table for the first special map. It is the same as the probability that any of the 16R low-probability results will be selected. The probability of a 16R highly accurate result is about 67%, and this probability is 2R high accuracy result, 4R high accuracy result, 6R high accuracy result, 10R high accuracy result, and 16R high probability in the distribution table for the first special map. The probability is that one of the highly accurate results will be selected.

  The distribution table for the first special map and the distribution table for the second special map have the same probability of being in the high-probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode when the jackpot is won. On the other hand, the average number of round games executed is greater in the distribution table for the second special figure than in the distribution table for the first special figure. Therefore, as a type of the jackpot result that can be selected when the jackpot is won, a prize to the second operating port 34 is generated more than when a prize is generated to the first operating port 33 and the internal lottery is performed. The case where the internal lottery is performed is more advantageous for the player.

  Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value and then returns to “0”. Here, in this pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 41. The expected effect includes a symbol display device 41 that can display a variation of symbols, and in a gaming machine in which a final stop result is a given correspondence result in a game round that results in a predetermined jackpot result, the symbol display device 41 This is a display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state that is likely to be the above-mentioned assignment correspondence result at the stage before the stop result is derived and displayed after the variable display of symbols is started. In addition, about the provision corresponding | compatible result, the combination of the symbol to which the same number was attached | subjected on one of the effective lines is stopped and displayed.

  In the expected effect, two types of reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of reach display and the generation of the result of giving correspondence at a stage before the reach display occurs are set.

  In the reach display, a combination of reach symbols is displayed by stopping and displaying symbols in some of the symbol columns among a plurality of symbol columns displayed on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, and the remaining symbols are displayed in that state. A display state in which a symbol is displayed in a variable manner in a column is included. In addition, in the state where the combination of the reach symbols is displayed as described above, while performing the variation display of the symbols in the remaining symbol columns, and performing a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen, , The reach effect is displayed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface after reducing or hiding the combination of the reach symbols.

  In the notice display, after the symbol variation display is started on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, the symbol variation is displayed in all symbol columns, or a part of the symbol columns and In a situation where symbols are variably displayed in the symbol row, a mode in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol row is included. Moreover, what makes a background screen the predetermined aspect different from the aspect until then, and what makes the symbol on a symbol row | line the predetermined aspect different from the aspect until then are also contained. Such a notice display can occur in any game times when reach display is performed and when reach display is not performed, but the case where reach display is performed is higher than the case where reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

  The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times in which the combination of the same symbols is finally stopped. In addition, in the game time corresponding to the small hit result, the game is not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Further, in the game times corresponding to the result of losing, it is executed when the reach random number counter C3 obtained at a predetermined timing with reference to the reach table stored in the main ROM 64 corresponds to the occurrence of reach display. .

  On the other hand, the determination as to whether or not to perform the notice display is performed not by the main control device 60 but by the sound emission control device 81. In this case, the sound emission control device 81 is more prone to generate a notice display in the game times corresponding to any one of the jackpot results than the game times corresponding to the missed results, and displays a notice display with a low appearance rate. A lottery process for displaying a notice is executed so as to satisfy at least one of the conditions of being easily generated. Incidentally, the lottery result is reflected when the game display effect is executed on the symbol display device 41.

  Next, the variation type counter CS will be described. For example, the variation type counter CS is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used by the main CPU 63 to determine the variation display period in the special figure display units 37a and 37b and the symbol variation display period in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is repeatedly updated and acquired at the time of starting the variation display on the special figure display units 37a and 37b and at the time of determining the variation pattern when the symbol display device 41 starts the variation of the symbol.

<About the processing configuration of the main CPU 63>
Next, each process executed in order for the main CPU 63 to advance the game will be described. The processing of the main CPU 63 is roughly divided into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, and timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec).

<Main processing>
First, the main processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, a power-on wait process is executed (step S101). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without progressing to the next process until a predetermined time for wait (specifically 1 sec) elapses after the main process is activated. The operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed during the execution period of the power-on wait process. Thereafter, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S102), and the internal function register of the main CPU 63 is set (step S103).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch provided in the power supply / launch control device 78 is manually operated (step S104), and whether or not “1” is set in the power failure flag of the main RAM 65 is determined. Determination is made (step S105). Also, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed (step S106), and it is determined whether or not the checksum matches the checksum stored at the time of power-off, that is, the validity of the stored data ( Step S107).

  In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when a game hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Similarly, when the information on occurrence of power shutdown is not set, or when an abnormality of data stored and held is confirmed by the checksum, the process proceeds to step S108. In step S108, the main RAM 65 is cleared. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S109.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch has not been pressed, step S109 is executed without executing step S108 on condition that the power failure flag is set to “1” and the checksum is normal. Proceed to In step S109, a power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RAM 65 such as initialization of the power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. After executing the process of step S109, a recognition process (step S110) for causing the management IC 66 to recognize various information, and a data output for outputting various data to the reader connected to the MPU 62 Processing is executed (step S111). Details of these recognition processing and data output processing will be described later.

  The main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, but the timer interrupt process is prohibited from occurring at the stage where the main process is started. The state where the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited is canceled at the timing before the process of step S111 is completed and the process of step S112 is executed, and the execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted. As a result, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the data output process in step S111 is completed, and the timer interrupt process is not executed until the stage before the process in step S112 is started. Therefore, the process for advancing the game in the main CPU 63 is not started until this situation is reached.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining process of steps S112 to S115. That is, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, but a remaining time is generated between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. The remaining time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but the remaining processes in steps S112 to S115 are repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes in steps S112 to S115 are non-periodic processes that are performed irregularly.

  In the remaining process, first, in step S112, an interrupt prohibition setting is performed to prohibit the generation of the timer interrupt process. In subsequent step S113, random number initial value update processing for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and in step S114, variation counter update processing for updating the variation type counter CS is performed. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter in the main RAM 65, the process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then the process of overwriting the read-out counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S115, an interrupt permission setting for switching from a state in which timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which the timer interrupt processing is permitted is performed. If the process of step S115 is performed, it will return to step S112 and will repeat the process of step S112-step S115.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Timer interrupt processing is executed periodically (for example, at a cycle of 4 msec).

  First, a power failure information storage process is executed (step S201). In the power outage information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power outage signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption has been received from the power outage monitoring board 67. Become. In the power failure process, “1” is set to the power failure flag in the main RAM 65, a checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is stored.

  Thereafter, a lottery random number update process is executed (step S202). In the lottery random number update process, the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the ordinary power random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, after executing the process of sequentially reading the current numerical information from the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general power random number counter C4, and adding 1 to each of the read numerical information, A process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S203, the random number initial value update process is executed in the same manner as in step S113, and in step S204, the variation counter update process is executed in the same manner as in step S114.

  Thereafter, a fraud detection process for monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a fraud monitoring target has occurred is executed (step S205). In the fraud detection process, occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and by confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, “1” is set to the game stop flag provided in the main RAM 65. In subsequent step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not “1” is set in the game stop flag. If a negative determination is made in step S206, the processing after step S207 is executed.

  In step S207, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for performing output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 32b and 34b is executed. For example, when the information to switch the special power winning device 32 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the special power driver 32b is started, and when the information to switch to the closed state is set. Stops the output of the drive signal. In addition, when the information for switching the power utility 34a of the second operating port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the power drive unit 34b should be started and switched to the closed state. When the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

  Thereafter, a reading process is executed (step S208). In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

  Thereafter, the incoming ball detection process is executed (step S209). In the ball entry detection process, signals received from the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a are read, and based on the read results, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, and the first operation port 33. The presence / absence of a ball entering the second working port 34 and the through gate 35 is specified. The details of the incoming ball detection process will be described later.

  Thereafter, a timer update process for updating the numerical information of the plural types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 65 is executed (step S210). In this case, the timer counter that is updated by subtracting the stored numerical information is handled in an integrated manner. However, both the updating of the subtracting timer counter and the updating of the adding timer counter are performed collectively. It is good also as a structure.

  Thereafter, a launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball is executed (step S211). In a situation where the firing operation to the firing operation device 28 is continued, one game ball is fired in a predetermined firing cycle of 0.6 sec. In the subsequent step S212, as the input state monitoring process, based on the information read in the reading process in step S208, the disconnection confirmation of each of the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a and the opening confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are confirmed. I do.

  Thereafter, the special figure special power control process for performing the execution control of the game times and the execution control of the opening / closing execution mode is executed (step S213), and the display control of the general figure display unit 38a and the drive control of the general electric handpiece 34a are performed. A general-purpose power control process is performed (step S214). The processing contents of the special figure special power control processing and the general figure general power control processing will be described later in detail.

  In the following step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214, the output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information on the special figure display sections 37a and 37b in the special figure hold display sections 37c and 37d. In addition to the setting, the output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information related to the general-purpose display section 38a in the general-purpose display section 38b is set. In step S215, output information for updating the display contents of the special figure display units 37a and 37b is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214, and the display of the general figure display unit 38a is performed. Set output information to update the contents.

  Thereafter, the contents of the command and the signal received from the payout control device 77 are confirmed, and a payout state receiving process for performing a process corresponding to the check result is executed (step S216). Also, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed (step S217). In addition, an external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process is executed (step S218). Thereafter, a management output process for outputting information corresponding to the result of entering the game ball in the game area PA to the management IC 66 is executed (step S219). Details of the management output process will be described later.

<Incoming ball detection process>
Next, in the main CPU 63, based on the detection results of the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through port. A configuration for specifying whether or not a game ball has entered the gate 35 will be described. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration in which the detection results of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 49a are input to the main CPU 63.

  The main CPU 63 is provided with an input port 63a. The input port 63a is configured as an 8-bit parallel interface so that eight types of signals can be handled simultaneously. An area for storing “0” or “1” information according to the voltage of each signal is provided in a one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. That is, the area includes 0th bit D0 to 7th bit D7. Further, more than eight types of signals are input to the input port 63a. In order to limit the number of simultaneously input targets to eight types, a signal group to be input to the input port 63a depends on the driver IC. It is switched through switching control.

  In the ball entry detection process (step S209) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), a signal group to be input to the input port 63a is set to a signal group from each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a. In such a situation, the 0th bit D0 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first winning port detection sensor 42a, and the first bit D1 corresponds to the detection signal from the second winning port detection sensor 43a. The second bit D2 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the third prize opening detection sensor 44a, and the third bit D3 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the special electric detection sensor 45a. The fourth bit D4 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first working port detection sensor 46a, and the fifth bit D5 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the second working port detection sensor 47a. The 6 bit D6 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the outlet detection sensor 48a, and the seventh bit D7 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the gate detection sensor 49a. It is.

  Each of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 49a detects a passage of the game ball by outputting a LOW level signal indicating that it is not detected as a detection signal when the passage of the game ball is not detected. In this case, an HI level signal indicating that the detection is being performed is output as a detection signal. The input port 63a stores "0" information for the corresponding bit when the LOW level signal is received, and "1" for the corresponding bit when the HI level signal is received. Stores the information. In other words, in the situation where the passing of the game ball is not detected by the entrance detection sensors 42a to 49a, information “0” corresponding to the information indicating non-detection is stored for the corresponding bit, and the passing of the game ball is detected. In the detected state, information “1” corresponding to the information indicating that the bit is being detected is stored.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the ball entry detection process executed in step S209 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12).

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored in the 0th bit D0 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S301: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the first output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S302), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S303). . The first output flag is for the main CPU 63 to specify that information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a should be executed to the management IC 66. Flag. The 10 award ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times that 10 game balls should be paid out. When the value of the ten-prize-ball counter is 1 or more, the ten-prize-ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), and the ten-prize-ball is output. When the command is output once, the value of the ten prize balls counter is decremented by one. When the payout control device 77 receives the 10 prize ball commands, the payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 10 game balls are paid out.

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of “0” is stored in the first bit D1 is switched to the situation in which the information of “1” is stored, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S304: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the second output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S305), and 1 is added to the value of the ten prize-ball counters provided in the main RAM 65 (step S306). . The second output flag is used for the main CPU 63 to specify that information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a should be executed to the management IC 66. Flag.

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of “0” is stored in the second bit D2 is switched to the situation in which the information of “1” is stored, the third winning opening detection sensor 44a It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S307: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the third output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S308), and 1 is added to the value of the 10 prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S309). . The third output flag is used for the main CPU 63 to specify that information output indicating that one game ball is detected by the third prize opening detection sensor 44a should be executed to the management IC 66. Flag.

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored in the third bit D3 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, one game ball is detected by the special electricity detection sensor 45a. It determines with having been detected (step S310: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the special electricity prize flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S311), “1” is set to the fourth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S312), and further The value of the counter for 15 prize balls provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S313). The special power winning flag is a flag for specifying by the main CPU 63 that one game ball has entered the special power winning device 32 in the open / close execution mode. In the special figure special power control process (step S213) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), by confirming that the special power winning flag is set to "1", one game ball is inserted into the special power winning device 32. It is determined that a ball has been generated, and the remaining number of balls that can enter the special power winning device 32 in the round game or opening / closing execution mode is decremented by one. When the process of subtracting 1 from the number of balls that can be entered is executed, the special electricity prize flag is cleared to “0”. The fourth output flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a should be executed to the management IC 66. . The 15 award ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times to pay out 15 game balls. When the value of the 15-prize-ball counter is 1 or more, the 15-prize-ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output processing of step S217 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 12), and the 15-prize-ball is output. When the command is output once, the value of the fifteen award ball counter is decremented by one. When the payout control device 77 receives 15 prize ball commands, the payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 15 game balls are paid out.

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored in the fourth bit D4 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, the first operating port detection sensor 46a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S314: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the first operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S315), and “1” is set to the fifth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S316). Further, 1 is added to the value of the single prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S317). The first operation winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the first operation port 33. In the special figure special power control processing (step S213) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 12), by confirming that the first operation winning flag is set to "1", the special figure special area holding area 65a of the special figure holding area 65a is set. On condition that the number of stored suspension information is less than the upper limit number of four, a process of newly storing the suspension information is executed. In the special electric special electric control process (step S213), it is confirmed that “1” is set in the first operation winning flag, and when the processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the first operation winning flag is cleared to “0”. To do. The fifth output flag is used for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball is detected by the first working port detection sensor 46a should be executed to the management IC 66. Flag. The single prize ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times one game ball should be paid out. When the value of the one-prize-ball counter is 1 or more, the one-prize-ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), and the one-prize-ball is also provided. When the command is output once, the value of the one prize ball counter is decremented by one. When the payout control device 77 receives a single prize ball command, the payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that one game ball is paid out.

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored in the fifth bit D5 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, the second working port detection sensor 47a It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S318: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the second operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S319), and “1” is set to the sixth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S320). Further, 1 is added to the value of the single prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S321). The second operation winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the second operation port 34. In the special figure special power control processing (step S213) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 12), by confirming that the second operation winning flag is set to "1", the special figure special area holding area 65a is held in the holding area RE. On condition that the number of stored suspension information is less than the upper limit number of four, a process of newly storing the suspension information is executed. In the special electric special electric control process (step S213), it is confirmed that “1” is set in the second operation winning flag, and when the processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the second operation winning flag is cleared to “0”. To do. The sixth output flag is for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball is detected by the second working port detection sensor 47a should be executed to the management IC 66. Flag.

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored in the sixth bit D6 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, one game ball is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a. Is detected (step S322: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the seventh output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S323). The seventh output flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a should be executed to the management IC 66. is there.

  When it is confirmed that the situation where the information “0” is stored in the seventh bit D7 is switched to the situation where the information “1” is stored, one game ball is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a. It is determined that it has been detected (step S324: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the gate winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S325). The gate winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the through gate 35. In the general-purpose power control process (step S214) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), it is confirmed that "1" is set in the gate winning flag, and the general-purpose data stored in the general-purpose holding area 65c is confirmed. On the condition that the number of hold information on the side is less than the upper limit number of four, a process of storing the current numerical information of the general random number counter C4 as the hold information on the general figure side in the general figure hold area 65c is executed. I do. It is confirmed that “1” is set in the gate winning flag in the ordinary power control process (step S214), and when the processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the gate winning flag is cleared to “0”.

  Since the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) is started at a period of 4 msec as described above, when the detection of one game ball is started by one of the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a, the ball is entered. While the detection sensors 42a to 49a continue to detect the one game ball, the main CPU 63 determines that one game ball has been detected by the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 49a. Done. Therefore, it is sufficient to provide one each of the first to seventh output flags.

<Configuration for paying out game balls>
Next, the contents of processing executed by the payout control device 77 will be described. First, the electrical configuration of the payout control device 77 and various devices that communicate with the payout control device 77 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  The payout control device 77 includes an MPU 91. The MPU 91 incorporates a payout-side ROM 93, a payout-side RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit and the like in addition to a payout-side CPU 92 that is an arithmetic processing unit including a control unit and a calculation unit.

  The payout-side ROM 93 is a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage unit) that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory, and is used as a read-only memory. The payout ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the payout CPU 92 and fixed value data.

  The payout side RAM 94 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage unit) that requires an external power supply for storage and holding such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The payout side RAM 94 is capable of random access and has a faster time for reading than the payout side ROM 93 when compared with the same data capacity. The payout side RAM 94 temporarily stores various data and the like for the execution of the control program stored in the payout side ROM 93.

  The payout side CPU 92 can perform bidirectional communication with the main side CPU 63. When the payout side CPU 92 receives a prize ball command from the main side CPU 63, the payout side CPU 92 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that the number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command is paid out. Further, the payout side CPU 92 monitors whether or not the game ball can be normally paid out, and if the payout side CPU 92 specifies that the game ball cannot be normally discharged, The payout device 76 is stopped even in a situation where the information on the number of unpaid prize balls is stored. Further, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a payout limit command indicating that the payout side cannot be normally paid out to the main side CPU 63. When the main CPU 63 receives the payout limit command, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 perform notification indicating that it is not possible to normally pay out game balls. In this manner, a notification command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. As a state where it is not possible to normally pay out game balls, a full state where the lower plate 56a is full of game balls, a state where no balls are refilled in the tank 75, a state where no balls are replenished, and a payout device 76 There are a payout abnormal state in which the machine does not operate normally, a main body open state in which the gaming machine main body 12 is released from the outer frame 11, and a front door open state in which the front door frame 14 is opened from the inner frame 13. .

  A full tank detection sensor (not shown) is provided in the middle of the game ball passage leading from the payout device 76 to the lower tray 56a, and the detection result of the full tank detection sensor is input to the payout CPU 92. The payout-side CPU 92 specifies that the game ball is full when the game ball is continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor, and the state where the game ball is continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor is released. If the full tank is released

  A ball non-detection sensor (not shown) is provided in the middle of the game ball passage leading from the tank 75 to the payout device 76, and the detection result of the ball non-detection sensor is input to the payout CPU 92. The payout-side CPU 92 specifies that the game ball is not detected when the game ball is not continuously detected by the ball non-detection sensor, and when the game ball is not continuously detected by the ball non-detection sensor is released. Identifies that the ballless state has been released.

  The payout device 76 is provided with a payout detection sensor (not shown) for detecting a game ball paid out from the payout device 76, and the detection result of the payout detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that one game ball has been paid out from the payout device 76 when a game ball is detected by the payout detection sensor. In addition, the payout side CPU 92 specifies that the payout detection sensor is in a payout abnormal state when the payout detection sensor 76 does not continuously detect the game ball even though the payout device 76 is driven and controlled so that the game ball is paid out. When the state where the game ball is not continuously detected by the payout detection sensor is released, it is determined that the payout abnormality state is released.

  A front door opening sensor 95 is provided on the front surface of the inner frame 13 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95 is input to the payout side CPU 92. In this case, when the front door frame 14 is in a closed state with respect to the inner frame 13, the front door opening sensor 95 transmits a closing detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and the front door frame 14 is in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13. In this case, the front door opening sensor 95 transmits an opening detection signal to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that the front door frame 14 is in a closed state when receiving a closing detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95 and receives the opening detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95. It specifies that the front door frame 14 is an open state. Also, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a front door opening command to the main side CPU 63 at the timing when it is determined that the front door frame 14 is in the open state from the closed state, and specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state from the open state. At this time, a front door closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63. The main CPU 63 specifies that the front door frame 14 has been opened when the front door opening command is received, and specifies that the front door frame 14 has been closed when the front door closing command is received.

  A main body opening sensor 96 is provided on the front surface of the back pack unit 15 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96 is input to the payout side CPU 92. In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the main body opening sensor 96 transmits a closing detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and the gaming machine main body 12 is open with respect to the outer frame 11. In some cases, the main body opening sensor 96 transmits an opening detection signal to the payout side CPU 92. The payout-side CPU 92 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in a closed state when a closing detection signal is received from the main body opening sensor 96, and a gaming machine when the opening detection signal is received from the main body opening sensor 96. It is specified that the main body 12 is in an open state. Further, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a main body opening command to the main side CPU 63 at the timing when it is determined that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state from the closed state, and specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state from the open state. A main body closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63 at the timing. The main CPU 63 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 has been opened when the main body opening command is received, and specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 has been closed when the main body closing command is received.

  The timer interruption process executed by the payout CPU 92 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly started at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec).

  First, a full tank process is executed (step S401). In the full tank process, as described above, it is determined whether or not the tank is full based on the detection result of the full tank detection sensor, and in the case of the full tank, the process for stopping the game ball payout And a command indicating that the tank is full is transmitted to the main CPU 63. When the full tank state is released, a process for enabling the game ball to be paid out is executed, and a command indicating that the full tank state has been released is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, a ball useless process is executed (step S402). In the ball-free processing, as described above, it is determined whether or not the ball is in the non-ball state based on the detection result of the ball-free detection sensor. At the same time, a command indicating that there is no ball is transmitted to the main CPU 63. In addition, when the ballless state is released, a process for enabling the game ball to be paid out is executed, and a command indicating that the ballless state is released is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, a payout abnormality monitoring process is executed (step S403). In the payout abnormality monitoring process, as described above, it is determined whether or not the payout abnormality state is based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor, and if it is in the payout abnormal state, the process of stopping payout of the game ball is executed. At the same time, a command indicating a payout abnormality state is transmitted to the main CPU 63. In addition, when the payout abnormal state is canceled, a process for enabling payout of the game ball is executed, and a command indicating that the payout abnormal state has been canceled is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, a front door opening monitoring process is executed (step S404). In the front door opening monitoring process, as described above, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state based on the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95. When the front door frame 14 is in the open state, A process for stopping the payout of game balls is executed, and a front door opening command is transmitted to the main CPU 63. In addition, when the front door frame 14 is closed, a process for enabling payout of game balls is executed, and a front door closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, the main body opening monitoring process is executed (step S405). In the main body opening monitoring process, as described above, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state based on the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96. Is performed, and a main body release command is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Further, when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed, a process for enabling the payout of the game ball is executed and a main body closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, a command reading process is executed (step S406). In the command reading process, a process for reading a prize ball command transmitted by the main CPU 63 is executed. Then, the prize ball command is stored in the payout side RAM 94. Then, after executing a prize ball setting process for adding the number corresponding to the received prize ball command to the unpaid prize ball number information in the payout side RAM 94 (step S407), the payout device 76 pays out game balls. The payout control process for performing the execution control is executed (step S408). In the payout control process, when the unpaid prize ball number information stored in the payout side RAM 94 is a value of 1 or more, the payout device 76 is driven and one paying ball is detected by the payout detection sensor. In this case, 1 is subtracted from the value of the prize ball number information. When the value of the prize ball number information becomes “0”, the drive control of the payout device 76 is stopped. Thereafter, an external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process is executed (step S409).

<Configuration for external output to hall computer HC>
Next, a configuration for externally outputting information from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer HC provided in the game hall will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 15 is provided with an external terminal plate 97. The external terminal plate 97 is provided with a large number of external terminals, which are some external terminals and a plurality of external terminals are electrically connected to the main CPU 63 and some external terminals. A plurality of external terminals are electrically connected to the payout side CPU 92. Since the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 are electrically connected to the external terminal plate 97 in this manner, as shown in FIG. It is possible to output.

  One external terminal of the external terminal plate 97 is electrically connected to the front door opening sensor 95, and one external terminal of the external terminal plate 97 is electrically connected to the main body opening sensor 96. More specifically, a signal relay board 98 is provided at an intermediate position of a signal path from the front door opening sensor 95 to the payout side CPU 92. The signal relay board 98 is provided with a branch path SL2 branched from the signal path SL1 from the front door opening sensor 95 to the payout CPU 92. The branch path SL2 is connected to an external terminal for opening the front door in the external terminal plate 97. Therefore, an electrical signal corresponding to the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95 is input not only to the payout-side CPU 92 but also to an external terminal for opening the front door on the external terminal plate 97. Thus, a signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is in an open state can be externally output to the hall computer HC without being controlled by the payout side CPU 92.

  In detail, the signal relay board 98 is provided with a branch path SL4 that branches from the signal path SL3 from the main body open sensor 96 to the payout CPU 92. The branch path SL4 is connected to an external terminal for opening the main body of the external terminal plate 97. Therefore, the electrical signal corresponding to the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96 is not only input to the payout-side CPU 92 but also input to the external terminal for opening the main body of the external terminal plate 97. As a result, a signal indicating whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state can be externally output to the hall computer HC without being controlled by the payout side CPU 92.

  Next, the content of information output from the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 to the hall computer HC will be described. First, the contents of information output from the main CPU 63 to the hall computer HC will be described.

  In the external information setting process (step S218) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), the main CPU 63 sets output of information to each external terminal assigned to the main CPU 63 on the external terminal board 97. As information output from the main CPU 63 to the external terminal board 97, information indicating that the open / close execution mode is being performed, information indicating that the winning / rejecting lottery mode is being performed in the high probability mode, and one game round has ended. And a predetermined number (for example, 100) of game balls from the game area PA through one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. Information indicating that the game ball has been ejected, information indicating that a game ball has entered the first operating port 33, and information indicating that a game ball has entered the second operating port 34 are included. .

  In the external information setting process (step S409) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16), the payout CPU 92 sets the output of information to each external terminal assigned to the payout CPU 92 on the external terminal board 97. The information output from the payout side CPU 92 to the external terminal board 97 includes information indicating that 10 game balls have been paid out.

In the hall computer HC, in accordance with various information received from the pachinko machine 10 through the external terminal board 97, it is possible to grasp the execution mode of the game ball payout in the pachinko machine 10. For example,
A payout rate, which is a ratio of the number of payout game balls generated until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10; Rate (hereinafter, this payout rate is referred to as "B")
The payout rate in the open / close execution mode, the payout rate in the high probability mode, the number of game times executed until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “ S ")
B-S × “the number of winning balls for winning in the first working port 33 and the second working port 34”
-Number of game balls that have entered the first operating port 33 before 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "S1")
The number of game balls that have entered the second operating port 34 before 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “S2”).
B- (S1 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + S2 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34”)
Etc. are calculated. Thereby, it becomes possible to manage the entrance mode of the game ball in the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 in the hall computer HC. The number of prize balls is the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the corresponding entrance part.

<Configuration for managing the winning mode of game balls>
Next, a configuration for managing the winning mode of the game ball using the management IC 66 will be described. First, the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  As described above, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 includes the main CPU 63, the main ROM 64, the main RAM 65, and the management IC 66. The MPU 62 includes an I / F 101 and a reading terminal 102 in addition to these.

  The I / F 101 is an interface for transmitting / receiving a signal to / from an external device of the MPU 62. The I / F 101 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63 via the internal bus 103. Detection results from sensors such as the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a and commands from the payout side CPU 92 are input to the MPU 62 through the input port of the I / F 101, and based on the input detection results and the contents of the commands. As described above, the main CPU 63 executes various processes. As a result of various processes executed by the main CPU 63, when a signal is output to a device such as the special-purpose drive unit 32b, the signal output is performed through the output port of the I / F 101, and the main side As a result of executing various processes by the CPU 63, when a command is output to the payout CPU 92 and the sound emission control device 81, the command output is performed through the output port of the I / F 101.

  The reading terminal 102 is a terminal for electrically connecting a reading device that is an external device of the pachinko machine 10 to the MPU 62, and is provided such that a connecting terminal portion is exposed on the surface of the MPU 62. . However, as described above, the main control board 61 on which the MPU 62 is mounted is accommodated in the board box 60a, and the reading terminal 102 faces the wall of the board box 60a so as not to be exposed to the outside of the main controller 60. ing. Therefore, in order to electrically connect the reading device to the reading terminal 102, it is necessary to open the substrate box 60a to expose the MPU 62. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 from being performed illegally. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an opening for exposing the reading terminal 102 to the outside of the main controller 60 is formed in the substrate box 60a. The reader 102 may be electrically connected to the terminal 102.

  The management IC 66 includes a management-side I / F 111, a management-side CPU 112, a management-side ROM 113, a management-side RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence relationship memory 116, and a history memory 117. Each of these devices is connected to be capable of bidirectional communication through an internal bus 66a provided in the management IC 66.

  The management-side I / F 111 receives various signals from the main CPU 63 via the signal path group 118 for unidirectional communication built in the MPU 62, and uses the signal path group 119 for unidirectional communication built in the MPU 62. An interface for transmitting various signals to the reading terminal 102 via the interface. Various signals from the main CPU 63 are input to the input port of the management side I / F 111, and various signals to the reading terminal 102 are output from the output port of the management side I / F 111. The main CPU 63 is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 via a bidirectional signal path group 120 built in the MPU 62.

  The management side CPU 112 is an arithmetic processing device including a control unit and an arithmetic unit. The management ROM 113 is a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory, and is used as a read-only memory. The management ROM 113 stores various control programs executed by the management CPU 112 and fixed value data. The management-side RAM 114 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage unit) that requires an external power supply for storage and holding, such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The management-side RAM 114 can be randomly accessed, and the time required for reading is faster than that of the management-side ROM 113 when compared with the same data capacity. The management-side RAM 114 temporarily stores various data for execution of the control program stored in the management-side ROM 113.

  The RTC 115 is a real-time clock, and is configured to constantly measure date information and time information and output the date information and time information being measured in accordance with an instruction from the management CPU 112. The RTC 115 is provided with a backup power source, and it is possible to measure date information and time information even while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.

  The correspondence relationship memory 116 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage unit) that requires an external power supply for storage and holding such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The correspondence relationship memory 116 stores information on the correspondence relationship between the buffers 122a to 122p provided in the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111 and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122p. Used for Details of the contents of the correspondence memory 116 will be described later.

  The history memory 117 is a memory that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory (that is, nonvolatile storage means), and is used for both reading and writing. The history memory 117 is used to store information relating to the entry of game balls received from the main CPU 63 through the management-side I / F 111. Details of the contents of the history memory 117 will be described later.

  Next, the configuration of the input port 121 provided in the management side I / F 111 will be described. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for describing the configuration of the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111.

  The input port 121 is provided with a plurality of buffers 122a to 122p. Specifically, first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p are provided. One type of signal can be input to each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p through the signal paths 118a to 118p, and each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p is an input target signal. “0” is stored as the first data when the signal is at the LOW level, and “1” information is stored as the second data when the signal to be input is at the HI level. The relationship between LOW and HI and the first data and the second data may be reversed.

  A first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first prize opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a first signal at the LOW level in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the first winning port detection sensor 42a, and one game is detected by the first winning port detection sensor 42a. When a sphere is detected, an HI level first signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the HI level first signal is input to the first buffer 122a.

  A second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a second signal at the LOW level in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the second prize opening detection sensor 43a, and one game is outputted by the second prize opening detection sensor 43a. When a sphere is detected, an HI level second signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the HI level second signal is input to the second buffer 122b.

  A third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third prize opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a third signal of the LOW level in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the third prize opening detection sensor 44a, and one game is outputted by the third prize opening detection sensor 44a. When a sphere is detected, a third signal of HI level is output over a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level third signal is input to the third buffer 122c.

  A fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electricity detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs the fourth signal at the LOW level in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the special electricity detection sensor 45a, and one game ball is detected by the special electricity detection sensor 45a. HI level fourth signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the HI level fourth signal is input to the fourth buffer 122d.

  The fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first working port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a fifth signal at the LOW level in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the first operation port detection sensor 46a, and one game is output by the first operation port detection sensor 46a. When a sphere is detected, a fifth signal of HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level fifth signal is input to the fifth buffer 122e.

  A sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second working port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a sixth signal at the LOW level when no new game ball is detected by the second operation port detection sensor 47a, and one game is output by the second operation port detection sensor 47a. When a sphere is detected, a HI level sixth signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the HI level sixth signal is input to the sixth buffer 122f.

  A seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the out-port detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a seventh signal at the LOW level when no new game ball is detected by the out port detection sensor 48a, and one game ball is detected by the out port detection sensor 48a. In this case, the seventh signal at the HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the HI level seventh signal is input to the seventh buffer 122g.

  An eighth signal corresponding to whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress is input to the eighth buffer 122h. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the eighth signal at the LOW level in the situation that is not in the opening / closing execution mode, and continuously outputs the eighth signal at the HI level in the situation that is in the opening / closing execution mode.

  The ninth buffer 122i is supplied with a ninth signal corresponding to whether or not the high probability mode is being performed. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW-level ninth signal in a situation other than the high-probability mode, and continuously outputs the HI-level ninth signal in the situation of the high-probability mode.

  A tenth signal corresponding to whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is input to the tenth buffer 122j. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is closed, and continues the HI level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is open. And output.

  The sixteenth buffer 122p receives an output instruction signal for causing the management CPU 112 to recognize when the history information stored in the history memory 117 is output to the reading terminal 102. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level output instruction signal when there is no need to output history information, and outputs a HI level output instruction signal for a specific period when it is necessary to output history information. To do. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

  The eleventh buffer 122k, the twelfth buffer 122l, the thirteenth buffer 122m, the fourteenth buffer 122n, and the fifteenth buffer 122o can receive signals from the main CPU 63, but the pachinko machine 10 does not receive normal signals. It is blank. As described above, by providing a larger number of buffers 122a to 122p than the types of signals output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 in the pachinko machine 10 as the input port 121 of the management I / F 111, It is possible to divert the management IC 66 to a different model from the pachinko machine 10. Thereby, the versatility of the management IC 66 can be improved. Incidentally, signal paths 118a to 118p are formed between the main CPU 63 and each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p so as to correspond one-to-one to the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the signal paths 118k to 118o may not be formed between the buffers 122k to 122o to be blanked.

  The fact that the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p in the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111 is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the management side CPU 112 receives no instruction from the main side CPU 63. Can specify that an output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p. On the other hand, what type of signal is input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the type of these signals receives an instruction from the main CPU 63. This is specified by the management CPU 112. Although the details of the types of these signals in the management side CPU 112 will be described later, when the control is started in the main side CPU 63 and the management side CPU 112 in accordance with the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62, the main side CPU 63 changes to the management side CPU 112. This is done by sending a type identification command. In this case, the information on the types of various signals provided by the type identification command is stored in the correspondence memory 116, and when the various types of signals are specified by the management CPU 112 in a situation where operating power is supplied. Information stored in the correspondence relationship memory 116 is referred to.

  FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the correspondence memory 116. The correspondence relationship memory 116 includes first to fifteenth correspondence relationship areas 123a to 123o in a one-to-one correspondence with the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o provided in the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111. Is provided.

  In the first correspondence relationship area 123a, information indicating the general winning opening 31 is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a by the management CPU 112. In addition, information indicating the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the general prize opening 31 is included in the first correspondence relationship area 123a together with information indicating that the game is a general prize opening 31 (10 pieces). Stored. In the second correspondence area 123b, information indicating the general winning opening 31 is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the second buffer 122b by the management CPU 112. The second correspondence area 123b also includes information indicating the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the general prize opening 31 together with information indicating that it is the general prize opening 31 (10 pieces). Stored. In the third correspondence area 123c, information indicating the general winning opening 31 is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the third buffer 122c by the management CPU 112. In addition, in the third correspondence area 123c, information indicating the general winning opening 31 and information on the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning opening 31 (10 pieces) are also included. Is stored.

  In the fourth correspondence area 123d, information indicating that the special prize-winning device 32 is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the fourth buffer 122d. The fourth correspondence area 123d also includes information indicating the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the special electricity prize winning device 32, together with information indicating that it is the special electricity prize winning device 32 (15). Stored. In the fifth correspondence area 123e, information indicating the first working port 33 is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the fifth buffer 122e. In addition, in the fifth correspondence area 123e, information indicating the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the first operation port 33 together with information indicating the first operation port 33 (one piece). ) Is also stored. In the sixth correspondence area 123f, information indicating the second working port 34 is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the sixth buffer 122f. In addition, in the sixth correspondence area 123f, information indicating the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the second operation port 34 together with information indicating the second operation port 34 (one piece). ) Is also stored. In the seventh correspondence area 123g, information indicating the outlet 24a is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the seventh buffer 122g.

  In the eighth correspondence area 123h, information indicating the open / close execution mode is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the eighth buffer 122h. In the ninth correspondence area 123i, information indicating the high probability mode is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the ninth buffer 122i by the management CPU 112. In the tenth correspondence area 123j, information indicating the front door frame 14 is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the tenth buffer 122j.

  In the eleventh corresponding relationship area 123k, information indicating a blank that does not correspond to any of them is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k by the management CPU 112. In the twelfth correspondence area 123l, information indicating a blank that does not correspond to any of them is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l by the management CPU 112. In the thirteenth correspondence area 123m, information indicating a blank that does not correspond to any of them is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m by the management CPU 112. In the fourteenth correspondence area 123n, information indicating a blank that does not correspond to any of them is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n by the management CPU 112. In the fifteenth corresponding relationship area 123o, information indicating a blank that does not correspond to any of them is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o by the management CPU 112.

  As described above, what kind of signal is input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is specified by the management CPU 112 by receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63. The management IC 66 can be used for a different model from the pachinko machine 10. Thereby, the versatility of the management IC 66 can be improved.

  In addition, every time a signal corresponding to storage of history information is output to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o, information for recognizing the signal type is not output, but the signal type is recognized in advance. Information for specifying the type of signal to be input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o based on the output information in the management CPU 112 is stored in the correspondence memory 116. This is a configuration. As a result, in comparison with a configuration in which information for recognizing the type of the signal is output each time a signal corresponding to storage of history information is output to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o, The amount of information output from the side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 can be suppressed.

  In addition, the output of information for specifying the type of signal input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o by the management CPU 112 is performed when the supply of operating power is started. Thereby, in the situation where a game is started in the pachinko machine 10, the type of signal input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o can be specified by the management CPU 112.

  Further, information setting that the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p is performed at the design stage of the management IC 66. As a result, the type of signal input to the sixteenth buffer 122p is specified for the output instruction signal that is surely used not only for the pachinko machine 10 but also for other types of pachinko machines that use the management IC 66. Therefore, it is possible to omit the processing for this. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the processing load of processing for specifying the type of the signal.

  Next, the history memory 117 of the management IC 66 will be described. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117.

  The history memory 117 is provided with a history area 124 for sequentially storing history information. In the history area 124, a plurality of pointer information is set in serial numbers, and a history information storage area 125 is set in correspondence with each pointer information on a one-to-one basis. In the history information storage area 125, a combination of RTC information and correspondence information can be stored. In this case, each history information storage area 125 has a data capacity of 2 bytes, a data capacity of 1 byte is allocated as an area for storing RTC information, and an area for storing correspondence information. A data capacity of 1 byte is allocated. When it becomes necessary to store correspondence information according to the signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o (actually the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j of the pachinko machine 10) First, the date information and time information measured in the current RTC 115 are stored in the area for storing the RTC information in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information that is the current write target. After that, the correspondence information corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122o, which triggered the information storage this time, is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122o in the correspondence memory 116, and the read correspondence information is read. Is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be currently written.

  Specifically, as to the correspondence information stored in the history information storage area 125, the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g receive signals corresponding to the detection results of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 48a as described above. Therefore, information corresponding to the type of the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g in the correspondence memory 116. More specifically, information corresponding to the type of the entrance portion corresponding to each of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g. As already described in the pachinko machine 10, the first to third winning opening detection sensors 42 a to 44 a detect game balls that have entered the general winning opening 31. The first to third correspondence relationship areas 123a to 123c corresponding to the detection sensors 42a to 44a store information indicating that they are all general winning holes 31. In addition, information indicating that the special correspondence winning device 32 is stored in the fourth correspondence area 123d, and information indicating that the first operating port 33 is stored in the fifth correspondence area 123e. In the sixth correspondence area 123f, information indicating the second operation port 34 is stored, and in the seventh correspondence area 123g, information indicating the out port 24a is stored. When the buffer 122a to 122o that triggered the information storage this time is any one of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, the information on the type of the entrance part corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122g is the first to first buffers. The information is read from any one of the seventh correspondence relation areas 123a to 123g, and the read information on the type of the ball-entry portion is stored as it is in the area for storing the correspondence relation information in the history information storage area 125.

  On the other hand, a signal indicating whether or not the open / close execution mode is being input to the eighth buffer 122h, a signal indicating whether or not the high probability mode is being input to the ninth buffer 122i, and the tenth buffer 122j being A signal indicating whether or not the door frame 14 is being opened is input. Therefore, information indicating the open / close execution mode is stored in the eighth correspondence area 123h, information indicating the high probability mode is stored in the ninth correspondence area 123i, and the tenth correspondence area 123j is stored. Stores information indicating the front door frame 14.

  As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the eighth signal at the LOW level in the situation that is not in the opening / closing execution mode, and continuously outputs the eighth signal at the HI level in the situation that is in the opening / closing execution mode. The side CPU 112 specifies that the opening / closing execution mode has started when the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and specifies that the opening / closing execution mode has ended when the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. It becomes possible. Then, in both cases where the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level and when the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the management CPU 112 is triggered to store the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Identifies That is, when the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, not only the information indicating that it is the opening / closing execution mode read from the eighth correspondence area 123h but also the start information together with the history information storage area 125. Is stored in an area for storing the corresponding relationship information. Further, when the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, not only the information indicating that it is the opening / closing execution mode read from the eighth correspondence area 123h but also the end information together with the history information storage area 125 Is stored in an area for storing the corresponding relationship information.

  As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW-level ninth signal in the situation other than the high-probability mode, and continuously outputs the HI-level ninth signal in the situation of the high-probability mode. The side CPU 112 specifies that the high probability mode has started when the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and specifies that the high probability mode ends when the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. It becomes possible. Then, in both cases where the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level and when the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the management CPU 112 is triggered to store the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Identifies That is, when the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, not only the information indicating the high probability mode read out from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the start information, together with the start information. Is stored in the area for storing the corresponding relationship information. When the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the history information storage area 125 includes not only the information indicating the high probability mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the end information. Is stored in the area for storing the corresponding relationship information.

  As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the tenth signal at the LOW level when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state, and outputs the tenth signal at the HI level when the front door frame 14 is in the open state. In order to continuously output, the management side CPU 112 specifies that the front door frame 14 is opened when the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and when the tenth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. However, it is possible to specify that the front door frame 14 is closed. The management CPU 112 is triggered to store the corresponding information in the history information storage area 125 both when the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level and when the tenth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. Identifies That is, when the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, the history information is stored together with not only the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 read from the tenth correspondence area 123j but also the opening start information. The correspondence information of the area 125 is stored in the area for storing. Further, when the tenth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, history information is stored together with not only the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 read from the tenth correspondence area 123j but also the opening end information. The correspondence information of the area 125 is stored in the area for storing.

  The history information storage area 125 can store all the history information generated during the ten consecutive business days when game balls are continuously fired in the pachinko machine 10 from opening to closing. It is provided for several minutes. For example, if history information is generated 60000 times per day, 600,000 or more history information storage areas 125 are provided. As a result, all history information can be stored and retained in the history memory 117 for at least 10 days.

  The history memory 117 is provided with a pointer area 126 in addition to the history area 124. The pointer area 126 stores information for the management CPU 112 to specify pointer information that is currently written in the history memory 117. Specifically, at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10, the pointer area 126 is set with information for designating the pointer information “0” as a write target. Each time one piece of history information is newly stored in the history information storage area 125, the information in the pointer area 126 is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be written is incremented by one. When the history information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the last order pointer information, the pointer information of “0” is the target of writing. The information in the service area 126 is updated. As a result, when there is an opportunity to store history information exceeding the number of storable history information, new history information is overwritten in order from the history information storage area 125 in which old history information is stored. Become.

  When history information is read from the history memory 117 by the reading device, the history information storage area 125 is all cleared to “0” and pointer information “0” is to be written. Information in the pointer area 126 is updated. As a result, it is possible to prevent history information that has been read once from being read again.

  Next, a specific processing configuration for managing the winning mode of the game ball using the management IC 66 will be described. First, a processing configuration for storing information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o provided in the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111 and the signal type in the correspondence memory 116 will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the recognition process executed by the main CPU 63. The recognition process is executed in step S110 in the main process (FIG. 11).

  First, “15” is set in the recognition output counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S501). The recognizing output counter indicates the remaining required number of information outputs for causing the management side CPU 112 to recognize which type of signal each buffer 122a to 122p of the input port 121 in the management side I / F 111 corresponds to. This is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify. As already described, since 15 of the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are the recognition targets of the signal type, “15” is set in the recognition output counter.

  Thereafter, an output process of the identification start command is executed (step S502). The main CPU 63 outputs various commands to the management CPU 112 in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize which type of signal the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o correspond to. When this command is output, the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are used. That is, the first to fifteenth buffers 122a are used by using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h) that are used to instruct the management CPU 112 to store the history information. A command output for causing the management CPU 112 to recognize which kind of signal corresponds to .about.122o is performed. As a result, the number of signal paths can be reduced compared to a configuration in which signal paths for performing the command output are provided separately from the signal paths 118a to 118p for outputting signals to the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p. And the configuration can be simplified. The identification start command has a data capacity of 8 bits, and the data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. Also, in the output process of the identification start command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when the output of the identification start command is started in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize that the new command has been transmitted. The output period of the identification start command and the period of maintaining the output state of the ninth signal at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification start command and the ninth signal. Has been. By receiving the identification start command, the management-side CPU 112 should start processing for storing information on the correspondence relationship between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the signal type in the correspondence relationship memory 116. Identify.

  Thereafter, the type identification command corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64 (step S503). In this case, the first buffer 122a becomes the signal type setting target first, and the n + 1th buffer becomes the signal type setting target next to the nth buffer, and then corresponds to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o. The signal type recognition setting is performed. Accordingly, if the recognition output counter is “15” to “13”, the type identification command indicating the general winning opening 31 and the number of the winning balls is read. If the recognition output counter is “12”, the special electric prize is received. The type identification command indicating the device 32 and the number of prize balls is read. If the recognition output counter is “11”, the type identification command indicating the first operating port 33 and the number of prize balls is read. If the recognition output counter is “10”, it is the second operation port 34 and the type identification command indicating the number of prize balls is read. If the recognition output counter is “9”, it is determined that the output port 24a is. The type identification command is read, and if the recognition output counter is “8”, the type identification command indicating the open / close execution mode is read, and the recognition output counter is read. If "7", the type identification command indicating the high probability mode is read, and if the output counter for recognition is "6", the type identification command indicating the front door frame 14 is read, and the output counter for recognition is read. If the value is "5" to "1", the type identification command indicating blank is read out.

  Thereafter, output processing of the read type identification command is executed (step S504). The type identification command has an 8-bit data capacity like the identification start command, and the data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. In the output process of the identification type command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when the output of the identification type command is started in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize that the new command has been transmitted. Further, the output period of the identification type command and the period of maintaining the output state of the ninth signal at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification type command and the ninth signal. Has been. By receiving the identification type command, the management-side CPU 112 corresponds to the identification type command in the corresponding relation areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the buffer to be set this time among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o. Store information to be used.

  Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the recognition output counter in the main RAM 65 (step S505), and it is determined whether or not the value of the recognition output counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S506). If the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S506: NO), a process for outputting a type identification command corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after 1 subtraction is executed (steps S503 and S503). Step S504).

  On the other hand, if the value of the recognition output counter is “0” (step S506: YES), the output processing of the identification end command is executed (step S507). The identification end command has a data capacity of 8 bits, and data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. Further, in the output process of the identification end command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing of starting the output of the identification end command in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize that the new command has been transmitted. The output period of the identification end command and the period for maintaining the output state of the ninth signal at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification end command and the ninth signal. Has been. By receiving the identification end command, the management-side CPU 112 specifies that the processing for storing the information on the correspondence relationship between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the signal type in the correspondence relationship memory 116 is completed. To do.

  Next, the management process executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The management process is started when the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is started. The processing speed of the management-side CPU 112 is higher than the processing speed of the main-side CPU 63. After the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 12) is started once in the main-side CPU 63, the next timer interrupt processing (FIG. 12) Is started, the combination of the processes in step S606 and subsequent steps in the management process is performed 16 times or more.

  When the identification start command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S601: YES), the value of the setting target counter provided in the management RAM 114 is cleared to “0” (step S602). The setting target counter is a counter for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of the buffer 122a to 122o that is the target of signal type setting. The first buffer 122a is the signal type setting target first, and then the n + 1th buffer is the signal type setting target next to the nth buffer.

  Thereafter, on the condition that the type identification command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S603: YES), the correspondence setting process is executed (step S604). In the correspondence setting process, the type identification received this time in the correspondence area corresponding to the current value in the setting target counter of the management RAM 114 among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116. Stores information on the signal type set in the command. Thereafter, the value of the setting target counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S605).

  If a negative determination is made in step S603, or if the process of step S605 is executed, it is determined whether an identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S606). If the identification end command has not been received (step S606: NO), the process returns to step S603, and on condition that a type identification command is newly received from the main CPU 63 (step S603: YES), step S604 and step S605 Run the process again.

  When the identification end command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S606: YES), the processes of step S607 and step S608 are repeatedly executed. Although details will be described later in step S <b> 607, a history setting process for storing history information corresponding to the type of signal received from the main CPU 63 in the history memory 117 is executed. In step S608, although details will be described later, an external output process for outputting the history information stored in the history memory 117 to the reading terminal 102 is executed.

  FIG. 23 is a time chart showing how the information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122o is stored in the correspondence memory 116. FIG. 23A illustrates a period in which a command is output from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h). FIG. 23B shows a period in which the output state of the ninth signal is at the HI level. FIG. FIG. 23D shows a timing at which the correspondence setting process (step S604) is executed by the management-side CPU 112.

  When the supply of the operation power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, the output of the identification start command using the first to eighth signals is started at the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. You. Further, at the timing of the time t1, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. Thereafter, at the timing t2 when the output of the identification start command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. The management CPU 112 identifies that the command is transmitted from the main CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level, and the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h. The contents of the command received from the main CPU 63 are grasped by confirming the above information. In this case, since the identification start command has been received, the management-side CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S601 of the management processing (FIG. 22) to enter the identification state. Thereafter, at the timing of t3, the output of the identification start command is stopped as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t4, the output of the first type identification command using the first to eighth signals is started as shown in FIG. Further, at the timing of the t4, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. Thereafter, at a timing t5 when the output of the type identification command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. The management side CPU 112 identifies that the command is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level, and the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h By confirming the information, the contents of the command received from the main CPU 63 are grasped. In this case, since the first type identification command has been received, the management-side CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process at the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. In the correspondence setting process, information indicating the general winning opening 31 and information on the number of winning balls are stored in the first correspondence area 123a of the correspondence memory 116. Thereafter, at the timing of t6, the output of the type identification command is stopped as shown in FIG.

  After that, at the timings t7 to t9, timings t10 to t12, timings t13 to t15, and timings t16 to t18, respectively, Correspondence setting processing corresponding to the type identification command output from the side CPU 63 is executed by the management side CPU 112. In this case, the correspondence setting process corresponding to the fifteenth type identification command is completed at the timing from t16 to t18.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t19, the output of the identification end command using the first to eighth signals is started as shown in FIG. Further, at the timing of the timing t19, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. Thereafter, at a timing t20 when the output of the identification end command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. The management side CPU 112 identifies that the command is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level, and the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h By confirming the information, the contents of the command received from the main CPU 63 are grasped. In this case, since the identification end command has been received, the identification state of the management-side CPU 112 ends at the timing of t20, as shown in FIG. Thereafter, at the timing of t21, the output of the identification end command is stopped as shown in FIG.

  In order to instruct the management CPU 112 to store the history information, the management CPU 112 recognizes whether or not the command is output using the ninth signal as described above. Even if the command is output using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths) used, it is clearly shown to the management CPU 112 that the command is being output. It can be recognized.

  Next, a processing configuration for storing history information in the history memory 117 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a management output process executed by the main CPU 63. The output processing for management is executed in step S219 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 12).

  First, “10” is set to the management target counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S701). The management target counter specifies in the main CPU 63 whether or not there is a management target that is not specified as to whether or not the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed in the current management output process. At the same time, it is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify which of the management targets the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed. In one management output process, the main CPU 63 specifies whether or not the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed. The management targets include the seven ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, There are a total of 10 items, ie, whether the open / close execution mode is executed, whether the high probability mode is executed, and whether the front door frame 14 is opened / closed. Therefore, first, “10” is set in the management target counter.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the output state of the signal to the management CPU 112 for the management target corresponding to the current management target counter value is HI level (step S702). If it is not the HI level (step S702: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the management target counter is 4 or more, whereby the number of management targets corresponding to the value of the management target counter is seven pitch detection sensors 42a. To 48a is specified (step S703).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S703, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the output flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the value of the management target counter (step S704). Specifically, if the value of the management target counter is “10” and corresponds to the first winning mouth detection sensor 42a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the first output flag. If the value of the management target counter is “9” and corresponds to the second prize opening detection sensor 43a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the second output flag, and the value of the management target counter is determined. Is “8” and corresponds to the third prize opening detection sensor 44a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the third output flag, and the value of the management target counter is “7”. In the case of corresponding to the special electric detection sensor 45a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the fourth output flag, the value of the management target counter is “6”, and the first working port detection sensor 46a If it corresponds to "5", the fifth output flag is set to "1" Whether the management target counter is “5” and corresponds to the second operating port detection sensor 47a, is “6” set in the sixth output flag? If the value of the management target counter is “4” and corresponds to the out port 24a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the seventh output flag. As described above, “1” is set in the first to seventh output flags in the ball detection process (FIG. 14).

  When “1” is set in the output flag corresponding to the value of the management target counter (step S704: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter among the first to seventh signals is set to the HI level. (Step S705). Thereafter, the output flag corresponding to the value of the management target counter is cleared to “0” (step S706).

  If a negative determination is made in step S703, it is determined whether or not an opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter to the HI level has occurred (step S707). Specifically, when the value of the management target counter is “3”, it is determined whether or not a shift to the open / close execution mode has occurred, and when the value of the management target counter is “2”, It is determined whether or not the transition to the probability mode has occurred. If the value of the management target counter is “1”, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 has been opened. If an affirmative determination is made in step S707, the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter is set to the HI level (step S708).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S702, it is determined whether or not an opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter to the LOW level has occurred (step S709). Specifically, when the value of the management target counter is 4 or more and the current management target is any of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a, the value of the management target counter among the first to seventh signals is set. It is determined whether or not the HI output continuation period (specifically, 10 msec) has elapsed since the corresponding signal output state was switched from the LOW level to the HI level. The HI output continuation period is set to a period longer than the longest processing interval of the history setting process (step S607) of the management process (FIG. 22) in the management CPU 112, and the output of the signal switched from the LOW level to the HI level is output. This is a period during which the state can be reliably specified by the management-side CPU 112. Further, when the value of the management target counter is “3” and the current management target is the open / close execution mode, it is determined whether the open / close execution mode has ended, and the value of the management target counter is “2”. If the current management target is the high probability mode, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode has ended. If the value of the management target counter is "1" and the current management target is the front door frame 14, Determines whether the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. When an opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter to the LOW level has occurred (step S709: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter is set to the LOW level (step S709). Step S710).

  When a negative determination is made at step S704, when a process at step S706 is executed, when a negative determination is made at step S707, when a process at step S708 is executed, when a negative determination is made at step S709, or step When the processing of S710 is executed, 1 is subtracted from the value of the management target counter in the main RAM 65 (step S711). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the management target counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S712). If the value of the management target counter is 1 or more (step S712: NO), the processing from step S702 onward is executed for the management target corresponding to the new management target counter value.

  Next, the history setting process executed by the management-side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The history setting process is executed in step S607 of the management process (FIG. 22).

  First, the number of buffers to be checked in the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in a check target counter provided in the management RAM 114 (step S801). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored in the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116 is identified, and the identification is performed. Set the number of information to the check target counter. In this pachinko machine 10, since information other than information indicating blank is stored in the first to tenth corresponding relationship areas 123a to 123j as already described, in step S801, “10” is set in the check target counter. To do.

  After that, it is confirmed whether or not the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has been changed from “0” to “1”. Thus, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S802). In addition, when the value of the confirmation target counter is “n”, the nth buffers 122a to 122o are the confirmation targets of the numerical information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is “10”, the tenth buffer 122j is a check target for numerical information, and if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth buffer 122e is a check target for numerical information. .

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S802, RTC information that is year / month / day information and time information is read from the RTC 115 (step S803). Then, the writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S804). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current writing target is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 and corresponds to the pointer information that is the writing target. The RTC information read in step S803 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Also, the correspondence information is read out from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current value of the check target counter, and the correspondence information is written into the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information that is the write target. If the correspondence information is any one of the information indicating the open / close execution mode, the information indicating the high probability mode, and the information indicating the front door frame 14, the above-described writing is performed. The start information as well as the correspondence information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the target pointer information. Note that when the value of the confirmation target counter is “n”, the n-th correspondence relationship areas 123a to 123o are the correspondence information readout targets. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is “10”, the tenth correspondence area 123j is a target for reading correspondence information, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is “5”, the fifth correspondence area 123e is correspondence. Information is to be read out.

  When the write process is executed as described above, the value of the check target counter is any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. In the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written, the RTC information, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are stored. A combination of the correspondence relationship information indicating any of the above and the history information is stored. When the value of the check target counter is one of the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, and the front door frame 14, the RTC information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. , The combination of the association information indicating any one of the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, and the front door frame 14 and the start information is stored as the history information.

  Thereafter, update processing of the target pointer is executed (step S805). In the update process, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and added by one. It is determined whether the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new writing target pointer information. If it exceeds the maximum value, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

  If a negative determination is made in step S802, or if the process of step S805 is executed, whether or not the signal output has been switched to the LOW level in the corresponding relationship areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the value of the current check target counter. It is determined whether or not correspondence information to be checked is stored (step S806). Specifically, when the current value of the check target counter is “8” to “10”, the information indicating the open / close execution mode and the high probability mode are provided in the corresponding correspondence areas 123h to 123j. Is stored, and either of the information indicating the front door frame 14 is stored, so that an affirmative determination is made in step S806.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S806, the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is changed from “1” to “0”. It is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the HI level to the LOW level (step S807). If an affirmative determination is made in step S807, the RTC information is read (step S808) as in step S803, and the writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S809). In the writing process, the RTC information read in step S808 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Also, the correspondence information is read out from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current value of the check target counter, and the correspondence information is written into the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information that is the write target. Further, not only the correspondence information but also the end information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. By executing the writing process in this way, when the value of the check target counter is any of the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, and the front door frame 14, the value corresponds to the pointer information to be written. In the history information storage area 125, a combination of the RTC information, the correspondence information indicating one of the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, and the front door frame 14, and the end information is stored as the history information. State. After that, the target pointer update process is executed in the same manner as in step S805 (step S810).

  When a negative determination is made at step S806, when a negative determination is made at step S807, or when the process at step S810 is executed, the value of the check target counter in the management RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S811). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the confirmation target counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S812). When the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (step S812: NO), the processing after step S802 is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new value of the confirmation target counter.

  Next, how the history information is stored in the history memory 117 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 26A shows a period in which an HI level signal is input to any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, and FIG. 26B shows a period in which an HI level signal is input to the eighth buffer 122h. 26C shows a period in which the HI level signal is input to the ninth buffer 122i, and FIG. 26D shows a period in which the HI level signal is input to the tenth buffer 122j. FIG. 26 (e) shows the timing of writing history information to the history memory 117.

  At the timing of t1, the output state of the signal input to any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g is switched from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. Therefore, at the timing of the time t1, the history information is written into the history memory 117 as shown in FIG. Thereafter, at the timing of t2, the signal switched to the HI level at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 26A is switched to the LOW level. However, the signal is a signal that has been input to any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, and the switching of the LOW level is not the storage target of the history information. Writing of history information is not executed as shown in e).

  Thereafter, at each of the timing of t3, the timing of t5, the timing of t6, the timing of t9, the timing of t10, the timing of t13, and the timing of t14, the first to seventh buffers 122a as shown in FIG. The output state of the signal input to any one of the signals -122g is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. Therefore, at each of these timings, history information is written as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 26B, the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h becomes the HI level from the timing t4 to the timing t7. The eighth buffer 122h corresponds to whether or not the opening / closing execution mode has occurred. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26 (e), the timing at which the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h switches to the HI level at t4, and the timing at which the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level At each timing of t7, the history information is written. In this case, the history information written at the timing t4 includes start information, and the history information written at the timing t7 includes end information. Thereby, it is possible to grasp the execution period of the opening / closing execution mode by checking the history information in the history memory 117.

  In addition, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of time passage. Therefore, whether the history information indicating that a ball has entered any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is in the open / close execution mode. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not. Since the history information includes RTC information, any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 can be compared by comparing the RTC information. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that the ball has entered the open / close execution mode.

  As shown in FIG. 26C, the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i becomes the HI level from the timing t8 to the timing t11. The ninth buffer 122i corresponds to whether or not the high probability mode has occurred. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26 (e), the timing at which the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i switches to the HI level, and the timing at which the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level At each timing of t11, the history information is written. In this case, the history information written at timing t8 includes start information, and the history information written at timing t11 includes end information. Thus, by confirming the history information in the history memory 117, it is possible to grasp the execution period of the high probability mode.

  In addition, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of time passage. Therefore, whether the history information indicating that a ball has entered the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33, or the second operating port 34 is in the high probability mode. It is possible to distinguish whether or not. Further, since the history information includes the RTC information, by comparing the RTC information, any one of the out opening 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 can be obtained. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that the ball has entered into the high probability mode.

  As shown in FIG. 26D, the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j becomes the HI level from the timing t12 to the timing t15. The tenth buffer 122j corresponds to whether or not the front door frame 14 is opened. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 26 (e), the timing at which the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j switches to the HI level at timing t12, and the timing at which the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level At each timing of t15, the history information is written. In this case, the history information written at the timing t12 includes start information, and the history information written at the timing t15 includes end information. Accordingly, it is possible to grasp the period during which the front door frame 14 is open by checking the history information in the history memory 117.

  In addition, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of time passage. Accordingly, history information indicating that a ball has entered any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is being opened. It becomes possible to distinguish whether it is a thing. Since the history information includes RTC information, any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 can be compared by comparing the RTC information. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that a ball has entered the car is that the front door frame 14 is being opened.

  Next, a processing configuration for outputting history information stored in the history memory 117 to a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 of the MPU 62 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a data output process executed by the main CPU 63. The data output process is executed in step S111 in the main process (FIG. 11).

  In the data output processing, first, it is determined whether or not a connection signal indicating that the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 is received from the reading terminal 102 (step S901). The reading apparatus is configured to output a connection signal when electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and when the connection signal is received through the reading terminal 102, an affirmative determination is made in step S901. do.

  If a negative determination is made in step S901, the data output process is terminated as it is. In this case, in order to execute the data output process, it is necessary to restart the supply of operating power to the MPU 62. Thus, in order to perform external output of history information, it is necessary to start supply of operating power to the MPU 62 in a state where the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. . Since a power supply operation unit for performing a stop operation and a start operation of supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is provided on the back surface of the back pack unit 15, in order to perform the stop operation and the start operation, the outer frame 11 is used. Thus, it is necessary to open the gaming machine body 12 and expose the back surface of the back pack unit 15. Under such circumstances, in order to output the history information externally, it is necessary to start supplying the operating power to the MPU 62 with the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an operation for reading history information by anyone other than the administrator of the game hall.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S901, it is determined whether or not a control information confirmation signal has been received from the reading terminal 102, whereby the current connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is determined by the main ROM 64. It is determined whether or not the control information (program and data) is confirmed (step S902). The reader is configured to be able to perform both control information confirmation and history information confirmation. When the control information confirmation is selected by manual operation on the reader, the reader can confirm the control information. When a signal is transmitted and confirmation of history information is selected by a manual operation on the reading device, a signal for history confirmation is transmitted from the reading device. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which the reading device for checking control information and the reading device for checking history are different may be adopted. In this case, when a reading device for confirming control information is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, a signal for confirming control information is transmitted from the reading device, and reading for history confirmation is performed to the reading terminal 102. When the apparatus is electrically connected, a history confirmation signal is transmitted from the reading apparatus.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S902, an output process for confirming control information is executed (step S903). In the output process, a program and data are read from the main ROM 64 as control information, and the read control information is output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, the control information can be read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and it is confirmed whether the control information is normal or normal. Can be performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S902, an output instruction signal is transmitted to the management CPU 112 (step S904). Specifically, the output state of the output instruction signal is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. This HI level output state continues for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p. When the output state of the output instruction signal is switched to the HI level, the management-side CPU 112 executes processing for outputting history information. This process will be described in detail later.

  When the process of step S903 is executed, or when the process of step S904 is executed, it is determined whether or not the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is continued (step S905). If it is continued (step S905: YES), the process stands by in step S905. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the processing set in the execution order after the data output processing from being executed until the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is released. When the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is released (step S905: NO), the data output process is terminated.

  Next, an external output process executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to a flowchart of FIG. The external output process is executed in step S608 of the management process (FIG. 22).

  When the output state of the output instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S1001: YES), processing for outputting history information after step S1002 is executed. Specifically, first, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the corresponding relationship information indicating the outlets 24a in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is stored, The number of balls entered is calculated (step S1002). In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating that it is the general winning opening 31 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, it is possible to enter the general winning opening 31. The number is calculated (step S1003). In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating that it is the special electricity prize winning device 32 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, it is possible to enter the special electricity prize winning device 32. The number is calculated (step S1004). In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the first operating port 33 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, The number of entered balls is calculated (step S1005). Further, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the second operating port 34 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, The number of balls entered is calculated (step S1006).

  Thereafter, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information and start information indicating the front door frame 14 are stored, and the correspondence relationship indicating the front door frame 14 An outlet that occurs in a situation where the front door frame 14 is open by referring to the history information storage area 125 that exists in a period between the information and the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 are calculated (step S1007). The history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information and start information indicating the front door frame 14 in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 are stored, the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and The period with the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. In addition, in the entirety of the pointer information that is a serial number, a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and start information are stored, and a correspondence relationship indicating the front door frame 14. When there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the information and the end information are stored, the number of entering balls for the total of the sections is calculated. Further, although there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating start door frame 14 and start information are stored, RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 Is stored in the history information storage area 125, the correspondence information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 and the start information are not stored. The history information in the history information storage area 125 in which the RTC information corresponding to the time after the history information storage area 125 is stored is treated as if the front door frame 14 is in the open state.

Thereafter, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1002 to S1007 (step S1008). Specifically, first, each number of balls generated while the front door frame 14 is opened calculated in step S1007 is subtracted from the number of balls calculated in each of steps S1002 to S1006. Then, the following parameters are calculated using the number of incoming balls after the subtraction. Note that the difference in the number of entrances of the out mouth 24a calculated in step S1007 with respect to the number of entrances calculated in step S1002 is defined as the entrance number K1, and the calculation is performed in step S1007 with respect to the number of entrances calculated in step S1003. The difference in the number of balls entered in the general winning opening 31 is set as the number K2 of balls entered, and the difference in the number of balls entered in the special electric prize winning device 32 calculated in step S1007 with respect to the number of balls entered calculated in step S1004 is set as the number K3 entered. The difference in the number of balls entered in the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1007 with respect to the number of balls calculated in step S1005 is defined as the number of balls K4, and the number calculated in step S1006 is calculated in step S1007. The difference in the number of balls entering the second operation port 34 is defined as the number K5 of balls entered.
First parameter: total number of game balls to be paid out (K2 × “number of prize balls for prize to general prize port 31” + K3 × “number of prize balls for prize to special electric prize device 32” + K4 × “first operation port” 33) + K5 × “Number of prize balls for winning to the second operating port 34”) / Ratio of the total number of game balls ejected from the skill area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as the ratio). "D1")
Second parameter: the ratio of the total number of game balls K2 entering the general winning opening 31 / the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5). Third parameter: game balls to the special prize winning device 32. The total number of balls K3 / the ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5). Fourth parameter: the total number K4 of game balls entering the first operating port 33 / discharge from the game area PA. Ratio of the total number of game balls played (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D2”)
Fifth parameter: ratio of the total number of game balls entering the second operation port K5 / total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D3”)
Sixth parameter: D1- (D2 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + D3 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34”)
7th parameter: (K3 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the special electricity winning device 32” + K5 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34”) / total number of game balls to be paid out (K2 × “general The number of winning balls for winning at the winning opening 31 + K3 × “the number of winning balls for winning at the special electricity winning device 32” + K4 × “the number of winning balls for winning at the first operating port 33” + K5 × “the second operating port 34” Ratio / eighth parameter: K3 × “number of winning balls for winning to the special electric prize device 32” / total number of game balls to be paid out (K2 × “for winning to the general winning opening 31”) “Number of winning balls” + K3 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the special electric prize winning device 32” + K4 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + K5 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34” )) Percentage then history notes Using the newest RTC information oldest RTC information in the history for the area 124 of the 117, the history information being the object of this operation is to calculate the total time it took to be extracted every (step S1009). Then, the first output process is executed (step S1010). In the first output process, all history information stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. In addition, the various parameters calculated in step S1008 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102, and the total time calculated in step S1009 is output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, in the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, each information to be output in the first output process is read.

  Thereafter, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information and start information indicating the opening / closing execution mode are stored, correspondence information indicating the switching execution mode, and By referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in the period between the end information and the history information storage area 125, the out port 24a and the general winning port 31 generated in the state of the open / close execution mode are referred to. Then, the number of balls entered into each of the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is calculated (step S1011). The history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information and start information indicating the opening / closing execution mode are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, and the correspondence information and end information indicating the opening / closing execution mode are stored. Is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. In addition, in the entire pointer information that is a serial number, the history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information and start information indicating the opening / closing execution mode are stored, correspondence information indicating the opening / closing execution mode, and If there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored, the number of balls entered for the total of the sections is calculated. Further, although there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating start / close execution mode and start information are stored, RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is present. When correspondence information and start information indicating that it is in the open / close execution mode is not stored in the stored history information storage area 125, correspondence information and start information indicating that it is in the open / close execution mode is stored. Any history information in the history information storage area 125 in which RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is stored is handled in the open / close execution mode.

  After that, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the like generated in the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the open state during the period of the opening / closing execution mode specified in step S1011. The number of balls entering each of the second operation ports 34 is calculated (step S1012). The method of calculating the number of entered balls is the same as that in step S1007, except that the period of the opening / closing execution mode specified in step S1011 is assumed.

Thereafter, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of step S1011 and step S1012 (step S1013). Specifically, first, the number of balls entered when the front door frame 14 is opened in step S1012 is subtracted from the number of balls entered in step S1011. Then, the following parameters are calculated using the number of incoming balls after the subtraction. Note that the difference in the number of entrances of the out mouth 24a calculated in step S1012 with respect to the number of entrances of the out mouth 24a calculated in step S1011 is defined as the number of entrances K11, and the entry of the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1011 is performed. The difference in the number of balls entered in the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1012 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number K12 of balls entered, and the special prize apparatus calculated in step S1012 with respect to the number of balls entered in the special prize device 32 calculated in step S1011. The difference in the number of entering balls 32 is defined as the number of entering balls K13, and the difference in the number of entering balls in the first working port 33 calculated in step S1012 with respect to the number of entering balls in the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1011 is entered. The number K14 is calculated in step S1012 with respect to the number of balls entering the second operation port 34 calculated in step S1011. The difference between the ball entrance number of the second actuating port 34 and ball entrance number K15 was.
Eleventh parameter: Total number of game balls to be paid out (K12 × “number of winning balls for winning in the general winning opening 31” + K13 × “number of winning balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32” + K14 × “first operating port 33 The number of winning balls for winning a prize + K15 × “the number of winning balls for winning the second operating port 34”) / the ratio of the total number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) D11 ”)
The twelfth parameter: the ratio of the total number of game balls entered into the general winning opening 31 K12 / the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) The total number of balls K13 / the ratio of the total number of game balls (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) discharged from the game area PA. Fourteenth parameter: the total number K14 of game balls entering the first operating port 33 / discharge from the game area PA. Ratio of the total number of game balls played (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D12”)
Fifteenth parameter: ratio of total number of game balls K15 entering the second operating port 34 / total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D13”)
16th parameter: D11− (D12 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + D13 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34”)
17th parameter: (K13 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the special electricity winning device 32” + K15 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34”) / total payout of game balls (K12 × “general The number of winning balls for winning in the winning opening 31 "+ K13 ×" the number of winning balls for winning in the special electricity winning device 32 "+ K14 ×" the number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33 "+ K15 ×" the second operating port 34 ". Ratio / 18th parameter: K13 × “the number of winning balls for winning the special electric prize device 32” / total number of game balls to be paid out (K12 × “for winning to the general winning opening 31”) “Number of winning balls” + K13 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the special electric prize winning device 32” + K14 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + K15 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34” ") Thereafter, the second output process is executed (step S1014). In the second output process, the various parameters calculated in step S1013 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, in the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, each piece of information to be output in the second output process is read.

  Thereafter, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence information indicating the high probability mode and the start information, the correspondence information indicating the high probability mode, and the like. By referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in the period between the end information and the history information storage area 125, the out port 24a and the general prize port 31 generated in the high probability mode are referred to. Then, the number of balls entering each of the special winning award device 32, the first operation port 33, and the second operation port 34 is calculated (step S1015). In the history area 124 of the history memory 117, a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating the high probability mode and start information are stored, and correspondence information and end information indicating the high probability mode. Is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. Further, in the entirety of the pointer information that is the serial number, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the high probability mode and the start information are stored, the correspondence information indicating the high probability mode and When there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored, the number of incoming balls for the total of the sections is calculated. In addition, although there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the mode is the high probability mode and start information are stored, RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is not stored. When the correspondence information indicating the high probability mode and the start information are not stored in the stored history information storage area 125, the correspondence information indicating the high probability mode and the start information are stored. All the history information in the history information storage area 125 in which the RTC information corresponding to the time later than the history information storage area 125 is stored is treated as in the high probability mode.

  Thereafter, during the period of the high probability mode specified in step S1015, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the out port 24a generated in a state where the front door frame 14 is in the open state. The number of balls entering each of the second operation ports 34 is calculated (step S1016). The method of calculating the number of entered balls is the same as that of step S1007 except that the period of the high probability mode specified in step S1015 is assumed.

Thereafter, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1015 and S1016 (step S1017). Specifically, first, the number of balls entered during the opening of the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1016 is subtracted from the number of balls entered in step S1015. Then, the following parameters are calculated using the number of incoming balls after the subtraction. Note that the difference in the number of entered balls in the out mouth 24a calculated in step S1016 with respect to the number of entered balls in the out mouth 24a calculated in step S1015 is defined as the number of entered balls K21, and the entry of the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1015. The difference in the number of balls entered in the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1016 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number K22 of balls received, and the special prize winning device calculated in step S1016 with respect to the number of balls entered in the special prize winning device 32 calculated in step S1015. The difference in the number of entering balls 32 is defined as the number of entering balls K23, and the difference in the number of entering balls in the first working port 33 calculated in step S1016 with respect to the number of entering balls in the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1015 is entered. Calculated in step S1016 with respect to the number of balls in the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1015, with the number K24. The difference between the ball entrance number of the second actuating port 34 and ball entrance number K25 was.
21st parameter: the total number of game balls to be paid out (K22 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the general winning opening 31” + K23 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32” + K24 × “first operating port 33” The number of winning balls for winning the prize “+ K25 ד the number of winning balls for winning the second operating port 34 ”) / the ratio of the total number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) D11 ”)
22nd parameter: Total number of game balls entering the general winning opening 31 K22 / Ratio of total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) 23rd parameter: Game balls to the special prize winning device 32 Total number of entered balls K23 / Ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25). Twenty-fourth parameter: Total number of game balls entered into the first working port 33 K24 / discharged from the game area PA Ratio of the total number of game balls played (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D22”)
25th parameter: ratio of the total number of game balls entering the second operation port K25 / total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D23”)
26th parameter: D21− (D22 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + D23 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34”)
Thereafter, a third output process is executed (step S1018). In the third output process, the various parameters calculated in step S1017 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. Thereby, in the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, each piece of information to be output in the third output process is read. Thereafter, a clear process is executed (step S1019). In the clear process, all the history information storage areas 125 of the history memory 117 are cleared to “0” and the pointer area 126 is cleared to “0”. As a result, the history area 124 is initialized.

<Configuration of special electric winning device 32>
Next, the configuration of the special electric winning device 32 will be described. FIG. 29 is a front view of the game board 24 showing an enlarged region where the special electric winning device 32 is provided.

  The special electric winning device 32 is provided in the right area PA3 of the game area PA as described above. The position where the special power winning device 32 is provided is an intermediate position in the vertical direction in the right area PA3. At the intermediate position, the special power winning device 32 is located on the right side of the display surface of the symbol display device 41 in the center frame 36a. It extends laterally from a certain right frame portion 36g to the right end portion of the game area PA. As described above, the special prize winning device 32 is provided so as to extend in the lateral direction, so that the game ball flowing down the right area PA3 surely passes through the region where the special prize winning device 32 is provided.

  The special electric winning device 32 includes a passage forming body 201 in which an upstream area of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is formed, an opening / closing member 202 for preventing or allowing game balls to enter the fourth discharge passage portion 45, and an opening / closing member. And a guide member 203 for guiding the movement of the moving member 202. The passage forming body 201 is integrated with the right frame portion 36g of the center frame 36a, and protrudes forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24. The upstream region 45c of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is formed in the passage forming member 201 such that the entrance portion 45b exists in the right wall portion 201a of the passage forming member 201.

  The entrance portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is opened rightward, so that game balls flowing down the right area PA3 can enter. The upstream region 45c of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is inclined downward toward the left in the region following the entrance portion 45b. At the same time as the direction of the passage changes, and the direction of the passage changes so as to guide the game ball below the game board 24. The outlet of the upstream area 45c of the fourth discharge passage 45 is located on the back side of the game board 24, and is located at the downstream area 45d of the fourth discharge passage 45 provided on the back of the game board 24. It is connected to the entrance. The downstream area 45d of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 extends vertically below the game board 24. With the above configuration, the game ball that has entered the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is discharged to the lower side of the game board 24 on the back side of the game board 24. As described above, the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is provided with a special electricity detection sensor 45a for detecting a game ball that has entered the fourth discharge passage portion 45 (that is, a game ball that has entered the special electric winning device 32). However, the special electric power detection sensor 45a is installed in the passage forming body 201.

  An opening / closing member 202 is provided so as to open and close the inlet portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45. FIG. 30 is a perspective view of the opening / closing member 202, and FIG. 31 is a perspective view of the passage forming body 201 and the opening / closing member 202 showing a state in which the inlet 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is opened and closed by the opening / closing member 202. FIG. 32 is a plan view of the opening / closing member 202 and the driving unit 32b for special power.

  The opening / closing member 202 is made of a synthetic resin, and has a rectangular base portion 211 having a lateral width and a predetermined width in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10 as shown in FIG. And a blocking part 212 formed integrally with the base part 211 so as to stand vertically at one end of the base part 211. An opening 213 that penetrates the base 211 in the vertical direction is formed in the base 211. The opening 213 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the size of the pachinko machine 10 in the front-rear direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball and smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball. In addition, the lateral dimension of the opening 213 is set to be a plurality of times or more of the diameter of the game ball, specifically, set to be larger than 5 times the diameter of the game ball and smaller than 6 times the diameter of the game ball. Have been. Although the position where the opening 213 is formed is a position deviated to the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 in the base portion 211, the position is an intermediate position in both the front-rear direction and the lateral direction of the base portion 211. Has a plate-like portion around the opening 213.

  The blocking portion 212 is formed so as to rise upward from the left peripheral edge of the opening 213 in the base portion 211. The blocking portion 212 is formed in a plate shape, and a pair of front and back plate surfaces face in the lateral direction. The blocking portion 212 has a plate surface area, as shown in FIG. 31 (a), for blocking the inflow of the game ball through the entrance portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45, more specifically, the entrance portion 45b. Is sized so that it can be completely closed.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 31, the opening / closing member 202 is supported by each of the passage forming body 201 and the guide member 203 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29, the guide member 203 is provided so as to extend in the lateral direction from the right end portion of the game area PA to just before the passage forming body 201. The passage forming body 201 and the guide member 203 are provided with slide through holes 221 that penetrate the game board 24 in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10. The slide through hole 221 is formed to be slightly larger than an outer edge portion of the opening / closing member 202 in a front view. The opening / closing member 202 is inserted into the slide through hole 221, and the opening / closing member 202 is slidable in the front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10 along the slide through hole 221.

  When inserted into the slide through hole 221, the blocking portion 212 of the opening / closing member 202 is located at a position close to the right side plate surface of the right wall portion 201 a where the entrance portion 45 b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is formed in the passage forming body 201. Will face each other. Although the distance between the right side plate surface of the right wall portion 201a and the blocking portion 212 is set to be smaller than the radius of the game ball, the blocking portion 212 prevents the game ball from entering the fourth discharge passage portion 45. The distance is arbitrary as long as it can be blocked, and the right side plate surface of the right wall portion 201a is in contact with the blocking portion 212. When the opening / closing member 202 moves, the blocking portion 212 is moved away from the right wall portion 201a. It may be configured to slide on the right plate surface.

  The opening / closing member 202 is in a closed position where the blocking portion 212 closes the entrance portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 as shown in FIG. 31 (a), and the fourth discharge passage portion as shown in FIG. 31 (b). The blocking portion 212 moves to the rear of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the entrance 45b of the pachinko machine 45, and can be moved to an open position where the entrance 45b is opened rightward. Further, as shown in FIG. 32, a drive unit 32b for a special electric power for sliding the opening / closing member 202 in the back-and-forth direction of the pachinko machine 10 is provided behind the opening / closing member 202. The drive unit 32b for special power is a solenoid that is an electric actuator. In the non-drive state in which the drive signal is not output from the main CPU 63 to the special power drive unit 32b, the output unit 226 of the special power drive unit 32b is operated by the urging force of the urging member 225 of the special power drive unit 32b. Are arranged at the protruding position. On the other hand, in a drive state in which a drive signal is output from the main CPU 63 to the drive unit 32b for special power, a pulling force is applied to the output unit 226 to the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, so that the output unit 226 is provided. Moves toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 against the urging force of the urging member 225 and is located at the retracted position. The front end of the output unit 226 is connected to the rear end of the opening / closing member 202. Therefore, when the drive unit 32b for special power is in the non-drive state and the output unit 226 is arranged at the protruding position, the opening / closing member 202 is arranged at the closed position as shown in FIG. When the drive unit 32b is in the drive state and the output unit 226 is located at the retracted position, the opening / closing member 202 is located at the open position as shown in FIG. In addition, since the main part 227 of the drive part 32b for the special power is present on the back side of the game board 24 and the output part 226 is connected to the rear end of the opening and closing member 202, the special power from the front of the pachinko machine 10 is provided. Drive unit 32b is invisible or hard to see.

  33 (a) and 33 (b), in addition to FIGS. 31 (a) and 31 (b), the state of the special power winning device 32 in a state where the opening / closing member 202 is disposed at each of the closed position and the open position. ) Will be described. FIGS. 33A and 33B are cross-sectional views taken along line AA of FIG. FIGS. 31 (a) and 33 (a) show a state where the opening / closing member 202 is located at the closed position, and FIGS. 31 (b) and 33 (b) show a state where the opening / closing member 202 is located at the open position. Indicates a state in which First, a case where the opening / closing member 202 is disposed at the closed position will be described.

  When the opening / closing member 202 is located at the closed position, the entrance portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is closed by the blocking portion 212 of the opening / closing member 202 as shown in FIGS. 31 (a) and 33 (a). . Thereby, when the opening / closing member 202 is located at the closed position, the game ball is prevented from entering the fourth discharge passage portion 45.

  Regardless of whether the opening / closing member 202 is located at the closed position, the opening 213 of the base 211 exists on the right side of the blocking portion 212 as described above. In addition, when the opening / closing member 202 is disposed in the closed position, the front end of the guide plate portion 214, which is a region of the base portion 211 on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the opening 213, has a front end portion of the window of the front door frame 14. It faces the panel 52 at a position close to it. The distance between the tip of the guide plate 214 and the window panel 52 is less than the radius of the game ball. Accordingly, in a state where the opening / closing member 202 is disposed in the closed position, even if the game ball placed on the guide plate 214 tries to flow downward from the front end of the guide plate 214, it does not flow down. Blocked by the window panel 52.

  When the opening / closing member 202 is located at the closed position, the left end of the guide plate 214 extends in the front-rear direction at a position below the entrance 45 b of the fourth discharge passage 45 in the passage forming body 201. It penetrates into the formed slide through hole 221. In this case, the upper surface of the guide plate portion 214 is inclined downward toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 and is inclined downward toward the left. In this configuration, the passage forming body 201 projects toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24, and the front end of the passage forming body 201 faces the window panel 52 of the front door frame 14 at a position close to the window panel 52. I have. The distance between the front end of the passage forming body 201 and the window panel 52 is smaller than the radius of the game ball. Accordingly, even when the game ball attempts to move from the left end of the guide plate 214 to the left of the guide plate 214 in a state where the opening / closing member 202 is located at the closed position, it is blocked by the passage forming body 201. You. As described above, the upper surface of the guide plate portion 214 is not only inclined downward to the left but also inclined downward toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10, so that the opening / closing member 202 is in the closed position. In this state, the game ball placed on the guide plate 214 moves toward the opening 213 by its own weight and flows into the opening 213.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 33 (a), the guide member 203 is provided so as to protrude forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24, and the portion protruding forward is disposed at the closed position. The opening / closing member 202 is opposed to the base portion 211 from above. The left side region 232 of the portion protruding forward except for the right end receiving portion 231 extends in the lateral direction along the opening 213 of the base portion 211 in a state where the opening / closing member 202 is disposed in the closed position. That is, the projecting amount of the left area 232 toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 is such that the opening 213 of the base 211 is not included in the facing range. Thus, the opening 213 is not closed by the guide member 203 when the opening / closing member 202 is located at the closed position. Further, since the dimension in the front-rear direction of the left area 232 is smaller than the radius of the game ball, the game ball does not ride on the left area 232.

  On the other hand, a receiving portion 231 existing on the right side of the opening portion 213 of the opening / closing member 202 in the guide member 203 protrudes forward of the pachinko machine 10 from a left side region 232, and a front end portion thereof has a front door frame 14. At a position close to the window panel 52. The distance between the tip of the receiving portion 231 and the window panel 52 is smaller than the radius of the game ball. As a result, even if a game ball placed on the receiving portion 231 attempts to flow downward from the front end portion of the receiving portion 231, it is blocked by the window panel 52. Since the receiving portion 231 exists at the right end portion of the game board 24, even if the game ball placed on the receiving portion 231 tries to flow downward from the right end portion of the receiving portion 231, it will not flow down to the resin base 21. At the right side of the game board 24.

  On the upper surface of the receiving portion 231, both the size in the front-rear direction and the size in the horizontal direction are set larger than the diameter of the game ball. In this case, as shown in FIG. 33A, the front side region 233 on the upper surface of the receiving portion 231 is located closer to the front of the pachinko machine 10 than the opening 213 of the opening / closing member 202 arranged at the closed position. At the left edge of the front region 233, a regulating portion 234 for preventing a game ball placed on the front region 233 from dropping from the left edge of the front region 233 to the left of the front region 233 is provided. It is formed integrally. The front area 233 is inclined downward toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the game ball placed on the front region 233 on the upper surface of the receiving portion 231 moves to the rear region 235 on the upper surface of the receiving portion 231 by its own weight. The rear area 235 is inclined downward toward the left, and there is no portion that prevents a game ball from flowing down from the left end of the rear area 235 to the left of the rear area 235. Therefore, when the opening / closing member 202 is located at the closed position, the game ball placed on the rear region 235 on the upper surface of the receiving portion 231 moves toward the opening 213 of the opening / closing member 202 by its own weight, and 213.

  Next, a case where the opening / closing member 202 is located at the open position will be described. When the opening / closing member 202 is located at the open position, the entrance portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is closed by the blocking portion 212 of the opening / closing member 202 as shown in FIGS. 31 (b) and 33 (b). It is open to the right without any action. Thereby, it becomes possible for game balls to enter the fourth discharge passage portion 45.

  When the opening / closing member 202 is located at the open position, the entire opening 213 in the base portion 211 of the opening / closing member 202 is arranged in the slide through hole 221, and the entrance portion 45 b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45. The guide plate 214 of the base portion 211 of the opening / closing member 202 is present on the right side of FIG. In this case, as shown in FIG. 33B, the guide plate portion 214 extends laterally between the entrance portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 and the rear region 235 of the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203. . As described above, since the upper surface of the receiving portion 231 is inclined downward toward the left end of the rear region 235, the game ball placed on the upper surface of the receiving portion 231 is directed toward the guide plate portion 214 by its own weight. Since the upper surface of the guide plate 214 is inclined downward toward the left as it moves, the game ball placed on the upper surface of the guide plate 214 is loaded by its own weight with the entrance portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45. It will move toward. That is, in a state where the opening / closing member 202 is located at the open position, the game ball placed on the upper surface of the receiving portion 231 or the upper surface of the guide plate portion 214 is directed toward the entrance portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 by its own weight. It moves and enters the entrance portion 45b. Therefore, when the opening / closing member 202 is arranged at the open position, not only the game balls can enter the entrance portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45, but also the entrance of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 The entering of the game ball into the portion 45b is guided by the opening / closing member 202.

  When the opening / closing member 202 is located at the open position, the opening / closing member 202 moves to the rear of the pachinko machine 10 compared to when the opening / closing member 202 is located at the closed position. And the distance between the window panel 52 is increased. This distance is equal to or longer than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, depending on the flowing direction and the force of the flowing down of the game balls flowing toward the special prize winning device 32 in the right area PA3, the game balls enter the space between the guide plate 214 and the window panel 52, and By flowing down, a game ball may flow down below the special electric winning device 32. That is, even in a situation where the opening / closing member 202 is arranged at the open position, the game ball that has reached the position of the special power prize device 32 flows down to below the special power prize device 32 without winning the special power prize device 32. Things can happen. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 can be formed by integrally forming a protruding portion projecting upward over the entire front end of the guide plate portion 214. The configuration may be such that the front end of the portion 214 does not fall downward or hardly falls downward.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29 again, a configuration for setting the flow-down state of the game ball in the right area PA3 to the predetermined state will be described.

  In the right area PA3, on the upstream side of the special power winning device 32, a game ball flowing down the upstream side of the right area PA3 is provided with a game ball flowing to the right end side of the special power winning device 32, more specifically, the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203 and the like. Guidance means for guiding to the periphery is provided. As the guide means, a guide nail group 241 including a plurality of nails 24b is provided. The guide nail group 241 has a plurality of nails 24b arranged in a downward-sloping manner so as to generate a guide portion inclined downward from the right frame portion 36g of the center frame 36a toward the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203. It is formed with. In this case, the distance between the nail 24b at the left end and the right frame portion 36g in the guide nail group 241 is set to be smaller than the radius of the game ball, and the distance between the adjacent nails 24b in the guide nail group 241 is also reduced. It is set to be less than the radius of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball that has reached the guide nail group 241 is guided toward the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203 by the guide portion of the guide nail group 241.

  The game ball guided to the upper surface of the receiving portion 231 is guided to the opening 213 in the base portion 211 of the opening / closing member 202 by the upper surface of the receiving portion 231 as described above when the opening / closing member 202 is disposed in the closed position. Then, it flows into the opening 213. Therefore, when the opening / closing member 202 is located at the closed position, the game ball that has flowed down the right side area PA3 and reached the special prize winning device 32 flows into the opening 213 of the base portion 211 near the receiving portion 231. As a result, the water flows downward from the special electric winning device 32.

  Here, as described above, the through gate 35 is provided in the right area PA3, and the through gate 35 is disposed on the downstream side of the special electric winning device 32 near the passage forming body 201 of the special electric winning device 32. . Also, between the special winning award device 32 and the through gate 35, only game balls that flow down from the position near the passage forming body 201 of the special winning award device 32 to below the special winning device 32 can enter the through gate 35. A control nail group 242 is provided so that This prevents the game ball that has reached the special prize winning device 32 from passing through the through gate 35 when the opening / closing member 202 is located at the closed position.

  On the other hand, when the opening / closing member 202 is located at the open position, the game ball that has reached the special electric prize winning device 32 moves on the guide plate portion 214 of the base portion 211 to the entrance portion of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 as described above. It will flow down to 45b. In this case, if the arrangement of the opening / closing member 202 at the open position is maintained until the game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 reaches the entrance portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45, the game ball becomes The ball will enter the entrance portion 45b. On the other hand, when the opening / closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position before reaching the entrance portion 45b, the game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 at that time is moved to the guide plate portion 214. After moving to the front of the pachinko machine 10 following the movement of the pachinko machine 10 to the front, the guide is guided to the opening 213 of the base portion 211 along the slope of the upper surface of the guide plate portion 214, and flows into the opening 213. Become. Therefore, when the opening / closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in a state where the game ball exists in the predetermined range X near the passage forming body 201 on the guide plate portion 214, the game ball is moved to the passage forming body 201. At a position closer to 201, the water flows downward to the special electric winning device 32, and passes through the through gate 35. Then, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the hold information on the general-purpose side is acquired, and an opportunity to open the general-purpose electrical object 34a of the second operating port 34 occurs. In other words, the opportunity to enter the through gate 35, that is, the opportunity to open the electric utility product 34a of the second operating port 34 to the open state occurs only in the open / close execution mode.

  With reference to the time chart of FIG. 34, a description will be given of a state in which a prize is generated in the second operating port 34 in the open / close execution mode. 34 (a) shows the execution period of the opening / closing execution mode, FIG. 34 (b) shows the opening / closing state of the special electric prize winning device 32, FIG. 34 (c) shows the timing when a prize occurs in the through gate 35, FIG. 34 (d) shows the execution period of the open state of the second operating port 34, and FIG. 34 (e) shows the timing when a prize occurs in the second operating port 34. Note that the open state of the second working port 34 occurs a plurality of times when the normal power is opened, but in FIG. 34, the open state of the second working port 34 occurs only once for convenience of explanation. It will be described as.

  At the timing of t1, the open / close execution mode is started as shown in FIG. In the opening / closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), a round game is executed in each period from timing t2 to timing t3, timing t7 to timing t9, timing from timing t13 to timing t15, etc. The device 32 is opened.

  In each of the round games from the timing t2 to the timing t3 and the round games from the timing t7 to the timing t9 in each of these round games, the timing of t3 and the timing of t9 when the special winning device 32 changes from the open state to the closed state. In each of the above, a game ball is placed on the guide plate 214 of the opening / closing member 202 of the special electric winning device 32. Then, at each of the timing of t3 and the timing of t9, when the open / close member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position and the special power winning device 32 is changed from the open state to the closed state, it is placed on the guide plate portion 214. The dropped game ball falls into the opening 213 of the opening / closing member 202. The dropped game ball wins the through gate 35 at the timing of t4 and the timing of t10, respectively, as shown in FIG. As a result, the hold information on the general figure side is acquired, and the variable display of the pattern is started on the general figure display unit 38a. Then, as shown in FIG. 34 (d), when the change display of the pattern is completed, the general operation of the second operating port 34 is performed at each of the timings t5 to t8 and the timings t11 to t14. The accessory 34a is opened. As already described, even a game ball flowing down the right area PA3 can reach the position where the second operating port 34 is provided, and is directed to the right area PA3 in an attempt to make the special prize device 32 win the game ball. By continuing the launch of the game balls, a prize to the second operating port 34 is generated at each of the timing of t6 and the timing of t12 as shown in FIG. Thereby, the second suspension information is obtained. During the execution of the opening / closing execution mode, the start of a new game time is prevented, so that the execution of the hit / fail determination processing on the acquired second hold information and the start of the game time triggered by the second hold information are This is performed after the current open / close execution mode ends.

  On the other hand, in the round game from the timing of t13 to the timing of t15, at the timing of t15 when the special power winning device 32 is changed from the open state to the closed state, the game ball is placed on the guide plate 214 of the opening / closing member 202 of the special power winning device 32. The game ball does not fall on the guide plate portion 214 even if the game ball is placed on the guide plate portion 214. Therefore, no winning in the through gate 35 occurs when the round game ends.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 34A, the open / close execution mode occurs at the timing of t16. At the timing when the open / close execution mode ends, the reservation information on the general figure side is stored in the general figure reservation area 65c. As a result, the opening of the second working port 34 is started at the timing t17, which is the timing after the end of the open / close execution mode, as shown in FIG. 34D, and the opening period continues until the timing t19. Then, during this period, the launch operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2 or the right area PA3, and at the timing of t18, the prize to the second operating port 34 is achieved as shown in FIG. appear. In this case, if the upper limit number of pieces of the second hold information are not stored in the second special figure holding area 86 at this time, the second hold information is newly acquired. Then, the second suspension information becomes an execution target of the success / failure determination process and serves as a trigger for starting a new game.

<Execution mode of open / close execution mode>
Next, the execution mode of the open / close execution mode will be described. FIG. 35A and FIG. 35B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the execution mode of the open / close execution mode.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, as the jackpot result, the 2R low accuracy result, the 2R high accuracy result, the 4R low accuracy result, the 4R high accuracy result, the 6R low accuracy result, the 6R high accuracy result, the 10R low accuracy result, and the 10R high accuracy result As a result, there are 16R low-accuracy results and 16R high-accuracy results. In all of the open / close execution modes that occur when the jackpot results are obtained, the interval period between round games is set to 3 seconds as shown in FIG. In each of these opening / closing execution modes, the maximum number of winnings in the special power winning device 32 in each round game is set to 10, and the opening duration of each round game is set to 29 seconds. Then, in each round game, the special power winning device 32 is opened and closed once.

  On the other hand, the number of round games generated in these open / close execution modes is different. Specifically, the number of round games is set to two in the 2R low-accuracy result and the 2R high-accuracy result, and the number of round games is set to four in the 4R low-accuracy result and the 4R high-accuracy result. , 6R low-accuracy result and 6R high-accuracy result, the number of round games is set to 6 times, 10R low-accuracy result and 10R high-accuracy result, the number of round games is set to 10, 16R low-accuracy In the result and the 16R high accuracy result, the number of round games is set to 16 times. The larger the number of round games executed, the larger the number of balls entering the special power prize device 32 in one open / close execution mode. Therefore, the big hit result with the larger number of round games executed is more advantageous to the player.

  In addition, as the number of round games executed increases, the number of times the opening / closing member 202 of the special power winning device 32 slides between the open position and the closed position increases. As already described, at the timing when the opening / closing member 202 slides from the open position to the closed position, the game ball placed on the guide plate 214 of the opening / closing member 202 can win the through gate 35. Therefore, as the number of times the opening / closing member 202 slides between the open position and the closed position increases, the frequency of winning in the through gate 35 increases, and the winning in the through gate 35 occurs. An opportunity occurs that the general electricity role object 34a of the operation port 34 is opened. Then, if the second hold information acquired by the winning in the second operating port 34 is to be subjected to the success / failure determination processing, either the big hit result or the small hit result is generated. The opening / closing execution mode will occur. From this point as well, the jackpot result in which the number of round games executed is large is more advantageous for the player.

  Each of a low-probability result and a high-probability result is set as a jackpot result in which the number of round game executions is the same. In other words, a 2R low-probability result and a 2R high-probability result are set as the jackpot result in which the round game is executed twice. In addition, a 4R low-probability result and a 4R high-probability result are set as a jackpot result in which the round game is executed four times. In addition, a 6R low-probability result and a 6R high-probability result are set as a jackpot result in which the round game is executed six times. In addition, a 10R low-accuracy result and a 10R high-accuracy result are set as a jackpot result in which the round game is executed ten times. In addition, a 16R low-probability result and a 16R high-probability result are set as a jackpot result in which the round game is executed 16 times. Thereby, as a jackpot result in which the number of round games generated in the opening / closing execution mode is the same, a low-probability result in which the success / failure lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode is the low probability mode and a success / failure lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode are high. There will be a highly probable result that will be in probability mode. Therefore, as for the number of round games that occur in the opening and closing execution mode, there is a jackpot result in which the setting mode of the winning / decreasing lottery mode is different while the profit level of the player is the same, and the player expects the type of the jackpot result. More types of objects.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the first small hit result, the second small hit result, and the third small hit result exist as the small hit results. In each of the open / close execution modes that occur when the small hit result is obtained, the winning upper limit number is set to 10 as shown in FIG. On the other hand, the number of times the special power winning device 32 is opened in the open / close execution mode and the duration of opening of the special power winning device 32 at each opening time are different for each small hit result.

  FIG. 36 is a time chart for explaining an execution mode of the opening / closing execution mode which is executed in response to a small hit result. 36 (a1), 36 (a2) and 36 (a3) show the execution period of the opening / closing execution mode. FIGS. 36 (b1), 36 (b2) and 36 (b3) show the special Indicates the period during which it is open. 36 (a1) and FIG. 36 (b1) show an execution mode of the opening / closing execution mode which is executed in response to the first small hit result. FIGS. 36 (a2) and 36 (b2) FIG. 36 (a3) and FIG. 36 (b3) show the execution mode of the opening / closing execution mode which is executed when the second small hit result is triggered. 9 shows an execution mode of the open / close execution mode.

  In the case of the first small hit result, when the open / close execution mode is executed from the timing t1 to the timing t4 as shown in FIG. 36 (a1), the timing from the timing t2 to the timing t2 as shown in FIG. 36 (b1) The special prize winning device 32 is opened only once over the timing of t3. The opening continuation period of the special power winning device 32 in this one opening time is set to 10 seconds as shown in FIG. The firing cycle of the game balls is 0.6 seconds, and the maximum number of winning game balls to the special power prize device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode is ten. The period is longer than the product of the number.

  In the case of the second small hit result, when the open / close execution mode is executed from the timing t1 to the timing t20 as shown in FIG. 36 (a2), the timing from the timing t2 to the timing t2 as shown in FIG. 36 (b2) The special electric winning device 32 is opened once at each of the timing of t11, the timing of t12 to t13, the timing of t14 to t15, the timing of t16 to t17, and the timing of t18 to t19. . That is, in the case of the second small hit result, the number of times the special power winning device 32 is opened is five times. The opening duration of the special power winning device 32 at each opening time is set to 2 seconds as shown in FIG. The firing cycle of the game balls is 0.6 second, and the maximum number of winning the game balls to the special prize winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode is ten. The period is shorter than the product of the winning number and the winning number. However, the total open continuation period of each release is longer than the product of the launch cycle of the game balls and the winning upper limit number. In addition, the total opening duration of each opening is equal to the opening duration of one opening in the opening / closing execution mode in the first small hit result.

  In the case of the third small hit result, when the open / close execution mode is executed from the timing t1 to the timing t40 as shown in FIG. 36 (a3), the timing from the timing t2 as shown in FIG. 36 (b3) t21 timing, t22 timing to t23 timing, t24 timing to t25 timing, t26 timing to t27 timing, t28 timing to t29 timing, t30 timing to t31 timing, t32 timing to t33 timing The special electric winning device 32 is opened once at each of the timing, the timing of t34 to the timing of t35, the timing of t36 to the timing of t37, and the timing of t38 to t39. That is, in the case of the third small hit result, the number of times the special power winning device 32 is opened is ten times. The opening duration of the special power winning device 32 in each opening time is set to 1 second as shown in FIG. 35 (b). The firing cycle of the game balls is 0.6 second, and the maximum number of winning the game balls to the special prize winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode is ten. The period is shorter than the product of the winning number and the winning number. However, the total open continuation period of each release is longer than the product of the launch cycle of the game balls and the winning upper limit number. The total open duration of each open cycle is equal to the open duration of one open cycle in the opening / closing execution mode in the first small hit result, and the total open duration of each open cycle in the second small hit result. Equal to the period.

  As described above, in the opening / closing execution mode of each small hit result, the opening continuation period of each opening is set longer as the opening number is smaller. The longer the one open continuation period of the special power prize device 32 is, the more the prize to the special power prize device 32 is likely to occur. On the other hand, as the number of times the special prize winning device 32 is opened is increased, the chance that the special prize winning device 32 is changed from the open state to the closed state with the game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening / closing member 202 is increased. Therefore, winning in the through gate 35 is likely to occur. Therefore, in the first small hit result, a prize to the special power prize device 32 is most likely to occur, but a prize to the through gate 35 is hardest to occur, and in the third small hit result, a prize to the special power prize device 32 occurs most. Although it is difficult, winning in the through gate 35 is most likely to occur, and in the second small hit result, both winning in the special power winning device 32 and winning in the through gate 35 are likely to occur appropriately. As a result, a player expecting a prize to occur in the special prize winning device 32 expects the first small hit result, and a player expecting a prize to occur in the through gate 35 expects the third small hit result. Will be done. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the targets expected by the player. In addition, regardless of whether the first small hit result, the second small hit result, or the third small hit result occurs, there is a merit in each of them, so that it is possible to increase the degree of attention of the player to each small hit result. Become.

  In addition, in both cases of the second small hit result and the third small hit result, the special power winning device 32 is opened a plurality of times. I have. In addition, the game ball can reach the predetermined range X on the guide plate portion 214 when the period in which the opening / closing member 202 is located at the open position elapses 1 second.

<General-purpose power control processing>
Next, a processing configuration for switching the second operating port 34 between the open state and the closed state, and a processing configuration for switching the special power winning device 32 between the open state and the closed state will be described. First, a processing configuration for switching the second operation port 34 between the open state and the closed state will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a general-purpose power control process executed by the main CPU 63. It should be noted that the general-purpose power control process is executed in step S214 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12).

  First, a process of acquiring the hold information on the general-purpose side is executed (step S1101). In the acquisition process, if a prize has been awarded to the through gate 35 and it is not a situation that the upper limit number of ordinary figure holding information has been acquired in the ordinary figure holding area 65c, the ordinary telephone random number counter C4 The numerical information is stored in the general-purpose reservation area 65c. In this case, the reservation information on the general-purpose side is stored in the order of the first area 88a → the second area 88b → the third area 88c → the fourth area 88d.

  Then, while reading out the numerical information of the general-purpose general-purpose counter provided in the main-side RAM 65 (step S1102), the general-purpose general-purpose address table provided in the main-side ROM 64 is read (step S1103). Then, a start address corresponding to the numerical information of the general-purpose general-purpose counter is obtained from the general-purpose general-purpose address table (step S1104), and the process jumps to the process indicated by the obtained start address (step S1105).

  The general-purpose general-purpose counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to know which of the processes in steps S1106 to S1110 in the general-purpose general-purpose control process should be executed. In the address table, a start address in a program for executing each processing of steps S1106 to S1110 is set in association with the numerical information of the general-purpose general-purpose counter. When the value of the general figure counter is "0", the process jumps to the general figure change start process of step S1106, and when the value of the general figure general purpose counter is "1", the general figure change of step S1107 is performed. The process jumps to the middle process, and when the value of the general-purpose general-purpose counter is “2”, the process jumps to the process of determining the general-purpose general-purpose counter in step S1108, and when the value of the general-purpose general-purpose counter is “3”, The process jumps to the process during normal power opening in step S1109, and jumps to the process during normal power closing in step S1110 when the value of the general power general counter is "4".

  In the general figure change start process in step S1106, the general figure side hold information stored in the general figure hold area 65c on condition that the general figure side hold information is stored in the general figure hold area 65c. Is executed. Specifically, the hold information on the general figure side stored in the first area 88a of the general figure hold area 65c is shifted to the general figure execution area 89, and thereafter, the second area 88b → the first area 88a, The reservation information on the general-purpose side is shifted so that the third area 88c → the second area 88b and the fourth area 88d → the third area 88c. Then, the general-purpose opening lottery process is executed using the reservation information on the general-purpose side newly shifted to the general-purpose execution area 89 as a lottery value. In the present embodiment, as described above, there is only one support mode. Therefore, the probability of winning in the ordinary power open state in the ordinary power open lottery process is constant irrespective of the gaming state such as whether or not the open / close execution mode is in effect and whether or not the appropriate lottery mode is the high probability mode. In particular, with the probability of 9/10, it will be elected to open the normal electricity.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of winning in the open state may be higher or lower. Further, instead of executing the general-purpose opening lottery process, the general-purpose opening state may be surely generated once for one general-purpose side hold information. In this case, it is possible to increase the frequency of occurrence of the normal power open state.

  In the normal figure change start processing, when the normal power open lottery processing is executed, processing for starting the change display of the picture on the general figure display unit 38a is executed. In this case, the information of the variable display period in which the pattern is variably displayed on the general-purpose display section 38a is set in a general-purpose general-purpose timer counter provided in the main RAM 65. The value set in the general-purpose general-purpose timer counter is decremented by one each time the timer update process (step S210) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, there is only one support mode. Therefore, the fluctuation display period of the fluctuation display of the picture on the ordinary figure display unit 38a is constant irrespective of the game state such as whether or not the open / close execution mode is in effect and whether or not the success / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is set to 5 seconds. Then, when the variation display of the picture on the general-purpose display section 38a is started, the value of the general-purpose general-purpose counter is updated from “0” to “1”. As a result, the process to be executed in the next process of the general-purpose normal-power control process becomes the general-purpose-variable process.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display period of the variable display of the picture on the ordinary figure display unit 38a may be longer or shorter. Further, a plurality of types of variable display periods of the variable display of the picture on the ordinary figure display unit 38a may be set, and the variable display period to be executed may be determined by lottery. Further, in a configuration in which the general-purpose opening lottery process is not performed, and the general-purpose opening state is generated exactly once for one general-purpose side hold information, the pattern of the general-purpose display portion 38a is not displayed. When the display information is not executed and the general-purpose side hold information is newly acquired in a state where the general-purpose side is not open, or in a state where the general-purpose side hold information is held and stored, Is completed, a new general power release state may be started with the hold information on the general-purpose side as an execution trigger. On the contrary, even in a configuration in which the general-purpose release state is generated exactly once for one general-purpose side hold information, the variation display of the pattern on the general-purpose display unit 38a is executed, It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the normal power open state is started after the execution of the change display of the picture.

  In the ordinary figure changing process of step S1107, a process for updating the display of the picture on the ordinary figure display unit 38a is executed. If the value set in the general-purpose general-purpose timer counter of the main-side RAM 65 is “0” in the general-purpose change start process, the information of the fixed period on the general-purpose side is stored in the main-side RAM 65. In addition to setting the general-purpose timer counter, the general-purpose display unit 38a displays on the general-purpose display unit 38a a pattern corresponding to the result of the general-purpose opening lottery process that has triggered the execution of the change display time of the current pattern. Execute the processing. Then, the value of the general public telephone counter is updated from “1” to “2”. As a result, the process to be executed in the next process of the general-purpose figure control process becomes the general-purpose determination process.

  In the process of determining the general figure in step S1108, if the value of the general figure timer counter is “0”, the result of the general-purpose opening lottery process that has triggered the execution of the current pattern change display time is as follows. It is determined whether or not it is a normal electricity open state winning. If it is not the winning state, the value of the general figure counter is cleared to "0". As a result, the process to be executed in the next process of the general-purpose normal power control process is the general-purpose change start process.

  In the case of the winning in the open state, the process for setting the open state is executed. More specifically, “3” is set to a normal power release counter provided in the main RAM 65. The ordinary power release counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the remaining number of times in which the ordinary electricity role object 34a is opened in the ordinary power open state. In addition, numerical information of an open continuation period (specifically, 2 seconds) in the case of once opening the general electric part 34a is set in a general figure general electric timer counter. In addition, "10" is set to the general winning a prize counter. In addition, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 34b for electric power is started so that the electric power part 34a is opened. The general winning a prize counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the remaining game balls that can be awarded to the second operating port 34 in the normal power open state, and each time a winning to the second operating port 34 occurs. Is subtracted from the value of the regular winning counter. Then, when the value of the general electric winning counter becomes “0”, the current general electric opening state is ended regardless of the remaining number of times of opening of the general electric thing thing 34a and the remaining opening duration at that time. . After that, the value of the general-purpose general-purpose counter is updated from “2” to “3”. As a result, the process to be executed in the next process of the normal drawing normal power control process is the normal power opening process. Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, there is only one support mode. Therefore, the number of times that the electric power role object 34a is in the open state in the electric power open state, the opening duration when the electric power role object 34a is once opened, and the connection to the second operating port 34 in the electric power open state. The maximum number of winning prizes of the game balls is constant irrespective of the game state such as whether or not the open / close execution mode is in effect and whether or not the winning / absent lottery mode is the high probability mode.

  In the normal power open process in step S1109, if a winning has occurred in the second operating port 34, the value corresponding to the winning number is subtracted from the value of the general power winning counter in the main RAM 65. When the value of the general-purpose winning counter is "0", the value of the general-purpose opening count counter is cleared to "0", and the value of the general-purpose general-purpose timer counter is cleared to "0". By stopping the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 34b for use, the general-purpose duty object 34a is closed, and the value of the general-purpose general-purpose counter is cleared to “0”. As a result, the process to be executed in the next process of the general-purpose normal power control process is the general-purpose change start process. In addition, even if the value of the general-purpose winning counter is not "0", if the value of the general-purpose general-purpose timer counter is "0", the output of the driving signal to the general-purpose driving unit 34b is performed. Is stopped, the general-purpose part 34a is closed, and the value of the general-use opening counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by one. If the value of the general-purpose opening frequency counter is not “0”, the numerical information of the closing continuation period of the general-purpose duty object 34a is set in the general-purpose general-purpose timer counter, and then the value of the general-purpose general-purpose counter is set to “ Update from "3" to "4". As a result, the process to be executed in the next process of the normal- figure normal-power control process is the normal-power closed process. If the value of the general-purpose opening count counter is “0”, the value of the general-purpose general-purpose counter is cleared to “0” without setting the value to the general-purpose general-purpose timer counter. As a result, the process to be executed in the next process of the general-purpose normal power control process is the general-purpose change start process.

  In the normal power closing process in step S1110, the output of the drive signal to the normal power driving unit 34b is started on condition that the value of the normal power general timer counter is “0”. Numerical information of an open continuation period (specifically, 2 seconds) when the electric utility product 34a is set to the open state and the electric utility product 34a is set to the open state once is set in the general-purpose general electric timer counter. Then, the value of the general-purpose general-purpose counter is updated from “4” to “3”. As a result, the process to be executed in the next process of the normal drawing normal power control process is the normal power opening process.

  As described above, the execution of the normal electric power control process causes a change in the pattern to be displayed on the ordinary figure display unit 38a when the winning in the through gate 35 occurs. Then, in the case of winning in the normal power opening state in the general power opening lottery process, the general power opening state is set in which the general power role object 34a of the second operating port 34 is opened. When the electric power is released and the second operation port 34 is opened, a game ball can be awarded to the second operation port 34, and when the game ball wins the second operation port 34, the second holding information is obtained. Is stored in the second special figure reservation area 86.

<Special Figure Special Electric Control Process>
Next, a processing configuration for switching the special power winning device 32 between the open state and the closed state will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the special figure special power control process executed by the main CPU 63. The special figure special power control processing is executed in step S213 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 12).

  First, a process of acquiring hold information is executed (step S1201). In the process of acquiring the reservation information, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 39, a prize has occurred in the first operating port 33 (step S1301: YES), and furthermore, the first prize is stored in the first special figure reservation area 85. If the number of 1-hold information is less than the upper-limit storage number (step S1302: YES), a process for acquiring the first hold information is executed. The determination as to whether or not a winning has occurred in the first operating port 33 is performed by determining whether or not "1" is set in the first operating winning flag of the main RAM 65. As described above, "1" is set in the first operation winning flag in step S315 of the ball detection processing (FIG. 14). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1301, the first operation winning flag is cleared to "0".

  In the process for acquiring the first reservation information, first, the main CPU 63 is provided in the main RAM 65 so that the number of unprocessed first reservation information stored in the first special figure reservation area 85 is grasped by the main CPU 63. Then, the value of the first special figure suspension counter is incremented by 1 (step S1303). Incidentally, the display content of the first special figure reservation display section 37c in the special figure unit 37 is adjusted according to the value of the first special figure reservation counter. As a result, the display content of the first special figure reservation display section 37c corresponds to the number of pieces of the first reservation information stored in the first special figure reservation area 85. Thereafter, the value corresponding to the first storage area 85 in the first special figure reservation area 85, that is, the storage number corresponding to the reserved storage number obtained by adding 1 to each of the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 in step S1303. It is stored in the area (step S1304). Then, the first hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S1305). When receiving the first hold command, the sound emission control device 81 transmits a command corresponding to the first hold command to the display control device 82. The symbol display device 41 displays an image for notifying the number of pieces of the first hold information stored in the first special figure holding area 85, and the display control device 82 displays a command corresponding to the first hold command. Upon reception, the content of the image display is updated to the content corresponding to the increase of the number of the first suspension information by one. Note that, when the game round triggered by the first hold information is started, the content of the image display is updated to the content corresponding to the decrease of the number of the first hold information by one.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1301, when a negative determination is made in step S1302, or when the process of step S1305 is executed, a winning in the second operating port 34 has occurred (step S1306: YES). ), On the condition that the number of pieces of second hold information stored in the second special figure holding area 86 is less than the upper limit storage number (step S1307: YES), a process for obtaining the second hold information is performed. Execute. The determination as to whether or not a winning has occurred in the second operating port 34 is made by determining whether or not "1" is set in the second operating winning flag of the main RAM 65. As described above, "1" is set in the second operation winning flag in step S319 of the ball detection processing (FIG. 14). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1306, the second operation winning flag is cleared to "0".

  In the process for acquiring the second reservation information, first, the main CPU 63 is provided in the main RAM 65 so that the number of the unprocessed second reservation information stored in the second special figure reservation area 86 is grasped by the main CPU 63. Then, the value of the second special figure holding counter is incremented by 1 (step S1308). Incidentally, the display content of the second special figure holding display section 37d in the special figure unit 37 is adjusted according to the value of the second special figure holding counter. As a result, the display content of the second special figure suspension display section 37d corresponds to the number of the second suspension information stored in the second special figure suspension area 86. After that, the value of the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation area 86, that is, the storage corresponding to the reserved storage number obtained by adding 1 in step S1308. It is stored in the area (step S1309). After that, the second hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S1310). When receiving the second hold command, the sound emission control device 81 transmits a command corresponding to the second hold command to the display control device 82. In the symbol display device 41, an image display for notifying the number of the second reservation information stored in the second special figure reservation area 86 is performed, and the display control device 82 displays a command corresponding to the second reservation command. Upon reception, the content of the image display is updated to the content corresponding to the increase of the number of the second suspension information by one. Note that, when the game round triggered by the second hold information is started, the content of the image display is updated to the content corresponding to the decrease of the number of the second hold information by one.

  After executing the hold information acquisition process (step S1201), the numerical information of the special figure special power counter provided in the main RAM 65 is read (step S1202), and the special figure special power address table provided in the main ROM 64 is read. Read (step S1203). Then, a start address corresponding to the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is acquired from the special figure special power address table (step S1204), and the process jumps to the process indicated by the acquired start address (step S1205).

  The special figure special power counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to know which of the processes in steps S1206 to S1212 in the special figure special power control processing should be executed. Indicates a start address in a program for executing each of the processes of steps S1206 to S1212 in association with the numerical information of the special figure special power counter. If the value of the special figure special power counter is "0", the process jumps to the special figure variation start processing of step S1206. If the value of the special figure special power counter is "1", the processing of the special figure special power change is performed in step S1207. When the value of the special figure special power counter is "2", the processing jumps to the special figure special determination processing of step S1208, and when the value of the special figure special power counter is "3", the special power generation of step S1209 is performed. The process jumps to the start process. If the value of the special figure special power counter is "4", the process jumps to the special power open processing in step S1210. If the value of the special figure special power counter is "5", the process proceeds to step S1211. The process jumps to the special power closing process, and if the value of the special figure special power counter is "6", the process jumps to the special power ending process in step S1212. Hereinafter, each process of step S1206 to step S1212 will be individually described.

<Special map start processing>
First, the special figure change start processing in step S1206 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. Note that the special figure change start process is not executed in a situation where the game round has already been executed and in a situation where the open / close execution mode has been executed.

  In the special figure change start process, when the second special information reservation area 86 does not store the second reservation information and the first special figure reservation area 85 stores the first reservation information (step S1401: YES, step S1401). S1402: NO), the first data setting process is executed (step S1403). In the first data setting process, the data stored in the first area 85a of the first special figure reservation area 85 is moved to the special figure execution area 87. Thereafter, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first special figure reservation area 85 is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 85a to 85d to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first area 85a and also shifts the data in the second area 85b → The data in each area is shifted in such a manner as the first area 85a, the third area 85c → the second area 85b, the fourth area 85d → the third area 85c. Thereafter, the value of the first special figure reservation counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by one. As a result, the display content of the first special figure suspension display section 37c in the special figure unit 37 is changed to the content in which the first suspension information is reduced by one. In the data setting process, a first decrease command indicating that the first hold information in the first special figure holding area 85 has decreased by one is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. When receiving the first decrease command, the audio light emission control device 81 transmits a corresponding command to the display control device 82. As described above, the symbol display device 41 displays an image for notifying the number of pieces of the first reservation information stored in the first special figure reservation area 85, and the display control device 82 outputs the first decrease command. Is received, the content of the image display is updated to the content corresponding to the decrease of the number of the first hold information by one.

  On the other hand, when the second suspension information is stored in the second special map suspension area 86 (step S1401 and step S1402: YES), the first suspension information acquired earlier than the second suspension information is stored in the second suspension area 86. Even if it is stored in the one special map reservation area 85, the second data setting process is executed (step S1404). In the second data setting process, the data stored in the first area 86a of the second special figure holding area 86 is moved to the special figure execution area 87. Thereafter, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second special figure holding area 86 is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 86a to 86d to the lower area side. The data in the first area 86a is cleared and the second area 86b → The data in each area is shifted in the order of the first area 86a, the third area 86c → the second area 86b, the fourth area 86d → the third area 86c, and so on. Thereafter, the value of the second special figure hold counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by one. As a result, the display content of the second special figure suspension display section 37d in the special figure unit 37 is changed to the content in which the second suspension information is reduced by one. In the data setting process, a second decrease command indicating that the second hold information in the second special figure holding area 86 has decreased by one is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. When receiving the second reduction command, the audio light emission control device 81 transmits a corresponding command to the display control device 82. As described above, the symbol display device 41 performs an image display for notifying the number of the second reservation information stored in the second special figure reservation area 86, and the display control device 82 performs the second decrease command. Is received, the content of the image display is updated to the content corresponding to the decrease of the number of the second suspension information by one.

  Here, when the second hold information is stored as described above, even if the first hold information acquired earlier than the second hold information is stored, the second hold information is used for the special figure. Is shifted to the execution area 87. As a result, the second suspension information is preferentially digested as the start target of the game round rather than the first suspension information.

  When the processing of step S1403 or step S1404 has been executed, a hit / fail judgment processing is executed (step S1405). In the success / failure determination process, if the success / failure lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the start of the game round is the first hold information, the low probability success / failure table for the first special map (see FIG. 9A) is stored in the main ROM 64. If the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode and the start target of the game round is the first hold information, the high-accuracy winning / rejecting table for the first special map (see FIG. 9B) is read from the main ROM 64. If the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the start of the game round is the second hold information, the low probability winning / failing table for the second special map (see FIG. 9C) is read from the main ROM 64 and If the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the start time of the game round is the second hold information, the high probability winning / failing table for the second special map (see FIG. 9D) is read from the main ROM 64. After reading the success / failure table, information for success / failure determination, that is, numerical information obtained from the hit random number counter C1, is read from the hold information stored in the special figure execution area 87, and the read numerical information is stored in the success / failure table. Then, it is determined whether or not any of the numerical information set as the jackpot result matches. Also, if the start time of the current game round is the second hold information, and if it does not match the numerical information set as the jackpot result, the first small hit result, the second small hit It is determined whether or not any of the numerical information set for each of the result and the third small hit result matches the information for determining the success or failure.

  If the result of the hit determination process is a jackpot result (step S1406: YES), a distribution determination process is executed (step S1407). In the distribution determination process, if the start of the game round is the first hold information, the distribution table for the first special map (see FIG. 10A) is read from the main ROM 64, and the start target of the game round is the first. If the information is 2 hold information, the distribution table for the second special map (see FIG. 10B) is read from the main ROM 64. After reading the distribution table, the information for distribution determination, that is, the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 is read from the suspension information stored in the execution area 87 for the special map, and the distribution table is referred to. This specifies which kind of jackpot result the read numerical information corresponds to.

  After executing the distribution determination processing, "1" is set to the flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the type of the jackpot result specified in the distribution determination processing (step S1408). Thereafter, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed (step S1409). Specifically, the information on the pattern stop mode to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display units 37a and 37b, which is the start target of the current game round, is stored in the main ROM 64 in advance for the jackpot result stop. The information is specified from the result table, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 65. In the stop result table for the jackpot result, the type of the stop mode of the pattern stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b is set differently for each type of the big hit result. In step S1409, the main RAM 65 stores information on the pattern stop mode according to the type of the jackpot result specified in step S1408. It should be noted that a pattern stop mode may be set in one-to-one correspondence with each jackpot result, or a plurality of types of pattern stop modes may be set for at least some of the jackpot results. The method of selecting a stop result for a jackpot result in which a plurality of types of pattern stop modes are set is arbitrary, but a configuration in which the stop result is selected according to, for example, a value of a jackpot type counter C2 may be employed.

  If the result of the success / failure determination processing is not the big success result but any one of the small success results (step S1406: NO, step S1410: YES), the main RAM 65 corresponding to the type of the small success result specified in the success / failure determination processing. Is set to "1" (step S1411). After that, the information of the pattern stop mode to be finally stopped and displayed on the second special figure display unit 37b, which is the start target of the current game round, is stored in the main ROM 64 in advance, and the stop result table for small hit results is stored. , And the specified information is stored in the main RAM 65. In the stop result table for the small hit result, the type of the stop mode of the pattern stopped and displayed on the second special figure display unit 37b is set differently for each type of the small hit result, and in step S1412 Then, the information on the pattern stop mode according to the type of the small hit result specified in step S1411, is stored in the main RAM 65. Note that the pattern stop mode may be set in one-to-one correspondence with each small hit result, or a plurality of types of pattern stop modes may be set for at least some of the small hit results. . The method of selecting a stop result for a small hit result in which a plurality of types of pattern stop modes are set is arbitrary, but, for example, the stop result may be selected according to the value of the hit random number counter C1. Also, the information on the pattern aspect selected in step S1412 is different from the information on the pattern aspect selected in the case of the jackpot result.

  If the result of the success / failure determination process is neither the big hit result nor the small hit result (step S1410: NO), a stop result setting process for a miss result is executed (step S1413). Specifically, in the current game round, the information of the pattern form to be finally stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b is stored in the main ROM 64 in advance. From the stop result table for use, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 65. The information on the pattern aspect selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern aspect selected in the case of the jackpot result and the information on the pattern aspect selected in the case of the small hit result. One type is common to the special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b.

  When the processing of step S1409, step S1412, or step S1413 has been executed, a specific processing of the variable display period is executed (step S1414). In the specific processing, numerical information of the variation type counter CS is obtained. In addition, it is determined whether or not a reach effect occurs in the symbol display device 41 in the current game round. Specifically, if any of the jackpot results occurs in the current game round, it is determined that a reach effect will occur. In addition, if any small hit result occurs in the current game round, it is determined that the reach effect does not occur. When neither the big hit result nor the small hit result occurs in the current game round, the numerical information obtained from the reach random number counter C3 in the hold information stored in the special figure execution area 87 indicates that the reach has occurred. If it is the corresponding numerical information, it is determined that the reach effect is generated, and if it is not the numerical information corresponding to the reach occurrence, it is determined that the reach effect is not generated.

  When it is determined that the reach effect occurs, the information of the fluctuation display period corresponding to the numerical information of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the reach generation table stored in the main ROM 64, and The information of the acquired variable display period is set in the special figure special power timer counter. When it is determined that the reach effect does not occur, the information of the fluctuation display period corresponding to the numerical information of the current fluctuation type counter CS is referred to by referring to the reach non-generation table stored in the main ROM 64. get. In this case, each variable display period is set such that the variable display period when a reach effect occurs is longer than the variable display period when a reach effect does not occur. Then, the information of the obtained variable display period is set in a special figure special power timer counter. The value set in the special figure special power timer counter is decremented by one each time the timer update processing (step S210) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 12) is executed.

  The variable display period when no reach occurs is set such that the average period becomes shorter as the number of pieces of hold information stored in the first special figure holding area 85 or the second special figure holding area 86 increases. Also, in the situation where the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode, the holding information stored in the first special figure holding area 85 or the second special figure holding area 86 is more than in the situation where the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the low probability mode. The variable display period when no reach occurs is set such that a shorter variable display period is more likely to be selected when the numbers are the same.

  Further, the variable display period selected in the case of the small hit result may be shorter than the variable display period selected in the case of the large hit result. It is good also as a structure shorter than the average value of the variable display period selected when an average value is a big hit result. In this case, it is possible to increase the speed at which the game times are exhausted when the second suspension information becomes the start target of the game times and a small hit result occurs.

  Here, in the situation where the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the low-probability mode, the maximum variable display period selected when the second hold information is the start target of the game round is the time when the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the low-probability mode. The first hold information is set to a period that is equal to or shorter than the maximum variable display period selected when the game is started. The average period of the variable display period selected when the second hold information is the start target of the game round and the result is not the big hit in the situation where the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the low probability mode is the winning / rejecting lottery mode. Is in the low probability mode, the first hold information is set to a period equal to or less than the average period of the variable display period selected when the first hold information is a target of starting a game round and does not become a jackpot result. This makes it possible to prevent the digestion rate of the game times from deteriorating even when the second hold information is the start time of the game times in the low probability mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display selected when the second hold information is the target of starting the game and the jackpot result is not obtained in the situation where the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the low probability mode. The average period of the period is the average period of the variable display period that is selected when the first hold information is the start target of the game round and is not a jackpot result in the situation where the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the low probability mode. The configuration may be set to be the same or substantially the same. In this case, the term “substantially the same” corresponds to a degree to which the player cannot recognize the difference although the average period is actually different.

  In addition, in the situation where the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode, the average period of the variable display period selected when the second hold information is the start target of the game round and the result is not the jackpot is determined by the winning / rejecting lottery mode. Is set to a period shorter than the average period of the variable display period selected when the first hold information is the start target of the game round and does not result in the jackpot in the high probability mode. Thereby, the first hold information becomes the start target of the game round in the situation of the high probability mode, the digestion rate of the game round in the case of the second hold information is the start target of the game round in the situation of the high probability mode. It is possible to increase the rate of digestion of the game times in the case where the game is played.

  After executing the process of specifying the variable display period, the control unit 81 transmits a variation command and a type command corresponding to the current game to be started to the sound emission control device 81 (step S1415). The command for change includes information on the change display period specified in step S1414, and the game time to be started is displayed on either the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b. Information indicating whether or not they are supported is included. Further, the fluctuation command includes information on whether or not to execute a reach effect. The type command includes information as to whether or not the game time that is to be started this time corresponds to the jackpot result. If the type corresponds to the jackpot result, the type of the jackpot result is any type of jackpot result. Is included. In addition, the type command includes information as to whether or not the game time targeted for starting this time corresponds to the small hit result. Information indicating whether the result is a small hit result is included.

  After that, in the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the display unit which is the target of starting the current game round starts the variable display of the pattern (step S1416). Then, the value of the special figure special power counter is incremented by 1 (step S1417). Since the value of the special figure special power counter when the special figure fluctuation start processing is executed is “0”, the value of the special figure special power counter corresponds to the special figure fluctuation processing (step S1207) by adding 1. It becomes "1".

  Note that, when receiving the variation command and the type command, the sound emission control device 81 executes a process for determining the execution content of the gaming effect corresponding to the command. Then, light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed in accordance with a table corresponding to the processing result. As a result, the light emission effect in the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound output effect in the speaker unit 54 are executed over the fluctuation display period of the current game. In addition, the sound emission control device 81 transmits a command corresponding to the execution content of the game round effect determined this time to the display control device 82. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 82 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 according to a table corresponding to the command. Thereby, the display effect on the symbol display device 41 is executed over the variable display period of the current game.

  In this case, if the current game round is a 16R high-accuracy result, the combination of the symbol “7” is stopped and displayed on any of the activated lines. In addition, if the current game time is one of the 2R high accuracy result, the 4R high accuracy result, the 6R high accuracy result, and the 10R high accuracy result, the same odd number other than the “7” symbol is displayed on any of the activated lines. The symbol combination is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the game time of this time is one of the 2R low-accuracy result, the 4R low-accuracy result, the 6R low-accuracy result, the 10R low-accuracy result, and the 16R low-accuracy result, the same even pattern is displayed on any of the activated lines. Is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the current game round is one of the first small hit result, the second small hit result, and the third small hit result, the combination of the reach symbols is not a combination of the same symbols on any of the activated lines. However, a predetermined symbol combination (for example, “3.4.1”) is stopped and displayed. As described above, a predetermined combination of symbols common to the effects for the game round on the symbol display device 41 is stopped and displayed in any of the first small hit result, the second small hit result, and the third small hit result. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which of the first small hit result, the second small hit result, and the third small hit result corresponds, while clearly indicating the occurrence of the small hit result. Become. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the open / close execution mode that occurs when the small hit result is obtained. Further, in the configuration in which the predetermined combination of symbols common to any of the first small hit result, the second small hit result, and the third small hit result is stopped and displayed in the symbol display device 41, The picture corresponding to the type of the small hit result is stopped and displayed on the 2 special figure display section 37b. Therefore, the manager of the gaming hall can specify which kind of small hit result has occurred simply by visually checking the second special map display portion 37b. The present invention is not limited to this, and the symbol display device 41 may be configured to display a stop result corresponding to the type of the small hit result.

<Special map change processing>
Next, the special figure changing process executed in step S1207 of the special figure special power control process (FIG. 38) will be described.

  This is a case where the value of the special figure special power timer counter is 1 or more and the fluctuation display period of the current game time has not elapsed, and the special figure display units 37a and 37b to be executed for the current game time are displayed. When it is time to update the contents, data setting for updating the display contents of the special figure display units 37a and 37b is performed. As a result, the display contents of the patterns on the special figure display units 37a and 37b to be controlled are updated to the display contents in the next order.

  The state at the start of the variable display of the pattern on the special figure display sections 37a and 37b and the update of the variable display of the pattern are performed in a fixed mode regardless of the result of the determination of the success or failure and the result of the distribution determination. It is performed in a fixed manner regardless of the contents of the effect for the game round in 41. For example, when a plurality of predetermined update timings occur, the display content of the picture goes around once and a display pattern in which the display order is a fixed order is repeatedly performed. In any case, the stop result determined at the start of the game round is displayed. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the display of the special figure display units 37a and 37b.

  On the other hand, when the value of the special figure special power timer counter is “0”, that is, when the variable display period has elapsed, a final stop command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. After that, at the start of the game round, the information on the pattern stop mode of the special figure display sections 37a, 37b stored in the main RAM 65 is read. As a result, the variation display of the pattern is stopped in a state where the pattern corresponding to the game result of the current game is displayed on the special figure display units 37a and 37b to be controlled. Thereafter, the information of the final stop period (specifically, 0.5 sec) is set in the special figure special power timer counter. Thus, the measurement of the final stop period is started. Thereafter, the value of the special figure special power counter is incremented by one. Since the value of the special figure special power counter in the case where the special figure special processing is executed is "1", the value of the special figure special power counter corresponds to the special figure special determination processing (step S1208) by adding 1. It becomes "2".

  When receiving the final stop command, the sound emission control device 81 transmits a corresponding command to the display control device 82. When receiving the command, the display control device 82 causes the symbol display device 41 to definitely display the symbol combination corresponding to the result of stopping the current game round over the final stop period.

<Processing during special figure determination>
Next, the special figure fixing process executed in step S1208 of the special figure special power control processing (FIG. 38) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  The case where the value of the special figure special power timer counter is "0" and the final stop period has elapsed (step S1501: YES), and the game result of the current game round is a big hit result or a small hit result ( Step S1502: YES), add 1 to the value of the special figure special power counter (step S1503). Since the value of the special figure special power counter in the case where the special figure special processing is executed is “2”, the value of the special figure special power counter is increased by “1”, and the value of the special figure special power counter is “3” corresponding to the special power start processing (step S1209). ". On the other hand, when the game result of the current game is neither the big hit result nor the small hit result (step S1502: NO), the value of the special figure special power counter is cleared to “0” (step S1504). Thus, the value of the special figure special power counter becomes “0” corresponding to the special figure change start process (step S1206).

<Special electricity start processing>
Next, the special power start processing executed in step S1209 of the special power special power control processing (FIG. 38) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  If it is before the start of the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode (step S1601: YES), if the current game result is the big hit result, information corresponding to the opening period corresponding to the big hit result (specifically, 5 seconds) Is set in the special figure special power timer counter, and if the current game result is a small hit result, information (specifically, 2 seconds) corresponding to the opening period corresponding to the small hit result is stored in the special figure special power timer counter. It is set (step S1602). Thereafter, an opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S1603). Thus, an effect corresponding to the opening period is performed in the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54.

  If the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode has just started (step S1601: NO), the condition that the value of the special figure special power timer counter is “0”, that is, the opening period has elapsed (step S1604: YES), a setting process of the number of times of opening and closing is executed (step S1605). In this case, if the current game result is the 2R low-accuracy result or the 2R high-accuracy result, “2” is set to the opening / closing frequency counter provided in the main RAM 65, and the current game result is the 4R low-accuracy result or 4R high If it is a positive result, set the opening / closing frequency counter of the main RAM 65 to “4”. If the current game result is a 6R low accuracy result or a 6R high accuracy result, set “6” to the opening / closing frequency counter of the main RAM 65. If the current game result is the 10R low-accuracy result or 10R high-accuracy result, "10" is set to the opening / closing frequency counter of the main RAM 65, and if the current game result is the 16R low-accuracy result or 16R high-accuracy result For example, "16" is set in the opening / closing frequency counter of the main RAM 65. If the current game result is the first small hit result, "1" is set to the opening / closing frequency counter of the main RAM 65, and if the current game result is the second small hit result, the opening / closing frequency counter of the main RAM 65 is set. Is set to "5", and if the current game result is the third small hit result, "10" is set to the opening / closing frequency counter of the main RAM 65. The opening / closing frequency counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the remaining number of times of opening and closing the special power winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode.

  After that, an opening continuation period setting process is executed (step S1606). In this setting process, if the current game result is any of the big hits, the information of the open duration of the round game (specifically, 29 seconds) is set in the special figure special power timer counter. In the setting process, when the current game result is the first small hit result, the information (specifically, 10 seconds) of the opening duration for the first small hit result is set in the special figure special electric timer counter. Then, if the current game result is the second small hit result, the information (specifically, 2 seconds) of the opening duration for the second small hit result is set in the special figure special electric timer counter, and the current game If the result is the third small hit result, information on the open duration for the third small hit result (specifically, 1 second) is set in the special figure special power timer counter.

  Thereafter, a setting process of the winning upper limit number is executed (step S1607). In the setting process, "10" is set to the winning counter provided in the main RAM 65, regardless of whether the current game result is any big hit result or any small hit result. The winning counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the remaining number of the winning upper limit.

  After that, a special power release setting process is executed (step S1608). In the opening setting process, data setting for setting the special power winning device 32 to an open state is performed. Thereby, the special power winning device 32 is in an open state. Thereafter, the value of the special figure special power counter is incremented by 1 (step S1609). Since the value of the special figure special power counter is "3" when the special power special start processing is executed, the value of the special figure special power counter is increased by "1" to "4" corresponding to the special power open processing (step S1210). It becomes.

<Processing during opening of special electricity>
Next, the special power releasing processing executed in step S1210 of the special figure special power control processing (FIG. 38) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  If the value of the special figure special power timer counter is "0", that is, if the open continuation period has elapsed (step S1701: YES), the value of the open / close frequency counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S1702). After that, information of the interval period (specifically, 3 seconds) is set in the special figure special power timer counter (step S1703). In addition, a special power closing setting process is executed (step S1704). In the closing setting process, data setting for setting the special power winning device 32 to be in a closed state is performed. As a result, the special electric winning device 32 is closed. Then, the value of the special figure special power counter is incremented by 1 (step S1705). Since the value of the special figure special power counter in the case where the special power special opening processing is executed is “4”, the value of the special power special power counter is increased by “1” to “5” corresponding to the special power special closing processing (step S1211). ".

  If the value of the special figure special power timer counter is not “0”, that is, if the open continuation period has not elapsed (step S1701: NO), it is determined whether or not a prize has occurred in the special power prize device 32 (step S1701: NO). Step S1706). The determination as to whether or not a prize has occurred in the special power prize device 32 is performed by determining whether or not “1” is set in the special power prize flag of the main RAM 65. As described above, “1” is set in the special power winning flag in step S311 of the incoming ball detection process (FIG. 14). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1706, the special power winning flag is cleared to "0".

  When a prize has occurred in the special prize winning device 32 (step S1706: YES), the value of the prize counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S1707). Then, if the value of the winning counter after the subtraction of 1 is “0” (step S1708: YES), if the game result that triggered this opening / closing execution mode is any of the jackpot results (step S1708). S1709: NO), and executes the processing of steps S1702 to S1705 already described. On the other hand, if the value of the winning counter is “0” (step S1708: YES), and if the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is any small hit result (step S1709) : YES), the value of the open / close counter of the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S1710), and then the processing of steps S1704 to S1705 described above is executed.

<Treatment during special electricity closure>
Next, the special power closing process executed in step S1211 of the special power special power control process (FIG. 38) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  If the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is any of the small hit results and a prize has occurred in the special power prize device 32 (step S1801: YES), the main RAM 65 wins. The value of the counter is decremented by 1 (step S1802). The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S1801 is a case where a game ball that has entered the special power prize device 32 immediately before the special power prize device 32 changes from the open state to the closed state is detected by the special power detection sensor 45a. . If the value of the winning counter after subtraction by one is “0” (step S1803: YES), the value of the opening / closing counter of the main RAM 65 is cleared to “0” (step S1804).

  In the special power closing process, when the value of the open / close frequency counter of the main RAM 65 is not “0” (step S1805: NO), it is determined whether the value of the special figure special power timer counter is “0”. It is determined whether the interval period has elapsed (step S1806). If the interval period has elapsed (step S1806: YES), the condition that the game result that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode is any of the jackpot results (step S1807: YES) indicates that the winning upper limit number has been reached. A setting process is executed (step S1808). In the setting process, “10” is set in the winning counter of the main RAM 65.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1807, or if the process in step S1808 is performed, a process of setting an open continuation period is performed (step S1809). In the setting process, if the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is any of the jackpot results, the information of the open duration of the round game (specifically, 29 seconds) is transmitted to the special figure special power timer counter. Set to. In the setting process, when the current game result is the second small hit result, the information (specifically, 2 seconds) of the opening duration for the second small hit result is set in the special figure special power timer counter. If the current game result is the third small hit result, the information (specifically, one second) of the opening continuation period for the third small hit result is set in the special figure special power timer counter.

  After that, a special power release setting process is executed (step S1810). In the opening setting process, data setting for setting the special power winning device 32 to an open state is performed. Thereby, the special power winning device 32 is in an open state. Thereafter, the value of the special figure special power counter is decremented by 1 (step S1811). Since the value of the special figure special power counter is “5” when the special power special closing processing is executed, the value of the special power special power counter is reduced by “1” by “1”, which corresponds to the special power special opening processing (step S1210). ".

  On the other hand, when the value of the opening / closing counter of the main RAM 65 is “0” (step S1805: YES), the ending period setting process is executed (step S1812). In this case, if the game result that triggered this opening / closing execution mode is a jackpot result, information (specifically, 5 seconds) corresponding to the ending period corresponding to the jackpot result is set in the special figure special power timer counter. If the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is a small hit result, information (specifically, 2 seconds) corresponding to the ending period corresponding to the small hit result is stored in the special figure special power timer counter. set. After that, the ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S1813). Thus, an effect corresponding to the ending period is performed in the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54. Then, the value of the special figure special power counter is incremented by 1 (step S1814). Since the value of the special figure special power counter in the case where the special power closing processing is executed is “5”, the value of the special power special counter is incremented by “1”, and the value of the special power special counter is “6” corresponding to the special power end processing (step S1212). It becomes.

<Special electricity termination processing>
Next, the special power ending processing executed in step S1212 of the special figure special power control processing (FIG. 38) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  If the value of the special figure special power timer counter is "0", that is, if the ending period has elapsed (step S1901: YES), the game result that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode is one of the high-accuracy results. If it is (step S1902 and step S1903: YES), “1” is set to the high probability flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S1904). The high probability flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify which of the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode and the low probability mode. If the value of the high probability flag is “1”, the high probability flag is high. The mode is the probability mode, and if the value of the high probability flag is “0”, the mode is the low probability mode. Therefore, by executing the processing of step S1904, the success / failure lottery mode after the end of the current open / close execution mode becomes the high probability mode. If the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is any low-probability result (step S1902: YES, step S1903: NO), the high-probability flag of the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0". (Step S1905). As a result, the success / failure lottery mode after the end of the current open / close execution mode becomes the low probability mode.

  On the other hand, if the game result that triggered this opening / closing execution mode is any of the small hit results (step S1902: NO), neither step S1904 nor step S1905 is executed. Thus, even if the game result is one of the small hit results and the open / close execution mode occurs, the win / fail lottery mode does not change before and after the open / close execution mode.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1902, if the process in step S1904 is performed, or if the process in step S1905 is performed, a clear process is performed (step S1906). In the clearing process, various flags and various counters used in the current game times and the current open / close execution mode are cleared to “0”. However, the high-probability flag in the main RAM 65 is excluded from the target for clearing “0”. Thereafter, the value of the special figure special power counter is cleared to "0" (step S1907). Thus, the value of the special figure special power counter becomes “0” corresponding to the special figure change start process (step S1206).

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  Since a game ball is paid out when a game ball enters any one of the general winning port 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, the player can select one of these pitching units. The game will be played while expecting a game ball to enter. In this configuration, a game ball enters any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 (hereinafter, also referred to as a history target input section). Is generated, the corresponding history information is stored in the history memory 117 of the management IC 66. This allows the pachinko machine 10 to store and hold information for managing the number or frequency of game balls entering each history entry ball entry unit, and utilizes this managed information. This makes it possible to appropriately manage the manner in which the game balls enter the history target entry sections. In addition, since the history information is stored and held in the pachinko machine 10 itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification to the history information.

  All the ball entry units that discharge the game balls from the game area PA are the targets for executing the history information storage process and the targets for management using the history information. Thereby, it becomes possible to manage the pitching frequency for an arbitrary history target pitching part using the history information. In addition, it is possible to manage the ratio of the number of game balls that enter each history target entrance portion with respect to the number of game balls that are discharged from the game area PA, using history information.

  The history information includes RTC information, which is information corresponding to the timing at which a game ball has entered the history target entrance portion that triggered the storage of the history information. Thereby, by using the history information, it is possible to grasp in detail the entry history of the game balls into the history target entry portion.

  In the history memory 117, not only history information corresponding to the game ball entering the history target ball entry unit, but also history information indicating whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is being performed, and whether the game is in the high probability mode. History information indicating whether the front door frame 14 is being opened and history information indicating whether the front door frame 14 is being opened are stored. Thereby, it is possible to manage whether or not the game balls have entered the history target ball entering part by distinguishing whether or not each of these situations is present.

  The history information stored in the history memory 117 can be output to a reading device that is an external device of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the history information is read by the reading device, and it is possible to analyze the manner in which the game ball enters the history target entrance portion using the read history information.

  The MPU 62 is provided with a reading terminal 102, and a program can be read from the main ROM 64 by a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. Thereby, it is possible to confirm whether or not the program is normal. In this configuration, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is output to the outside using the reading terminal 102 for externally outputting the program. As a result, the history information can be output to the outside while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

  It is specified whether the information to be output from the reading terminal 102 is a program or history information, and information on the side corresponding to the identification result is output to the outside through the reading terminal 102. As a result, in the configuration in which history information is externally output using the reading terminal 102 for externally outputting the program, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether the information to be externally output is the program or history information. The specified information is output to the outside. Therefore, only necessary information can be read out even when the reading terminal 102 is also used.

  Based on the information received from the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, it is specified which information to be output from the reading terminal 102 is the program or the history information. As a result, it is possible to prevent the configuration relating to selection of information to be externally output from becoming complicated.

  An MPU 62 having a main ROM 64 for storing a program in advance has a management IC 66 and a reading terminal 102. As a result, signal paths for the reading terminal 102 can be collected in the MPU 62. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while making it difficult to illegally access the signal path to the reading terminal 102.

  A main CPU 63 that executes a process for paying out a game ball based on a game ball entering one of the general winning port 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. Separately, a management CPU 112 is provided, and the management CPU 112 executes processing for storing history information in the history memory 117. As a result, it is possible to manage the manner in which the game balls enter the respective history target entrance portions while preventing the processing load on the main CPU 63 from increasing extremely.

  The main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 are provided as the MPU 62 on the same chip. As a result, unauthorized access to the communication path between the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 can be prevented.

  The main-side CPU 63 uses information corresponding to the detection results of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a using the signal paths corresponding to the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a, and the buffers of the input port 121 of the management IC 66. It transmits to 122a-122g. As a result, the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 corresponds to each of the buffers 122a to 122g (that is, each signal path), and the configuration for distinguishing the type of each information on the management CPU 112 is simplified. It becomes possible to do.

  The main CPU 63 stores information corresponding to whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, information corresponding to whether or not to be in the high probability mode, and information corresponding to whether or not the front door frame 14 is being opened. Using the signal paths corresponding to each of these situations, the signals are transmitted to the buffers 122h to 122j of the input port 121 of the management IC 66. As a result, the types of information corresponding to these situations correspond to the buffers 122h to 122j (that is, the signal paths), and the configuration for distinguishing the types of information by the management CPU 112 is simplified. It becomes possible.

  The main CPU 63 transmits correspondence information indicating which type of information each buffer 122a to 122j (that is, each signal path 118a to 118j) corresponds to the management CPU 112. Thereby, it is not necessary to store the corresponding relationship information in the management IC 66 in advance. Therefore, the versatility of the management IC 66 can be improved.

  When supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. Thereby, in a situation where a game ball can enter the history target entrance part, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the main CPU 63 and the history target entrance part can be specified by the management IC 66. It becomes possible to become.

  Correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 using signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting information indicating whether or not a game ball has entered the history target ball entry unit. Thereby, it becomes possible to simplify the structure regarding communication compared with the structure which provides the signal path for exclusive use for transmitting correspondence information.

  The management IC 66 is provided with a correspondence memory 116, and correspondence information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is stored in the correspondence memory 116. As a result, information that enables the management target IC 66 to specify the history target entrance portion corresponding to the information to be transmitted is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the detection result information of each of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a. No need to provide. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the information amount of the detection result information of each of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 48a transmitted from the main CPU 63.

  When the output state of the output instruction signal output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, information is output from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 102. In this case, the fact that the signal path corresponding to the sixteenth buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal can be specified by the management CPU 112 without receiving correspondence information from the main CPU 63. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the configuration related to transmission of correspondence information from becoming extremely complicated.

  The management IC 66 is provided with more buffers than the types of information that need to be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 as the buffers 122a to 122p capable of receiving information from the main CPU 63. It has been. As a result, even if the number of types of the information increases or decreases depending on the model of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to cope without changing the configuration regarding the buffers 122a to 122p. Therefore, the versatility of the management IC 66 can be improved.

  When history information is transmitted from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 102, correspondence information indicating the type of the history target entrance portion corresponding to the history information is included in each history information. Thereby, it becomes possible to specify the entrance mode of the game ball into each history target entrance portion using the read history information.

  In the management IC 66, by using the history information stored in the history memory 117, various parameters (first to eighth, 11 to 18, 21 to 26 parameters) are calculated. This makes it possible to externally output various parameters that are the results of computation using history information.

  Various parameters are calculated in a state where the history information corresponding to the situation where the front door frame 14 is open is excluded. Thereby, it becomes possible to derive various parameters in a normal situation where the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. In addition, various parameters corresponding to each of the open / close execution mode situation and the high probability mode situation are calculated. Thereby, the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp the entrance mode of the game ball according to each situation.

  When various parameters are calculated, the history memory 117 is initialized by executing the clear processing of the history memory 117. As a result, the history information that exceeds the storage capacity of the history memory 117 becomes a storage target in the history memory 117, and the history information that should normally be stored is erased by overwriting. Can be made difficult to occur.

  When various parameters are output to the reading terminal 102, history information stored in the history memory 117 is also output to the reading terminal 102. This makes it possible to refer to not only the various parameters but also the history information which is the basis of the calculation of the various parameters when reading out the various parameters and analyzing the entering state of the game balls in the game area PA.

  The management CPU 112 calculates various parameters when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. Thereby, it becomes possible to reduce the frequency which calculates various parameters.

  When the main CPU 63 specifies that the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and when the output instruction information is transmitted from the main CPU 63, various parameters are calculated by the management IC 66. The various parameters of the calculation result are output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, various parameters can be output to a reading device outside the pachinko machine 10 based on an instruction from the main CPU 63.

  Whether or not the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 is specified in the process at the start of supply of operating power executed by the main CPU 63, and the reading device is electrically connected. Is specified, output instruction information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. Thereby, in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed by the main CPU 63 or the like, that is, in the situation before the normal process for advancing the game is started by the main CPU 63, The calculation of parameters and the external output of various parameters of the calculation results are completed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the calculation of various parameters and the external output of the calculation result in a situation where a game ball can enter the history target entrance part, and the processing load of the management IC 66 is reduced. It becomes possible to reduce.

  In a configuration in which when a game ball enters the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34, an external output corresponding to the game ball is generated through the external terminal plate 97, history information is stored in the history memory 117. . Thus, by using information output externally through the external terminal plate 97, the number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 and the frequency of entering the game can be easily grasped, By using the history information stored in the memory 117, it is possible to accurately grasp the number and frequency of game balls that have entered the history target pitch portion.

  The through gate 35 is provided at a position where the entry of game balls is restricted in a game state other than the open / close execution mode and the game balls can enter in the open / close execution mode. By this, by shifting to the opening and closing execution mode, not only the game balls can enter the fourth discharge passage portion 45 of the special electric winning device 32 but also the game balls can enter the through gate 35. Become. Therefore, it is possible to increase the profit of shifting to the open / close execution mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

  When the game ball enters the through gate 35, the hold information on the general figure side is obtained, and when the hold information on the general figure side is obtained, the second operating port 34 is opened with a high probability. It becomes. Then, when a game ball enters the second operating port 34, either the big hit result or the small hit result occurs, and the open / close execution mode occurs. That is, when the open / close execution mode is generated, the game ball can enter the through gate 35, and when the game ball enters the through gate 35, the open / close execution mode can be generated again. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the open / close execution mode continuously occurs, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The opening / closing execution mode can be generated based on a game ball entering the first operating port 33 where the game ball can enter regardless of the entry of the game ball into the through gate 35. When the open / close execution mode is generated as described above, the game ball can enter the through gate 35, and when the game ball enters the through gate 35, the open / close execution mode can be generated again. In this case, the player expects the opening / closing execution mode to be started based on the entry of a game ball into the first operating port 33 in a state other than the opening / closing execution mode. It is expected that the open / close execution mode will be continuously generated based on the entry of a game ball into the game.

  The probability that the opening / closing execution mode occurs when a game ball enters the through gate 35 is higher than the probability that the opening / closing execution mode occurs when the game ball enters the first operating port 33. As a result, it is possible to increase a player's expectation that a game ball enters the through gate 35 in the open / close execution mode.

  The expected value at which the open / close execution mode occurs after the game ball enters the through gate 35 and the hold information on the general figure side is acquired does not change according to the game state. As a result, the processing configuration can be simplified as compared with a configuration in which the expected value is changed according to the game state, and the expected value can be easily managed. However, in such a configuration in which the expected value does not fluctuate according to the game state, it becomes difficult to give the game intonation. On the other hand, since the game ball can enter the through gate 35 in the opening / closing execution mode as described above, it is possible to give inflection at the opportunity to acquire the hold information on the ordinary figure side. As a result, it is possible to give inflection to the game.

  When a game ball enters the through gate 35, it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the second operation port 34. When a game ball enters the second operation port 34, the transition to the open / close execution mode is triggered. appear. Accordingly, in order to continuously generate the open / close execution mode, it is necessary to cause the game ball to enter the through gate 35 in the open / close execution mode and further enter the second operation port 34. Become. Therefore, the uncertainty to the continuous occurrence of the open / close execution mode is increased, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

  The special electric winning device 32, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 are provided at positions where game balls that flow down or flow down the right area PA3 can enter. Thus, by rotating the firing operation device 28 with, for example, the maximum operation amount so that the game ball flows down the right area PA3, a prize in the special electric prize device 32, a prize in the second operation port 34, and a through-thru. It is possible to collectively win the prize to the gate 35.

  When the special electric winning device 32 is switched from one of an open state and a closed state to the other, the game balls can enter the through gate 35. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the switching timing of this state. Therefore, in the opening and closing execution mode, it is possible to diversify the target that the player should pay attention to, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the opening and closing execution mode. In addition, a through gate 35 is provided at a position where a game ball can flow at a timing when the special power winning device 32 switches from one of an open state and a closed state to the other. Thus, the above-described excellent effects can be achieved only by setting the positional relationship of the through gate 35 with respect to the special winning device 32 as described above.

  When the opening / closing member 202 of the special electricity prize device 32 moves from one of the open position and the closed position to the other, the game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 of the open / close member 202 can enter the through gate 35. Thereby, in the opening / closing execution mode, the player not only determines whether or not a game ball enters the fourth discharge passage portion 45 of the special electric winning device 32, but also places the game ball on the guide plate portion 214. In this state, attention is paid to whether or not the guide plate portion 214 moves from one of the open position and the closed position to the other, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the open / close execution mode.

  At the timing when the special power winning device 32 switches from the open state to the closed state, an opportunity for a game ball to enter the through gate 35 occurs. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention not only when the special power winning device 32 is in the open state but also at the timing when the special power prize device 32 is switched to the closed state.

  The guide plate 214 of the opening / closing member 202 is formed such that the game ball placed on the guide plate 214 flows down to the left along the guide plate 214. When the opening / closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in a state where the game ball is placed in the predetermined range X which is a part of the range of the guide plate portion 214, the through gate 35 is placed on the game ball. Is provided at a position where the ball can enter by dropping downward. In this case, in order for the game ball to enter the through gate 35, not only the game ball is placed on the guide plate portion 214 when the opening / closing member 202 is arranged at the open position, but also the game ball It is necessary to move the opening / closing member 202 from the open position to the closed position at an exquisite timing when the position exists in the predetermined range X. This allows the player to pay attention to the relationship between the position of the game ball placed on the guide plate 214 and the switching timing of the state of the opening / closing member 202, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the opening / closing execution mode. It becomes.

  On the upstream side of the special electric prize winning device 32, a guide nail group 241 for guiding the game balls flowing into the right area PA3 to the right end side of the opening / closing member 202 is provided. The predetermined range X, which is a range in which the game ball can enter the through gate 35 in the guide plate portion 214, is set so as to be biased to the left end side of the opening / closing member 202. Accordingly, in order for the game ball to enter the through gate 35, the opening / closing member 202 needs to move from the open position to the closed position at an exquisite timing during the flow of the game ball on the guide plate 214. is there. Therefore, the player pays attention to the movement of the game ball on the guide plate portion 214, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the open / close execution mode.

  Further, in the special electric winning device 32, the entrance portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is located to the left of a predetermined range X which is a range in which the game ball can enter the through gate 35 in the guide plate portion 214. are doing. As a result, game balls placed on the guide plate portion 214 but not reaching the entrance portion 45b enter the through gate 35. Therefore, the player's sense of disadvantage that the game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 has not won the special electric prize winning device 32 is changed to a sense of profit that a winning in the through gate 35 occurs. It becomes possible.

  The jackpot result includes, for example, a 2R high-accuracy result and a 16R high-accuracy result, and the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 2R high-accuracy result and the opening / closing execution triggered by the 16R high-accuracy result The ease of entering a game ball into the through gate 35 differs between the modes. As a result, a player who expects a game ball to enter the through gate 35 expects an open / close execution mode in which a game ball is likely to enter the through gate 35, thereby improving the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

  In a configuration in which game balls can enter the through gate 35 when the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed, for example, the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 2R high accuracy result and the 16R high accuracy result The opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the fact that the number of times of opening and closing the special power winning device 32 is different. As a result, in the opening / closing execution mode in which the expected value of game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 increases, the expected value of game balls entering the through gate 35 increases. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the player's expectation that the open / close execution mode in which the number of times of opening and closing the special power winning device 32 is large will occur.

  When a game ball enters the second operation port 34, not only a big hit result but also a small hit result can be obtained, and the probability of the small hit result is higher than the probability of the big hit result. Thereby, by causing the game ball to enter the second operating port 34, the opening / closing execution mode is easily generated. In this case, the ball can enter the through gate 35 in a predetermined situation, which causes the second operating port 34 to be opened. Accordingly, a player expecting a game ball to enter the second operation port 34 expects a predetermined situation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The predetermined situation is a situation where the open / close execution mode is being executed. Thus, as described above, when the open / close execution mode occurs once, a situation in which the open / close execution mode occurs continuously can be generated, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the low-probability mode, the average period of the fluctuation display period of the game times executed based on the game ball entering the second operation port 34 and not producing the jackpot is the first operation port 33 in the low probability mode. Is the same as, approximately the same as, or less than the average period of the variable display period of the game times executed based on the entry of the game ball into the game times and which does not produce a jackpot result. This makes it possible to prevent the digestion rate of the former game round from becoming extremely worse than the digestibility of the latter game round. However, in the case where the second operation port 34 is opened at a constant frequency irrespective of the game state when the game ball enters the through gate 35 and the game ball enters the through gate 35, the low probability mode is used. It is assumed that a game is played aiming at entering a game ball into the second operation port 34 at. On the other hand, it is impossible to enter a game ball into the through gate 35 in a situation other than the open / close execution mode. Therefore, in the low probability mode, it is possible to play a game aiming at entering a game ball into the first operation port 33.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, among the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p of the input port 121 in the management-side I / F 111, the type of buffer that is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66 is the type of buffer that is described above. This is different from the first embodiment. Further, the processing configuration executed by the main CPU 63 in order to cause the management CPU 112 to specify the type of input signal is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram for describing the configuration of the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111 in the present embodiment.

  The first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the sixteenth buffer 122p receive the same types of signals as in the first embodiment. Specifically, the first buffer 122a receives a first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and the second buffer 122b receives the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. The second signal is input, the third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning port detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and the fourth buffer 122d corresponds to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a. The fifth buffer 122e receives a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first working port detection sensor 46a, and the sixth buffer 122f corresponds to the detection result of the second working port detection sensor 47a. The sixth signal is input, the seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the out port detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g, and the output instruction is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p. No. is input.

  On the other hand, in the first embodiment, a signal corresponding to the open / close execution mode is input to the eighth buffer 122h as an eighth signal, and a signal corresponding to the high probability mode is input to the ninth buffer 122i as a ninth signal. Although the signal corresponding to the door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j as the tenth signal, in the present embodiment, buffers to which these signals are input are different. Specifically, a signal corresponding to the open / close execution mode is input to the thirteenth buffer 122m as a signal during the open / close execution mode, and a signal corresponding to the high probability mode is input to the fourteenth buffer 122n as a signal during the high probability mode. The signal corresponding to the door frame 14 is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o as a door opening signal.

  The opening / closing execution mode signal is input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, the high probability mode signal is input to the fourteenth buffer 122n, the door opening signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o, and the sixteenth buffer 122o. The input of the output instruction signal to the buffer 122p is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the management CPU 112 sends the output instruction signal to the thirteenth to sixteenth buffers 122m to 122p without receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63. It is possible to specify that each of the signals corresponding to each is input. On the other hand, what type of signal is input to the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l is not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the type of these signals receives an instruction from the main CPU 63. This is specified by the management CPU 112. The processing for specifying the type of signal is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the recognition processing of this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the recognition process is executed in step S110 in the main process (FIG. 11) as in the first embodiment.

  First, "12", which is the number of the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l for which the type of signal is to be recognized, is set in the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 (step S2001). Thereafter, an output process of an identification start signal is executed (step S2002). In the output processing, the output state of each of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a, the open / close execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high probability mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n is determined. By setting to the HI level, the output of the identification start signal is started. The period for maintaining these signals at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

  Thereafter, information on the number of outputs corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64, and the read information on the number of outputs is set in the output counter provided in the main RAM 65 ( Step S2003). The output count counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the output count of the type identification signal.

  In the present embodiment, when the management-side CPU 112 recognizes the type of the signal input to the first buffer 122a to the twelfth buffer 122l, the number of award balls set for the entry section corresponding to the type of the signal The type identification signal is output the same number of times as the above. The management CPU 112 stores information corresponding to the number of times of receiving the type identification signal for each of the first buffer 122a to the twelfth buffer 122l in the first to twelfth corresponding relationship areas 123a to 123l of the correspondence memory 116. . In other words, the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a to the twelfth buffer 122l is grasped as the number of winning balls set for the pitching portion corresponding to the type of signal.

  In step S2003, when the value of the recognition output counter is any of "12", "11", and "10", "10" corresponding to the number of winning balls in the general winning opening 31 is set in the output number counter. . When the value of the recognition output counter is “9”, “15” corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electric prize winning device 32 is set in the output number counter. When the value of the recognition output counter is “8”, “1” corresponding to the number of prize balls in the first operation port 33 is set in the output number counter. When the value of the recognition output counter is “7”, “1” corresponding to the number of prize balls in the second operation port 34 is set in the output number counter. Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is “6”, since the game ball is not paid out even if the game ball enters the out port 24a although it corresponds to the out port 24a, the output counter Set “0” to. Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is any one of “5” to “1”, since there is no corresponding entry portion and it is blank, “0” is set to the output number counter.

  Thereafter, a process of outputting a start trigger signal is executed (step S2004). In the output process, the output of the start trigger signal is started by setting the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a to the HI level. The period for maintaining the first signal at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the first signal.

  Thereafter, on the condition that the value of the output number counter of the main RAM 65 is not “0” (step S2005: YES), that is, on condition that a value of 1 or more is set in the output number counter in step S2003. Proceed to step S2006. In step S2006, output processing of a type identification signal is performed. In the output process, the output of the type identification signal is started by setting the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b to the HI level. The period for maintaining the second signal at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the second signal.

  Thereafter, the value of the output counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S2007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the output counter after the subtraction is “0” (step S2008). If the value of the output number counter is 1 or more (step S2008: NO), the process returns to step S2006.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2005 or an affirmative determination is made in step S2008, an end trigger signal output process is executed (step S2009). In the output processing, the output of the end trigger signal is started by setting the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c to the HI level. The period for maintaining the third signal at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the third signal.

  Thereafter, the value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S2010), and it is determined whether or not the value of the recognition output counter after the subtraction is “0” (step S2011). If the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S2011: NO), the process returns to step S2003, and a process for recognizing the type of signal corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after subtracting 1 is executed. I do.

  On the other hand, when the value of the recognition output counter is “0” (step S2011: YES), the process of outputting the identification end signal is executed (step S2012). In the output processing, the output state of each of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c, the open / close execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high probability mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n is determined. By setting to the HI level, the output of the identification end signal is started. The period for maintaining these signals at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

  Next, a management process according to the present embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The management process is started when the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment.

  When the reception of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 is completed (step S2101: YES), the value of the setting target counter of the management RAM 114 is cleared to “0” (step S2102). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2104 on condition that a start trigger signal has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2103: YES). In step S2104, it is determined whether a type identification signal has been received from the main CPU 63. If the type identification signal has been received (step S2104: YES), the value of the reception counter provided in the management RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2105). The reception counter is a counter for the management CPU 112 to specify the number of times the type identification signal is received from the main CPU 63. Note that the value of the reception counter is cleared to “0” when a positive determination is made in step S2103.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2104, or if the process in step S2105 is performed, it is determined whether an end trigger signal has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2106). If the end trigger signal has not been received (step S2106: NO), the process returns to step S2104, and if the end trigger signal has been received (step S2106: YES), the correspondence setting process is executed (step S2107). In the correspondence setting process, the reception number counter is set in the correspondence area corresponding to the current value in the setting target counter of the management RAM 114 among the first to twelfth correspondence areas 123a to 123l of the correspondence memory 116. Stores the value that is being stored. In this case, “10” corresponding to the number of winning balls of the general winning opening 31 is set in the first corresponding relationship area 123a, the second corresponding relationship area 123b, and the third corresponding relationship area 123c, and the fourth corresponding relationship area 123d. Is set to “15” corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electric prize winning device 32, “1” corresponding to the number of prize balls of the first operation port 33 is set to the fifth correspondence area 123e, and the sixth correspondence relation is set. In the area 123f, “1” corresponding to the number of prize balls of the second working port 34 is set. Further, “0” is set in the seventh to twelfth corresponding relation areas 123g to 123l. Thereafter, the value of the setting target counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2108).

  If a negative determination is made in step S2103 or if the process in step S2108 is performed, it is determined whether the reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 has been completed (step S2109). If the identification end signal has not been received (step S2109: NO), the process returns to step S2103, and the process from step S2104 is performed on condition that a start trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S2103: YES). Execute. If the reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 has been completed (step S2109: YES), the history setting processing in step S2110 and the external output processing in step S2111 are repeatedly executed.

  FIG. 49 is a time chart showing how the information on the correspondence between the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122l is stored in the correspondence memory 116. FIG. 49A shows a period in which the output state of the first signal is at the HI level, FIG. 49B shows a period in which the output state of the second signal is at the HI level, and FIG. ) Shows a period in which the output state of the third signal is at the HI level, FIG. 49D shows a period in which the output state of the signal during the open / close execution mode is at the HI level, and FIG. FIG. 49F shows the correspondence between the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122l during the period in which the output state of the signal during the high probability mode is at the HI level. FIG. 49 (g) shows a timing at which the value of the number-of-receptions counter in the management-side RAM 114 is incremented by 1, and FIG. 49 (h) shows the management period. Supported by the side CPU 112 Indicating timing for engagement setting process (step S2107) is executed.

  When the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, the first signal is supplied at the timing of t1, as shown in FIGS. 49 (a), 49 (d) and 49 (e). The output state of the open / close execution mode signal and the high probability mode signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. Thereby, the output of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is started. Thereafter, at the timing of t2, the output state of the first signal, the open / close execution mode signal, and the high probability mode signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level. Thereby, the output of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing t2, the management-side CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S2101 of the management process (FIG. 48), and enters the identification state as shown in FIG. 49 (f).

  Thereafter, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level from the timing t3 to the timing t4, as shown in FIG. As a result, a start trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. Then, from the timing t5 to the timing t7, the output state of the second signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 49 (b). As a result, the type identification signal is output once to the management CPU 112. In this case, at the timing of t6, the value of the reception counter of the management-side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 as shown in FIG. 49 (g).

  Thereafter, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level from the timing t8 to the timing t10, as shown in FIG. 49 (c). As a result, an end trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. In this case, at the timing of t9, the correspondence setting process is executed by the management CPU 112 as shown in FIG. 49 (h). Since the value of the reception number counter is “1” at the timing when the corresponding relationship setting process is executed, “1” is set as the corresponding relationship information in the corresponding relationship areas 123 a to 123 l in the corresponding relationship memory 116. Is stored.

  Thereafter, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level from the timing t11 to the timing t12, as shown in FIG. As a result, a start trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. Then, as shown in FIG. 49 (b), the timing from t13 to t15, the timing from t16 to t18, the timing from t19 to t21, and the timing from t22 to t24, as shown in FIG. The output state of the signal is maintained at the HI level. As a result, the type identification signal is output once to the management CPU 112. In this case, at the timing of t14, the timing of t17, the timing of t20, and the timing of t23, as shown in FIG. 49 (g), the value of the reception counter of the management-side RAM 114 is incremented by one.

  Thereafter, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level from the timing t25 to the timing t27, as shown in FIG. 49 (c). As a result, an end trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. In this case, the correspondence setting process is executed by the management-side CPU 112 at the timing of t26, as shown in FIG. Since the value of the reception number counter is “10” at the timing when the corresponding relationship setting process is executed, “10” is set as the corresponding relationship information in the corresponding relationship areas 123a to 123l in the corresponding relationship memory 116. Is stored.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t28, as shown in FIGS. 49 (c), 49 (d) and 49 (e), the output states of the third signal, the open / close execution mode signal and the high probability mode signal are set to the LOW level. To the HI level. Thereby, the output of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is started. Thereafter, at the timing of t29, the output states of the third signal, the open / close execution mode signal, and the high probability mode signal are changed from the HI level to the LOW level. As a result, the output of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing of t29, the management-side CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S2109 of the management process (FIG. 48), whereby the identification state is released as shown in FIG. 49 (f).

  In this embodiment, since the information on the number of prize balls is stored as the correspondence information, the history information stored in the history memory 117 includes a prize ball corresponding to the entrance part that triggered the storage of the history information. Number information is included as correspondence information. In this configuration, when there are a plurality of types of entrance parts having the same number of winning balls, the entrance parts cannot be distinguished in the history information. Specifically, since the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 each have one prize ball, it is possible to distinguish between the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 in the history information. Can not. Under such circumstances, the number of prize balls of the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 may be different. Thereby, even if it is the structure where history information like the 2nd embodiment is stored, it becomes possible to distinguish the 1st operation mouth 33 and the 2nd operation mouth 34 in history information.

  In this embodiment, “15” is set in the confirmation target counter of the management side RAM 114 in step S801 of the history setting process. As a result, all of the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are to be confirmed.

  According to this embodiment described in detail above, not only the output instruction signal, but also information corresponding to whether or not the open / close execution mode is being performed, information corresponding to whether or not the high probability mode is being performed, and the front door frame Regarding information corresponding to whether or not 14 is open, the management-side CPU 112 can specify that the signal path corresponds to the information without receiving the correspondence information from the main-side CPU 63. ing. In this case, only the information corresponding to the detection results of the respective ball detection sensors 42a to 48a is information that requires the management CPU 112 to recognize the correspondence between the information and the signal paths 118a to 118g from the main CPU 63. Become. When the management-side CPU 112 recognizes the correspondence information, the same number of pulse signals as the number of winning balls corresponding to each of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 using the second signal. Is output. Thereby, it becomes possible to simplify the structure regarding transmission of correspondence information.

<Third Embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the calculation of various parameters using history information is executed. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 50 is a block diagram for explaining an electrical configuration of the management IC 66 in the present embodiment. As in the first embodiment, the management IC 66 includes a management side I / F 111, a management side CPU 112, a management side ROM 113, a management side RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence relationship memory 116, and a history memory 117. These functions are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  In addition to the above, the management IC 66 is provided with a calculation result memory 131. In the present embodiment, when a calculation trigger occurs as will be described in detail later, various parameters are calculated by the management CPU 112 using history information stored in the history memory 117 at that time. The calculated various parameters are sequentially stored in the calculation result memory 131. Various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 are output to a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102.

  Various parameters are triggered before the timing at which the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. As a result, it is possible to vary the timing for calculating various parameters and the timing for externally outputting the parameters to the reading device, and the processing load can be distributed.

  In addition, since the calculation result memory 131 for storing calculation results of various parameters is provided, not only various parameters for one calculation trigger but also various parameters for a plurality of calculation triggers are collected. It becomes possible to memorize. As a result, it is possible to reduce the time required to calculate various parameters at each calculation opportunity.

  FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram for describing the configuration of the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111 in the present embodiment.

  The first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j and the sixteenth buffer 122p receive the same types of signals as in the first embodiment. Specifically, the first buffer 122a receives a first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and the second buffer 122b receives the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. The second signal is input, the third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third prize opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and the fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. The fifth buffer 122e receives a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first working port detection sensor 46a, and the sixth buffer 122f corresponds to the detection result of the second working port detection sensor 47a. The sixth signal is input, the seventh buffer 122g is input with the seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the out port detection sensor 48a, and the eighth buffer 122h is opened and closed. A signal corresponding to the high probability mode is input to the ninth buffer 122i, a signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j, and a signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p. An output instruction signal is input.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the various signals described above, a calculation instruction signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o. The calculation instruction signal is a signal output from the main CPU 63 to provide the calculation CPU of various parameters to the management CPU 112. The fact that the calculation instruction signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66 in the same manner as the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p. The management CPU 112 can specify that the signals corresponding to the fifteenth to sixteenth buffers 122o to 122p are input, respectively. On the other hand, what type of signal is input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the type of these signals receives an instruction from the main CPU 63. This is specified by the management CPU 112. The processing for specifying the type of signal is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment.

  Next, a description will be given of a processing configuration for causing the management-side CPU 112 to perform various parameter calculations in response to the occurrence of a calculation trigger. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the power failure information storage processing executed by the main CPU 63. The power failure information storage processing is executed in step S201 of the timer interruption processing (FIG. 12).

  In the power failure information storage process, when a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption has been received from the power failure monitoring board 67 (step S2201: YES), an output process of a calculation instruction signal is executed (step S2202). In the output process, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o in the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111 is maintained at the HI level for a specific period. This specific period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at the HI level. Then, after executing the process at the time of power failure in step S2203, the process enters an infinite loop and waits until the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is completely stopped. In the power failure process, “1” is set to the power failure flag in the main RAM 65, a checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is stored.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a power failure handling process executed by the management CPU 112. The power failure handling process is configured to be executed after the external output process in the management process (FIG. 22). In the management process, after receiving the identification end command from the main CPU 63 (step S606: YES), step S607 is performed. The history setting process, the external output process of step S608, and the power failure handling process are repeatedly executed in this order.

  In the power failure handling process, when the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 has become the HI level (step S2301: YES), in steps S2302 to S2306, the external output in the first embodiment is performed. As in steps S1002 to S1006 of the application process (FIG. 28), the number of balls entered for each of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is calculated. . In step S2307, similarly to step S1007 of the external output process (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment, the number of entering balls when the front door frame 14 is open is calculated. In step S2308, various parameters are calculated in the same manner as in step S1008 of the external output process (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment, and in step S2309, the external output process in the first embodiment is performed. The total time is calculated as in step S1009 of the process (FIG. 28). Then, the information of the operation result of step S2308 and the information of the operation result of step S2309 are written into the operation result memory 131 (step S2310). In this case, when other calculation result information is already stored in the calculation result memory 131, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. Do. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the operation result written this time. As a result, it is possible to specify when the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds to the timing.

  After that, in step S2311, similarly to step S1011 of the external output process (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment, the number of various balls in the open / close execution mode is calculated, and in step S2312, the first ball is entered. As in step S1012 of the external output process (FIG. 28) in the embodiment, the number of entering balls in the open / close execution mode and the state where the front door frame 14 is open is calculated. In step S2313, various parameters are calculated as in step S1013 of the external output process (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment. Then, the information of the operation result in step S2314 is written in the operation result memory 131 (step S2314). In this case, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite other calculation result information already stored in the calculation result memory 131. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the operation result written this time. As a result, it is possible to specify when the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds to the timing.

  After that, in step S2315, similarly to step S1015 of the external output process (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment, the number of various balls in the high probability mode is calculated, and in step S2316, the first ball is entered. As in step S1016 of the external output process (FIG. 28) in the embodiment, the number of entering balls in the high probability mode and the state where the front door frame 14 is open is calculated. In step S2317, various parameters are calculated as in step S1017 of the external output process (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment. Then, the information of the operation result in step S2317 is written in the operation result memory 131 (step S2318). In this case, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite other calculation result information already stored in the calculation result memory 131. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the operation result written this time. As a result, it is possible to specify when the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds to the timing. Thereafter, an infinite loop is entered, and the system waits until supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is completely stopped.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an external output process executed by the management CPU 112. The external output process is executed in step S608 of the management process (FIG. 22).

  When the output state of the output instruction signal from the main CPU 63 has become the HI level (step S2401: YES), an output process of the calculation result is executed (step S2402). In the output process, various calculation results stored in the calculation result memory 131 are output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, various calculation results stored in the calculation result memory 131 are read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. In this case, when only various calculation results corresponding to the occurrence of one calculation trigger are stored in the calculation result memory 131, only various calculation results corresponding to the occurrence of the one calculation trigger are stored in the reading device. When various calculation results corresponding to the occurrence of a plurality of calculation triggers are stored in the calculation result memory 131, various calculation results corresponding to the occurrence of the plurality of calculation triggers are read by the reading device. .

  After that, output processing of history information is executed (step S2403). In the output processing, all history information stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, the various history information stored in the history area 124 is read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. Thus, by outputting not only various calculation results but also history information, it becomes possible for a worker using the reading apparatus to perform detailed analysis on various calculation results.

  Thereafter, a clearing process is performed (step S2404). In the clear process, all the history information storage areas 125 of the history memory 117 are cleared to “0” and the pointer area 126 is cleared to “0”. As a result, the history area 124 is initialized. In the clear process, all areas of the calculation result memory 131 are cleared to “0”. As a result, the calculation result memory 131 is initialized.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters. This makes it possible to manage various parameters for each business day.

  When it is specified that the supply of operating power is stopped in the main CPU 63, the management instruction CPU 112 calculates various parameters by changing the output state of the calculation instruction signal to the HI level. As a result, various parameters can be calculated by the management CPU 112 based on an instruction from the main CPU 63.

  Various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 are sequentially written in the calculation result memory 131. As a result, various parameters can be accumulated in the management IC 66, and various parameters for a plurality of business days can be read together when the various parameters are read by the reading device.

  When various parameters are written in the calculation result memory 131, information that can specify the time when the various parameters are calculated is written in the calculation result memory 131 along with the various parameters. Thereby, it is possible to analyze various parameter information while grasping the time when the various parameters are calculated.

  It should be noted that the history memory 117 may be cleared to “0” when a calculation trigger occurs and calculation results of various parameters corresponding to the calculation trigger are written in the calculation result memory 131. This makes it difficult to generate an event in which new history information becomes a target to be written to the history memory 117 in a situation where the upper limit number of history information that can be stored is already stored in the history memory 117.

  The target information to be output to the reading device is only information on various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131, and the history information stored in the history memory 117 may not be output to the outside. . This makes it possible to reduce the amount of information output externally.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the power failure handling process executed by the management CPU 112 is different from that of the third embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the third embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the third embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a power failure handling process executed by the management CPU 112 in this embodiment.

  When the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 has reached the HI level (step S2501: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S2502). In the various arithmetic processes, the processes of steps S2302 to S2309, steps S2311 to S2313, and steps S2315 to S2317 of the power failure handling process (FIG. 53) in the third embodiment are executed.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a predetermined parameter among the various parameters calculated in step S2502 is within a reference range (step S2503). In particular,
7th parameter: (K3 × “number of winning balls for winning in the special electricity winning device 32” + K5 × “number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34”) / total payout number of game balls (K2 × “general The number of winning balls for winning at the winning opening 31 + K3 × “the number of winning balls for winning at the special electricity winning device 32” + K4 × “the number of winning balls for winning at the first operating port 33” + K5 × “the second operating port 34” Ratio / eighth parameter: K3 × “number of winning balls for winning to the special electric prize device 32” / total number of game balls to be paid out (K2 × “for winning to the general winning opening 31”) “Number of winning balls” + K3 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the special electric prize winning device 32” + K4 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + K5 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34” )) Percentage of the two parameters It is set as a parameter to be determined whether or not it is within the reference range. If the value of the seventh parameter is equal to or less than 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter is equal to or less than 0.6, an affirmative determination is made in step S2503 that the predetermined parameter is within the reference range.

The predetermined parameters are not limited to the seventh parameter and the eighth parameter, and instead of or in addition to these, other parameters may be set as the predetermined parameters. For example,
Second parameter: The ratio of the total number of game balls K2 entering the general winning opening 31 / the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) may be set as a predetermined parameter. . In this case, for example, when the value of the second parameter is 0.1 or more and 0.2 or less, the predetermined parameter may be determined to be in the reference range. Further, only predetermined parameters to be determined in step S2503 may be calculated in various calculation processes in step S2502.

  If the predetermined parameter is not within the reference range (step S2503: NO), various parameters calculated in step S2502 are written to the calculation result memory 131 (step S2504). In this case, when other calculation result information is already stored in the calculation result memory 131, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. Do. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the operation result written this time. As a result, it is possible to specify when the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds to the timing.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined parameter is within the reference range (step S2503: YES), the processing of step S2504 is not performed. As a result, only the various parameters when the predetermined parameter is not within the reference range are written into the calculation result memory 131. Therefore, when an abnormal situation occurs, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity necessary for the calculation result memory 131 while leaving the history in the calculation result memory 131.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2503, or if the process in step S2504 is performed, a clear process of the history memory 117 is performed (step S2505). In the clear process, all the history information storage areas 125 of the history memory 117 are cleared to “0” and the pointer area 126 is cleared to “0”. As a result, the history area 124 is initialized. After executing the processing in step S2505, an infinite loop is formed, and the processing waits until the supply of the operating power to the management CPU 112 is completely stopped.

  According to the present embodiment described above in detail, it is determined whether or not the contents of the calculated various parameters are included in the reference range, and only the various parameters determined to be included in the reference range are stored in the calculation result memory 131. Written. As a result, the amount of various parameters to be stored in the calculation result memory 131 can be suppressed, and the storage capacity necessary for the calculation result memory 131 can be suppressed.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the contents of the calculation trigger for causing the management side CPU 112 to execute various parameter calculations are different from those in the third embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the third embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the third embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 56A is a flowchart showing the trigger specifying process executed by the main CPU 63. The opportunity specifying process is executed as a process when an affirmative determination is made in step S712 in the management output process (FIG. 24).

  It is determined whether or not a game ball has entered one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 (step S2601). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2601, a process of adding a ball entry counter provided in the main RAM 65 is executed (step S2602). In the addition processing, the number of game balls that have entered any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is determined by the current processing time. Is specified based on the number of times step S705 is executed in the management output process (FIG. 24). Then, the specified number of game balls is added to the entrance counter.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the ball entry counter is equal to or more than the trigger reference number “500” (step S2603). If it is equal to or more than "500" (step S2603: YES), a subtraction process of the ball entry counter of the main RAM 65 is executed (step S2604). In the subtraction process, “500” is subtracted from the value of the entrance counter. Thereafter, an output process of the calculation instruction signal is performed (step S2605). In the output process, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o in the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111 is maintained at the HI level for a specific period. This specific period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at the HI level.

  FIG. 56B is a flowchart showing the calculation processing executed by the management CPU 112. The arithmetic process is a process executed instead of the power failure response process in the third embodiment. Therefore, the arithmetic processing is configured to be executed after the external output processing in the management processing (FIG. 22). In the management processing, after receiving the identification end command from the main CPU 63 (step S606: YES), the processing in step S607 is performed. The history setting processing, the external output processing in step S608, and the arithmetic processing are repeatedly executed in this order.

  When the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 has reached the HI level (step S2701: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S2702). In the various arithmetic processes, the same processes as those in steps S2302 to S2318 of the power failure handling process (FIG. 53) in the third embodiment are executed.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, each time the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number, the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters. In this case, since various parameters are calculated each time a calculation trigger that repeatedly occurs in a situation where operating power is supplied to the main CPU 63, the game balls enter the game area PA within one business day. It becomes possible to manage the mode in detail.

  In addition, since various parameters are calculated based on whether or not the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is greater than or equal to the trigger reference number, the various parameters are set on condition that the game is being executed. Is calculated. This makes it possible to prevent various parameters from being calculated meaninglessly in a situation where the game is not continuously executed.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the contents of the calculation trigger for causing the management CPU 112 to execute various parameter calculations are different from those in the fifth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the fifth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the trigger specifying process executed by the main CPU 63. The opportunity specifying process is executed as a process when an affirmative determination is made in step S712 in the management output process (FIG. 24).

  It is determined whether or not a game ball has entered one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 (step S2801). If a negative determination is made in step S2801, the value of the continuation counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2802). The continuation counter is a main CPU 63 during a period in which a game ball does not enter any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. It is a counter for specifying by.

  If the value of the continuation counter after adding 1 is equal to or greater than the stop reference value (step S2803: YES), the time measurement flag provided in the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S2804). If the state in which the game ball does not enter any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 continues for 5 seconds, an affirmative determination is made in step S2803. The stop reference value is set so as to execute. The time measurement flag is a flag for specifying in the main CPU 63 whether or not to measure time for specifying the timing for switching the output state of the calculation instruction signal to the HI level. When the value of “0” is “0”, the time is not measured, and when the value of the time measurement flag is “1”, the time is measured. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2801, the time measurement flag is set to "1" (step S2805).

  If a negative determination is made in step S2803, if the processing in step S2804 is performed, or if the processing in step S2805 is performed, the condition is that the time measurement flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1" ( Step S2806: YES), the value of the measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2807). The measurement counter is a counter used for measuring the time for specifying the timing for switching the output state of the calculation instruction signal to the HI level.

  It is determined whether or not the value of the measurement counter after adding 1 is equal to or more than an instruction reference value (step S2808). The instruction reference value is set so that an affirmative determination is made in step S2808 when the time measured by the measurement counter reaches 10 hours. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2808, the value of the measurement counter is cleared to "0" (step S2809), and an output process of a calculation instruction signal is executed (step S2810). In the output process, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o in the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111 is maintained at the HI level for a specific period. This specific period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at the HI level.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, since the various parameters are calculated every time the predetermined period elapses, it is possible to easily adjust the calculation frequency of the various parameters only by adjusting the predetermined period. Become. In this case, in a situation where the game is not being executed, the measurement for a predetermined period is stopped, and when the game is started, the measurement for the predetermined period is resumed from the state before the stop. As a result, it is possible to exclude a situation in which a game is not being executed from calculation targets of various parameters, and it is possible to appropriately derive various parameters in a situation in which a game is being executed.

  In addition, it is good also as a structure measured using RTC115 instead of the structure measured using a measurement counter whether the predetermined period passed.

<Seventh Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the contents of the calculation trigger that causes the management-side CPU 112 to execute calculation of various parameters are different from those in the first embodiment, and the occurrence of the calculation trigger is specified by the main CPU 63. Instead, it is performed independently by the management CPU 112. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the calculation processing executed by the management CPU 112. The calculation process is executed when a positive determination is made in step S812 in the history setting process (FIG. 25).

  Corresponds to the occurrence of a game ball entering any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 in the history setting process of the current process. It is determined whether history information to be stored is stored in the history memory 117 (step S2901). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2901, a process of adding a ball entry counter provided in the management-side RAM 114 is performed (step S2902). In the addition process, the number of game balls that have entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is determined as the number of processing balls of this time. In the history setting process, the history information corresponding to the occurrence of the game ball entering is specified based on the number of times stored. Then, the specified number of game balls is added to the entrance counter.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the ball entry counter is equal to or more than the trigger reference number “500” (step S2903). If it is not less than "500" (step S2903: YES), a subtraction process of the ball entry counter of the main RAM 65 is executed (step S2904). In the subtraction process, “500” is subtracted from the value of the entrance counter. After that, various calculation processes are executed (step S2905). In the various arithmetic processes, the same processes as those in steps S2302 to S2318 of the power failure handling process (FIG. 53) in the third embodiment are executed.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, each time the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number, the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters. In this case, since various parameters are calculated each time a calculation trigger that repeatedly occurs in a situation where operating power is supplied to the main CPU 63, the game balls enter the game area PA within one business day. It becomes possible to manage the mode in detail.

  In addition, since various parameters are calculated based on whether or not the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is greater than or equal to the trigger reference number, the various parameters are set on condition that the game is being executed. Is calculated. This makes it possible to prevent various parameters from being calculated meaninglessly in a situation where the game is not continuously executed.

  Further, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is measured by the management CPU 112, and the management CPU 112 determines whether or not the total number is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number. That is, the calculation CPU of various parameters is uniquely determined by the management CPU 112. As a result, it is not necessary for the main CPU 63 to execute processing for determining the calculation triggers of various parameters, so that the processing load on the main CPU 63 can be reduced.

<Eighth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  In the present embodiment, the operation result memory 131 is provided in the management IC 66 similarly to the third embodiment (see FIG. 50). When a calculation trigger occurs, the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters using the history information stored in the history memory 117 and writes the various parameters of the calculation results in the calculation result memory 131. In the present embodiment, a signal indicating that the open / close execution mode has been started, a signal indicating that the open / close execution mode has ended, a signal indicating that the high probability mode has been started, and the high probability mode has ended , A signal indicating that the opening of the front door frame 14 has been started, and a signal indicating that the opening of the front door frame 14 has been completed are individually transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. Is done.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing a history setting process according to the present embodiment executed by the management CPU 112.

  First, the number of buffers to be checked by the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the check target counter of the management RAM 114 (step S3001). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored in the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116 is identified, and the identification is performed. Set the number of information to the check target counter. In the present embodiment, information indicating that any one of the entry sections is supported is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g, and the opening / closing execution mode is started in the eighth correspondence area 123h. Corresponding information is stored, information corresponding to the end of the open / close execution mode is stored in the ninth correspondence area 123i, and information corresponding to the start of the high probability mode is stored in the tenth correspondence area 123j. Information corresponding to the end of the high-probability mode is stored in the eleventh correspondence area 123k, and information corresponding to the opening start of the front door frame 14 is stored in the twelfth correspondence area 123l. Information corresponding to the end of opening of the front door frame 14 is stored in the 13 correspondence area 123m. Therefore, "13" is set to the check target counter in step S3001.

  After that, it is checked whether the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has been changed from “0” to “1”. Then, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S3002). In addition, when the value of the confirmation target counter is “n”, the nth buffers 122a to 122o are the confirmation targets of the numerical information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is “10”, the tenth buffer 122j is a check target for numerical information, and if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth buffer 122e is a check target for numerical information. .

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3002, RTC information that is year / month / day information and time information is read from the RTC 115 (step S3003). Then, a writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S3004). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 which is the current writing target is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the pointer information corresponding to the writing target pointer information is specified. The RTC information read in step S3003 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Also, the correspondence information is read out from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current value of the check target counter, and the correspondence information is written into the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information that is the write target. Note that when the value of the confirmation target counter is “n”, the n-th correspondence relationship areas 123a to 123o are the correspondence information readout targets. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is “10”, the tenth correspondence area 123j is a target for reading correspondence information, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is “5”, the fifth correspondence area 123e is correspondence. Information is to be read out.

  Thereafter, the value of the target pointer is incremented by 1 (step S3005). Specifically, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read, and the numerical information is incremented by one. Then, it is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124 (step S3006).

  If it exceeds the maximum value (step S3006: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S3007). In various arithmetic processes, the same processes as those in steps S1002 to S1009, steps S1011 to S1013, and steps S1015 to S1017 of the external output process (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment are executed. Then, the information of the various parameters and the total time of the calculation result are written in the calculation result memory 131 (step S3008). In this case, when other calculation result information is already stored in the calculation result memory 131, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. Do. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the operation result written this time. As a result, it is possible to specify when the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds to the timing.

  After that, the state information is taken over (step S3009). In the handover process, based on the history information stored in the history memory 117, whether the current state is the open / close execution mode, whether the current state is the high probability mode, and whether the front door frame 14 is open. It is determined whether or not there is. Then, the state information is written in the management side RAM 114.

  Thereafter, a clearing process of the history memory 117 is executed (step S3010). In the clear process, all the history information storage areas 125 of the history memory 117 are cleared to “0” and the pointer area 126 is cleared to “0”. As a result, the history area 124 is initialized. After executing the clearing process, the status information written in the management-side RAM 114 in step S3009 is read. If state information indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is being stored is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written, the history information indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is being stored. In addition to writing, 1 is added to the pointer information to be written. If the state information indicating that the mode is in the high probability mode is stored, the history information indicating that the mode is in the high probability mode is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. While writing, the pointer information to be written is incremented by one. If state information indicating that the front door frame 14 is open is stored, history information indicating that the front door frame 14 is open corresponds to the pointer information to be written. While writing to the history information storage area 125, the pointer information to be written is incremented by one.

  When a negative determination is made in step S3002, when a negative determination is made in step S3006, or when the process of step S3010 is performed, the value of the check target counter of the management-side RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S3011). Then, it is determined whether the value of the check target counter after the subtraction of 1 is “0” (step S3012). If the value of the check target counter is 1 or more (step S3012: NO), the process from step S3002 is executed on the check target corresponding to the new check target counter value.

  According to the embodiment described above in detail, various parameters are calculated when the history information stored in the history memory 117 exceeds the upper limit number that can be stored in the history memory 117. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which history information becomes a storage target exceeding the upper limit number that can be stored in the history memory 117 and calculation of various parameters cannot be performed accurately.

  When various parameters are calculated, the history memory 117 is initialized and all the history information is deleted. This makes it possible to prevent history information that has already been subject to calculation of various parameters from being subject to computation of various parameters again.

  Even when the history memory 117 is initialized, the state information takeover process is executed. This makes it possible to appropriately manage the state information.

<Ninth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the history memory 117 and the processing configuration of the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112 are different from those of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram for describing the configuration of the history memory 117 in the present embodiment. The history memory 117 is provided with a total area 141, a first state area 142, a second state area 143, and a third state area 144. Each of these areas 141 to 144 is provided with first to fifteenth counters 141a to 141o, 142a to 142o, 143a to 143o, and 144a to 144o. Information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the first counters 141a to 144a of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the second counters 141b to 144b of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the third counters 141c to 144c of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122d is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the fourth counters 141d to 144d of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122e is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the fifth counters 141e to 144e of the respective areas 141 to 144. In the sixth counters 141f to 144f of the areas 141 to 144, information on the number of times that the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122f has changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored. Information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 122g is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the seventh counters 141g to 144g of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122h is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the eighth counters 141h to 144h of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the ninth counters 141i to 144i of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122j is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the tenth counters 141j to 144j of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the eleventh signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the eleventh counters 141k to 144k of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the twelfth counters 141l to 144l of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the thirteenth signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the thirteenth counters 141m to 144m of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the fourteenth signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the fourteenth counters 141n to 144n of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the 15th signal input to the 15th buffer 122o is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the 15th counters 141o to 144o of the respective areas 141 to 144.

  However, the measurement targets using the first to fifteenth counters 141a to 141o, 142a to 142o, 143a to 143o, and 144a to 144o are the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, and the first operation. These are first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g to which signals corresponding to the result of entering the ball into either the mouth 33 or the second working port 34 are input. Therefore, a signal corresponding to state information such as whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is being performed, whether or not the high probability mode is being performed, and whether or not the front door frame 14 is being opened is input. The buffers 122h to 122j are excluded from the measurement targets. The distinction of whether or not these are measurement targets is performed based on the correspondence information stored in the correspondence areas 123 a to 123 o of the correspondence memory 116.

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a history setting process according to the present embodiment executed by the management CPU 112.

  First, the number of buffers to be checked by the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the check target counter of the management RAM 114 (step S3101). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored in the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116 is identified, and the identification is performed. Set the number of information to the check target counter. In this pachinko machine 10, as described above, since information other than the information indicating blank is stored in the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j, "10" is set in the check target counter in step S3101. I do.

  After that, it is determined whether or not the buffers 122a to 122o corresponding to the current check target counters are buffers to which the signal of the state information is input (step S3102). Specifically, in the corresponding areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current value of the check target counter, information indicating the open / close execution mode, information indicating the high probability mode, and the front door It is determined whether any of the information indicating the frame 14 is stored.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3102, a state information setting process is executed (step S3103). In the setting process, when the output state of the eighth signal indicating whether or not in the opening / closing execution mode is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, information on the first state indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is in effect is displayed on the management side. When the output state of the eighth signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level, the first state information is erased from the management side RAM 114. When the output state of the ninth signal indicating whether or not the mode is in the high probability mode is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, information on the second state indicating that the mode is in the high probability mode is stored in the management RAM 114. When the output state of the ninth signal switches from the HI level to the LOW level, the information of the second state is deleted from the management-side RAM 114. In addition, when the output state of the tenth signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, information on the third state indicating that the front door frame 14 is open. Is stored in the management-side RAM 114, and when the output state of the tenth signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level, the information on the third state is deleted from the management-side RAM 114.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3102, the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and stored in a buffer to which a signal of information different from the state information is input By confirming whether or not the numerical information is changed from “0” to “1”, the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. It is determined whether or not it is (step S3104). If an affirmative determination is made in step S3104, the corresponding sum counter is added (step S3105). In the addition process, one of the counter values corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth counters 141a to 141o for summation in the summation area 141 of the history memory 117 is added. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is “5”, the total fifth counter 141e is an addition target, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is “1”, the total first counter 141a is an addition target. .

  Thereafter, by referring to the state information in the management-side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not the first state, that is, whether or not the open / close execution mode is being performed (step S3106). If the current state is the first state (step S3106: YES), the corresponding counter for the first state is added (step S3107). In the addition process, the counter value corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked among the first to fifteenth counters 142a to 142o for the first state in the first state area 142 of the history memory 117 is incremented by one. . For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is “5”, the fifth counter 142e for the first state is an addition target, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is “1”, the first counter 142a for the first state is Can be added.

  Thereafter, by referring to the state information in the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not the state is the second state, that is, whether or not the high probability mode is being performed (step S3108). If the current state is the second state (step S3108: YES), the corresponding second state counter is added (step S3109). In the addition process, one of the counter values corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth counters 143a to 143o for the second state in the second state area 143 of the history memory 117 is added. . For example, if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth counter 143e for the second state is an addition target, and if the value of the check target counter is “1”, the first counter 143a for the second state is set. Can be added.

  Thereafter, by referring to the state information in the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not the state is the third state, that is, whether or not the front door frame 14 is being opened (step S3110). If the current state is the third state (step S3110: YES), the corresponding third state counter is added (step S3111). In the addition process, the counter value corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth counters 144a to 144o for the third state in the third state area 144 of the history memory 117 is incremented by one. . For example, if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth counter 144e for the third state is to be added, and if the value of the check target counter is “1”, the first counter 144a for the third state is set. Can be added.

  When the processing of step S3103 is performed, when a negative determination is made in step S3104, when a negative determination is made in step S3110, or when the processing of step S3111 is performed, the value of the check target counter of the management-side RAM 114 is set to 1 Subtraction is performed (step S3112). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the check target counter after subtraction of 1 is “0” (step S3113). If the value of the check target counter is 1 or more (step S3113: NO), the processes from step S3102 are executed for the check target corresponding to the new check target counter value.

  By executing the history setting process as described above, the game ball entry history to the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is as described above. Rather than being stored as history information as in the first embodiment, it is stored as information on the number of times a game ball has been detected by each of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 48a. As a result, the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which each history information is stored individually.

  With the configuration in which the number of times a game ball is detected by each of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored as described above, in the external output process (FIG. 28) in the present embodiment (FIG. 28), the out port 24a such as step S1002 is used. The process of calculating the number of game balls entering the special power winning device 32, such as step S1004, the process of calculating the number of game balls entering the first power port 33, such as step S1005. The calculation process and the process of calculating the number of game balls entering the second operation port 34, such as step S1006, are not required. As a result, the processing load for calculating various parameters can be reduced.

  In the process of calculating the number of game balls that enter the general winning opening 31 such as step S1003, the first to third counters 141a to 141c, 142a to 142c, 143a to 143c, and 144a to 144c are all general winning openings. Therefore, it is necessary to execute a process of summing the values of the first to third counters 141a to 141c, 142a to 142c, 143a to 143c, and 144a to 144c. Further, the number of balls entered in the situation where the front door frame 14 is open in the open / close execution mode cannot be distinguished from the number of balls entered in other situations. Therefore, in the external output process (FIG. 28) according to the present embodiment, the process of step S1012 is not performed. Similarly, the number of incoming balls generated in the situation where the front door frame 14 is being opened during the high probability mode and cannot be distinguished from the number of incoming balls generated in other situations. Therefore, in the external output process (FIG. 28) according to the present embodiment, the process of step S1016 is not performed.

<Tenth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the storage means for storing history information is different from that in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 62 is a block diagram for explaining an electrical configuration of the MPU 62 in the present embodiment. Similar to the first embodiment, the MPU 62 includes a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, a management IC 66, an I / F 101, and a reading terminal 102. The management IC 66 is provided with a management side I / F 111, a management side CPU 112, a management side ROM 113, and a management side RAM 114, as in the first embodiment.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the management IC 66 is not provided with the RTC 115, the correspondence relationship memory 116, and the history memory 117. Instead, the management IC 66 is provided with a calculation result memory 131 as in the third embodiment. Since the RTC 115, the correspondence relationship memory 116, and the history memory 117 are not provided in the management IC 66, the history information is not stored in the management IC 66 in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, the history of entering into the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is stored in the main RAM 65. That is, the main RAM 65 that temporarily stores information necessary for executing a program in the main CPU 63 is also used as a memory for storing the entry history. The management IC 66 can access the main side RAM 65 through the management side I / F 111. When an operation trigger of various parameters occurs, the management IC 66 accesses the main side RAM 65 to read the entry history, and reads the read history. Various parameters are calculated using the entry history. The calculated various parameters are stored in the calculation result memory 131. When a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, various parameters are provided to the reading device from the calculation result memory 131, while the ball entry history stored in the main RAM 65 is not provided to the reading device. .

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a ball entry detection process executed by the main CPU 63 in the present embodiment. The incoming ball detection process is executed in step S209 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12).

  When it is confirmed that the state where the information of “0” is stored in the 0th bit D0 is changed to the state where the information of “1” is stored, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a outputs 1 It is determined that three game balls have been detected (step S3201: YES). In this case, the value of the general winning counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3202). The general winning counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entered into the general winning opening 31 as a pitching history. The value of the general winning counter is cleared to “0” when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. Incidentally, since the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the operating power supply to the MPU 62 is stopped, even if the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the value of the general winning counter is Retained. Thereafter, the value of the counter for ten prize balls in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3203).

  When it is confirmed that the state where the information of “0” is stored in the first bit D1 is changed to the state where the information of “1” is stored, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a outputs 1 It is determined that three game balls have been detected (step S3204: YES). In this case, the value of the general winning counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3205). Thereafter, the value of the counter for ten prize balls in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3206).

  When it is confirmed that the state where the information of “0” is stored in the second bit D2 is changed to the state where the information of “1” is stored, the third winning opening detection sensor 44a detects 1 It is determined that three game balls have been detected (step S3207: YES). In this case, the value of the general winning counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3208). Thereafter, the value of the ten award ball counter of the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3209).

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored in the third bit D3 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, the special electric detection sensor 45a makes one game It is determined that a sphere has been detected (step S3210: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the special power winning flag in the main RAM 65 (step S3211). Further, the value of the special power winning counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3212). The special electricity prize winning counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entered into the special electricity winning device 32 as a ball entry history. The value of the special electric prize counter is cleared to “0” when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. Incidentally, since the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the operation power supply to the MPU 62 is stopped, even if the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the value of the special prize winning counter is Retained. Thereafter, the value of the counter for 15 prize balls in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3213).

  When it is confirmed that the state where the information of “0” is stored in the fourth bit D4 is changed to the state where the information of “1” is stored, the first operating port detection sensor 46a outputs 1 It is determined that three game balls have been detected (step S3214: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the first operation winning flag in the main RAM 65 (step S3215). Further, the value of the first operation counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3216). The first operation counter is a counter for storing the number of entering the first operation port 33 as the entry history. The value of the first operation counter is cleared to “0” when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. . Incidentally, since the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the operation power supply to the MPU 62 is stopped, even if the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the value of the first operation counter Is retained. Thereafter, the value of the one-prize-ball counter of the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3217).

  When it is confirmed that the state where the information of “0” is stored for the fifth bit D5 is changed to the state where the information of “1” is stored, the second working port detection sensor 47a outputs 1 It is determined that three game balls have been detected (step S3218: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the second operation winning flag of the main RAM 65 (step S3219). Further, the value of the second operation counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3220). The second operation counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entering the second operation port 34 as a ball entry history. The value of the second operation counter is cleared to “0” when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. . Incidentally, since the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the operation power supply to the MPU 62 is stopped, even if the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the value of the second operation counter Is retained. Thereafter, the value of the one-prize-ball counter of the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3221).

  When it is confirmed that the state in which the information of “0” is stored in the sixth bit D6 is changed to the state in which the information of “1” is stored, one out of the out mouth detection sensor 48a is used. It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S3222: YES). In this case, the value of the out counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3223). The out counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entering the out port 24a as a ball entry history. The value of the out counter is cleared to “0” when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. Incidentally, since the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the operation power supply to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the out counter is stored even if the pachinko machine 10 is in a power-off state. Retained.

  When it is confirmed that the state where the information “0” is stored in the seventh bit D7 is changed to the state where the information “1” is stored, one game is performed by the gate detection sensor 49a. It is determined that a ball has been detected (step S3224: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the gate winning flag in the main RAM 65 (step S3225).

  By performing the entry detection process as described above, the entry histories to the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 are stored in the respective entrance parts. Is stored in the main side RAM 65 as the number of balls entered. As a result, every time a ball enters any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, a signal is sent from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112. There is no need to output. Therefore, the configuration for outputting a signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 can be simplified.

  In the present embodiment, when a calculation opportunity occurs, the management side CPU 112 reads the number of balls entered from the general winning counter of the main RAM 65 to the general winning slot 31, and transfers the special winning prize counter from the main RAM 65 to the special winning device 32. Read the number of balls entered, read the number of balls entered from the first operation counter of the main RAM 65 to the first operation port 33, read the number of balls entered from the second operation counter of the main RAM 65 to the second operation port 34, The number of balls entering the out port 24a is read from the out counter of the main RAM 65. Then, the first parameter to the eighth parameter described in the first embodiment are calculated using the read number of balls. However, the number of entrances in a state where the number of entrances when the front door frame 14 is open and the number of entrances when the front door frame 14 is closed are not measured. Therefore, the first parameter to the eighth parameter are calculated in a state including the number of balls generated when the front door frame 14 is open. Also, since the number of each ball in the open / close execution mode and the number of each ball in the high probability mode are not individually measured, the first parameter to the eighteenth parameter and the twenty-first parameter described in the first embodiment are described. The 26th parameter is not calculated. The calculated first to eighth parameters are written in the calculation result memory 131. When a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, all parameters written at that time in the calculation result memory 131 are provided to the reading device. At this time, the calculation result memory 131 is cleared to “0”.

  Note that the management IC 66 does not independently access the main RAM 65, but information on the number of balls that are stored in the main RAM 65 as a ball entry history is transmitted to the management IC 66 by transfer control by the main CPU 63. It is good also as a structure to be. In this case, an event in which the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 simultaneously access the main RAM 65 can be reliably prevented.

<Eleventh embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration of the main control board 61, the types of signals output from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112, and the way of storing the ball entry history in each ball entry unit. ing. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 64 is a block diagram for explaining an electrical configuration of the main control board 61 in the present embodiment. The MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61 as in the first embodiment. Similar to the first embodiment, the MPU 62 includes a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, a management IC 66, an I / F 101, and a reading terminal 102. Similarly to the first embodiment, the management IC 66 is provided with a management-side I / F 111, a management-side CPU 112, a management-side ROM 113, a management-side RAM 114, a correspondence relationship memory 116, and a history memory 117.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the management IC 66 is not provided with the RTC 115. Also. The main control board 61 is provided with a notification light emitting unit 151 in addition to the MPU 62. The notification light emitting unit 151 is directly controlled to emit light by the main CPU 63. The main CPU 63 can access the history memory 117 of the management IC 66, and calculates various parameters using the information of the entry history of each entry that has been read from the history memory 117. Then, the light emitting state of the notification light emitting unit 151 is controlled according to the contents of the various parameters thus calculated. The notification light emitting unit 151 is accommodated in the accommodation space of the substrate box 60a of the main control device 60, but the substrate box 60a is formed transparent, and the light emission state of the notification light emitting unit 151 is changed to the outside of the substrate box 60a. The light emitting part 151 for notification is provided so that it can be visually confirmed. As a result, the gaming machine main body 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11 so that the main control device 60 can be visually confirmed, thereby notifying the light emitting unit 151 for notification without requiring the work of opening the board box 60a. It becomes possible to visually confirm the light emission state of the.

  FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram for describing the configuration of the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111 in the present embodiment.

  The first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the sixteenth buffer 122p receive the same types of signals as in the first embodiment. Specifically, the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning mouth detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a, and the second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning mouth detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. A third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third prize winning port detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and a fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electricity detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. Is input to the fifth buffer 122e, and a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first operating port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. 6 signal is input, the seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the out port detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g, and the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p. It is inputted.

  On the other hand, in the first embodiment, a signal corresponding to the open / close execution mode is input to the eighth buffer 122h as an eighth signal, and a signal corresponding to the high probability mode is input to the ninth buffer 122i as a ninth signal. Although the signal corresponding to the door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j as the tenth signal, in the present embodiment, the signal corresponding to the open / close execution mode, the signal corresponding to the high probability mode, and the front door frame The signal corresponding to 14 is not input to the input port 121. That is, no signal relating to the entry history is input to the eighth to fifteenth buffers 122h to 122o.

  The types of signals to be input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o have not been determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the types of these signals can be obtained by receiving instructions from the main CPU 63. It is specified by the management side CPU 112. The processing for specifying the type of signal is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment. On the other hand, the fact that the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the management CPU 112 outputs to the sixteenth buffer 122p without receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63. It is possible to specify that the instruction signal is input.

  FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in the present embodiment. The history memory 117 is provided with first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o. The first buffer counter 152a stores information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The second buffer counter 152b stores information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The third buffer counter 152c stores information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fourth buffer counter 152d stores information on the number of times that the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122d has changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fifth buffer counter 152e stores information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122e has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The sixth buffer counter 152f stores information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122f has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The seventh buffer counter 152g stores information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 122g has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The eighth buffer counter 152h stores information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122h has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The ninth buffer counter 152i stores information on the number of times that the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i has changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The tenth buffer counter 152j stores information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122j has changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The eleventh buffer counter 152k stores information on the number of times the output state of the eleventh signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The twelfth buffer counter 152l stores information on the number of times the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The thirteenth buffer counter 152m stores information on the number of times the output state of the thirteenth signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fourteenth buffer counter 152n stores information on the number of times the output state of the fourteenth signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fifteenth buffer counter 152o stores information on the number of times the output state of the fifteenth signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level.

  However, the measurement targets using the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o are any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. First to seventh buffers 122a to 122g to which signals corresponding to the result of entering the car are input. Accordingly, the eighth to fifteenth buffers 122h to 122o are excluded from the measurement target. The distinction of whether or not these are measurement targets is performed based on the correspondence information stored in the correspondence areas 123 a to 123 o of the correspondence memory 116.

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing a history setting process executed by the management CPU 112. Note that the history setting process is executed in step S607 of the management process (FIG. 22).

  First, the number of buffers to be checked in the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the check target counter of the management RAM 114 (step S3301). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored in the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116 is identified, and the identification is performed. Set the number of information to the check target counter. In the pachinko machine 10, as described above, since information other than the information indicating blank is stored in the first to seventh response areas 123a to 123j, "7" is set in the check target counter in step S3301. I do.

  After that, it is checked whether the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has been changed from “0” to “1”. Then, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S3302). In addition, when the value of the confirmation target counter is “n”, the nth buffers 122a to 122o are the confirmation targets of the numerical information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth buffer 122e is a check target for numerical information, and if the value of the check target counter is “1”, the first buffer 122a is a check target for numerical information. .

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3302, the corresponding buffer counters 152a to 152o are added (step S3303). In the addition process, the counter value corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked among the counters of the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o of the history memory 117 is incremented by one. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is “5”, the fifth buffer counter 152e is the addition target, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is “1”, the first buffer counter 152a is the addition target.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3302 or if the process in step S3303 is performed, the value of the check target counter in the management-side RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S3304). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the check target counter after subtraction of 1 is “0” (step S3305). If the value of the check target counter is equal to or greater than 1 (step S3305: NO), the process from step S3302 is performed on the check target corresponding to the new check target counter value.

  By executing the history setting process as described above, the game ball entry history to the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is as described above. Rather than being stored as history information as in the first embodiment, it is stored as information on the number of times a game ball has been detected by each of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 48a. As a result, the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which each history information is stored individually.

  FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the external output process according to the present embodiment executed by the management CPU 112. The external output process is executed in step S608 of the management process (FIG. 22).

  When the output state of the output instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 is at the HI level (step S3401: YES), the output counters provided in the management RAM 114 are replaced by the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152a. The number of counters for which the management-side CPU 112 outputs the number-of-times information out of 152o is set (step S3402). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored in the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116 is identified, and the identification is performed. Set the number of information to the check target counter. In this embodiment, since information other than the information indicating blank is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g as described above, "7" is set to the output target counter in step S3402. .

  Thereafter, the correspondence information stored in the area corresponding to the current value of the output target counter in the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116 is read (step S3403), and the history information is read. The frequency information stored in the counter corresponding to the current value of the output target counter among the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o in the memory 117 is read (step S3404). In this case, when the value of the output target counter is “n”, the n-th corresponding relationship areas 123a to 123o are targets for reading the corresponding relationship information, and the n-th buffer counters 152a to 152o read the number-of-times information. It becomes a target. For example, if the value of the output target counter is “5”, the fifth correspondence area 123e is a target for reading the correspondence information, the fifth buffer counter 152e is a target for reading the number of times information, and the value of the output target counter is If it is “1”, the first correspondence relationship area 123a is a target for reading correspondence information, and the first buffer counter 152a is a target for reading number information.

  Thereafter, an information output process is executed (step S3405). In the information output process, a combination of the correspondence information read in step S3403 and the number-of-times information read in step S3404 is output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, in the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, the number-of-times information about the correspondence information that is the current output target is read.

  Thereafter, the value of the output target counter of the management side RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S3406). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the output target counter after the subtraction of “1” is “0” (step S3407). If the value of the output target counter is 1 or more (step S3407: NO), the processing from step S3403 is executed for the output target corresponding to the new output target counter value. If the determination in step S3407 is affirmative, the values of the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o are cleared to "0".

  FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the parameter management processing executed by the main CPU 63. The parameter management process is executed after the management output process of step S219 is executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12).

  First, it is determined whether or not a calculation trigger for various parameters has occurred (step S3501). The calculation is triggered when the parameter management process is executed for the first time after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, and in the same way as in the fifth embodiment, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power receiving award. This occurs every time the total number of game balls entering the device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 reaches 500 or more as the trigger reference number. Since the case where the parameter management process is first executed after the supply of operating power is started is set as a calculation trigger, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and then turned on again to calculate various parameters. An opportunity can be easily generated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3501, the notification corresponding to the calculation results of the various parameters is executed as described later. It becomes possible to grasp the entering state of the game ball. In addition, it is possible to finely manage the entrance mode of the game balls in the game area PA by generating a calculation opportunity every time the total number of game balls entered reaches the trigger reference number of 500 or more. It becomes.

  If a calculation trigger has occurred (step S3501: YES), the entry history is read from the counter for which the entry history is stored among the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o in the history memory 117 (step S3501). S3502). Specifically, the numerical information of the first to seventh buffer counters 152a to 152g is read. In this case, the main CPU 63 can recognize the buffer counters 152a to 152o from which the entry history is to be read by the program and data stored in the main ROM 64.

  After that, various calculation processes are executed (step S3503). In the various calculation processes, various parameters are calculated using the entry history read in step S3502 and information on the number of winning balls corresponding to the entry history. The main CPU 63 uses the programs and data stored in the main ROM 64 to store each ball entry history read in step S3502 in the out port 24a, the general prize port 31, the special power prize device 32, the first operating port 33, and the It is possible to specify which one of the two operation ports 34 corresponds, and it is possible to specify information on the number of prize balls corresponding to each entry history read in step S3502. .

Specifically, regarding the various parameters calculated in step S3503,
7th parameter: (K3 × “number of winning balls for winning in the special electricity winning device 32” + K5 × “number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34”) / total payout number of game balls (K2 × “general The number of winning balls for winning at the winning opening 31 + K3 × “the number of winning balls for winning at the special electricity winning device 32” + K4 × “the number of winning balls for winning at the first operating port 33” + K5 × “the second operating port 34” Ratio / eighth parameter: K3 × “number of winning balls for winning to the special electric prize device 32” / total number of game balls to be paid out (K2 × “for winning to the general winning opening 31”) “Number of winning balls” + K3 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the special electric prize winning device 32” + K4 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + K5 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34” )) Is calculated.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the calculated various parameters fall within the first range (step S3504). When the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, it is determined that the calculated various parameters are in the first range, and an affirmative determination is made in step S3504. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3504, a first notification state setting process is executed (step S3505). In the setting processing, the light emission of the notification light emitting unit 151 is controlled to be in the first notification state. In this case, the notification light emitting unit 151 is in a blue light emitting state.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3504, it is determined whether the calculated various parameters fall within the second range (step S3506). If either one of the condition that the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6 is satisfied, the calculated various parameters are An affirmative determination is made in step S3506 assuming that the range is two. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3506, a second notification state setting process is executed (step S3507). In the setting process, the notification light emitting unit 151 is controlled to emit light so as to be in the second notification state. In this case, the notification light emitting unit 151 is in a yellow light emitting state.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3506, it means that the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6. In this case, a third notification state setting process is performed (step S3508). In the setting process, the notification light emitting unit 151 is controlled to emit light so as to be in the third notification state. In this case, the notification light emitting unit 151 is in a red light emitting state.

  The light emission state set in step S3505, step S3507, or step S3508 remains unchanged until a new notification state is set for the notification light emitting unit 151 or the supply of operating power to the notification light emitting unit 151 is stopped. Continue until. In addition, the notification state of the notification light emitting unit 151 is stored and held in the main RAM 65 and backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65, so the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and the notification light emitting unit is stopped. Even if 151 is once turned off, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed, a light emission state corresponding to the type of information in the notification state stored in the main RAM 65 is obtained. The light emission control of the notification light emitting unit 151 is executed.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  The game ball entry history to the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is stored as history information as in the first embodiment. Instead, it is stored as information on the number of times a game ball has been detected by each of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a. As a result, the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which each history information is stored individually.

  A notification light emitting unit 151 for notifying contents corresponding to various parameters calculated by the management side CPU 112 is provided. As a result, the contents corresponding to the various parameters are notified by the pachinko machine 10 itself, so that the manager of the game hall or the like does not need to read the information stored in the history memory 117 and the game balls in the game area PA can be read. It becomes possible to grasp the entrance mode.

  A notification light-emitting unit 151 is provided together with the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 accommodated in the board box 60a. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult to perform unauthorized access to the communication path between the MPU 62 and the notification light emitting unit 151.

  The calculation of various parameters and the light emission control of the notification light emitting unit 151 are executed not by the management CPU 112 but by the main CPU 63. Thereby, it becomes possible to improve the reliability of the notification content in the notification light emitting unit 151.

  When the calculation results of the various parameters correspond to the first range, the first notification state is entered, and when the calculation results of the various parameters correspond to the second range, the second notification state is established. The third notification state is entered when neither the first range nor the second range is supported. That is, the various parameters are not notified as they are, but the contents corresponding to the range including the various parameters are notified. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the notification patterns in the notification light emitting unit 151 from becoming excessive, and it is possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification light emitting unit 151.

  Even if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped immediately after the power supply to the notification light emitting unit 151 is continued. It is good also as a structure by which the light emission state in is maintained. In this case, even when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, it is possible to grasp the game ball entering mode in the game area PA by checking the notification light emitting unit 151. .

  Also, instead of this configuration, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the notification light emitting unit 151 is turned off, but the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. May be configured such that the notification light emitting unit 151 is controlled to emit light so as to be in a light emitting state corresponding to the result of various parameters calculated before the supply of operating power is stopped. In this case, for example, by confirming the notification light-emitting unit 151 before the start of business in the game hall, it is possible to grasp the game ball entry mode on the previous business day.

  The notifying means for notifying the calculation results of the various parameters is not limited to the notification light emitting unit 151, but may be a display device having a display surface such as the symbol display device 41 or the like. It may be. In addition, a signal corresponding to the calculation result of various parameters may be output to the hall computer HC of the game hall through the external terminal board 97.

  The special figure display part 37a of the special figure unit 37 or the universal figure display part 38a of the universal figure unit 38 may be configured to also function as the notification light emitting part 151. For example, when supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started, various parameters are calculated, and depending on whether the calculation result is included in the first range, the second range, or any other one as in the above embodiment. The notification corresponding to the calculation result may be executed in the special figure display unit 37a or the general map display unit 38a immediately after the start of the supply of the operating power. In this case, the notification may be configured to end when the start condition of the variable display of the pattern in the special figure display unit 37a or the start condition of the variable display of the pattern in the general map display unit 38a is satisfied. It may be configured to be temporarily interrupted when the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, and resumed when the variable display of the pattern is completed. According to this configuration, it is possible to use the special-figure display unit 37a or the general-purpose display unit 38a as notification means for notifying the entrance mode of the game ball in the game area PA.

  The notification light emitting unit 151 may be provided at a position where the notification light emitting unit 151 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 in a state where the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are closed. For example, it is good also as a structure by which the alerting | reporting light emission part 151 is provided in the position which can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52 behind the pachinko machine 10 rather than the window panel 52. In this case, the notification content corresponding to the calculation results of various parameters can be confirmed without requiring the opening operation of the gaming machine main body 12 or the front door frame 14.

<Twelfth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration for providing information on each entry result to the management IC 66 is different from that in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a signal path for allowing the detection results of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 48a to be input to the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66.

  The detection result of the first winning port detection sensor 42a is input to the main CPU 63 through the first signal path SL11. In addition, the detection result of the second prize winning port detection sensor 43a is input to the main CPU 63 through the second signal path SL12. Further, the detection result of the third prize winning port detection sensor 44a is input to the main CPU 63 through the third signal path SL13. Further, the detection result of the special electricity detection sensor 45a is input to the main CPU 63 through the fourth signal path SL14. The detection result of the first working port detection sensor 46a is input to the main CPU 63 through the fifth signal path SL15. The detection result of the second working port detection sensor 47a is input to the main CPU 63 through the sixth signal path SL16. In addition, the detection result of the out port detection sensor 48a is input to the main CPU 63 through the seventh signal path SL17.

  A first branch path SL21 is formed so as to branch from a middle position of the first signal path SL11, and the first branch path SL21 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a second branch path SL22 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the second signal path SL12, and the second branch path SL22 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a third branch path SL23 is formed so as to branch from a middle position of the third signal path SL13, and the third branch path SL23 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a fourth branch path SL24 is formed so as to branch from a middle position of the fourth signal path SL14, and the fourth branch path SL24 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a fifth branch path SL25 is formed so as to branch from a middle position of the fifth signal path SL15, and the fifth branch path SL25 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a sixth branch path SL26 is formed so as to branch from a middle position of the sixth signal path SL16, and the sixth branch path SL26 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a seventh branch path SL27 is formed so as to branch from a middle position of the seventh signal path SL17, and the seventh branch path SL27 is electrically connected to the management IC 66.

  With the above-described configuration, the detection results of the respective ball detection sensors 42a to 48a are input to the management IC 66 without any processing by the main CPU 63. As a result, the main CPU 63 executes processing for causing the management side CPU 112 to recognize the respective winning results of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34. Therefore, the processing load on the main CPU 63 can be reduced.

  Further, branch points of the branch paths SL21 to SL27 from the signal paths SL11 to SL17 exist in the MPU 62. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to access the branch location and each of the branch paths SL21 to SL27 from the outside, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act of inputting an abnormal entry result only to the management IC 66. .

<13th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the execution mode of the open / close execution mode is different between the case where the jackpot result is a low-accuracy result and the case where the jackpot result is a high-accuracy result. Hereinafter, the execution mode of the open / close execution mode in the present embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 71 is a time chart for explaining an execution mode of the open / close execution mode in the present embodiment. FIGS. 71 (a1) and 71 (a2) show the execution period of the opening / closing execution mode, and FIGS. 71 (b1) and 71 (b2) show the execution period of the round game, and FIGS. 71 (c1) and 71 ( c2) indicates a period in which the special power winning device 32 is in the open state. FIGS. 71 (a1), 71 (b1), and 71 (c1) show opening / closing in the case of 2R low-accuracy result, 4R low-accuracy result, 6R low-accuracy result, 10R low-accuracy result, and 16R low-accuracy result. FIG. 71 (a2), FIG. 71 (b2), and FIG. 71 (c2) show the execution mode of the mode, with 2R high accuracy results, 4R high accuracy results, 6R high accuracy results, 10R high accuracy results, and 16R high accuracy results. The execution mode of the open / close execution mode in a certain case is shown.

  In both the open / close execution mode when the result is low and the open / close execution mode when the result is high, as shown in FIGS. 71 (a1) and 71 (a2), the open / close execution is performed at the timing of t1. The mode is started, and the first round game is executed as shown in FIG. 71 (b1) and FIG. 71 (b2) from timing t2 to timing t3. Regardless of the open / close execution mode in the case of the low-probability result and the open / close execution mode in the case of the high-probability result, the execution mode of each round game is the same except for the last round game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 71 (c1) and FIG. 71 (c2), the special power winning device 32 is opened once in each round game, and the opening duration of the special power winning device 32 in each round game is a game. The period is set to 29 seconds, which is longer than the product of the ball firing period (0.6 seconds) and the winning number of round games (10).

  Thereafter, in the open / close execution mode in the case of the low-probability result, the last round game is executed as shown in FIG. 71 (b1) from the timing t4 to the timing t5. The execution mode of the round game is the same as the execution mode of the previous round game. In other words, the special power winning device 32 is opened once in each round game, and the opening duration of the special power winning device 32 in each round game is the firing cycle of the game ball (0.6 seconds) and the winning upper limit number of the round game ( 10) is set to 29 seconds, which is a longer period than the product of (10). Then, an ending period occurs from timing t5 to timing t6, and the current open / close execution mode ends.

  In the open / close execution mode in the case of the high-accuracy result, the last round game is executed as shown in FIG. 71 (b2) from the timing t4 to the timing t5, but in the round game, a predetermined round game is executed. The special power winning device 32 is opened and closed a plurality of times so as to sandwich the interval period. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 71 (c2), the timing from t4 to t11, the timing from t12 to t13, the timing from t14 to t15, the timing from t16 to t17, and the timing from t18 The special winning a prize device 32 is opened at timings of t19 to t19 and timings of t20 to t5. Then, an ending period occurs from timing t5 to timing t6, and the current open / close execution mode ends.

  In this case, in the timing of t4 to t11, the timing of t12 to t13, the timing of t14 to t15, the timing of t16 to t17, and the timing of t18 to t19, The open continuation period is set to a period longer than the launch cycle of game balls (0.6 seconds) and shorter than the product of the launch cycle of game balls (0.6 seconds) and the winning upper limit number of round games (10). And specifically, set to one second. In this relatively short opening duration, the number of winnings in the special power winning device 32 is about one, and it is possible that no winning in the special power winning device 32 occurs. In addition, the number of times the special power winning device 32 is opened during the relatively short opening duration is five times smaller than the number of winning upper limit numbers, and thus, the timing at which the last opening time due to the relatively short opening duration ends. At the timing of t19, there is a low possibility that the special electric prize winning device 32 has generated a prize of the maximum number of prize winning balls in the last round game executed. Therefore, the opening of the special power winning device 32 after the timing of t20 occurs with a high probability.

  In addition, the relatively short opening duration is supplied from the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203 to the right end of the guide plate portion 214 of the opening / closing member 202 in a situation where the opening / closing member 202 of the special electric winning device 32 is arranged at the opening position. The game ball is set to a period in which the game ball can reach the predetermined range X of the guide plate portion 214. The game ball that has reached the predetermined range X can drop below the open / close member 202 and win the through gate 35 by moving the open / close member 202 from the open position to the closed position in that situation. Thereby, every time the special power winning device 32 is opened for a relatively short duration, an opportunity to win a game ball to the through gate 35 is generated.

  The opening duration of the special power winning device 32 from the timing t20 to the timing t5 is set to a period longer than the above-described relatively short opening duration. This relatively long opening duration is set to a period equal to or longer than the product of the launch cycle of game balls (0.6 seconds) and the winning number of round games (10 pieces), specifically 6 seconds. Is set to In this relatively long open duration, it can be expected that the special electric prize device 32 will receive a prize of the maximum number of prize game balls. Also, when a game ball is awarded to the special power prize device 32 during the opening time of the special power prize device 32 for the relatively short open continuation period, the special power prize for the relatively long open continuation period. In the middle of the opening of the device 32, there is a high possibility that the number of winnings to the special power winning device 32 in the final round of the round game reaches the winning upper limit number.

  In the round game of the last execution time of the opening / closing execution mode in the case of the high-accuracy result, after the special power-winning device 32 is opened five times with the relatively short opening continuation period as described above, a relatively long opening continuation is performed. The special power prize winning device 32 is opened once according to the period, and an interval period in which the special power prize winning device 32 is in a closed state exists between these opening times. That is, as shown in FIG. 71 (c2), the timing of t11 to t12, the timing of t13 to t14, the timing of t15 to t16, the timing of t17 to t18, and the timing of t19 to t20 The special electric winning device 32 is maintained in the closed state over the timing of. Each of the interval periods is the same, and is specifically set to one second.

  As described above, the opening and closing of the special power prize winning device 32 occurs a plurality of times in the last execution round game. There will be many opportunities for the opening / closing member 202 to move from the open position to the closed position. This makes it possible to provide many opportunities for winning in the through gate 35 in the open / close execution mode when the result is highly accurate. Further, it is possible to increase the advantage of obtaining a high-accuracy result as compared with a low-accuracy result.

  In addition, a plurality of times of opening and closing of the special power winning device 32 in the last execution round game is performed with a relatively short opening duration, so that the duration of the last execution round game becomes extremely long. It is possible to do so. Also, before all the opening times of the special power prize device 32 in the relatively short opening continuation period are completed, the winning number of game balls to the special power prize device 32 in the last round game does not reach the upper limit of winning. It becomes possible to.

Next, a description will be given of a processing configuration of the main CPU 63 that enables the execution mode of the opening / closing execution mode as described above. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the special power starting process in this embodiment. The special power start process is executed in step S1209 of the special power control process (FIG. 38). In steps S3601 to S3603, steps S1601 to S1603 of the special power start process (FIG. 42) in the first embodiment are performed. Perform the same processing. If the opening and closing execution mode opening period has elapsed (step S3604: YES), a round number setting process is executed (step S3605). In the round number setting process, the round number of the current open / close execution mode is set in a round counter provided in the main RAM 65. The round counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the remaining number of round games in the current open / close execution mode. Specifically, the round counter is set to "2" for a 2R low-precision result or a 2R high-accuracy result, and the round counter is set to "4" for a 4R low-precision result or a 4R high-precision result. If the result is low or 6R high, set the round counter to "6". If the result is 10R low or 10R, set the round counter to "10". If the result is correct, "16" is set in the round counter. If any of the small hits results, the value of the round counter is cleared to "0".

  Thereafter, a setting process of the number of times of opening and closing is executed (step S3606). In the process of setting the number of times of opening and closing in the special power starting process, if any of the jackpot results is found, the opening / closing frequency counter of the main RAM 65 is set to "1" as the number of times of opening and closing of the special power winning device 32 in the first round game. If the current game result is the first small hit result, the opening / closing frequency counter of the main RAM 65 is set to “1”. If the current game result is the second small hit result, the opening / closing frequency counter of the main RAM 65 is set to “1”. If the game result is the third small hit result, "10" is set in the opening / closing frequency counter of the main RAM 65. Thereafter, in steps S3607 to S3610, the same processing as steps S1606 to S1609 of the special power start processing (FIG. 42) in the first embodiment is executed.

  FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the special power release processing in this embodiment. It should be noted that the special power opening process is executed in step S1210 of the special figure special power control process (FIG. 38).

  When a prize has occurred in the special power prize device 32 (step S3701: YES), the value of the prize counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S3702). Then, if the value of the winning counter after the subtraction of 1 is “0” (step S3703: YES), it is necessary to end the current round game if it is a big hit result, and to open and close this time if it is a small hit result It is necessary to end the execution mode. Therefore, the value of the opening / closing counter of the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S3704).

  Thereafter, under the condition that the current open / close execution mode is any of the jackpot results (step S3705: YES), the value of the round counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S3706). Then, a setting process of the number of times of opening and closing is executed (step S3707). In the setting process, if the current value of the round counter is “0”, the value of the opening / closing frequency counter of the main RAM 65 is not set. In the setting process, if the current round counter value is “1”, the opening / closing frequency counter of the main RAM 65 is set to “1” if the trigger of the current opening / closing execution mode is a low-probability result. On the other hand, if the trigger of the current open / close execution mode is a highly accurate result, “6” is set to the open / close frequency counter of the main RAM 65. In the setting process, if the current value of the round counter is 2 or more, “1” is set to the opening / closing frequency counter of the main RAM 65. In addition, a setting process of the winning upper limit number is executed (step S3708). In the setting processing, if the current round counter value is “0”, the value of the winning counter of the main RAM 65 is not set, and if the current round counter value is 1 or more, the winning of the main RAM 65 is not performed. "10" is set to the counter as a winning upper limit number of a new round game. Thereafter, in steps S3709 to S3711, the processes of steps S1703 to S1705 of the special power opening process (FIG. 43) in the first embodiment are executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3701 or step S3703, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure special power timer counter is “0”. It is determined whether or not the time has elapsed (step S3712). If an affirmative determination is made in step S3712, the value of the opening / closing counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S3713). If the value of the opening / closing counter after the subtraction of 1 is “0” (step S3714: YES), and the execution trigger of the current opening / closing execution mode is any of the jackpot results (step S3715: YES), The value of the round counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S3716). Further, a setting process of the number of times of opening and closing is executed (step S3717). In the setting process, if the current value of the round counter is “0”, the value of the opening / closing frequency counter of the main RAM 65 is not set. In the setting process, if the current round counter value is “1”, the opening / closing frequency counter of the main RAM 65 is set to “1” if the trigger of the current opening / closing execution mode is a low-probability result. On the other hand, if the trigger of the current open / close execution mode is a highly accurate result, “6” is set to the open / close frequency counter of the main RAM 65. In the setting process, if the current value of the round counter is 2 or more, “1” is set to the opening / closing frequency counter of the main RAM 65. Further, a setting process of the winning upper limit number is executed (step S3718). In the setting processing, if the current round counter value is “0”, the value of the winning counter of the main RAM 65 is not set, and if the current round counter value is 1 or more, the winning of the main RAM 65 is not performed. "10" is set to the counter as a winning upper limit number of a new round game. After that, the processing of steps S3709 to S3711 is executed.

  FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the special power closing process in this embodiment. Note that the special power closing process is executed in step S1211 of the special figure special power control process (FIG. 38).

  In steps S3801 to S3804, the same processes as those in steps S1801 to S1804 in the special power closing process (FIG. 44) in the first embodiment are executed. When a negative determination is made in step S3801, or when the process of step S3804 is performed, it is determined whether both the round counter of the main RAM 65 and the opening / closing counter of the main RAM 65 are "0" ( Step S3805). If a negative determination is made in step S3805, it is determined whether the value of the special figure special power timer counter is "0" to determine whether or not the interval period has elapsed (step S3806). If the interval period has elapsed (step S3806: YES), a setting process of the open continuation period is executed (step S3807). In the setting process, if the trigger of the current open / close execution mode is the second small hit result, the information (specifically, 2 seconds) of the opening duration for the second small hit result is set in the special figure special power timer counter. If the opening and closing execution mode is triggered by the third small hit result, the information on the open duration for the third small hit result (specifically, one second) is set in the special figure special power timer counter. In the setting process, if the trigger of the current open / close execution mode is any of the low-probability results, the information of the longest open continuation period (specifically, 29 seconds) is set in the special figure special power timer counter. . In the setting process, if the trigger of the current open / close execution mode is any highly accurate result and the value of the round counter is 2 or more, the information of the longest opening continuation period (specifically, 29 seconds) is used. Set in the special figure special power timer counter. In the setting process, if the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by any one of the highly accurate results and the value of the round counter is “1”, the value of the opening / closing counter of the main RAM 65 is “6” to “5”. In the case of "2", the information of the relatively short opening duration (specifically, one second) is set in the special figure special power timer counter, and when the value of the opening / closing counter of the main RAM 65 is "1", Sets the information of the relatively long open duration (specifically, 6 seconds) in the special figure special power timer counter.

  Thereafter, in steps S3808 to S3809, the same processes as those in steps S1810 to S1811 of the special power closing process (FIG. 44) in the first embodiment are executed. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S3805, in steps S3810 to S3812, the same processes as those in steps S1812 to S1814 of the special power closing process (FIG. 44) in the first embodiment are executed.

  According to the present embodiment described above, the opening and closing of the special prize winning device 32 occurs a plurality of times in the last round game, so that the game ball is placed on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening and closing member 202 of the special prize winning device 32. In this situation, the opening / closing member 202 often moves from the open position to the closed position. This makes it possible to provide many opportunities for winning in the through gate 35 in the open / close execution mode when the result is highly accurate. Further, it is possible to increase the advantage of obtaining a high-accuracy result as compared with a low-accuracy result.

  In addition, since the opening round of the first half in the round game of the last execution time is performed using the relatively short opening duration, the duration time of the round game of the last execution time does not become extremely long. It is possible to do so. Also, before all the opening times of the special power prize device 32 in the relatively short opening continuation period are completed, the winning number of game balls to the special power prize device 32 in the last round game does not reach the upper limit of winning. It becomes possible to.

  In the round game of the last execution time in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the high accuracy result, the opening duration of the last opening time of the special power winning device 32 is longer than the relatively short opening time period. Is set to This relatively long opening duration is set to a period equal to or longer than the product of the launch cycle of game balls (0.6 seconds) and the winning number of round games (10 pieces), specifically 6 seconds. Is set to In this relatively long open duration, it can be expected that the special electric prize device 32 will receive a prize of the maximum number of prize game balls. Also, when a game ball is awarded to the special power prize device 32 during the opening time of the special power prize device 32 for the relatively short open continuation period, the special power prize for the relatively long open continuation period. In the middle of the opening of the device 32, there is a high possibility that the number of winnings to the special power winning device 32 in the final round of the round game reaches the winning upper limit number.

<Another embodiment of the thirteenth embodiment>
-The round game in which the special power winning device 32 is opened a plurality of times is not limited to the last round game, and may be the first round game or a round game in the middle. In addition, the configuration may be such that the special power winning device 32 is opened a plurality of times in a plurality of round games.

  -It is not limited to a configuration in which a relatively long opening duration occurs after a relatively short opening duration occurs in one round game. The number of times of opening may occur only a plurality of times.

  In the relatively short open duration, the game ball can reach the position on the guide plate portion 214 where a prize can be made to the through gate 35, but the ball enters the entrance portion 45b of the special electric prize device 32. May be set to an impossible or difficult period. In this case, it is possible to generate a situation in which it is difficult to enter the entrance portion 45b of the special electric winning device 32, and it is possible to enter the through gate 35 in a situation where it is difficult to enter the ball. Note that the configuration may be applied to a configuration in which only one opening occurs in one round game, instead of a configuration in which a plurality of opening times occur in one round game.

<Fourteenth embodiment>
In the first embodiment, the through gate 35 is provided below the special electric winning device 32, and when the opening / closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in a situation where a game ball is placed on the guide plate portion 214. Although the configuration is such that the game ball can win the through gate 35, in the present embodiment, the target that the game ball can win is a ball entry portion other than the through gate 35. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 75 is a front view of the game board 24 in the present embodiment.

  As in the first embodiment, the special electric winning device 32 is provided in the right area PA3 of the game area PA. The special electric winning device 32 includes a passage forming body 201, an opening / closing member 202, and a guide member 203 as in the first embodiment. When the opening / closing member 202 is located at the closed position, it is impossible for game balls to enter the fourth discharge passage 45 and pass through the opening 213 (see FIG. 30) formed in the opening / closing member 202. As a result, the game ball flows down below the special electric winning device 32. When the opening / closing member 202 is located at the open position, the game ball can be placed on the guide plate 214 of the opening / closing member 202, and the game ball placed on the guide plate 214 is moved to the fourth discharge passage. The ball can enter the part 45. Further, a guide nail group 241 is provided on the right side area PA3 on the upstream side of the special electric winning device 32, as in the first embodiment. Thus, the game balls flowing down the right area PA3 are guided by the guide nail group 241 to the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203. Then, the game ball guided to the receiving portion 231 reaches the right end of the opening / closing member 202.

  The through gate 35 is not provided below the special winning device 32 in the right area PA3. In the present embodiment, the through gate 35 is provided in the left area PA2 of the game area PA. The frequency of entering the game balls is constant regardless of the game state. Further, when the shooting operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, the game ball can reach the position where the second operation port 34 is provided. Therefore, when the game ball is fired so as to flow down the left area PA2, winning in the through gate 35 becomes possible, and the second operating port 34 is opened when the winning in the through gate 35 is triggered. When it is in the state, it is possible to win the second operation port 34.

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, a low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode are set as the support modes for controlling the state of the general purpose accessory 34a of the second operating port 34. In the low frequency support mode, the frequency of the general electric role product 34a not being opened or the frequency of the general electric role product 34a being opened is relatively low. Relatively high. If the result is low, the support mode after the completion of the opening and closing execution mode becomes the low frequency support mode, and if the result becomes high, the support mode after the completion of the opening and closing execution mode becomes the high frequency support mode. .

  A first special ball entrance 251 and a second special ball entrance 252 are provided below the special power winning device 32 in the right area PA3. The first special ball entrance 251 and the second special ball entrance 252 are provided such that openings serving as entrances for game balls are opened vertically upward, and members for directly opening and closing these entrances are provided. Is not provided. In addition, the game ball that has entered the first special entrance 251 is discharged to the back side of the game board 24 to be discharged from the game area PA, and has entered the second special entrance 252. Is discharged from the game area PA by being led out to the back side of the game board 24. The first special entrance 251 and the second special entrance 252 are arranged side by side in such a manner that the first special entrance 251 is on the left and the second special entrance 252 is on the right. .

  The first special entrance 251 is provided with a first special detection sensor 251a for detecting a game ball entering the first special entrance 251 and the second special entrance 252 is provided with a first special detection sensor 251a. A second special detection sensor 252a for detecting a game ball that has entered the second special entrance 252 is provided. The first special detection sensor 251a and the second special detection sensor 252a are electrically connected to the main CPU 63.

  FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the incoming ball detection process executed by the main CPU 63. The ball entry processing is executed in step S209 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 12).

  When one game ball is detected by the first special detection sensor 251a (step S3901: YES), the value of the counter for ten prize balls provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3902). The 10 award ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times that 10 game balls should be paid out. When the value of the ten-prize-ball counter is 1 or more, the ten-prize-ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), and the ten-prize-ball is output. When the command is output once, the value of the ten prize balls counter is decremented by one. When the payout control device 77 receives the 10 prize ball commands, the payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 10 game balls are paid out.

  When one game ball is detected by the second special detection sensor 252a (step S3903: YES), the value of the counter for five prize balls provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3904). The five prize ball counter is a counter for specifying the number of times that the payout of five game balls should be executed by the main CPU 63. If the value of the five-prize-ball counter is 1 or more, a five-prize-ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), and the five-prize-ball control is performed. When the command is output once, the value of the counter for five prize balls is decremented by one. When receiving the five prize ball commands, the payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that five game balls are paid out.

  It should be noted that other processing is also performed in the ball entry detection processing (step S3905). In other processes, the same processes as those in steps S301 to S325 of the incoming ball detection process (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment are executed.

  Returning to the description of the game board 24 (FIG. 75), the first special entrance 251 is arranged downstream of the special winning device 32 and closer to the passage forming body 201 of the special winning device 32. A first guide nail group 253 is provided between the opening and closing member 202 of the special electric winning device 32 and the first special entrance 251 by a plurality of nails 24b. The first guide nail group 253 enables a game ball existing to the left of the first guide nail group 253 to enter the first special ball entrance 251, and the first guide nail group 253 allows the game ball to enter the first special nail entrance 251. The game balls existing on the right side are also prohibited from entering the first special entrance 251. Accordingly, when the opening / closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in a situation where the game ball exists on the first range X1 near the passage forming body 201 on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening / closing member 202, the game is performed. A ball can enter the first special entrance 251, and other game balls cannot enter the first special entrance 251.

  The distance dimension along the guide plate portion 214 in the first range X1 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball, and specifically, is twice the diameter of the game ball. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured such that the distance dimension along the guide plate portion 214 on the first range X1 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and is larger than twice the diameter of the game ball. It may be.

  The second special entrance 252 is located on the downstream side of the special prize winning device 32 at a position to the right of the first special entrance 251 but separated to the left from the right end of the opening / closing member 202. A second group of guide nails 254 is provided between the opening / closing member 202 of the special electric winning device 32 and the second special ball entrance 252 by a plurality of nails 24b. The second guiding nail group 254 enables a game ball existing to the left of the second guiding nail group 254 to enter the second special ball entrance 252, and the second guiding nail group 254 The game ball existing on the right side is also prohibited from entering the second special entrance 252. Accordingly, when the opening / closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in a state where the game ball exists in the second range X2 near the center on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening / closing member 202, the game ball is moved to the second position. It becomes possible to enter the second special entrance 252, and other game balls cannot enter the second special entrance 252. In this case, even if the opening / closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in a situation where a game ball exists at a position on the right side of the second range X2 on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening / closing member 202, the game The ball does not enter the second special entrance 252. Further, when the opening / closing member 202 is arranged at the closed position, the game ball passes through the opening 213 of the opening / closing member 202 at a position on the right side of the second range X2, so that the game ball is in the second special entry. Do not enter the ball opening 252.

  The distance dimension along the guide plate 214 in the second range X2 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball, and is specifically 2.5 times the diameter of the game ball. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the distance dimension along the guide plate 214 on the second range X2 may be smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and may be more than 2.5 times the diameter of the game ball. The configuration may be large.

  Next, how the game ball enters the first special entrance 251 or the second special entrance 252 in the opening / closing execution mode will be described with reference to a time chart of FIG. FIG. 77A shows a period in which the opening / closing member 202 of the special electric winning device 32 is located at the open position, and FIG. FIG. 77 (c) shows a period in which a game ball is present in the second range X2 on the guide plate 214 of the opening / closing member 202, and FIG. 77 (d) shows a first special entry. FIG. 77 (e) shows the timing at which game balls enter the second special entrance 252.

  First, a case where a game ball enters the first special entrance 251 will be described. At the timing of t1, the opening / closing member 202 is placed in the open position as shown in FIG. After that, a game ball exists in the second range X2 on the guide plate portion 214 as shown in FIG. 77 (c) from the timing t2 to the timing t3, and the game ball further flows down on the guide plate portion 214. By doing so, the game ball is present in the first range X1 on the guide plate portion 214 as shown in FIG. 77 (b) from the timing t3 to the timing t4. Then, as shown in FIG. 77 (a), the opening / closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position at the timing t4 when the game ball is present in the first range X1 on the guide plate 214. As a result, the game ball enters the first special entrance 251 at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 77 (d). Then, when the game balls enter the first special entrance 251, the payout of 10 game balls is executed.

  Next, a case where a game ball enters the second special entrance 252 will be described. At the timing of t6, the opening / closing member 202 is arranged at the open position as shown in FIG. 77 (a). Thereafter, the game ball is present in the second range X2 on the guide plate portion 214 as shown in FIG. 77 (c) from the timing t7 to the timing t8. Then, at time t8 when the game ball is present in the second range X2 on the guide plate 214, the opening / closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position as shown in FIG. 77 (a). As a result, the game ball enters the second special entrance 252 at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 77 (e). Then, when the game balls enter the second special entrance 252, the payout of five game balls is executed.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  By shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, not only can the game balls enter the special electric prize winning device 32, but also the game balls can enter the special entrance ports 251 and 252. The payout of the game balls is executed not only when the game balls enter the special winning award device 32 but also when the game balls enter the special entrance ports 251 and 252. This makes it possible to increase the number of game balls to be paid out in the opening and closing execution mode, and to increase the advantage of the opening and closing execution mode.

  The special ball entrances 251 and 252 are provided at positions downstream of the special prize winning device 32 and at positions where the game sphere can flow in when the special prize winning device 32 switches from one of an open state and a closed state to the other. ing. As a result, the game balls that have leaked as balls to be entered by the special electric winning device 32 enter the special entrances 251 and 252, and the game balls enter the special entrances 251 and 252. Will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the disadvantage of the player for the occurrence of a game ball leaking from the ball entry target of the special power winning device 32.

  When the open / close member 202 of the special electric winning device 32 moves from one of the open position and the closed position to the other, the game ball placed on the guide plate 214 of the open / close member 202 can enter the special entrance 251 or 252. It becomes. Thereby, in the opening / closing execution mode, the player not only determines whether or not a game ball enters the fourth discharge passage portion 45 of the special electric winning device 32, but also places the game ball on the guide plate portion 214. In this state, attention is paid to whether the opening / closing member 202 moves from one of the open position and the closed position to the other, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the open / close execution mode.

  At the timing when the special power winning device 32 switches from the open state to the closed state, an opportunity for game balls to enter the special entrances 251 and 252 is generated. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention not only when the special power winning device 32 is in the open state but also at the timing when the special power prize device 32 is switched to the closed state.

  The guide plate 214 of the opening / closing member 202 is formed such that the game ball placed on the guide plate 214 flows down to the left along the guide plate 214. Then, the special entrances 251 and 252 are placed when the opening / closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in a state where the game balls are placed in the partial ranges X1 and X2 of the guide plate portion 214. The game ball is provided at a position where the ball can enter by falling downward. In this case, in order for the game balls to enter the special entrances 251 and 252, not only the game balls are placed on the guide plate portion 214 in a situation where the opening / closing member 202 is arranged at the open position, but also the placement of the game balls. The opening / closing member 202 needs to move from the open position to the closed position at an exquisite timing when the game ball that is present exists in some of the ranges X1 and X2. This allows the player to pay attention to the relationship between the position of the game ball placed on the guide plate 214 and the switching timing of the state of the opening / closing member 202, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the opening / closing execution mode. It becomes.

  On the upstream side of the special electric prize winning device 32, a guide nail group 241 for guiding the game balls flowing into the right area PA3 to the right end side of the opening / closing member 202 is provided. The ranges X1 and X2 in which the game balls can enter the special entrances 251 and 252 in the guide plate portion 214 are set so as to be biased to the left end side of the opening / closing member 202. Accordingly, in order for the game ball to enter the special entrance 251 or 252, the opening / closing member 202 is moved from the open position to the closed position at an exquisite timing during the flow of the game ball on the guide plate portion 214. Need to move. Therefore, the player pays attention to the movement of the game ball on the guide plate portion 214, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the open / close execution mode.

  Further, in the special prize winning device 32, the entrance portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is located on the left side of the ranges X1 and X2 in which the game balls can enter the special entrance ports 251 and 252 in the guide plate portion 214. Exists. As a result, the game balls placed on the guide plate 214 but not reaching the entrance 45b enter the special entrances 251 and 252. Accordingly, the disadvantage of the player that the game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 has not won the special electric prize winning device 32 may be changed to the fact that the winning in the special ball entrances 251 and 252 occurs. It can be turned into profitable.

  A first special entrance 251 and a second special entrance 252 are provided as special entrances 251 and 252 that can enter the ball when the opening / closing execution mode is set, and the first special entrance 251 is provided. The number of game balls to be paid out differs between the case where a game ball enters the game ball and the case where a game ball enters the second special entrance 252. Then, when the first condition is satisfied in the opening and closing execution mode, a game ball enters the first special entrance 251, and when the second condition is satisfied in the opening and closing execution mode, the game enters the second special entrance 252. The ball enters. Thus, the player not only expects the game balls to enter the special ball entrances 251 and 252 in the open / close execution mode, but also makes the first special ball entrance 251 on the side where the number of game balls paid out is large. It is expected that game balls will enter. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the open / close execution mode.

  The first special entrance 251 allows the game ball to enter when the opening / closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in a state where the game ball is placed in the first range X1 of the guide plate portion 214. Position. In addition, the second special entrance 252 allows the game ball to enter when the opening / closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in a state where the game ball is placed in the second range X2 in the guide plate portion 214. It is provided at a position where This not only expects the opening / closing member 202 to move from the open position to the closed position in a state where the game ball is placed on either the first range X1 or the second range X2. It is expected that the opening / closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in a state where the game ball is placed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In a configuration in which the game balls that have flowed into the right area PA3 are guided to the right end side of the opening / closing member 202 by the provision of the guide nail group 241, the second range X2 is set to the lateral center side of the opening / closing member 202. And the first range X1 is set at a position offset to the left end side of the opening / closing member 202. Further, on the left side of the opening / closing member 202, there is an entrance portion 45b of the special electric winning device 32. This makes it easier for game balls existing on the guide plate 214 near the entrance 45b of the special power winning device 32 to enter the first special entrance 251 having a larger number of payouts. In this case, it is possible to increase the profit for the player in a situation where the disadvantage that the game ball does not enter the entrance portion 45b of the special power winning device 32 is unfortunately increased.

<Another embodiment of the fourteenth embodiment>
-Only one of the first special entrance 251 and the second special entrance 252 may be provided. In addition, a third special entrance is provided in addition to the first special entrance 251 and the second special entrance 252, and the third special entrance is provided to open and close the game ball in a third range of the guide plate portion 214. When the member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position, the game ball may enter the third special entrance.

  -Even if a game ball enters the first special entrance 251 or the second special entrance 252, the present invention is not limited to a configuration in which only payout of the game ball is executed. For example, the first special entrance When a game ball enters the ball opening 251, the first hold information or the second hold information that triggers the hit / fail determination processing is obtained, and when a game ball enters the second special entrance 252. The payout of the game balls may be executed. In this case, different benefits are provided when a game ball enters the first special entrance 251 and when a game ball enters the second special entrance 252.

  Further, for example, when a game ball enters the first special entrance 251, one of the first reservation information and the second reservation information is obtained, and the game ball enters the second special entrance 252. In such a case, the other of the first hold information and the second hold information may be acquired. With this, even if a game ball enters any one of the special entrances 251 and 252, the hold information that triggers the success / failure determination process is obtained, but the type of the obtained hold information is the first special ball entry. There is a difference between a case where a game ball enters the mouth 251 and a case where a game ball enters the second special ball entrance 252.

  Also, for example, regardless of which of the first special entrance 251 and the second special entrance 252 a game ball enters, the general-purpose side hold information is acquired, but the acquired general-purpose side hold is obtained. The information may have a configuration in which the probability that the second operation port 34 will be in the normal power open state is different.

  The first range X1 is not limited to a configuration narrower than the second range X2, and the width of the first range X1 and the width of the second range X2 may be the same or substantially the same, The first range X1 may be wider than the second range X2.

  -The game balls that have entered the special entrances 251 and 252 are not limited to the configuration drawn out to the back side of the game board 24, and the special entrances 251 and 252 are provided in a gate shape. Accordingly, the game balls that have entered the special entrances 251 and 252 may continue flowing down the game area PA thereafter. This makes it easier for the game ball to reach the lower area PA4.

<Fifteenth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, a first special power winning device 261 and a second special power winning device 262 are provided instead of the special power winning device 32. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 78 is a front view of the game board 24 in the present embodiment.

  A first special winning device 261 and a second special winning device 262 are provided in the right area PA3 of the gaming area PA in place of the special winning device 32. The first special power winning device 261 and the second special power winning device 262 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction such that the first special power winning device 261 is on the upper side and the second special power winning device 262 is on the lower side. Further, in the first embodiment, the through gate 35 is provided as a ball entry portion for generating an opportunity to open the general-purpose part 34a of the second operating port 34 to the open state. A first through-gate 263 and a second through-gate 264 are provided as a ball entry portion for generating a trigger for opening the object 34a. The first through gate 263 is provided to the left of the first special winning device 261, and the second through gate 264 is provided to the left of the second special winning device 262.

  The configuration of the first special electric winning device 261 and the configuration of the first through gate 263 will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 (a) and 79 (b). FIGS. 79A and 79B are cross-sectional views taken along line AA of FIG.

  The game board 24 is formed with a first big winning opening 265 so as to penetrate the game board 24 in the front-rear direction. The position where the first big winning opening 265 is formed is a position closer to the variable display unit 36 in the right area PA3 but a position to the right of the first through gate 263. A first special electric winning device 261 is provided so as to prevent or allow game balls to enter the first big winning opening 265. The first special electric winning device 261 includes a first guide plate 271 provided to penetrate the game board 24 in the front-rear direction at a position below the first big winning opening 265. The first guide plate 271 is provided so as to be movable in the front-rear direction by being driven by a driving unit (not shown), and has a blocking position where the amount of protrusion from the board of the game board 24 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is minimized. The pachinko machine 10 is slid forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the blocking position, and moves to a guide position where the amount of protrusion from the board of the game board 24 toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 is maximized.

  A first ball receiving portion 272 is provided at a position above the right end portion of the first guide plate 271 in the game board 24, and a right side from the upper region PA1 above the first special electric winning device 261 in the right region PA3. A first guide nail group 267 for guiding all of the game balls flowing into the area PA3 to the first ball receiving portion 272 is provided (see FIG. 78). The first guide nail group 267 is formed by arranging a plurality of nails 24b so as to be inclined downward to the right. The game balls that have flowed into the right area PA3 by the first guiding nail group 267 are all guided to the first ball receiving portion 272. The distance between the front end of the first ball receiving portion 272 and the window panel 52 is set to a size larger than the diameter of the game ball. The first ball receiving portion 272 has an upper surface inclined downward toward the front of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the game ball that has reached the upper surface of the first ball receiving portion 272 flows down toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by its own weight.

  When the first guide plate 271 is located at the blocking position, the distance between the front end of the first guide plate 271 and the window panel 52 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball as shown in FIG. Also have large dimensions. In the blocking position, the front end of the first guide plate 271 is located behind the front end of the first ball receiving portion 272 on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, game balls that have reached the upper surface of the first ball receiving portion 272 while the first guide plate 271 is located at the blocking position basically pass through the space between the first ball receiving portion 272 and the window panel 52. It will fall below the first ball receiving portion 272. In addition, the game ball guided by the first guide nail group 267 bounces on the first ball receiving portion 272 so that the first guide plate 271 arranged at the blocking position is closer to the front of the pachinko machine 10 than the board of the game board 24. It is also assumed that it is placed on the upper surface of the region projecting from On the other hand, the upper surface of a region of the first guide plate 271 disposed at the blocking position, which protrudes forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24, is inclined downward toward the front of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, even if a game ball is placed on the upper surface of the first guide plate 271 disposed at the blocking position, the game ball does not win the first big winning opening 265 and the first through gate 263 without being awarded to the first guide plate. 271 falls below the first guide plate 271 from between the front end of the window panel 52 and the window panel 52. With the above configuration, when the first guide plate 271 is arranged at the blocking position, the occurrence of a winning in the first big winning opening 265 is prevented and the occurrence of a winning in the first through gate 263 is prevented. Is done.

  When the first guiding plate 271 is located at the guiding position, as shown in FIG. 79 (b), the distance between the front end of the first guiding plate 271 and the window panel 52 is smaller than the radius of the game ball. Also have small dimensions. In this guide position, the front end of the first guide plate 271 is located closer to the front of the pachinko machine 10 than the front end of the first ball receiver 272. Therefore, the game ball that has reached the upper surface of the first ball receiving portion 272 while the first guide plate 271 is located at the guide position protrudes forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24 on the first guide plate 271. On the upper surface of the region.

  The upper surface of the protruding region 273 that protrudes forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24 when placed at the guiding position on the first guide plate 271 has a boundary portion for changing the inclination direction of the upper surface. 274 are formed. With the boundary portion 274 as a boundary, the upper surface of the protruding region 273 is located on the first guiding region 275 existing in front of the first ball receiving portion 272 and on the left side of the first guiding region 275 and has a first big prize. It is divided into a second guiding region 276 leading to the opening 265 and a third guiding region 277 left of the first guiding region 275 and in front of the second guiding region 276 and leading to the first through gate 263. I have. The upper surface of the first guidance area 275 is inclined downward to the left. Further, the left end of the first guiding region 275 is in contact with both the right end of the second guiding region 276 and the right end of the third guiding region 277. Thereby, the game ball guided from the first ball receiving portion 272 to the first guiding region 275 flows down to the second guiding region 276 or the third guiding region 277 by its own weight. In this case, the range in which the left end of the first guiding region 275 is in contact with the right end of the second guiding region 276 is wider than the range in which the left end of the first guiding region 275 is in contact with the right end of the third guiding region 277. Therefore, a game ball guided by the first guidance region 275 is more likely to flow into the second guidance region 276 than the third guidance region 277. However, the game balls guided by the first guidance region 275 flow into the third guidance region 277 at a predetermined frequency (specifically, one out of four).

  The second guide area 276 has a downward slope toward the left rear so that the game ball placed on the upper face of the second guide area 276 is guided to the first special winning opening 265. Thereby, the game ball placed on the upper surface of the second guiding area 276 can easily win the first big winning opening 265. The game ball that has won the first big winning opening 265 is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to the first big winning opening 265. This detection sensor is electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and the main CPU 63 specifies the presence or absence of a prize in the first big winning opening 265 based on the detection result of the detection sensor. Then, in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the result of the round game or the small hit in which the first special winning opening 265 is to be opened, it is specified that one game ball has entered the first special winning opening 265. In this case, the value of the winning counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by one. When the value of the prize counter becomes “0”, it is specified that a prize of the prize upper limit number has occurred as in the first embodiment, and the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the round game or the small hit result is set. Terminate.

  The third guidance area 277 is inclined downward toward the left. Here, when the first guide plate 271 is located at the guide position, the first guide plate 271 exists from the right end of the right area PA3 to the right end of the first through gate 263 in the lateral position. Will be done. As described above, the distance between the front end portion of the first guide plate 271 arranged at the guide position and the window panel 52 is smaller than the radius of the game ball. Therefore, unless the game ball placed on the upper surface of the third guiding area 277 moves to the second guiding area 276 for some reason on the way, it flows down toward the first through gate 263 by its own weight, and flows to the first through gate 263. You will win a prize. The game ball that has won the first through gate 263 is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to the first through gate 263. This detection sensor is electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and the main CPU 63 specifies the presence or absence of a winning in the first through gate 263 based on the detection result of the detection sensor. Then, when it is specified that one game ball has entered the first through gate 263, it is assumed that the upper limit number of the general figure side hold information is not stored in the general figure hold area 65c. The numerical value information of the random number counter C4 is stored in the general drawing holding area 65c as the general drawing holding information.

  With the above configuration, in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the round game in which the first special power winning device 261 is controlled or the small hit result in which the first special power winning device 261 is controlled, the first guide plate 271 is When the game ball is located at the guidance position, the game ball flowing into the right area PA3 is guided to one of the first special winning opening 265 and the first through gate 263, and the first special winning opening 265 and the first through gate 263 Winning to either one will surely occur. When a winning in the first big winning opening 265 occurs, the remaining number of the winning upper limit number is decremented by 1 and the payout of 15 game balls as a specific number is executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment. You. When a prize occurs in the first through gate 263, a trigger for acquiring the hold information on the general-purpose side occurs. Thus, when the first special power winning device 261 is to be controlled, the player can determine that both the winning at the first big winning opening 265 and the winning at the first through gate 263 occur. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Next, the configuration of the second special power winning device 262 and the configuration of the second through gate 264 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80A is a sectional view taken along line BB of FIG. 78.

  The game board 24 is formed with a second big winning opening 266 so as to penetrate the game board 24 in the front-rear direction. The position where the second special winning opening 266 is formed is a position below the first special electric winning device 261 and the first through gate 263 and a position vertically below the first special winning opening 265. Further, the position where the second large winning opening 266 is formed is a position closer to the variable display unit 36 in the right area PA3 but to the right of the second through gate 264.

  A second special power winning device 262 is provided so as to prevent or allow game balls to enter the second large winning opening 266. The second special electric winning device 262 includes a second guide plate 281 provided at a position below the second big winning opening 266 so as to penetrate the game board 24 in the front-rear direction. The second guide plate 281 is provided so as to be movable in the front-rear direction by being driven by a driving unit (not shown), and has a blocking position where the amount of protrusion from the board of the game board 24 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is minimized. The pachinko machine 10 is slid forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the blocking position, and moves to a guide position where the amount of protrusion from the board of the game board 24 toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 is maximized.

  In the game board 24, a second ball receiving portion 282 is provided at a position above the right end of the second guide plate 281. Further, in the right area PA3, above the second special electric winning device 262, a first big win. A second guiding nail group 268 is provided to guide all of the game balls flowing below the first special electric winning device 261 to the second ball receiving portion 282 without winning the opening 265 and the first through gate 263. (See FIG. 78). The second guide nail group 268 is formed by arranging a plurality of nails 24b so as to be inclined downward to the right. The game balls that have flowed below the first special electric winning device 261 in the right area PA3 are all guided to the second ball receiving portion 282 by the second guiding nail group 268. The distance between the front end of the second ball receiving portion 282 and the window panel 52 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. The upper surface of the second ball receiving portion 282 is inclined downward toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the game ball reaching the upper surface of the second ball receiving portion 282 flows down toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 by its own weight.

  When the second guide plate 281 is disposed at the blocking position, the distance between the front end of the second guide plate 281 and the window panel 52 is larger than the diameter of the game ball, as in the case of the first guide plate 271. Large dimensions. In this blocking position, the front end of the second guide plate 281 is located on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 from the front end of the second ball receiving portion 282. Therefore, game balls that have reached the upper surface of the second ball receiving portion 282 while the second guide plate 281 is located at the blocking position basically pass through the space between the second ball receiving portion 282 and the window panel 52. It will fall below the second ball receiving portion 282. In addition, the game ball guided by the second guide nail group 268 bounces on the second ball receiving portion 282, so that the second guide plate 281 disposed at the blocking position is located on the pachinko machine 10 front side with respect to the board of the game board 24. It is also assumed that it is placed on the upper surface of the region projecting from On the other hand, the upper surface of a region of the second guide plate 281 disposed at the blocking position, which protrudes forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24, is inclined downward toward the front of the pachinko machine 10. . Therefore, even if a game ball is placed on the upper surface of the second guide plate 281 arranged at the blocking position, the game ball does not win the second large winning opening 266 and the second through gate 264 without being awarded to the second guide plate. 281 falls below the second guide plate 281 from between the front end of the window panel 52 and the window panel 52. With the above configuration, when the second guide plate 281 is disposed at the blocking position, the occurrence of a winning in the second big winning opening 266 is prevented and the occurrence of a winning in the second through gate 264 is prevented. Is done.

  When the second guide plate 281 is located at the guide position, as shown in FIG. 80A, the distance between the front end of the second guide plate 281 and the window panel 52 is smaller than the radius of the game ball. Also have small dimensions. In this guide position, the front end of the second guide plate 281 is located closer to the front of the pachinko machine 10 than the front end of the second ball receiver 282. Therefore, the game ball that has reached the upper surface of the second ball receiving portion 282 while the second guide plate 281 is located at the guide position protrudes forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24 on the second guide plate 281. On the upper surface of the region.

  On the upper surface of the protruding region 283 that protrudes forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24 when the second guiding plate 281 is located at the guiding position, a boundary portion for changing the inclination direction of the upper surface is provided. 284 are formed. With the boundary portion 284 as a boundary, the upper surface of the protruding region 283 is located on the first guiding region 285 existing in front of the second ball receiving portion 282 and on the left of the first guiding region 285 and has the second big prize. A second guiding region 286 leading to the mouth 266, and a third guiding region 287 left of the first guiding region 285 and in front of the second guiding region 286 and leading to the second through gate 264. I have. The upper surface of the first guidance area 285 is inclined downward toward the left. Further, the left end of the first guiding region 285 is in contact with both the right end of the second guiding region 286 and the right end of the third guiding region 287. Thereby, the game ball guided from the second ball receiving portion 282 to the first guiding region 285 flows down to the second guiding region 286 or the third guiding region 287 by its own weight. In this case, the range in which the left end of the first guiding region 285 is in contact with the right end of the second guiding region 286 is wider than the range in which the left end of the first guiding region 285 is in contact with the right end of the third guiding region 287. Therefore, a game ball guided by the first guidance region 285 is more likely to flow into the second guidance region 286 than the third guidance region 287. However, game balls guided by the first guidance region 285 flow into the third guidance region 287 at a predetermined frequency (for example, one out of seven).

  The second guide area 286 has an upper surface inclined downward toward the left rear so as to guide game balls placed on the upper surface of the second guide area 286 to the second special winning opening 266. Thereby, the game ball placed on the upper surface of the second guiding area 286 is likely to win the second big winning opening 266. The game ball that has won the second big winning opening 266 is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to the second big winning opening 266. This detection sensor is electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and the main CPU 63 specifies the presence or absence of a prize in the second big winning opening 266 based on the detection result of the detection sensor. In the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the round game or the small hit result in which the second special winning opening 266 is to be opened, it is specified that one game ball has entered the second special winning opening 266. In this case, the value of the winning counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by one. When the value of the prize counter becomes “0”, it is specified that a prize of the prize upper limit number has occurred as in the first embodiment, and the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the round game or the small hit result is set. Terminate.

  The third guidance area 287 is inclined downward toward the left. Here, when the second guide plate 281 is arranged at the guide position, the second guide plate 281 exists from the right end of the right area PA3 to the right end of the second through gate 264 in the lateral position. Will be done. As described above, the distance between the front end of the second guide plate 281 disposed at the guide position and the window panel 52 is smaller than the radius of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball placed on the upper surface of the third guiding region 287 flows down toward the second through gate 264 by its own weight unless it moves to the second guiding region 286 for some reason. You will win a prize. The game ball that has won the second through gate 264 is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to the second through gate 264. This detection sensor is electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and the main CPU 63 specifies whether or not the second through gate 264 has won based on the detection result of the detection sensor. Then, when it is specified that one game ball has entered the second through gate 264, it is determined that the upper limit of the general figure holding information is not stored in the general figure holding area 65c. The numerical value information of the random number counter C4 is stored in the general drawing holding area 65c as the general drawing holding information.

  With the above configuration, in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by a round game in which the second special power winning device 262 is controlled or a small hit result in which the second special power winning device 262 is controlled, the second guiding plate 281 is When the game ball is located at the guidance position, the game ball that has flowed into the right area PA3 is guided to one of the second special winning opening 266 and the second through gate 264 and the second special winning opening 266 and the second through gate 264. Winning of any one will surely occur. When a winning in the second big winning opening 266 occurs, the remaining number of the winning upper limit is subtracted by 1 and payout of 15 game balls as a specific number is executed as in the first embodiment. You. When a prize occurs in the second through gate 264, a trigger for acquiring the hold information on the general-purpose side occurs. Thus, when the second special power winning device 262 is to be controlled, the player can determine that both the winning at the second big winning opening 266 and the winning at the second through gate 264 occur. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Here, the first special power winning device 261 and the second special power winning device 262 are compared with each other with reference to FIGS. 80 (a) and 80 (b). FIG. 80 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. 78 as described above, and shows the second special electric winning device 262 when the second guide plate 281 is arranged at the guide position. FIG. 78A is a sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 78, and shows the first special electric winning device 261 when the first guide plate 271 is arranged at the guide position.

  As shown in FIGS. 80A and 80B, the size of the left end of the first guide region 275 in the first guide plate 271 is the same as the size of the left end of the first guide region 275 in the second guide plate 281. Or, they are almost the same. In this case, the ratio of the range in which the right end of the third guiding region 277 is in contact with the entire left end of the first guiding region 275 in the first guiding plate 271 is equal to the ratio of the first guiding region 285 in the second guiding plate 281. The ratio is larger than the ratio of the range in which the right end of the third guidance region 287 is in contact with the entire left end. Then, in the relationship with the configuration, when the first special power winning device 261 is in an open state (that is, when the first guide plate 271 is arranged at the guide position), a game placed on the upper surface of the first guide plate 271 is performed. The probability that the ball is guided to the first through gate 263 is such that the ball is guided to the second guide plate 281 when the second special power winning device 262 is in the open state (that is, when the second guide plate 281 is arranged at the guide position). The probability that the game ball placed on the upper surface is guided to the second through gate 264 is higher. Conversely, when the first special power winning device 261 is in an open state (that is, when the first guide plate 271 is located at the guide position), the game ball placed on the upper surface of the first guide plate 271 is placed in the first big win. The probability of being guided to the mouth 265 is that the game placed on the upper surface of the second guiding plate 281 when the second special power winning device 262 is in the open state (that is, when the second guiding plate 281 is arranged at the guiding position). It is lower than the probability that the ball is guided to the second big winning opening 266. Thereby, depending on the type of the special power winning device controlled as one of the first special power winning device 261 and the second special power winning device 262, it is easy to generate a winning in the special winning opening 265, 266 and the through gate 263. , 264 can be made different.

  As described above, the first group of guiding nails 267 is provided above the first special electric winning device 261, and the first group of guiding nails 267 is located at the right end of the variable display unit 36 and before the first ball receiving portion 272. It extends over it (see FIG. 78). On the other hand, the first through gate 263 is provided below the first guide nail group 267 and to the left of the first special electric winning device 261 in the right area PA3. Therefore, the game ball flowing into the right area PA3 does not win the first through gate 263 without passing through the area where the first special power winning device 261 is provided.

  On the other hand, the second guiding nail group 268 provided between the first special electric winning device 261 and the second special electric winning device 262 receives the game balls flowing below the first special electric winning device 261 into the second ball receiving portion 282. Although provided so as to guide, the second guide nail group 268 does not enter the first through gate 263 side from the left end of the first special electric winning device 261 (see FIG. 78). A second through gate 264 is provided at a position vertically below the first through gate 263, and the first through gate 263 is configured so that a game ball passes through a gate hole penetrating in the vertical direction. Therefore, the game ball that has won the first through gate 263 can also win the second through gate 264, and in addition, the game ball that has won the first through gate 263 can easily win the second through gate 264. When one game ball wins in the first through gate 263 and wins in the second through gate 264, it is necessary that the upper limit number of holding information of the general figure is not acquired in the general figure holding area 65c. Two pieces of hold information on the figure side are acquired. Therefore, also from this point, when the first special power winning device 261 is controlled, the hold information on the general-purpose side is more easily acquired than when the second special power winning device 262 is controlled.

  Next, the contents of the success / failure table in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. FIG. 81 (a) shows a low-probability table for the first special figure, FIG. 81 (b) shows a high-probability table for the first special figure, and FIG. 81 (c) shows a second table for the second special figure. FIG. 81 (d) shows a low-probability table for the second special map.

  As shown in FIG. 81A and FIG. 81B, as shown in FIG. 81A and FIG. 81B, the first special figure low-accuracy correctness table and the first special figure are similar to the first embodiment. And a high-probability table. Only the jackpot result and the missed result are set as the game results in the low-accuracy table for the first special map and the high-accuracy table for the first special map. The probability that the jackpot result is selected is set higher than that of the low likelihood determination table for the first special map.

  As shown in FIG. 81 (c) and FIG. 81 (d), as shown in FIG. 81 (c) and FIG. 81 (d), as shown in FIG. 81 (c) and FIG. 81 (d), as shown in FIG. And a high-accuracy table. In the low-accuracy table for the second special map and the high-accuracy table for the second special map, a big hit result, a first small hit result, and a second small hit result are set as game results. . The probability of the jackpot result being selected is set higher in the high-accuracy table for the second special figure than in the low-accuracy table for the second special figure. On the other hand, the probability of selecting one of the first small hit result and the second small hit result is set higher in the low-accuracy table for the second special figure than in the high-accuracy table for the second special figure. ing.

  Next, an execution mode of the open / close execution mode will be described. FIGS. 82 (a) and 82 (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining an execution mode of the open / close execution mode.

  In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, as a jackpot result, as shown in FIG. 82A, a 2R low-accuracy result, a 2R high-accuracy result, a 4R low-accuracy result, a 4R high-accuracy result, and a 6R There are a low accuracy result, a 6R high accuracy result, a 10R low accuracy result, a 10R high accuracy result, a 16R low accuracy result, and a 16R high accuracy result. The number of round games in the open / close execution mode, the maximum number of winning round games, the opening duration of each round game, and the interval period in the case of each of these jackpot results are the same as those in the first embodiment. On the other hand, the types of the special power winning devices 261 and 262 to be controlled in the open / close execution mode are different depending on the type of the jackpot result. Specifically, in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by one of the 2R high accuracy result, the 4R high accuracy result, the 6R high accuracy result, the 10R high accuracy result, and the 16R high accuracy result, the first special electric winning device in each round game. 261 is the control target, whereas in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by any of the 2R low-accuracy result, the 4R low-accuracy result, the 6R low-accuracy result, the 10R low-accuracy result, and the 16R low-accuracy result, each round game is executed. Thus, the second special power winning device 262 is controlled. As a result, the hold information on the general-purpose side is more easily obtained in the open / close execution mode when the result is high in accuracy than when the result is low in accuracy. On the other hand, winning in the large winning openings 265 and 266 is less likely to occur in the open / close execution mode in the case of the high accuracy result than in the case of the low accuracy result.

  Here, the opening continuation period of each round game is set to 29 seconds, and the winning upper limit number of each round game is set to 10. In this case, since the firing cycle of the game balls is 0.6 seconds, about 48 game balls can be supplied to the position of the first special electric prize device 261 before the opening duration of each round game elapses. On the other hand, as described above, three of the four game balls guided to the first guide region 275 of the first guide plate 271 in the first special electric winning device 261 are replaced with three first game winning holes 265. And one game ball wins the first through gate 263. Then, 36 of the 48 winning numbers, that is, 3/4, are calculated to be guided to the first big winning opening 265, and this number is larger than the winning upper limit number. Therefore, even if the first special power winning device 261 is the control target, the upper limit number of game balls can be won in the first big winning opening 265 in each round game. Incidentally, during the period in which the guide plates 271 and 281 of the special electric prize winning devices 261 and 262 are held at the guide positions in each round game, the game balls reaching the ball receiving portions 272 and 282 are guided to the corresponding through gates 263 and 264. Is set to a period longer than the minimum period required for the game ball to reach the corresponding through gates 263 and 264 from the left ends of the guide plates 271 and 281 after reaching the ball receiving portions 272 and 282. Have been.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a first small hit result and a second small hit result are set as small hit results as shown in FIG. 82 (b). The winning upper limit number, opening continuation period, opening count, and interval period in the opening / closing execution mode in the case of these small hit results are all the same. On the other hand, the types of the special power winning devices 261 and 262 to be controlled in the open / close execution mode are different depending on the type of the small hit result. Specifically, in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the first small hit result, the first special power winning device 261 is controlled, whereas in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second small hit result, the second special power winning device 261 is controlled. The winning device 262 is the control target. Thereby, the hold information on the general-purpose side is more easily obtained in the open / close execution mode when the first small hit result is obtained than when the second small hit result is obtained. On the other hand, winning in the large winning openings 265 and 266 in the opening / closing execution mode is less likely to occur in the first small hit result than in the second small hit result. By the way, during the period in which the guide plates 271 and 281 of the special electric winning devices 261 and 262 are held at the guide position in each opening and closing operation of the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result, the game ball that has reached the ball receiving units 272 and 282 When the game ball is guided to the corresponding through gate 263, 264, the game ball reaches the ball receiving portions 272, 282 and then falls from the left end of the guide plate 271, 281 toward the corresponding through gate 263, 264. The period is set longer than the minimum period required.

  FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the special power release setting process executed by the main CPU 63. The open setting process is executed in step S1608 of the special power start process (FIG. 42) and in step S1810 of the special power closing process (FIG. 44).

  First, it is determined whether or not the current control target is the first special power winning device 261 (step S4001). If the current opening / closing execution mode is triggered by any of the high accuracy results or the first small hit results, the first special power winning device 261 is a control target, and the current opening / closing execution mode is any of the low accuracy results or When the second small hit result is triggered, the second special power winning device 262 is a control target.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4001, the opening setting process of the first special power winning device 261 is executed (step S4002). Specifically, the driving signal is transmitted to the driving means of the first special power winning device 261 so that the first guide plate 271 of the first special power winning device 261 is located at the guiding position. On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S4001, the opening setting process of the second special power winning device 262 is executed (step S4003). Specifically, a drive signal is transmitted to the driving means of the second special power winning device 262 such that the second guide plate 281 of the second special power winning device 262 is located at the guidance position. As a result, the special power winning devices 261 and 262 corresponding to the big hit result or the small hit result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode are opened.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  Since the game balls can enter the through gates 263 and 264 when the special power prize devices 261 and 262 are open, the game is played when the special power prize devices 261 and 262 are open. The player expects both the winning in the special electric winning devices 261 and 262 and the winning in the through gates 263 and 264. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in a situation where the special power winning devices 261 and 262 are in the open state.

  The through gates 263 and 264 are game balls placed on the guide plates 271 and 272 arranged at the guide positions, and the games that flow down on the guide plates 271 and 272 to a side different from the side of the special winning opening 265 and 266. The ball is provided at a position where the ball can enter. As a result, the player's attention to the game balls placed on the guide plates 271 and 272 can be increased, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  The game balls flowing into the right area PA3 are guided to the right end sides of the guide plates 271 and 272 by the guide nail groups 267 and 268. In this case, the special winning openings 265 and 266 and the through gates 263 and 264 are provided on the left side of the guide plates 271 and 272. This allows the player to pay attention to the state in which the game balls flow down on the guide plates 271 and 272.

  The area of the guide plates 271 and 272 where the game ball can enter the through gates 263 and 264 is located to the left of the special winning openings 265 and 266, that is, in the downstream direction of the game ball on the guide plates 271 and 272. Exists on the side. As a result, the player's sense of disadvantage that the game balls placed on the guide plates 271 and 272 did not win in the special winning openings 265 and 266 may be changed, and conversely, the prize may be generated in the through gates 263 and 264. Can be changed to a sense of profit.

  A first special electric winning device 261 and a second special electric winning device 262 are provided as special electric winning devices 261 and 262, and a first through gate 263 and a second through gate 264 are provided as through gates 263 and 264. I have. Then, by being guided by the first guiding plate 271 of the first special electric winning device 261, it is possible to win the first through gate 263, and by being guided by the second guiding plate 272 of the second special electric winning device 262. Winning to the second through gate 264 becomes possible. In this case, by changing the types of the special power prize devices 261 and 262 to be subjected to the open / close control in the open / close execution mode, the percentage of game balls entering the special power prize devices 261 and 262 and the through gates 263 and 264, respectively. Can be made different.

  The probability that a game ball placed on the first guide plate 271 enters the first through gate 263 is different from the probability that a game ball placed on the second guide plate 272 enters the second through gate 264. . This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the special power winning devices 261 and 262 for which the opening / closing control is performed.

  For example, the types of the special power winning devices 261 and 262 to be subjected to the opening and closing control in the opening and closing execution mode are different between the 2R low accuracy result and the 2R high accuracy result. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the type of game result that triggers the execution of the open / close execution mode.

  The second through gate 264 is located downstream of the first through gate 263 in the downflow direction of the game ball. Accordingly, when the first special electric winning device 261 is subjected to the opening / closing control, not only can the game ball enter the first through gate 263, but also the game ball enters the second through gate 264. You will get. Therefore, a player who expects to acquire the hold information on the ordinary figure side expects that the first special power winning device 261 is to be subjected to the opening / closing control.

  Regardless of whether a game ball enters the first through gate 263 or a case where a game ball enters the second through gate 264, the same privilege of acquiring hold information on the general-purpose side is given. This makes it possible to suppress a disadvantage felt by the player even if the execution target of the opening / closing control is any of the first special power winning device 261 and the second special power winning device 262.

<Another form of the fifteenth embodiment>
A configuration may be adopted in which the types of the special power winning devices 261 and 262 to be subjected to the opening / closing control are changed during the one opening / closing execution mode. This makes it possible to change the ratio of the expected ball entry rate between the special winning openings 265 and 266 and the through gates 263 and 264 during the opening and closing execution mode.

  The game ball that has entered the first through gate 263 is not limited to the configuration in which the game ball that has entered the first through gate 263 can enter the second through gate 264. The configuration may be such that it is impossible to enter the ball, and the game ball entered into the second through gate 264 is not allowed to enter the first through gate 263.

  -Although the structure which does not provide the member which opens and closes the special winning opening 265,266 directly is provided, it is good also as a structure which provides the member which directly opens and closes the special winning opening 265,266. For example, when the first guide plate 271 is arranged at the blocking position, the first guide plate 271 faces the first large winning opening 265 at a position close to the first large winning opening 265 so as to cover the first large winning opening 265 from the front. When the 271 is located at the guiding position, a portion on the first guiding plate 271 which is a position which does not hinder the flow of the game ball toward the first winning port 265 or the first through gate 263 is the first guiding plate. The configuration provided on the plate 271 may be adopted. In this case, it is possible to prevent a game ball from entering the first big winning opening 265 in a situation where the first guide plate 271 is arranged at the blocking position.

<Sixteenth Embodiment>
In the first embodiment, the through gate 35 is provided below the special electric winning device 32, and when the opening / closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in a situation where the game ball is placed on the guide plate portion 214. Although the configuration is such that the game ball can win the through gate 35, in the present embodiment, the through gate 35 is not provided below the special power winning device 32, and two special power winning devices 32 are arranged vertically. Is established. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 84 is a front view of the game board 24 in the present embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, the through gate 35 is provided in the left area PA2 of the game area PA. The frequency of entering the game balls is constant regardless of the game state. Further, when the shooting operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, the game ball can reach the position where the second operation port 34 is provided. Therefore, when the game ball is fired so as to flow down the left area PA2, winning in the through gate 35 becomes possible, and the second operating port 34 is opened when the winning in the through gate 35 is triggered. When it is in the state, it is possible to win the second operation port 34.

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, a low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode are set as the support modes for controlling the state of the general purpose accessory 34a of the second operating port 34. In the low frequency support mode, the frequency of the general electric role product 34a not being opened or the frequency of the general electric role product 34a being opened is relatively low. Relatively high. If the result is low, the support mode after the completion of the opening and closing execution mode becomes the low frequency support mode, and if the result becomes high, the support mode after the completion of the opening and closing execution mode becomes the high frequency support mode. .

  In the right area PA3, two special electric winning devices 32 are vertically arranged side by side. The special electric winning device 32 includes a passage forming body 201, an opening / closing member 202, and a guide member 203 as in the first embodiment. When the opening / closing member 202 is located at the closed position, it is impossible for game balls to enter the fourth discharge passage 45 and pass through the opening 213 (see FIG. 30) formed in the opening / closing member 202. As a result, the game ball flows down below the special electric winning device 32. When the opening / closing member 202 is located at the open position, the game ball can be placed on the guide plate 214 of the opening / closing member 202, and the game ball placed on the guide plate 214 is moved to the fourth discharge passage. The ball can enter the part 45. In the following description, the upper special power winning device 32 is referred to as a first special power winning device 291, and the lower special power winning device 32 is referred to as a second special power winning device 292.

  The first special power winning device 291 extends from the right end of the variable display unit 36 to the right end of the game area PA above the second special power winning device 292. In the right side area PA3, a guide nail group 241 is provided on the upstream side of the first special power winning device 291 as in the first embodiment. Thereby, the game balls flowing down the right area PA3 are guided by the guide nail group 241 to the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203 in the first special electric winning device 291. Then, the game ball guided to the receiving portion 231 reaches the right end of the opening / closing member 202. In this case, when the opening / closing member 202 of the first special power-winning device 291 is arranged at the open position and the first special power-winning device 291 is in the open state, the game ball flowing into the right area PA3 is in the first position. It is basically prevented from flowing below the special special winning device 291, and when the opening / closing member 202 of the first special special winning device 291 is disposed in the closed position and the first special winning device 291 is in the closed state. Is allowed to allow the game balls flowing into the right area PA3 to flow below the first special electric winning device 291.

  The second special power winning device 292 extends from the right end of the variable display unit 36 to the right end of the game area PA. In the right area PA3, a lower guiding nail group 293 is provided between the first special power winning device 291 and the second special power winning device 292. The lower guiding nail group 293 is formed from the passage forming body 201 side of the first special power winning device 291 so as to guide the game ball flowing below the first special power winning device 291 to the right end side of the second special power winning device 292. It is formed by arranging a plurality of nails 24b to the lower right over the right end side of the two special electric winning device 292. As a result, the game balls flowing below the first special power winning device 291 are guided by the lower guiding nail group 293 to the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203 in the second special power winning device 292. Then, the game ball guided to the receiving portion 231 reaches the right end of the opening / closing member 202. In this case, when the opening / closing member 202 of the second special power winning device 292 is disposed at the open position and the second special power winning device 292 is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed into the right area PA3 is in the second position. It is basically prevented from flowing down below the special special winning device 292, and when the opening / closing member 202 of the second special special winning device 292 is arranged in the closed position and the second special winning device 292 is in the closed state. Is allowed to allow the game balls flowing into the right area PA3 to flow below the second special electric winning device 292.

  FIG. 85 (a) is a flowchart showing a special power release setting process executed by the main CPU 63. The special power release setting process is executed in step S1608 of the special power start process (FIG. 42) and in step S1810 of the special power closing process (FIG. 44).

  In the special power setting process, first, the first power winning device 291 is set (step S4101). In the opening setting process, data setting is performed so that the first special power winning device 291 is in an open state. Subsequently, an opening setting process of the second special power winning device 292 is executed (step S4102). In the opening setting process, data setting is performed so that the second special power winning device 292 is in an open state. Thereby, the first special power winning device 291 and the second special power winning device 292 are opened at the same time or almost simultaneously. That is, in the present embodiment, at the start of each round game in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the big hit result, and in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result, each open / close execution mode of the special prize winning devices 291 and 292 is set. At the start, both the first special power winning device 291 and the second special power winning device 292 are open.

  FIG. 85B is a flowchart showing a special power closing setting process executed by the main CPU 63. The special power closing setting processing is executed in step S1704 of the special power opening processing (FIG. 43).

  In the closing setting process for special power, first, the closing setting process of the first special power winning device 291 is executed (step S4201). In the closing setting process, data setting is performed so that the first special power winning device 291 is in the closed state. Subsequently, the second special power winning device 292 is closed (step S4202). In the closing setting process, data setting for setting the second special power winning device 292 to a closed state is performed. As a result, the first special power winning device 291 and the second special power winning device 292 are closed at the same time or almost simultaneously. That is, in this embodiment, at the end of each round game in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the big hit result, and in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result, each opening / closing execution mode of the special electric prize winning devices 291 and 292 is executed. At the end, both the first special power winning device 291 and the second special power winning device 292 are closed.

  By the way, although the explanation by the illustration is omitted, in the special power opening process (FIG. 43), if the game ball has won one of the first special power winning device 291 and the second special power winning device 292, it is determined in step S1706. Make an affirmative decision. In this case, if a winning has occurred simultaneously in the first special power winning device 291 and the second special power winning device 292, the value of the winning counter is subtracted by 2 in step S1707, and a winning occurs in either one. If yes, the value of the winning counter is decremented by one in step S1707. In addition, in the special power closing process (FIG. 44), if it is a small hit result, and if the game ball has won one of the first special power winning device 291 and the second special power winning device 292, the process proceeds to step S1801. Make an affirmative decision. In this case, if a winning has occurred simultaneously in the first special power winning device 291 and the second special power winning device 292, the value of the winning counter is subtracted by 2 in step S1802, and a winning occurs in either one. If yes, the value of the winning counter is decremented by one in step S1802.

  Next, how the first special power winning device 291 and the second special power winning device 292 are opened and closed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 86 (a) shows the execution period of the round game, FIG. 86 (b) shows the period when the first special power winning device 291 is in the open state, and FIG. 86 (c) shows the time when the second special power winning device 292 is FIG. 86 (d) shows a period during which the game ball placed on the guide plate 214 of the first special winning device 291 reaches the guide plate 214 of the second special winning device 292. Indicates the shortest period that is assumed as the required period.

  As shown in FIG. 86 (a), the round game is executed at each of the timing from t1 to t2, the timing from t3 to t5, and the timing from t6 to t8. In this case, as shown in FIG. 86 (b) and FIG. 86 (c), at each of the timing of t1, the timing of t3, and the timing of t6, both the first special power winning device 291 and the second special power winning device 292 simultaneously. At the timing of t2, the timing of t5, and the timing of t8, both the first special power winning device 291 and the second special power winning device 292 are simultaneously closed.

  In this configuration, it is assumed that the game ball is placed on the guide plate 214 of the opening / closing member 202 of the first special power winning device 291 at the timing of t2 and the timing of t5 when the first special power winning device 291 is closed. Is done. This game ball will fall downward without winning the first special electric winning device 291. In this case, the shortest period assumed as a period required for the game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 of the first special power winning device 291 to reach the guide plate portion 214 of the second special power winning device 292 is determined by each special power winning device. The distance between the first special power winning device 291 and the second special power winning device 292 is set so as to be longer than the interval period between one opening time of the winning devices 291 and 292 and the next opening time. Have been. Further, as described above, the lower guiding nail group 293 is provided between the first special power winning device 291 and the second special power winning device 292, and the game balls flowing below the first special power winning device 291 are provided. By lowering the inclination on the lower guide nail group 293 by its own weight, it reaches the position of the second special electric winning device 292. Thereby, the period required for the game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 of the first special power winning device 291 to reach the guide plate portion 214 of the second special power winning device 292 is shorter than when the game ball falls vertically. It has been for a long time.

  With the above configuration, the game ball dropped from the guide plate portion 214 of the first special power winning device 291 toward the second special power winning device 292 at the timing of t2 is shown in FIGS. 86 (c) and 86 (d). As shown, the second special power winning device 292 reaches the second special power winning device 292 at a timing t4, which is a timing later than the timing t3 when the second special power winning device 292 is again opened. Further, at the timing of t5, the game ball that has fallen from the guide plate portion 214 of the first special power winning device 291 toward the second special power winning device 292, as shown in FIG. 86 (c) and FIG. 86 (d), At the timing t7, which is a timing later than the timing t6 when the second special power winning device 292 is again opened, the second special power winning device 292 is reached.

  In each round game, when the first special power winning device 291 is in the closed state, the number of game balls placed on the guide plate 214 of the first special power winning device 291 is at most about two less than the winning upper limit number. . Therefore, the second special power prize device 292 is not closed before the game ball dropped from the first special power prize device 291 wins the second special power prize device 292.

  According to the above-described configuration, in the configuration in which the first special power-winning device 291 and the second special power-winning device 292 are vertically arranged in the right area PA3, the first special power-winning device 291 is provided at each opening time in the open / close execution mode. A period occurs in which both the second special power winning device 292 and the second special power winning device 292 are in the open state. As a result, a game ball that failed to enter the first special power winning device 291 in the open state can enter the second special power winning device 292 in the open state. Therefore, in the open / close execution mode, it is difficult to cause a ball to leak into the special power winning devices 291 and 292.

  At the timing when each opening round ends, a game ball that has not reached the first special telephone winning apparatus 291 despite reaching the position of the first special telephone winning apparatus 291 in the next opening round. The first special power winning device 291 and the second special power winning device 292 are provided so as to be able to enter the second special power winning device 292. As a result, a game ball that has leaked into the first special power winning device 291 at a predetermined opening time can enter the second special power winning device 292 at the next opening time, and the special power winning device 291 in the open / close execution mode. It is difficult for a ball to leak into the 292.

  In one open / close execution mode, a period from the end of a predetermined opening round to the start of the next opening round is a period in which a game ball reaches from the position of the first special winning device 291 to the position of the second special winning device 292. The period is set to be shorter than the period required for the operation. Thus, a game ball that has leaked into the first special power winning device 291 at a predetermined opening time can enter the second special power winning device 292 at the next opening time. In addition, it is possible to realize such a configuration that it is difficult to cause a ball entry leak by adjusting the positional relationship between the first special power winning device 291 and the second special power winning device 292.

  In the above configuration, when the opening / closing member 202 of the first special electric winning device 291 is disposed at the open position, the inflow of the game ball to the downstream side from the opening / closing member 202 is prevented, and the second special electric winning prize is provided. When the opening / closing member 202 of the device 292 is arranged at the open position, the inflow of the game ball downstream of the opening / closing member 202 is prevented. Then, when each opening round is started, the first special telephone winning apparatus 291 and the second special telephone winning apparatus 292 are simultaneously opened, and when each opening round is completed, the first special telephone winning apparatus 291 and the second special telephone winning apparatus 291 are connected. The winning device 292 is simultaneously closed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls that are discharged to the out opening 24a without winning the special power winning devices 291 and 292 in the open / close execution mode.

  The first special power winning device 291 and the second special power winning device 292 are simultaneously opened and simultaneously closed. As a result, it is possible to achieve the above-described excellent effects while suppressing an increase in the processing load for controlling the opening and closing of the special power winning devices 291 and 292.

<Another embodiment of the sixteenth embodiment>
The first special electric winning device 291 and the second special electric winning device 292 are not limited to the configuration in which they are opened at the same time at the start of each opening round, but are distinguished by the appearance although the opening timing is slightly different. It may be configured to be almost the same to the extent that it is difficult to perform, or may be configured to differ in the timing of the open state so that it can be visually identified. In this configuration, in order to allow a game ball that has leaked into the first special power prize device 291 to enter the second special power prize device 292, the timing at which the second special power prize device 292 is opened is determined by the timing of the first special power prize device. It is preferable that the timing be before the timing when the device 291 is opened.

  The first special electric winning device 291 and the second special electric winning device 292 are not limited to the configuration in which they are simultaneously closed at the end of each opening cycle, but are distinguished by the appearance although the timing of being closed is slightly different. It may be configured to be substantially the same to the extent that it is difficult to perform, or may be configured to differ in the timing of the closed state so that it can be visually identified.

  When the first special power winning device 291 is in an open state, the configuration may be such that a game ball flowing down the right area PA3 is reliably prevented from flowing downstream of the first special power winning device 291. For example, like the guide plates 271 and 281 in the fifteenth embodiment, the opening / closing member 202 has a plate shape without the opening 213, and when the opening / closing member 202 is disposed in the closed position, the opening / closing member 202 becomes a game board. When the game board 24 is disposed at the open position, the opening / closing member 202 may be provided between the game board 24 and the window panel 52. Accordingly, when the first special power-winning device 291 is in the open state, except for the game ball placed on the opening / closing member 202 at the timing when the first special power-winning device 291 switches from the open state to the closed state, the right side The game ball flowing down in the area PA3 will surely win the first special power winning device 291.

  Further, in addition to or instead of the above configuration, when the second special power winning device 292 is in the open state, it is ensured that the game ball flowing down the right area PA3 flows downstream of the second special power winning device 292. May be prevented. For example, like the guide plates 271 and 281 in the fifteenth embodiment, the opening / closing member 202 has a plate shape without the opening 213, and when the opening / closing member 202 is disposed in the closed position, the opening / closing member 202 becomes a game board. When the game board 24 is disposed at the open position, the opening / closing member 202 may be provided between the game board 24 and the window panel 52. Accordingly, when the second special power-winning device 292 is in the open state, the right side when the second special power-winning device 292 is in the open state at the timing when the second special power-winning device 292 switches from the open state to the closed state, except for the game ball placed on the opening / closing member 202. The game ball flowing down in the area PA3 will surely win the second special power winning device 292.

  The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the lower guiding nail group 293 is provided between the first special power winning device 291 and the second special power winning device 292, and the lower guiding nail group 293 is not provided. It is good also as composition. Even in this case, the game ball reaches the distance between the first special winning device 291 and the second special winning device 292 from the position of the first special winning device 291 to the position of the second special winning device 292. By setting such that the shortest time required before is longer than the interval time between the opening times of the special power winning devices 291 and 292, the game balls that have leaked into the first special power winning device 291 can be removed by the second special power winning device 291. It is possible to make the ball enter the special prize winning device 292.

<Seventeenth embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the above-described sixteenth embodiment in the configuration for allowing all the game balls flowing down the right area PA3 in the open / close execution mode to win the special power prize device. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the sixteenth embodiment is basically omitted. In this embodiment, there is no small hit result.

  FIG. 87 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the game board 24 for explaining the configuration of the special electric winning devices 301 and 302 in the present embodiment.

  In the right area PA3 of the game board 24, a first special power winning device 301 and a second special power winning device 302 are vertically arranged side by side. Each of the special winning devices 301 and 302 has large winning openings 301a and 302a through which game balls can enter, and has opening and closing doors 301b and 302b for opening and closing the special winning openings 301a and 302a. The doors 301b and 302b can be switched between an open position and a closed position by being driven by special power drive units 301c and 302c. When the doors 301b and 302b are located at the closed position, game balls cannot enter the special winning openings 301a and 302a, and when the doors 301b and 302b are located at the open positions, a large prize is won. Game balls can enter the mouths 301a and 302a. Game balls that have entered the special winning openings 301a and 302a are detected by the detection sensors 301d and 302d. Even in the present embodiment, as in the sixteenth embodiment, at the start of the round game, both the first special power winning device 301 and the second special power winning device 302 are simultaneously opened, and at the end of the round game, the first special power winning device 301 is opened. Both the winning device 301 and the second special power winning device 302 are simultaneously closed.

  Although not shown in the present embodiment, when the first special power winning device 301 is in an open state, it is ensured that the game balls flowing into the right area PA3 win the first special power winning device 301. In the right area PA3, an area upstream of the first special power winning device 301 is set. Also, the game ball that has flowed below the first special power winning device 301 is located in the right area so that the second special power winning device 302 can be reliably won if the second special power winning device 302 is open at that time. In PA3, an area between the first special power winning device 301 and the second special power winning device 302 is set.

  In the right side area PA3, a flow-down preventing member 303 is provided between the first special power winning device 301 and the second special power winning device 302. The flow-down preventing member 303 is driven by the blocking drive unit 304 to be movable between a retreat position where it does not protrude forward from the board of the game board 24 and a blocking position which protrudes forward from the board of the game board 24. ing. When the downflow prevention member 303 is located at the evacuation position, the game ball that has flowed downward below the first special power winning device 301 is directed to the second special power winning device 302 without being disturbed by the downflow prevention member 303. Flow down. On the other hand, when the downflow prevention member 303 is located at the prevention position, all the game balls flowing down to the first special power winning device 301 are placed on the upper surface of the downflow prevention member 303, and the second special power winning device 302 It is prevented from flowing down to the side.

  FIG. 88 is a flow chart showing the flow-down prevention control processing executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the flow-down prevention control process is repeatedly executed in the open / close execution mode.

  When the current round game is a different round game from the final round game (step S4301: YES), and the blocking start period (specifically, 2 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the current round game. (Step S4302: YES), a drive control process for starting blocking is executed (step S4303). Thereby, the downflow prevention member 303 is arranged from the retreat position to the prevention position. Note that the blocking start period is set to a period shorter than the product of the firing cycle of the game balls (specifically, 0.6 seconds) and the winning upper limit number of each round game (specifically, 10). The round game does not end before the blocking start period elapses.

  When a negative determination is made in step S4301, when a negative determination is made in step S4302, or when the process of step S4303 is performed, a blocking end period (specifically, one second) elapses from the start timing of the round game. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (step S4304). If an affirmative determination is made in step S4304, a drive control process for blocking termination is executed (step S4305). As a result, the downflow prevention member 303 is arranged at the retreat position from the prevention position. Note that the blocking end period is set to a period shorter than the blocking start period.

  Next, the relationship between the open / close state of each of the special electric winning devices 301 and 302 and the operating position of the downflow prevention member 303 will be described. FIG. 89 is a time chart for explaining the relationship. FIG. 89 (a) shows the execution period of the round game, FIG. 89 (b) shows the period when the first special power winning device 301 is in the open state, and FIG. 89 (c) shows the time when the second special power winning device 302 is used. FIG. 89 (d) shows a period in which the flow-down preventing member 303 is located at the blocking position. FIGS. 90 (a) to 90 (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the relationship between the open / close state of each of the special electric winning devices 301 and 302 and the operating position of the flow-down preventing member 303. The case of the open / close execution mode in which three round games occur will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 89 (a), the first round game is executed at the timing of t1. At the timing of the time t1, as shown in FIGS. 89 (b) and 89 (c), the first special power winning device 301 and the second special power winning device 302 are simultaneously opened. In this case, as shown in FIG. 90 (c), both the first special power winning device 301 and the second special power winning device 302 are in the open state, and the flow preventing member 303 is in the retracted position.

  At timing t2 when the inhibition start period has elapsed from timing t1 when the first round game is started, the flow-down inhibiting member 303 is arranged from the retreat position to the inhibition position as shown in FIG. 89 (d). In this case, as shown in FIG. 90 (a), both the first special power winning device 301 and the second special power winning device 302 are in the open state, and the downflow prevention member 303 is located at the prevention position.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t3, the first round game ends as shown in FIG. 89 (a). At the timing of t3, as shown in FIGS. 89 (b) and 89 (c), the first special power winning device 301 and the second special power winning device 302 are simultaneously closed. However, even in this situation, the state in which the downflow prevention member 303 is arranged at the prevention position is maintained. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 90 (b), both the first special power winning device 301 and the second special power winning device 302 are in the closed state, and the state in which the flow-down preventing member 303 is disposed at the blocking position is set. As a result, the game balls passing in front of the first special power-winning device 301 at the timing when the first special power-winning device 301 is closed and the game balls passing in front of the first special power-winning device 301 in the interval period flow down. Further falling down on the upper surface of the blocking member 303 is prevented.

  Then, at the timing of t4, the next round game is started as shown in FIG. 89 (a), and at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 89 (b) and FIG. The device 301 and the second special power winning device 302 are simultaneously opened. In this case, as shown in FIG. 90 (a), both the first special power winning device 301 and the second special power winning device 302 are in the open state, and the downflow prevention member 303 is located at the prevention position.

  After that, the blocking end period elapses after the round game is started at the timing of t5, so that the flow-down preventing member 303 is arranged from the blocking position to the retracted position as shown in FIG. 89 (d). In this case, as shown in FIG. 90 (c), both the first special power winning device 301 and the second special power winning device 302 are in the open state, and the flow preventing member 303 is in the retracted position. As a result, the game balls placed on the upper surface of the flow preventing member 303 start to flow downward, and all the game balls win the second special power winning device 302.

  After that, the same operation as the timing from t2 to t5 is repeated at the timing from t6 to t9. Then, at the timing of t10, as shown in FIG. 89 (a), the last round game ends. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 89 (b) and 89 (c), the first special power winning device 301 and the second special power winning device 302 are simultaneously closed. Further, as shown in FIG. 89 (d), the flow-down preventing member 303 is located at the retracted position.

  According to the present embodiment described above, even if a ball leaks into the first special power winning device 301, the inflow of the leaked game ball to the downstream side is prevented by the downflow prevention member 303. Then, in a state where the second special power winning device 302 is in an open state, the blocking by the flow-down preventing member 303 is released, so that the game ball that has been prevented from flowing into the downstream side by the flow-down preventing member 303 is removed. The ball will enter the second special power winning device 302. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a ball leakage into the special power winning devices 301 and 302 in the open / close execution mode.

<Eighteenth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the position where the combination of the special electric winning device 32 and the through gate 35 is provided is different from that of the first embodiment. In addition, a ball entry unit that triggers the acquisition of the hold information on the ordinary figure side is provided in addition to the through gate 35. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 91 is a front view of the game board 24 in the present embodiment.

  In the above-described first embodiment, a combination of the special electric winning device 32 and the through gate 35 is provided in the right area PA3 of the gaming area PA. In the present embodiment, the special electric winning apparatus 32 is provided in the left area PA2 of the gaming area PA. A combination with the through gate 35 is provided. The configuration of the special electric winning device 32 is the same as that of the first embodiment except that the positional relationship between the left and right is reversed. That is, the special electric winning device 32 extends from the left end of the left area PA2 to the left end of the center frame 36a at a middle position in the vertical direction of the left area PA2, and is a passage forming body in which the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is formed. 201 is provided on the left frame portion 36d of the center frame 36a, and the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203 is located at the left end of the left area PA2. The upper surface of the guide plate 214 of the opening / closing member 202 is inclined downward to the right. The game balls flowing down the left area PA2, except for the game balls entering the entrance 36e of the warp passage, reach the area where the special electric winning device 32 is provided.

  In the left area PA2, a plurality of nails 24b are arranged above the special electric winning device 32, so that a guide nail group 241 is provided. The guide nail group 241 guides the game balls that have flowed into the left area PA2 and have not entered the entrance portion 36e of the warp passage to the receiving portion 231. As a result, the game ball flowing down the left area PA2 and reaching the special prize winning device 32 is first guided to the receiving portion 231 and then reaches the left end of the opening / closing member 202. When the opening / closing member 202 is located at the open position, the upper surface of the guide plate 214 of the opening / closing member 202 can be turned rightward to win the fourth discharge passage portion 45. On the other hand, when the opening / closing member 202 is located at the closed position, it flows down below the opening / closing member 202 through the opening 213 (see FIG. 30) of the opening / closing member 202. Further, even when the open / close member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position while the game ball rests on the guide plate portion 214, the game ball flows down from the rest position to below the open / close member 202.

  In the left area PA2, a through gate 35 is provided at a position below the special winning award device 32 and near the center frame 36a. Further, between the special winning award device 32 and the through gate 35, a control nail group 242 for guiding game balls existing in a predetermined range on the guide plate portion 214 on the right side to the through gate 35 is provided. . Accordingly, when the opening / closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in a state where the game ball exists in the predetermined range on the right side on the guide plate portion 214, the game ball wins the through gate 35. It becomes. Then, when a prize is generated in the through gate 35, as in the case of the first embodiment described above, on the condition that the upper limit number of general-purpose-side reservation information is not stored in the general-purpose reservation area 65c on hold. Side's hold information is obtained.

  In the present embodiment, a sudden gate 311 is provided in addition to the through gate 35 as a ball entry unit that triggers the acquisition of the hold information on the ordinary figure side. The burst gate 311 is provided above the guide nail group 241 in the left area PA2. When a prize is awarded to the sudden gate 311, as in the case where a prize is awarded to the through gate 35, the upper limit of the general-purpose side hold information is not stored in the general-purpose reserve area 65 c. The hold information on the ordinary figure side is acquired on condition of. Note that the sudden gate 311 has a through gate that penetrates in the vertical direction similarly to the through gate 35, and the winning game ball continues to flow down the game area PA as it is, but is not limited thereto. The game ball that has won the sudden gate 311 without being thrown out may be discharged to the back side of the game board 24.

  Here, a restriction nail 312 is provided on the upstream side of the sudden gate 311 so as to make it difficult for a prize to occur in the sudden gate 311. By the provision of the restriction nail 312, the probability that the game ball flowing down the left area PA2 will win the sudden gate 311 is the probability that the game ball supplied to the lower area PA4 will win the first operating port 33. Lower than the probability. The probability that the game ball flowing down the left area PA2 will win the sudden gate 311 is lower than the probability that the game ball flowing below the special winning device 32 in the left area PA2 wins the general winning opening 31. Has become. Further, the probability that a game ball flowing down the left area PA2 will win the sudden gate 311 is lower than the probability that a game ball wins in the special power prize device 32 when the special prize device 32 is open. In addition, the probability is lower than the probability that the game ball wins the through gate 35 in the open / close execution mode. The probability that a game ball flowing down the left area PA2 will win the sudden gate 311 is greater than the probability that a game ball will win the second operation port 34 when the second operation port 34 is open. It has a low probability. For example, when 1000 game balls flow into the left area PA2, there is a probability that one game ball can win the sudden start gate 311.

  By the way, in the present embodiment, when the hold information on the general-purpose side is acquired, the general-use open state is reliably generated by using the hold information on the general-purpose side. In other words, when a prize occurs in the through gate 35 or the sudden gate 311 and the hold information on the general-purpose side is acquired, the second operating port 34 is reliably opened thereafter. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of advantage with respect to the acquisition of the hold information on the general-purpose side.

  Even if the special electric winning device 32, the through gate 35, and the sudden gate 311 are provided in the left area PA2 as described above, a game ball flowing down the left area PA2 does not win the special electric winning apparatus 32. And flows into the lower area PA4. The game ball that has flowed into the lower area PA4 can reach a position where it can win the first operating port 33, and wins the second operating port 34 if the second operating port 34 is open. Possible positions can be reached. Further, the player can reach a position where the general winning opening 31 can be won. Thus, by continuing the firing operation of the game ball so as to flow down the left area PA2, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, the through gate 35, and the sudden start It is possible to aim for a prize for all of the gates 311.

  On the other hand, although the nail 24b is provided in the right area PA3, the ball entry portion is not provided. The game balls flowing down the right area PA3 flow into the lower area PA4, and the flown game balls can reach a position where the first operating port 33 can win a prize, and the second operating port 34 is in an open state. If so, it is possible to reach a position where the second operating port 34 can win a prize. In this case, because of the fact that the ball entry portion is not provided in the right area PA3 as described above, the firing operation is performed so as to flow down the right area PA3 as compared with the case where the firing operation is performed so as to flow down the left area PA2. Is performed, winning is more likely to occur in the open second operation port 34. Thereby, for example, when a prize is awarded to the sudden gate 311 and the open state of the second operating port 34 is suddenly generated, the game ball is fired so as to flow down the right area PA3. It becomes possible to easily generate a prize to the second operation port 34.

  FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the process of acquiring the hold information on the general figure executed by the main CPU 63. It should be noted that the process of acquiring the hold information on the general-purpose side is executed in step S1101 in the general-purpose general-purpose control process (FIG. 37).

  When a prize has occurred in the through gate 35 (step S4401: YES), and the number of reserved information on the general figure side stored in the general figure reserved area 65c is less than the upper limit storage number (step S4402: YES) ), The main CPU 63 adds 1 to the value of the general drawing holding counter provided in the main RAM 65 so that the main CPU 63 can grasp the number of unprocessed general drawing holding information stored in the general drawing holding area 65c. (Step S4403). Incidentally, the display content of the general-purpose drawing display section 38b of the general-purpose unit 38 is adjusted according to the value of the general-purpose holding counter. As a result, the display content of the general-purpose reservation display section 38b corresponds to the number of the general-purpose-side reservation information stored in the general-purpose reservation area 65c. After that, the value of the general-purpose random number counter C4 is stored in the first storage area of the general-purpose reserved area 65c, that is, the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number obtained by adding 1 in step S4403 (step S4404).

  After that, a general-purpose hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S4405). When the voice light emission control device 81 receives the general drawing hold command, it transmits a corresponding command to the display control device 82. In the symbol display device 41, an image is displayed for notifying the number of hold information on the general figure side stored in the general figure hold area 65c, and the display control device 82 displays a command corresponding to the general figure hold command. Upon reception, the content of the image display is updated to the content corresponding to the increase of the number of the hold information on the general-purpose side by one. In addition, when the change display of the picture on the general figure display unit 38a triggered by the general figure side hold information is started, the content of the image display corresponds to the decrease in the number of the general figure side hold information by one. The content is updated.

  The display contents of the symbol display device 41 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. On the lower surface of the display surface of the symbol display device 41, a first reserved display area 313 for notifying the number of the first reserved information stored in the first special figure reserved area 85, and a second special figure. A second hold display area 314 for notifying the number of second hold information stored in the hold area 86 is set. In the first reserved display area 313, the same number of unit display areas as the number of the first reserved information that can be stored in the first special figure reserved area 85 are juxtaposed in the horizontal direction, and the number of the first reserved information increases. , The reserved images 315 are sequentially displayed from the left unit display area, and the reserved images 315 are sequentially deleted from the right unit display area as the number of the first reserved information decreases. In the second reserved display area 314, the same number of unit display areas as the number of second reserved information that can be stored in the second special figure reserved area 86 are juxtaposed in the horizontal direction. The reserved images 315 are displayed sequentially from the left unit display area as the number increases, and the reserved images 315 are sequentially deleted from the right unit display area as the number of the second reserved information decreases. Since the first hold display area 313 is set, the number of the first hold information can be clearly grasped through the display content of the symbol display device 41, and the second hold display area 314 is set. Thereby, the number of the second suspension information can be clearly grasped through the display content of the symbol display device 41.

  In the upper left corner of the display surface of the symbol display device 41, a general-purpose display display area 316 for notifying the number of the general-purpose side reserved information stored in the general-purpose storage area 65c is set. I have. The same number of unit display areas as the number of hold information on the general figure side that can be stored in the general figure hold area 65c are arranged side by side in the general figure hold display area 316. The reserved images 315 are displayed in order from the left unit display area as the number increases, and the reserved images 315 are sequentially deleted from the right unit display area as the number of pieces of the reserved information on the general figure side decreases. By setting the general-figure hold display area 316, the number of hold information on the general-figure side can be clearly grasped through the display content of the symbol display device 41.

  Note that the display control device 82 increases the number of the reserved images 315 to be displayed in the general-purpose reserved display area 316 by one when receiving a command corresponding to the general-purpose reserved command. Further, the display control device 82 transmits the command indicating that the variation display of the pattern on the general-purpose display section 38a has been started from the main CPU 63 to the audio light emission control device 81, and transmits the command from the audio light emission control device 81. When the received command is received, the number of the reserved images 315 displayed in the general-purpose reserved display area 316 is reduced by one.

  Returning to the description of the process of acquiring the hold information on the general-purpose side (FIG. 92), if a negative determination is made in step S4401, a negative determination is made in step S4402, or if the process of step S4405 is performed, A prize is awarded to the sudden gate 311 (step S4406: YES), and furthermore, the condition is that the number of hold information on the general figure side stored in the general figure hold area 65c is less than the upper limit storage number ( Step S4407: YES), add 1 to the value of the general-purpose drawing counter in the main RAM 65 (step S4408). As described above, the display content of the general-purpose drawing display unit 38b in the general-purpose unit 38 is adjusted according to the value of the general-purpose holding counter. After that, the value of the general-purpose random number counter C4 is stored in the first storage area of the general-purpose reserved area 65c, that is, the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number obtained by adding 1 in step S4408 (step S4409).

  Thereafter, if the current state is the opening / closing execution mode (step S4410: YES), or if the current state is not the opening / closing execution mode but the value of the general drawing hold counter of the main RAM 65 is 2 or more, that is, the general drawing holding area 65c is displayed. If two or more pieces of hold information are stored (step S4410 and step S4411: NO), a general-purpose hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S4412). In this case, the processing contents of the audio light emission control device 81 and the display control device 82 are the same as those in the case where the general drawing hold command is transmitted in step S4405.

  On the other hand, if the current state is not the opening / closing execution mode (step S4410: NO) and the value of the general-purpose holding counter of the main RAM 65 is “1”, that is, if the general-purpose holding information is 1 in the general-purpose holding area 65c. When only the number is stored (step S4411: YES), a sudden hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S4413). When receiving the sudden hold command, the sound emission control device 81 transmits a command corresponding to the sudden hold command to the display control device 82. When the display control device 82 receives the command, it updates the display content of the general-purpose pending display area 316 in the same manner as when a command corresponding to the general-purpose pending command is received. Further, when the display control device 82 receives the command corresponding to the sudden command, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 93 (b), a prize to the second operating port 34 on the display surface of the symbol display device 41 as a special notification. A special notification image 317 that prompts the user to perform a shooting operation aimed at is displayed. By displaying the special notification image 317, the player performs a firing operation aiming at winning in the second operating port 34, and it is possible to generate an opportunity to acquire the second hold information.

  When the timing for displaying the special notification image 317 in a situation where the effect for the game round is being executed on the symbol display device 41 is reached, the display control device 82 sets the upper right corner on the display surface of the symbol display device 41. The reduced display area 318 is set, and the effect for the game round is continued to be reduced and displayed in the reduced display area 318. Thereby, even when the sudden suspension command is transmitted from the main CPU 63 in a situation where the game effect is being performed, the special notification image 317 can be displayed in a predetermined size, and the special notification image 317 can be displayed. The notification image 317 can be easily recognized by the player.

  Next, the manner in which the hold information on the ordinary figure is obtained will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 94 (a) shows the execution period of the open / close execution mode, FIG. 94 (b) shows the period when the special power winning device 32 is in the open state, and FIG. 94 (c) shows the occurrence of a prize in the through gate 35. FIG. 94 (d) shows the timing of the occurrence of a prize in the sudden gate 311. FIG. 94 (e) shows the timing at which the hold information on the general figure side is acquired.

  At time t1 when the open / close execution mode is not executed, a prize is generated in the sudden gate 311 as shown in FIG. 94 (d). As a result, the hold information on the general-purpose side is acquired at the timing of the time t1, as shown in FIG. 94 (e). The second operating port 34 is opened with the acquired hold information on the general-purpose side as an opportunity, and the second hold information obtained based on the winning in the second operating port 34 in the open state is a game time. And the end of the game round, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second small hit result is executed from timing t2 to timing t9 as shown in FIG. 94 (a). . Here, in the present embodiment, when the second small hitting result is obtained, the number of times the special power winning device 32 is opened is set to two times.

  In the opening / closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. 94 (b), the special power-winning device 32 is in an open state from the timing t3 to the timing t4 and from the timing t6 to the timing t7. In this case, the opening / closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position with the game ball resting on the guide plate portion 214 at each of the timing of t4 and the timing of t7. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 94 (c), a winning in the through gate 35 occurs at each of the timings t5 and t8, and at each of the timings t5 and t8, as shown in FIG. 94 (e). Then, the hold information on the public figure side is acquired. As a result, the opportunity for the second operating port 34 to be opened again is generated, a prize is generated for the opened second operating port 34, and the second hold information is acquired. As shown in (a), the opening / closing execution mode occurs again from the timing of t10 to the timing of t16, triggered by the second small hit result.

  In the opening / closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. 94 (b), the special power-winning device 32 is in an open state from the timing t11 to the timing t12 and from the timing t13 to the timing t14. Also, at the timing of t14, the opening / closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position with the game ball resting on the guide plate portion 214. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 94 (c), a prize is made to the through gate 35 at the timing of t15, and at the timing of t15, as shown in FIG. 94 (e), the hold information on the general-purpose side is acquired. As a result, the second operating port 34 is again opened, and a prize is generated in the opened second operating port 34 to acquire the second hold information. Occurs.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following effects can be obtained in addition to the effects of the first embodiment.

  Even in a situation other than the opening / closing execution mode, when the game ball enters the sudden start gate 311, the hold information on the general-purpose side is acquired, and the second operating port 34 may be opened. Then, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode based on the game ball entering the second operating port 34 in the opened state. Thus, it is possible to generate a situation in which the opening / closing execution mode occurs based on the entry of a game ball into the second operating port 34 in the opening / closing execution mode as well as in the opening / closing execution mode.

  A restriction nail 312 is provided on the upstream side of the sudden gate 311 so that the probability of the game ball entering the sudden gate 311 is lower than the probability of the game ball entering the through gate 35 in the open / close execution mode. ing. This makes it possible to reduce the probability that the open / close execution mode will be generated based on the entry of a game ball into the sudden gate 311 in a situation other than the open / close execution mode. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's satisfaction with the transition to the opening / closing execution mode based on the entry of a game ball into the sudden start gate 311 in a state other than the opening / closing execution mode.

  In addition, the restriction nail 312 is provided so that the probability of a game ball entering the sudden gate 311 is lower than the probability of a game ball entering the first operating port 33. From this point as well, it is possible to increase the player's satisfaction with the shift to the opening / closing execution mode based on the entry of a game ball into the sudden start gate 311 in a situation other than the opening / closing execution mode.

  When a game ball enters the sudden start gate 311 and the hold information on the general figure side is acquired and the second operating port 34 is opened, the special notification image 317 corresponding thereto is displayed on the symbol display device. 41 is displayed. As a result, even though the game ball enters the sudden start gate 311 and the second operation port 34 is opened, the game ball enters the second operation port 34 without being noticed. It is possible to make it difficult to cause a phenomenon that the ball opportunity is lost.

  In the opening / closing execution mode, the game ball can enter the through gate 35, so that the player is more likely to be conscious of the second operating port 34 being opened. In a situation where there is no game ball entering the through gate 35, there is a possibility that the player's awareness of the opening of the second operating port 34 may be low. In this case, the special notification image 317 is displayed when a game ball enters the sudden start gate 311 in a state other than the open / close execution mode and the hold information on the general-purpose side is acquired. It is possible to direct the player's consciousness to the opening of the operation port 34. Further, in the opening / closing execution mode in which the player is likely to be conscious of the opening of the second operation port 34, the special notification image 317 is not displayed, so that the special notification image 317 is displayed. Can be prevented from being bothersome for the player.

  A special notification image 317 is displayed when the reservation information on the general figure side is acquired based on the entry of a game ball into the sudden start gate 311 in a situation where the reservation information on the general figure side is not acquired. This makes it possible to display the special notification image 317 in a situation where the player has low awareness of the opening of the second operation port 34.

  The special electric winning device 32, the through gate 35, and the gate 311 are provided in a region where a game ball flowing down the left area PA2 or a game ball flowing down can enter the ball. Thus, it is possible to aim for a prize to the special power winning device 32, the through gate 35, and the sudden gate 311 by the same firing operation mode.

  A game ball flowing down the right area PA3 is more likely to reach the position of the second operating port 34 than a game ball flowing down the left area PA2. Thus, when the second operation port 34 is opened in a state other than the opening / closing execution mode, the game ball is fired so as to flow down the right area PA3, whereby the game to the second operation port 34 is performed. It is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter.

<Another embodiment of the eighteenth embodiment>
-The combination of the special power winning device 32 and the through gate 35 and the sudden gate 311 may be configured so that the positional relationship is such that if one of the winnings is aimed at, the other winning cannot be aimed. For example, the combination of the special power winning device 32 and the through gate 35 may be provided in the left area PA2 and the sudden gate 311 may be provided in the right area PA3. May be provided in the right area PA3 and the sudden gate 311 may be provided in the left area PA2.

  -In the same way as in the first embodiment, the general-purpose opening lottery process is performed on the hold information on the general-purpose side, and when the general-purpose opening state is won, the general-purpose opening state is set and the second operating port 34 is opened. It may be configured to be in a state. In this case, a situation may occur in which the second operation port 34 is not opened even if a game ball enters the sudden start gate 311. In this configuration, the general-purpose holding information obtained based on a game ball entering the through gate 35 and the general-purpose holding information acquired based on a game ball entering the sudden gate 311 are displayed. May be treated differently, and the former general-purpose side hold information and the latter general-purpose side hold information may have different probabilities of winning in the general-purpose open state in the general-purpose open lottery process.

  For example, the hold information on the general figure side obtained based on a game ball entering the sudden gate 311 is more general than the hold information on the general figure obtained based on a game ball entering the through gate 35. It is good also as a structure which is easy to be elected in the normal electricity open state in the electricity open lottery process. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's satisfaction with that the game ball has entered the sudden start gate 311.

  On the other hand, the hold information on the general figure side obtained based on the game ball entering the sudden start gate 311 is smaller than the hold information on the general figure side obtained based on the game ball entering the through gate 35. It is good also as a structure which is hard to become a winning in the open state in the open electric lottery process. In this case, the probability that the game ball enters the burst gate 311 will be lower than the probability that the game ball will be in the normal power open state, so that the probability of the game ball entering the burst gate 311 does not need to be lowered.

  A distinction is made between the reservation information on the general figure side obtained based on the game ball entering the through gate 35 and the reservation information on the general figure side acquired based on the game ball entering the sudden start gate 311. One of these pieces of hold information is set so that the second operating port 34 is in the normal power open state without executing the general power open lottery processing, and the other is in the general power open state lottery processing in the general power open lottery processing. Accordingly, the second operation port 34 may be in a state where the electric power is normally opened. For example, with regard to the hold information on the general figure side obtained based on the game ball entering the sudden gate 311, the second operating port 34 is in the general power open state without performing the general power open lottery process. With respect to the hold information on the general figure side acquired based on the game ball having entered the through gate 35, the general operation open state lottery process results in the general power open state winning, so that the second operation port 34 opens the general power. It may be configured to be in a state. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's satisfaction with that the game ball has entered the sudden start gate 311.

  The entry probability of the sudden gate 311 is the entry probability of the general winning opening 31, the entry probability of the special power winning device 32 in an open state, the entry probability of the first operation opening 33, the second operation opening 34. The configuration is not limited to a configuration in which the entry probability is lower than the entry probability and the entry probability to the through gate 35 in the opening / closing execution mode. For example, a configuration in which the sudden gate 311 has a higher entry probability than the general winning opening 31. It may be. Further, the configuration may be such that the sudden gate 311 has a higher ball entry probability than the first operating port 33.

  -Instead of the sudden gate 311, a configuration may be provided in which a sudden second operation port is provided. In this case, by preventing the opening and closing member for preventing or allowing game balls from entering the second sudden operation port from being provided in the second sudden operation port, a game to the second sudden operation port is provided. The configuration is such that the ball entry probability does not fluctuate according to the game state, and when a game ball enters the second operating port for abruptness, similarly to the case where a game ball enters the second operating port 34. The second suspension information is obtained. This makes it possible to cause a situation in which the opening / closing execution mode suddenly occurs when a game ball enters the second operating port for sudden operation.

  In addition, in this configuration, the average change display period of the game times triggered by the second hold information acquired based on the game ball entering the second operating port for sudden operation is displayed on the second operating port 34. May be shorter than the average variable display period of the game times triggered by the second hold information acquired based on the entry of the ball. As a result, it is possible to reduce the time required from when the game ball enters the second operating port for sudden opening to when the open / close execution mode is started.

<Nineteenth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, a special power winning device 321 is provided instead of the special power winning device 32. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 95 is a front view of the game board 24 in the present embodiment.

  A special power prize device 321 is provided in the right area PA3 of the game area PA in place of the special power prize device 32. The special electric winning device 321 is provided in the middle part of the right side area PA3 in the vertical direction and over the whole in the horizontal direction. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the right area PA3 surely passes through the area in which the special electric winning device 321 is provided. Further, a through gate 35 is provided below the special power winning device 321 in the right side area PA3 and near the variable display unit 36.

  The configuration of the special electric winning device 321 will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 (a) and 96 (b). 96 (a) and 96 (b) are cross-sectional views taken along line AA of FIG. 95.

  The game board 24 is formed with a special winning opening 322 so as to penetrate the game board 24 in the front-rear direction. The position where the special winning opening 322 is formed is a position closer to the variable display unit 36 in the right area PA3. A special electric winning device 321 is provided so as to prevent or allow game balls to enter the large winning opening 322. The special electric winning device 321 includes a guide plate 323 provided so as to penetrate the game board 24 in the front-rear direction at a position below the special winning opening 322. The guide plate 323 is provided so as to be movable in the front-rear direction by being driven by driving means (not shown), and a blocking position where the amount of protrusion from the board surface of the game board 24 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is minimized. The pachinko machine 10 is slid forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the blocking position, and moves to a guide position where the amount of protrusion from the game board 24 to the front of the pachinko machine 10 is maximized.

  In the game board 24, a ball receiving portion 324 is provided at a position above the right end of the guide plate 323. Further, in the right area PA3, the game flowing from the upper area PA1 into the right area PA3 above the special winning award device 321 in the right area PA3. A guide nail group 241 for guiding all of the balls to the ball receiving portion 324 is provided (see FIG. 95). The guide nail group 241 is formed by arranging a plurality of nails 24b so as to be inclined downward to the right. All the game balls flowing into the right area PA3 are guided to the ball receiving portion 324 by the guide nail group 241. The distance between the front end of the ball receiving portion 324 and the window panel 52 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. The ball receiving portion 324 has an upper surface inclined downward toward the front of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the game ball that has reached the upper surface of the ball receiving portion 324 flows down toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 by its own weight.

  When the guide plate 323 is arranged at the blocking position, as shown in FIG. 96 (a), the distance between the front end of the guide plate 323 and the window panel 52 is larger than the diameter of the game ball. Become. In this blocking position, the front end of the guide plate 323 is located closer to the rear of the pachinko machine 10 than the front end of the ball receiver 324. Therefore, the game ball that has reached the upper surface of the ball receiving portion 324 while the guide plate 323 is located at the blocking position is basically below the ball receiving portion 324 through the space between the ball receiving portion 324 and the window panel 52. Will fall. In addition, the dimension of the guide plate 323 disposed at the blocking position, which protrudes forward from the game board 24, is less than the radius of the game ball. Therefore, even if the game ball guided by the guide nail group 241 bounces on the ball receiving portion 324 and moves toward the guide plate 323 located at the blocking position, the play ball and the window are not placed on the guide plate 323. It will fall below the guide plate 323 through the space between the panel 52. With the above configuration, when the guide plate 323 is located at the blocking position, the occurrence of a prize in the special winning opening 322 is prevented. Further, as described above, the through gate 35 is provided at a position close to the variable display unit 36, and the position is set to the left with respect to the ball receiving portion 324 so that the game balls jumped at the ball receiving portion 324 are difficult to reach. It is a position that is separated. Therefore, when the guide plate 323 is located at the blocking position, occurrence of a winning in the through gate 35 is also prevented.

  When the guide plate 323 is located at the guide position, as shown in FIG. 96 (b), the distance between the front end of the guide plate 323 and the window panel 52 is smaller than the radius of the game ball. Become. In this guide position, the front end of the guide plate 323 is located closer to the front of the pachinko machine 10 than the front end of the ball receiver 324. Therefore, the game ball that has reached the upper surface of the ball receiving portion 324 in a state where the guide plate 323 is located at the guide position is located on the upper surface of the region of the guide plate 323 protruding forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24. Will be listed.

  On the upper surface of the protruding area 325 protruding forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24 when placed at the guide position on the guide plate 323, two partition walls 326, 327 are provided at intermediate positions in the lateral direction. Is provided. The first partition wall 326 existing on the right side of the partition walls 326 and 327 extends from the front end of the guide plate 323 toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the guide plate 323 is disposed at the guide position. In this situation, the rear end of the first partition wall 326 is separated from the board surface of the game board 24 by a dimension larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the second partition wall 327 existing on the left side extends from the board surface of the game board 24 toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 when the guide plate 323 is located at the guide position. However, the front end of the second partition wall 327 is located on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 by a dimension larger than the front end of the guide plate 323 by the diameter of the game ball. In the configuration in which the first partition wall 326 and the second partition wall 327 are formed as described above, the upper surface of the protruding region 325 is generally inclined downward toward the left. In addition, on the upper surface of the protruding region 325, it is inclined downward toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10 from the position of the first partition wall 326 to the left of the ball receiving portion 324 and up to the position of the first partition wall 326. The slope is downward toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 up to the position of the partition wall 327, and is downwardly sloped toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10 from the position of the second partition wall 327 to the position of the special winning opening 322. In other words, the upper surface of the protruding region 325 is connected to the first partition wall 326 and the game board while the game ball placed on the upper surface of the protruding region 325 flows down to the left when the guide plate 323 is located at the guiding position. 24, and the space between the second partition wall 327 and the front end of the guide plate 323 is inclined so as to flow downward while meandering in the front-rear direction.

  In a situation where the guide plate 323 is located at the guide position, the distance between the front end portion of the guide plate 323 and the window panel 52 is smaller than the radius of the game ball, so that the guide plate 323 is located at the guide position. The window panel 52 prevents the game balls placed on the upper surface of the protruding region 325 from dropping downward from the front end of the guide plate 323 toward the lower side of the guide plate 323 in the arranged state. The left end of the guide plate 323 faces the center frame 36a of the variable display unit 36 at a position close to the center frame 36a. The distance between the left end of the guide plate 323 and the center frame 36a is the radius of the game ball. Less than. Therefore, in a situation where the guide plate 323 is located at the guide position, a game ball placed on the upper surface of the protruding region 325 may fall downward from the left end of the guide plate 323 toward the center of the guide plate 323. Blocked by frame 36a.

  With the above configuration, when the guide plate 323 is located at the guide position, the game ball flows down the projecting region 325 by its own weight along the meandering path on the projecting region 325, so that the game ball wins a big prize. The ball will enter the mouth 322. The game ball that has won the special winning opening 322 is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to the special winning opening 322. This detection sensor is electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and the main CPU 63 specifies the presence or absence of a prize in the special winning opening 322 based on the detection result of the detection sensor. In the opening / closing execution mode triggered by a round game or a small hit result in which the special winning opening 322 is to be opened, when it is specified that one game ball has entered the special winning opening 322, the main The value of the winning counter in the side RAM 65 is decremented by one. When the value of the prize counter becomes “0”, it is specified that a prize of the prize upper limit number has occurred as in the first embodiment, and the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the round game or the small hit result is set. Terminate.

  When a game ball is placed on the guide plate 323 arranged at the guidance position and a ball of the maximum winning number of game balls occurs in the large winning opening 322 in a situation where the game ball is placed on the guide plate 323, the guide plate 323 is placed in a state where the game ball is placed. Move from the guidance position to the blocking position. In this case, the game ball placed on the guide plate 323 moves toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10 following the movement of the guide plate 323 toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and hits the game board 24 from the front. The contact of the guide plate 323 from below causes the contact plate 323 to eventually fall downward because contact with the guide plate 323 prevents further backward movement.

  As described above, the through gate 35 is provided below the special electric winning device 321. The position of the through gate 35 is determined by the first partition wall 326 and the second partition wall 327 of the guide plate 323 in the horizontal positional relationship. It is the same position as the area between. Further, between the special winning award device 321 and the through gate 35, a game ball placed in the inter-section area Y between the first partition wall 326 and the second partition wall 327 of the guide plate 323 is allowed by the guide plate 323. A control nail group 242 is provided to guide the falling game ball toward the through gate 35 so as to win the through gate 35 when the player ball falls due to the movement from the position to the blocking position (see FIG. 95). . Thereby, when the guide plate 323 moves from the allowable position to the blocking position in a state where the game ball is placed in the inter-section area Y, a prize to the through gate 35 occurs. Incidentally, the inter-section area Y is separated from the ball receiving portion 324 to the left by a dimension larger than the diameter of the game ball, more specifically, by a dimension larger than three times the diameter of the game ball. Accordingly, in a situation where the guide plate 323 is arranged at the blocking position, a game ball reaching the ball receiving portion 324 is prevented from winning the through gate 35.

  The game ball that has won the through gate 35 is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to the through gate 35. This detection sensor is electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and the main CPU 63 specifies the presence or absence of a winning in the through gate 35 based on the detection result of the detection sensor. Then, when it is specified that one game ball has entered the through gate 35, the general-purpose random number counter is provided on condition that the upper limit number of general-purpose side hold information is not stored in the general-purpose reserve area 65c. The numerical information of C4 is stored in the general-purpose holding area 65c as the general-purpose holding information.

  Here, when the game ball is fired at the shortest firing cycle (specifically, 0.6 seconds) by the same firing mode in which the game ball flows down the right area PA3, the guide plate 323 is moved to the guide position. In the situation where the game ball that has entered the special winning opening 322 in the situation where the game ball in the next firing order is more likely to exist in the inter-segment area Y, the inter-segment area Y Is set. Thus, when a game ball is placed on the guide plate 323 arranged at the guidance position and a ball of the maximum winning number of game balls occurs in the large winning opening 322 in a situation where the game ball is placed on the guide plate 323, the game ball is placed on the guide plate 323. Gaming balls can easily enter the through gate 35.

  In addition, a meandering passage that extends not only in the lateral direction but also meanders in the front-rear direction is formed in the protruding region 325 of the guide plate 323. Is set. Accordingly, it is possible to set the inter-section area Y that makes it easier to generate a winning in the through gate 35 while suppressing an increase in the lateral dimension of the guide plate 323.

<Another form of the nineteenth embodiment>
The combination of the special power winning device 32 and the through gate 35 according to the first embodiment and the combination of the special power winning device 321 and the through gate 35 according to the nineteenth embodiment are both provided. A configuration may be adopted in which the types of the special power winning devices 32 and 321 to be subjected to the opening / closing control are changed according to the type of the game result that has been changed. In this case, when the special power winning device 321 in the nineteenth embodiment is subjected to the opening / closing control, the direction to the through gate 35 is higher than when the special power winning device 32 in the first embodiment is the subject of the opening / closing control. Is likely to occur, the player expects that the special power winning device 321 in the nineteenth embodiment is to be subjected to the opening / closing control.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, A various deformation | transformation improvement is possible within the range which does not deviate from the meaning of this invention. For example, you may change as follows. Incidentally, the following configuration of another embodiment may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration of the above embodiment.

  (1) In each of the above-described embodiments, all of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 are stored as history information (or pitching history). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only a part of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is stored as history information. It is good also as composition which becomes. For example, only the general winning opening 31, the special prize winning device 32, and the second operation opening 34 may be configured to store history information, and only the general winning opening 31 is configured to store history information. It ’s good. Even in this case, it is possible to grasp the game ball entry mode in a predetermined period for the ball entry part for which history information is to be stored.

  (2) In each of the above embodiments, information corresponding to the result of entering the game ball is transmitted in correspondence with each of the first prize opening detection sensor 42a, the second prize opening detection sensor 43a, and the third prize opening detection sensor 44a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the information corresponding to the result of entering the same type of entrance part is the same type of entrance part. There may be a configuration in which a plurality of incoming ball detection sensors are present and a plurality of ball detection sensors are transmitted in accordance therewith. As a result, the number of types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 can be suppressed.

  (3) In the first embodiment or the like, correspondence information indicating the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the correspondence between the buffers 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the correspondence information may be stored in the management IC 66 in advance. In this case, it is not necessary to execute processing for causing the management IC 66 to recognize the correspondence information, and thus the processing load on the main CPU 63 can be reduced.

  (4) In the first embodiment, the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the respective buffers 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 can communicate with each other and can be handled by the management IC 66. The configuration may be such that the correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 when a signal requesting transmission of the relationship information is received. In this case, the correspondence memory 116 is provided as a non-volatile memory and used for both reading and writing. Correspondence information provided from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 after shipment of the pachinko machine 10 is sent to the main CPU 63. Even when the supply of operating power is stopped, the correspondence memory 116 is configured to store and hold the operation power. Thereby, it becomes possible to reduce the frequency with which correspondence information is transmitted.

  (5) In the first embodiment, the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the respective buffers 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. However, the signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting the detection result information of the respective ball detection sensors 42a to 48a are used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the correspondence information is mainly used. A configuration may be employed in which a dedicated signal path for transmitting from the side CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is provided. As a result, the management IC 66 can determine which type of information is received from the main CPU 63 based on the types of the buffers 122a to 122o that receive the information.

  (6) In the first embodiment, etc., information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66, but information is not transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the information may be transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63. For example, various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 based on the history information may be transmitted to the main CPU 63. In this case, the main CPU 63 may directly execute the notification control of the notification means in the same manner as in the eleventh embodiment so that notification corresponding to the contents of the received various parameters is performed. The main CPU 63 transmits a command corresponding to the contents of the received various parameters to the sound emission control device 81, so that the contents of the various parameters are obtained using the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the symbol display device 41. It is good also as a structure which performs corresponding alerting | reporting.

  (7) When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, various parameters are calculated by the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112 based on the history information stored in the history memory 117. The contents of various parameters may be notified using the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, the symbol display device 41, and the like. In this case, it is possible to confirm whether or not the game ball entering mode of the game area PA was normal on the previous business day at the start of the game hall.

  (8) When various parameters calculated based on the history information stored in the history memory 117 are abnormal results, the pachinko machine 10 cannot start a game until the prohibition release operation is performed. It is good. As a configuration for preventing the game from starting, for example, a configuration in which the launch of the game ball may be prohibited, a configuration in which each of the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a is invalidated, or the first operation port Even if a winning to 33 or the 2nd operation mouth 34 occurs, it is good also as composition which does not perform the success / failure judgment processing. Further, the prohibition canceling operation may be an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 again with the RAM erasure switch turned ON, and can be operated when the gaming machine main body 12 is released from the outer frame 11. It is good also as operation of the operation means used. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being played as it is in a situation where the game ball entering mode in the game area PA is in an abnormal mode.

  (9) Although history information corresponding to the detection results of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the history memory 117, calculation of various parameters using the history information is performed in either the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112. Also, the configuration may be such that neither is executed. In this case, the history information may be read by a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and various parameters may be calculated using the read history information by an operator of the reading work. Alternatively, the reading device may be configured to execute various parameters using the read history information. In this case, the processing load on the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 can be reduced.

  (10) The management IC 66 is not provided, and the main CPU 63 may have a function of executing a history information storing process and a function of calculating various parameters in each of the above embodiments. A configuration provided in the CPU 92 or a configuration provided in the sound emission control device 81 may be employed. When the payout-side CPU 92 or the sound emission control device 81 is provided with these functions, information on the detection results of the respective entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the control subject having the functions. It will be.

  (11) The management IC 66 is provided with a power source separate from the main CPU 63, and even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the management IC 66 calculates various parameters using history information. Alternatively, it may be configured to be able to output history information or information of various parameters. As a result, even when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the history information and various parameters can be read by the reading device.

  (12) The reading terminal 102 used for reading the program from the main ROM 64 is also used as a terminal used for reading history information or various parameters by the reading device. The terminal used for reading history information or various parameters by the reading device may be provided separately from the reading terminal 102 for reading the program from the main ROM 64. In this case, the terminal used for reading history information or various parameters may be provided in the MPU 62 or may be provided in a position different from the MPU 62 in the main control board 61.

  (13) The correspondence relationship memory 116, the history memory 117, and the calculation result memory 131 in each of the above embodiments are not limited to the configuration provided as nonvolatile storage means such as a flash memory. 116, 117, or 131 is provided as a volatile storage unit that requires power supply to store and store information, and backup power is supplied to the memory, thereby operating power to the main CPU 63. Even if the supply is stopped, the information may be stored and held. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a dedicated backup power device is provided for the memory, and backup power is supplied to the memory from the power supply / launch control device 78 that supplies the main RAM 65 with backup power. Also good.

  (14) The present invention is not limited to a configuration in which various parameters are calculated using the history information, and the history information is not stored and held, and the game ball is played by any one of the incoming detection sensors 42a to 48a. Various parameters may be calculated and updated each time a new detection is made. In this case, although the calculation frequency of various parameters increases, it is possible to extract various parameters at an arbitrary timing.

  (15) The management IC 66 includes the management-side CPU 112 as a general-purpose CPU, and is not limited to a configuration that executes history information storage processing and various parameter calculation processing based on programs and data stored in the management-side ROM 113. A hardware circuit designed to have these functions may be formed in the management IC 66. Specifically, for example, in the case of the first embodiment, the hardware circuit receives a signal indicating that a game ball has been detected by any of the detection sensors 42a to 48a from the main CPU 63. The correspondence information corresponding to the buffer that received the signal is stored in the history memory 117 from the correspondence memory 116, and the information of the RTC 115 at that time is stored in the history memory 117. To do. For example, in the ninth embodiment, when the hardware circuit receives a signal indicating that a game ball has been detected by any of the detection sensors 42a to 48a from the main CPU 63, the hardware circuit receives the signal. The counter value corresponding to the buffer is incremented by one. In addition, when an operation trigger occurs in the first embodiment or the like, the hardware circuit calculates various parameters using history information at that time. In addition, when an external output trigger to the reading terminal 102 occurs, the hardware circuit externally outputs various parameters as calculation results and externally outputs history information.

  (16) In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the information on the detection results of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored as history information, the configuration in which the transition to the opening / closing execution mode has occurred is stored as history information. The transition timing to the opening / closing execution mode and the end timing may be stored as history information, or the transition to the high frequency support mode may be stored as history information, and a predetermined abnormality It is good also as a structure by which it is memorize | stored as historical information that this occurred. Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which the transition probability to opening / closing execution mode is calculated by using the above history information, and it is good also as a structure by which the transition probability to high frequency support mode is calculated, and predetermined | prescribed abnormality is The frequency of occurrence may be calculated. The history information and various parameters may be read by a reading device.

  (17) The main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 may be provided as separate chips, may be provided as separate substrates, or may be provided as separate control devices.

  (18) In the first embodiment and the like, the number of balls entered for the game balls entering the out port 24a is measured, while the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and History information including RTC information may be stored for awarding of a prize ball of a game ball such as the second operation port 34 and entering a privilege triggering ball portion that triggers the determination process. As a result, it is possible to calculate the frequency of game balls entering each privilege opportunity ball portion with respect to the total number of game balls discharged while allowing the game ball entry history to the privilege opportunity ball portion to be extracted. Become.

  (19) It is good also as a structure in which things other than the thing in said each embodiment are contained as object kept as log | history information. For example, at least one of the timing when the lower plate 56a becomes full, the timing when the full state is started, and the timing when the full state is released may be stored as history information. It may be configured that at least one of the timing when the ball has become unsatisfied, the timing at which the ball has no state is started, and the timing at which the state without the ball is released is stored as history information, and the dispensing device 76 becomes in an abnormal state. In addition, at least one of the timing at which the abnormal state of the payout device 76 is started and the timing at which the abnormal state of the payout device 76 is canceled may be stored as history information. In this case, it is possible to grasp the frequency of occurrence of these events.

  (20) In the first embodiment and the like, a configuration in which the 16th buffer 122p of the input port 121 in the management-side I / F 111 corresponds to the output instruction signal is preset in the design stage of the management IC 66. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fact that the sixteenth buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal is also recognized by the management IC 66 by transmitting a type identification command from the main CPU 63. It is good also as a structure. In this case, it is not necessary to previously set the correspondence relationship between the buffers 122a to 122p and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122p in the management IC 66.

  (21) The number of game balls that have entered a predetermined ball-entry part that is generated when the front door frame 14 is in the open state is stored as history information, and the number of balls that have been grasped using the history information. May be externally output to the reading device. As a result, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls that have entered a predetermined entry portion in a state where the front door frame 14 is in an open state, and it is possible to grasp the presence or absence of fraud. In addition, the number of balls entered into a predetermined ball-entry part generated in a situation where the front door frame 14 is in an open state is calculated when a predetermined calculation trigger occurs, and the calculated number of balls entered is an abnormal number. In some cases, abnormality notification may be executed. As a result, it is possible to deal with an illegal act of illegally opening the front door frame 14 and causing a game ball to enter a predetermined entrance part.

  (22) The management IC 66 may be configured to transmit a normal operation signal to the main CPU 63 when operating normally. In this case, the main CPU 63 can monitor whether or not the management IC 66 is operating normally.

  (23) In the first embodiment or the like, the order in which the management CPU 112 executes the confirmation processing of the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o may be reverse to that of the first embodiment or the like. In this case, the order in which the main CPU 63 executes the process for changing the output state of each signal matches the order in which the management CPU 112 executes the confirmation process for the buffers 122a to 122o.

  (24) When information stored in the main ROM 64 is externally output using the reading terminal 102, one of a program and data may be selectively externally output, and a predetermined program It is good also as a structure which can output only to the outside. In this case, the information to be analyzed can be selectively read by the reading device. As a configuration for selectively outputting information to the outside, the main CPU 63 selects information to be externally output from selection information received from the reading device through the reading terminal 102, and outputs the selected information to the outside. Can be considered.

  (25) Other information to be externally output through the reading terminal 102 for externally outputting the program stored in the main ROM 64 is not limited to history information and various parameters. For example, when an abnormality occurs May be configured to store the history information of the occurrence of the abnormality and output the stored history information to the outside through the reading terminal 102.

  (26) The detection sensors 42a to 48a are individually provided for the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, and the detection sensors 42a to 48a are provided. The total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA by grasping the total number of game balls detected in this way is not limited to this. For example, all of the game balls discharged from the game area PA It is good also as a structure which provides the discharge | emission detection sensor which detects the game ball which passes the said channel | path area | region while providing the channel | path area | region where one game ball will pass one by one. In this case, it is possible to grasp the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA by using the detection result of the discharge detection sensor. Further, in the configuration, as in each of the above-described embodiments, a detection sensor for detecting the number of game balls received in each of the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. By providing 42a to 47a, it is possible to calculate the ratio of the number of game balls that have entered each of the entrance parts to the total number of game balls that have been discharged from the game area PA.

  (27) In the first embodiment, the through gate 35 is not provided on the downstream side of the special prize winning device 32, but an operation port that is a trigger for obtaining the hold information on the special figure side is provided. Is also good. For example, an operating port that is not provided with the general electric role object 34a and is not provided with a member that directly blocks or allows game balls to enter, and that is provided with an operating port that is a trigger for acquiring the second hold information. Configuration. In this case, when the special power winning device 32 is opened and closed in the opening and closing execution mode, an opportunity to acquire the second hold information is generated. Further, in this configuration, the opening / closing execution mode is reliably generated when the second hold information is the target of the validity / non-permission determination, so that when the game ball enters the operating port in the opening / closing execution mode, The opening / closing execution mode surely occurs. This increases the importance of the game ball entering the operating port in the opening / closing execution mode. This configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

  (28) In the first embodiment, by providing the through gate 35 on the downstream side of the special power winning device 32, it is possible to enter a game ball into the through gate 35 when the special power winning device 32 is opened and closed. However, the configuration for providing the ball entry portion that allows game balls to enter in the open / close execution mode is not limited to this. For example, the special power opening / closing member of the special power prize winning device 32 is configured to be a general purpose accessory 34a of the second operating port 34, and the special power opening / closing member is arranged from the closed position to the open position, so that one of the special power opening / closing members is arranged. The part presses the ball-opening / closing member of the predetermined ball-in section, and the ball-opening / closing member moves from the closed position to the open position so that the game ball can enter the predetermined ball-in section. Is also good. In this case, when the special power opening / closing member returns from the open position to the closed position, the pressing of the ball entry / opening member by the special power opening / closing member is released, and the ball input / closing member returns from the open position to the closed position. . Even with this configuration, it is possible to enter a game ball into a predetermined ball entry section in the open / close execution mode.

  (29) Even in a situation where the special power winning device 32 is not opened and closed, the game ball can reach when the shooting ball is at a position where the game ball can reach and the shooting operation is performed aiming at the special power winning device 32. In addition to providing the through gate 35 at the position, a configuration may be provided in which a motorized opening / closing member for preventing or allowing a game ball to enter the through gate 35 is provided. When the opening / closing execution mode is started, the electric opening / closing member stops the game ball from entering the through gate 35 at a predetermined cycle and the game ball enters the through gate 35. Is moved to an allowable position that allows the above. Even with this configuration, it is possible for game balls to enter the through gate 35 in the open / close execution mode. This configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

  (30) In the first embodiment, when a game ball enters the through gate 35 and the hold information on the general figure side is acquired, the general operation open state of the second operation port 34 is reliably generated. It may be. This configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

  (31) In the first embodiment, when the special power winning device 32 is switched from the open state to the closed state, the game ball placed on the guide plate 214 can enter the through gate 35. The present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be such that when the special power winning device 32 switches from the closed state to the open state, the game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 can enter the through gate 35. That is, in this configuration, even if the special power prize device 32 is in the closed state, it is impossible to win the special power prize device 32, but a game ball can be placed on the guide plate portion 214. When the special power winning device 32 is switched from the closed state to the open state in a situation where a game ball is placed on the game ball, the game ball can drop toward the through gate 35. In this case, the player pays attention to whether or not a game ball is placed on the guide plate portion 214 in the situation where the special power winning device 32 is in the closed state. The player's attention to the winning device 32 can be increased. This configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

  (32) When the special power prize device 32 switches from the closed state to the open state, the game balls on the guide plate portion 214 can enter the through gate 35 and the special power prize device 32 is changed from the open state to the closed state. In the case where the game ball is switched to, the game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 may be able to enter the through gate 35. This allows the player to pay attention to each of the start timing and the end timing of the opening of the special power winning device 32. Further, it is possible to generate a lot of opportunities for game balls to enter the through gate 35. This configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

  (33) In the first embodiment, when the special power prize winning device 32 is in the open state, the game ball flowing down the right area PA3 is reliably prevented from flowing downstream of the special power prize winning device 32. It may be. For example, like the guide plates 271 and 281 in the fifteenth embodiment, the opening / closing member 202 has a plate shape without the opening 213, and when the opening / closing member 202 is disposed in the closed position, the opening / closing member 202 becomes a game board. When the game board 24 is disposed at the open position, the opening / closing member 202 may be provided between the game board 24 and the window panel 52. Accordingly, except for the game ball placed on the opening / closing member 202 at the timing when the special power winning device 32 is switched from the open state to the closed state, when the special power winning device 32 is in the open state, it flows down the right area PA3. The game ball to be played will surely win the special power winning device 32. This configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

  (34) In the first embodiment, when the game ball enters the through gate 35 and the electric power is released, the second operating port 34 is opened by electric power. There is no limitation. For example, when a game ball enters the through gate 35, the second operating port 34 is opened by mechanically interlocking using the pressing force of the entered game ball. When one or two game balls enter the second operation port 34, the second operation port 34 returns to the closed state by mechanically interlocking using the pressing force of the game ball. It may be. This configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

  (35) In the first embodiment, the game ball entering the through gate 35 is configured to continue flowing down the game area PA thereafter. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ball enters the through gate 35. The game balls may be discharged from the game area PA by being led out to the back side of the game board 24. This configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

  (36) The configuration of the special power winning device 32 of the first embodiment and the configuration of the special power winning devices 261 and 262 of the fifteenth embodiment are applied to the second operating port 34, and the second operating port is used. A configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined ball entry portion is provided at a position where the ball can be entered only when 34 is opened and closed. In this case, the predetermined ball entry section may be a ball entry section in which payout of game balls is executed by entry of game balls, and the reservation information on the special figure side or the reservation on the general figure side by entry of game balls. A ball entry unit from which information is acquired may be used.

  (37) In the opening / closing execution mode, the configuration may be such that the hold information on the general-purpose side is not digested. Accordingly, the transition of the second operating port 34 to the power open state in response to the acquisition of the hold information on the general-purpose side in the opening / closing execution mode occurs after the end of the opening / closing execution mode. This allows the player to aim the game ball at the second operation port 34. This configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

  (38) Even in the open / close execution mode, although the hold information on the general-purpose side is digested, the variation display of the pattern on the general-purpose display unit 38a started in the open-close execution mode is continued until the open / close execution mode ends. It may be configured. Even in this case, it is possible for the player to aim the game ball at the second operating port 34 after the open / close execution mode. This configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

  (39) When the second suspension information is subjected to the success / failure determination processing, a configuration may be adopted in which not only the big hit result and the small hit result but also a miss result can be obtained. Further, even if the first hold information is the target of the hit / fail determination processing, a configuration may be adopted in which a small hit result can be obtained.

  (40) A configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the ordinary electric role product 34a are different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, when compared to the game area PA in a situation where the launch of the game ball is continued in the same manner, the general utility 34a of the second working port 34 is released per unit time. The high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the state becomes relatively high and low.

  In the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the probability of being in the open state win state in the open state lottery using the ordinary number counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). In the frequency support mode, the number of times that the general electric role product 34a is opened when the general electric power release state is won is set to be larger than that in the low frequency support mode, and one open time is set longer. I have. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the open state of the public power supply is selected and the open state of the general electric utility 34a occurs a plurality of times, from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The closing time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the minimum reserved time (i.e., the normal map) is required for the next open train lottery after the first open lottery than the low frequency support mode. The one display continuation time in the display unit 38a) is set short.

  As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that a winning in the second operating port 34 will occur is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability of winning the first operating port 33 than in the second operating port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation is performed more than in the first operating port 33. The probability of winning a prize in the mouth 34 is increased. When a winning is made to the second operation port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of possessed balls so much. It can be carried out.

  Note that the configuration for increasing the frequency at which the high frequency support mode is set to the normal power open state per unit time as compared to the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above, for example, in the general power open lottery It is good also as a structure which raises the probability that it will be elected in an open state of a public train. In addition, a reserved time (for example, executed in the general map display unit 38a based on a winning to the through gate 35) is secured after the next public train opening lottery is performed. In a configuration in which a plurality of types of variable display time) are prepared, the high frequency support mode is set so that a short securing time is easily selected or the average secure time is shorter than the low frequency support mode. Also good. Furthermore, increase the number of times of opening, lengthen the opening time, and shorten the reserved time that will be secured when the next public train opening lottery is performed after the first public train opening lottery is performed, the reserved time concerned The advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one condition or any combination of conditions among shortening the average time and increasing the winning probability.

  (41) When the special prize device 32 is open, game balls can enter the special prize device 32, and when the special prize device 32 is closed, game balls to the special prize device 32 The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which it is not possible to enter a special ball, and even if the special power winning device 32 is in a closed state, it is possible to enter a game ball into the special power winning device 32 but it is in an open state. The configuration may be such that game balls are less likely to enter the special electric prize winning device 32 than in the case. This configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

  (42) When the second operation port 34 is open, game balls can enter the second operation port 34, and when the second operation port 34 is closed, the second operation port 34. The configuration is not limited to a configuration in which game balls cannot enter the second operation port 34. Even if the second operation port 34 is in a closed state, game balls can enter the second operation port 34. However, a configuration may be employed in which game balls are less likely to enter the second operation port 34 than in the case of the open state. This configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

  (43) It is impossible for the player to refill the game balls in the pachinko machine 10, and the game balls circulate in the pachinko machine 10, and information on the number of game balls usable by the player is stored and held. The configurations of the above embodiments may be applied to configurations in which game balls can be fired within the range of information on the number of usable game balls stored and held.

  (44) Instead of a configuration in which the display control device 82 is controlled by the audio light emission control device 81 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 60, display control is performed based on a command transmitted from the main control device 60. The device 82 may control the sound emission control device 81. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 81 and the display control device 82 are separately provided, the both control devices may be provided as one control device, and one of the two control devices has a function. May be integrated into the main control device 60, and both functions of these two control devices may be integrated into the main control device 60. The configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 81 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 81 to the display control device 82 are also arbitrary.

  (45) Other types of pachinko machines, such as pachinko machines, which are different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific region of a special device, or a game ball in a specific region of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that becomes a jackpot when a right enters and a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine equipped with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, and a sparrow ball.

  In addition, a non-ballistic gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reel by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has passed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable / closable is provided with a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts rotating the reel.

  When the present invention is applied to a slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined, for example, a result of a lottery process of a role executed when one game is started based on an operation of a start lever is recorded as history information. It may be configured to calculate the actual winning probability of each role using the history information, and when a transition to a special control state such as a bonus game occurs, it is stored as history information and stored. The information may be used to calculate the actual transition probability to the special control state, or the ratio of the number of staying games in the special control state to the total number of played games may be calculated. The history information and various parameters may be readable by a reading device, or notification corresponding to the calculation results of various parameters may be performed by the gaming machine itself.

  (46) The characteristic configurations of the first to nineteenth embodiments may be applied to each other in any combination. For example, the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the sixth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the twelfth embodiment may be combined. The characteristic configuration of the embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the fourth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the eighth embodiment may be combined, and the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment may be combined. The configuration, the characteristic configuration of the thirteenth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the fourteenth embodiment may be combined, and the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the fifteenth embodiment, The characteristic configuration of the embodiment may be combined with the characteristic configuration of the nineteenth embodiment. In addition, a configuration in which the characteristic configuration of the first to nineteenth embodiments is applied in a predetermined combination may be applied in an arbitrary combination of the configuration in the above another embodiment.

<Invention Group Extracted from Each Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately indicated in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration indicated in parentheses.

<Feature A group>
Feature A1. Predetermined ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special prize winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
When a game ball enters the predetermined entry means, specific storage execution means (execution detection processing in the main CPU 63) is performed so that information corresponding to the game ball is stored in the specific storage means (main RAM 65). Function)
A privilege for executing a process for giving a privilege to a player based on the fact that information corresponding to a game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means is stored in the specific storage means A granting unit (a function for executing the process of step S217 in the main CPU 63, a function for executing the process of step S408 in the payout CPU 92);
In a gaming machine equipped with
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the corresponding information is stored in the predetermined storage means (the history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the tenth embodiment). In the main side RAM 65), predetermined information (first information) that allows the number or frequency of game balls to enter the predetermined ball entry means to be specified by the gaming machine or a device external to the gaming machine. A predetermined storage execution unit (first storage unit) that stores history information in the eighth to twelfth embodiments and numerical information measured by a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments in the predetermined storage unit. In the ninth, eleventh, and twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the history setting process in the management CPU 112, and in the tenth embodiment, steps S3202, S3205, and S3208 in the main CPU 63. Step S3212, step S3216, the gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of step S3220 and step S3223).

  According to the feature A1, when a game ball enters a predetermined ball entry means, information corresponding to the game ball is stored in the specific storage means, and when the information is stored in the specific storage means, a privilege is given to the player Is done. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting the game ball to enter the predetermined ball entry means. In this configuration, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, information corresponding to the game ball is stored in the predetermined storage means, and the number of balls entered or the frequency of the ball entry into the predetermined ball entry means. Predetermined information that can be specified by the control means of the gaming machine or a device external to the gaming machine is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, it becomes possible to store and hold information for managing the number of game balls entering or the frequency of entering the predetermined ball entry means in the game machine. By using this managed information, it is possible to store and hold information. It becomes possible to appropriately manage the manner of entering the game ball into the ball entry means. In addition, since the predetermined information is stored and held by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification to the predetermined information.

  Feature A2. The gaming machine according to Feature A1, wherein the predetermined information does not trigger execution of a process for giving a privilege to a player.

  According to the feature A2, the purpose is to appropriately manage the entrance mode of the game ball to the predetermined entrance means by the predetermined information not triggering the execution of the process for granting a privilege to the player It is possible to store and hold predetermined information in an information form.

Feature A3. Specific entry means (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special prize winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area,
The predetermined storage execution means is configured such that when a game ball enters the specific ball entry means, storage of information corresponding thereto is executed in the predetermined storage means, and the game ball enters the specific ball entry means. Specific information enabling the number of balls to be specified by the control means of the gaming machine or a device external to the gaming machine (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, and in the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, wherein the measured numerical information) is stored in the predetermined storage means.

  According to the feature A3, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined entry means but also the specific information corresponding to the specific entry means is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, it is possible to manage not only the manner of entering the game ball into the predetermined entrance means but also the manner of entering the game ball into the specific entrance means. Further, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it becomes possible to manage the ratio of the pitching frequency between the predetermined pitching means and the specific pitching means.

  Feature A4. All the entry means for discharging the entered game balls from the game area, including the predetermined entry means, are stored in the predetermined storage means for information corresponding to the occurrence of the entry of the game balls. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, which is a ball entry means.

  According to the feature A4, since all the entry means for discharging the game ball from the game area are managed using the information stored in the predetermined storage means, the entry frequency for any entry means Can be managed using the information stored in the predetermined storage means. In addition, it is possible to manage the ratio of the number of game balls entering the predetermined ball entry means with respect to the number of game balls discharged from the game area using information stored in the predetermined storage means.

  Feature A5. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein the predetermined information includes information corresponding to a timing at which a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means.

  According to the feature A5, since the information corresponding to the timing at which the game ball enters the predetermined entry means is included in the predetermined information, the use of the predetermined information allows the game ball to enter the predetermined entry means. It becomes possible to grasp the entry history in detail.

  Feature A6. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, wherein the predetermined information is count information of the number of game balls that have entered the predetermined ball entry means.

  According to the feature A6, the predetermined information is the counting information of the number of game balls that have entered the predetermined ball entry means, so that the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means while suppressing the information capacity of the predetermined information. Can be managed.

  Feature A7. The predetermined storage execution unit is configured to store information that allows the game device to specify whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry unit in a predetermined situation in the predetermined storage unit (the In the first to seventh embodiments, the function of the management-side CPU 112 for executing the processing of steps S804 and S809, in the eighth embodiment, the function of the management-side CPU 112 for executing the processing of step S3004, and in the ninth embodiment, the management The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, further comprising a function of executing the process of step S3103 in the side CPU 112).

  According to the feature A7, it is possible to manage the entrance mode of the game ball to the predetermined entrance means by distinguishing whether or not the situation is a predetermined situation.

  Feature A8. Any one of features A1 to A7, comprising external output means (a function for executing external output processing in the management CPU 112) for outputting the information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the gaming machine. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature A8, it is possible to read the information stored in the predetermined storage means from the gaming machine and analyze the entrance mode of the game ball to the predetermined entry means using the read information.

Feature A9. Program output means for outputting a control program to a device external to the gaming machine using the information output unit (reading terminal 102) (function to execute the process of step S903 in the main CPU 63),
The gaming machine according to Feature A8, wherein the external output means outputs the information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device external to the gaming machine using the information output unit.

  According to the feature A9, it is possible to externally output the information stored in the predetermined storage unit by using the information output unit for externally outputting the control program. As a result, it is possible to externally output the information stored in the predetermined storage unit while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

  Feature A10. Means for identifying whether the information to be output from the information output unit is the information stored in the predetermined storage means or the control program, and outputting information corresponding to the identification result (mainly) The gaming machine according to Feature A9, further comprising a function of executing the process of step S902 in the side CPU 63.

  According to the feature A10, in the configuration in which the information output unit for outputting the control program to the outside is used to output the information stored in the predetermined storage unit to the outside, the information to be externally output is the control program and the predetermined information. Which of the information stored in the storage means is specified on the gaming machine side, and the specified information is output to the outside. As a result, only necessary information can be read out even when the information output unit is also used.

Feature A11. First control means (main-side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
Second control means (management CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A10, comprising:

  According to the feature A11, since the second control means provided separately from the first control means having the specific storage execution means has the predetermined storage execution means, the processing load of the first control means is extremely increased. It is possible to achieve the above-described excellent effects while preventing such a situation.

  Feature A12. The gaming machine according to Feature A11, wherein the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip.

  According to feature A12, since the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip, unauthorized access to the communication path between the first control means and the second control means is prevented. It becomes possible to stop.

Feature A13. Specific entry means (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special prize winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area,
The predetermined storage execution means is configured to cause the predetermined storage means to store information corresponding to a game ball entering the specific entry means, so that a game to the specific entry means is performed. Specific information that enables the number of balls entered or the frequency of entrance to be specified by the control means of the gaming machine or a device external to the gaming machine (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, In the eleventh embodiment, numerical information measured by the counter) is stored in the predetermined storage means,
The first control means includes:
First transmission means for transmitting first information to the second control means using a first signal path when a game ball enters the predetermined entry means (first to seventh signals of the main CPU 63). Function to output either), and
Second transmitting means for transmitting second information to the second control means using the second signal path when a game ball enters the specific entering means (the first to seventh signals of the main CPU 63). Function to output either), and
A gaming machine according to Feature A11 or A12, wherein

  According to the feature A13, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined entry means but also the specific information corresponding to the specific entry means is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, it is possible to manage not only the manner of entering the game ball into the predetermined entrance means but also the manner of entering the game ball into the specific entrance means. Further, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it becomes possible to manage the ratio of the pitching frequency between the predetermined pitching means and the specific pitching means.

  Further, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and when a game ball enters the specific ball entry means. The second information is transmitted to the second control means using the second signal path. As a result, the type of information to be transmitted corresponds to the signal path, and the configuration for distinguishing the type of each information by the second control means can be simplified.

  Feature A14. The first control means transmits, to the second control means using the third route, information for specifying that the second control means can specify whether or not a predetermined situation is present. (In the first, third to ninth and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, and in the second embodiment, the signal in the open / close execution mode in the main CPU 63, The gaming machine according to feature A13, further comprising a function of outputting either a high frequency support mode signal or a door opening signal.

  According to the feature A14, it is possible to manage whether the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means and the game ball entry mode into the specific ball entry means by distinguishing whether or not the situation is a predetermined situation. In addition, since the information for identification that can identify whether or not the predetermined situation is present is transmitted to the second control means using the third route, the information for identification is transmitted to the second information by the second control means. It is possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing from other information such as two information.

  Feature A15. The first control means provides the second control means with identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined pitching means and the second information corresponds to the specific pitching means. The gaming machine according to Feature A13 or A14, comprising identification information transmitting means for transmitting (a function for executing recognition processing in the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature A15, identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined entry means and the second information corresponds to the specific entry means is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. Therefore, it is not necessary to previously store the correspondence relationship of these pieces of information in the second control unit. Thereby, the versatility of a 2nd control means can be improved.

  Feature A16. The gaming machine according to Feature A15, wherein the identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means when supply of operating power to the first control means is started.

  According to feature A16, when supply of operating power to the first control means is started, the identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. In a situation where a game ball can enter the ball, it is possible to specify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means by the second control means. Become.

  Feature A17. The identification information transmitting unit transmits the identification information to the second control unit using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path. The feature according to A15 or A16, Gaming machine.

  According to the feature A17, the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, and thus a configuration in which a dedicated signal path for transmitting the identification information is provided. Compared to the above, the communication configuration can be simplified.

  Feature A18. When the second control means receives the identification information, the second control means can specify that the first information corresponds to the predetermined entry means and that the second information corresponds to the specific entry means. Any one of features A15 to A17, comprising: means for storing correspondence relation information to be stored in correspondence relation storage means (correspondence relation memory 116) (function for executing correspondence relation setting processing in the management side CPU 112) The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature A18, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control unit and the ball entry unit is stored in the second control unit. As a result, information that enables the second control means to specify the ball entry means corresponding to the information to be transmitted is provided to the second control means every time the first information or the second information is transmitted from the first control means. There is no need to do it. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the information amount of the first information and the second information.

Feature A19. The first control means transmits third information enabling the second control means to specify whether or not a predetermined situation is present to the second control means using a third route. (In the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, and in the second embodiment, the open / close execution mode signal in the main CPU 63, High frequency support mode signal or door open signal output function)
The second control means is capable of recognizing that the third information is information that can specify whether or not the predetermined situation is present without receiving the identification information. A gaming machine according to any one of A18.

  According to the feature A19, it is possible to manage whether the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means and the game ball entry mode into the specific ball entry means by distinguishing whether or not the situation is a predetermined situation. Further, the fact that the third information is information that can specify whether or not the predetermined situation is present can be specified by the second control means without receiving identification information from the first control means. . As a result, the information form of the identification information can be prevented from becoming complicated.

  Feature A20. The second control means has a receiving unit capable of receiving information from the first control means, more than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A13 to A19, wherein a large number of receiving units (buffers 122a to 122p) are provided.

  According to feature A20, since the second control means is provided with more receiving units than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, Accordingly, even if the number of types of the information increases or decreases, it is possible to cope without changing the configuration related to the receiving unit. Therefore, the versatility of the second control means can be improved.

Feature A21. First external output means (management) that outputs information of a combination of the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means and information that makes it possible to recognize that it corresponds to the predetermined pitching means to a device outside the gaming machine Function for executing external output processing in the side CPU 112),
Second external output means (management) for outputting information of a combination of the specific information stored in the predetermined storage means and information enabling recognition of correspondence to the specific entry means to a device outside the gaming machine Function for executing external output processing in the side CPU 112),
The gaming machine according to any one of features A13 to A20, comprising:

  According to the feature A21, the information stored in the predetermined storage means is read from the gaming machine, and using the read information, the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means and the game ball entering the specific ball entry means It is possible to specify the entrance mode. In addition, when the external output is performed, information of a combination of the predetermined information and the information enabling recognition of the correspondence with the predetermined ball entry means is output to the outside, and the specific information and the specific ball entry means are supported. The information of the combination with the information that makes it possible to recognize that the operation is being performed is output to the outside. Thereby, it becomes possible to specify each entrance mode using the information read from the predetermined storage means.

  Feature A22. An information calculating means (first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, ninth, and nineteenth) for calculating mode information corresponding to a mode of entering a game ball in the game area in a predetermined period using the predetermined information; In the tenth and twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of steps S1008, S1013, and S1017 in the management CPU 112, and in the third embodiment, the processing of steps S2308, S2313, and S2317 in the management CPU 112 are executed. Function, in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2502 in the management CPU 112, in the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2702 in the management CPU 112, and in the seventh embodiment, the function of the management CPU 112 Function for executing the processing of step S2905, the eleventh The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A21, characterized in that the facilities embodiment has a function) for executing the process of step S3503 in the main side CPU 63.

  According to the feature A22, the aspect information corresponding to the entry state of the game ball is calculated by the gaming machine using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. Thereby, for example, it becomes possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the entrance mode of the game ball, or it is possible to externally output the mode information that is a result of calculation using predetermined information. .

Feature A23. The predetermined storage executing means is means for causing the predetermined storage means to store information enabling identification of whether or not a game ball enters the predetermined ball input means in a predetermined situation (first In the seventh to seventh embodiments, the function of the management-side CPU 112 to execute the processing of steps S804 and S809, in the eighth embodiment, the function of the management-side CPU 112 to execute the processing of step S3004, and in the ninth embodiment, the management-side A function of executing the process of step S3103 in the CPU 112)
Means for calculating the aspect information by extracting or excluding the predetermined information corresponding to the entry of a game ball into the predetermined ball entry means in the predetermined situation (first, second, In the sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of steps S1008, S1013, and S1017 in the management CPU 112, and in the third embodiment, the functions of step S2308 in the management CPU 112, A function of executing the processing of steps S2313 and S2317, a function of executing the processing of step S2502 in the management CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S2702 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, In the seventh embodiment, step S2905 in the management CPU 112 is performed. Ability to run the process, the gaming machine according to the features A22 in the eleventh embodiment which is characterized in that a function) for executing the process of step S3503 in the main side CPU 63.

  According to the feature A23, it is possible to calculate the mode information corresponding to the entering mode of the game ball by distinguishing whether or not the situation is a predetermined situation.

  Feature A24. Means for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means when the aspect information is calculated by the information calculation means (first, second, eighth, ninth, tenth, and twelfth implementations); The function A22 or A23 has a function of executing the processing of step S1019 in the management CPU 112 in the embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S2505 in the management CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature A24, when the mode information is calculated, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage unit is deleted, and thus it is difficult to generate an event that the predetermined information exceeds the storage capacity of the predetermined storage unit. It becomes possible to make it.

  Feature A25. Even if the mode information is calculated by the information calculation unit, the state in which the predetermined information used when calculating the mode information is stored in the predetermined storage unit is maintained. Or the gaming machine according to A23.

  According to the feature A25, even if the aspect information is calculated, the predetermined information used when calculating the aspect information is stored and held in the predetermined storage unit, so that the aspect information is read and the game ball enters When analyzing an aspect, it is possible to refer not only to the aspect information but also to predetermined information that is the basis for the calculation of the aspect information.

  Feature A26. When the supply of operating power to the control means having the specific storage execution means is stopped, or when the supply of operating power to the control means having the specific storage execution means is started, The gaming machine according to any one of features A22 to A25, wherein the aspect information is calculated.

  According to the feature A26, since the mode information is calculated when the supply of the operating power to the control unit is stopped or when the supply of the operating power to the control unit is stopped, the mode information is calculated for each business day. It becomes possible to manage.

  Feature A27. The information calculation means calculates the aspect information when a calculation opportunity that can repeatedly occur in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means having the specific storage execution means is generated. The gaming machine according to any one of A26.

  According to feature A27, since the mode information is calculated every time an operation trigger occurs repeatedly in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means, the mode information is managed in detail within the range of one business day. Is possible.

Feature A28. The information calculation means calculates the mode information every time the period measured by the period measurement means (measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65) becomes a predetermined period,
The period measuring means stops measuring the period when the game is not being executed, and resumes the period measurement from the state before the stop when the game is started while the period measurement is stopped The gaming machine according to any one of features A22 to A27, characterized by:

  According to the feature A28, since the aspect information is calculated every time the predetermined period elapses, it is possible to easily adjust the calculation frequency of the aspect information only by adjusting the predetermined period. In this case, in a situation where the game is not being executed, the measurement for a predetermined period is stopped, and when the game is started, the measurement for the predetermined period is resumed from the state before the stop. As a result, it is possible to exclude a situation in which a game is not being executed from the calculation target of the aspect information, and it is possible to appropriately derive aspect information in a situation in which a game is being executed.

  Feature A29. Features A22 to A28, characterized by comprising external output means (function for executing external output processing in the management CPU 112) for outputting the mode information calculated by the information calculation means to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature A29, it is possible to easily grasp the entrance mode of the game ball by outputting the mode information to a device outside the game machine.

  Feature A30. The gaming machine according to Feature A29, wherein the external output means outputs the predetermined information to a device outside the gaming machine when the mode information is output to a device outside the gaming machine.

  According to the feature A30, not only the mode information but also the predetermined information is output to a device outside the gaming machine, so that when the mode information is read and the game ball entering mode is analyzed, It is possible to refer to the predetermined information that is the basis for the calculation of the mode information.

Feature A31. First control means (main-side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
Second control means (management CPU 112) having the external output means;
With
The external output means outputs the mode information to a device external to the gaming machine when the second control means receives the output instruction information transmitted from the first control means. A gaming machine according to A30.

  According to the feature A31, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control unit is reduced by providing the second control unit having the external output unit separately from the first control unit, the mode is based on an instruction from the first control unit. It is possible to output information to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature A32. The information calculation means calculates the mode information every time a predetermined calculation opportunity occurs,
Result storage execution means (in the third embodiment, steps S2310, S2314 and S2318 in the management CPU 112 in the third embodiment) for sequentially storing the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means in a calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 131). 32. The gaming machine according to any one of features A22 to A31, wherein the gaming machine has a function of executing the processing of step S2504 in the management-side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment.

  According to the feature A32, the mode information can be accumulated in the gaming machine. Thereby, when managing the entrance mode of a game ball, it becomes possible to read several mode information collectively.

Feature A33. The result storage execution means includes
Means for determining whether or not the aspect information is storage target information (function of executing the process of step S2503 in management-side CPU 112);
Means for storing the aspect information in the calculation result storage means when the aspect information is the storage target information (a function of executing the process of step S2504 in the management-side CPU 112);
The gaming machine according to Feature A32, further comprising:

  According to the feature A33, when the mode information of the calculated result corresponds to the storage target information, the mode information is stored in the calculation result storage unit. Thereby, it is possible to limit the mode information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and it is possible to suppress the storage capacity necessary for the calculation result storage means.

  Feature A34. The game according to Feature A32 or A33, wherein the result storage execution unit causes the calculation result storage unit to store information that can identify a time when the mode information is calculated, in association with the mode information. Machine.

  According to the feature A34, information that can specify the time when the mode information is calculated is attached to the mode information. Thereby, it becomes possible to analyze each aspect information, grasping | ascertaining the time when each aspect information was calculated.

Feature A35. First control means (main-side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
Second control means (management CPU 112) having the information calculation means;
With
The information calculation unit calculates the mode information when the second control unit receives the calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control unit. Any one of features A22 to A34, Game machines.

  According to the feature A35, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control unit is reduced by providing the second control unit having the information calculation unit separately from the first control unit, the mode is based on an instruction from the first control unit. Information can be calculated by the second control means.

  Feature A36. A notification control unit (a function of executing the processes of steps S3505, S3507, and S3508 in the main CPU 63) that controls the notification unit (the notification light emitting unit 151) so as to notify the content corresponding to the aspect information. The gaming machine according to any one of features A22 to A35.

  According to the feature A36, the content corresponding to the mode information is notified by the gaming machine itself. Thereby, the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp the management result of the entrance mode of the game ball without reading the mode information from the gaming machine.

Feature A37. The control board (main control board 61) provided with the notification control means is housed in a board box,
The gaming machine according to Feature A36, wherein the informing means is provided on the control board.

  According to the feature A37, it is possible to make it difficult to perform unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control unit and the notification unit.

Feature A38. First control means (main-side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
Second control means (management CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
With
The game machine according to Feature A36 or A37, wherein the first control means includes the information calculation means and the notification control means.

  According to the feature A38, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control unit is reduced by providing the second control unit having the predetermined storage unit separately from the first control unit, the function for calculating the mode information and the calculation result thereof It is possible to consolidate functions for executing notification corresponding to the first control means.

  Feature A39. The notification control unit controls the notification unit so that the first notification is executed when the aspect information is information of the first range, and when the aspect information is information of the second range. The gaming machine according to any one of features A36 to A38, wherein the notification means is controlled so that the second notification is executed.

  According to the feature A39, the aspect information is not notified as it is, but the content corresponding to the range including the aspect information is notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of notification patterns in the notification unit from becoming excessive, and to reduce the load for controlling the notification unit.

  Feature A40. Features A1 to A1, further comprising means for externally outputting corresponding information corresponding to a game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means (function of executing step S218 in the main CPU 63) The gaming machine according to any one of A39.

  According to the feature A40, in a configuration in which, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the corresponding information corresponding to the game ball is externally output, the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to use the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means while easily grasping the number and frequency of game balls entering the predetermined entry means by using the correspondence information. It becomes possible to accurately grasp the number and frequency of game balls entering the ball means.

  Feature A41. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A40, wherein the predetermined storage execution unit or the second control unit is provided as a dedicated circuit.

  According to the feature A41, it is possible to achieve an excellent effect as described above in the configuration in which the predetermined storage execution unit or the second control unit is provided as a dedicated circuit.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features A1 to A41, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C4, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F45, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to Any one or more of H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of the game, the storage of information corresponding to the predetermined event is performed by a predetermined storage unit (the history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, and the main memory in the tenth embodiment). The predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured by a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is stored in the RAM 65). Predetermined storage executing means for storing in the storage means (a function of executing a history setting process in the management CPU 112 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, a main CPU 63 in the tenth embodiment) In step S3202, step S3205, step S3208, step S3212, step S3216, step S3220, and step S3223 To function),
An information calculating means (first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, ninth, twelfth and twelfth embodiments) for calculating aspect information corresponding to a result of a game in a predetermined period by using the predetermined information; In the third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S1008, S1013, and S1017 in the management CPU 112. In the third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S2308, S2313, and S2317 in the management CPU 112, the fourth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2702 in the management CPU 112 is performed in the management CPU 112, and in the seventh embodiment, the processing of step S2905 is performed in the management CPU 112. Function, main side CP in the eleventh embodiment Processing in step S3503 and the ability to perform) in 63,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B1, when a predetermined event occurs, information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the predetermined storage unit, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage unit. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the occurrence frequency or occurrence frequency of a predetermined event in the gaming machine, and appropriately manage the occurrence mode of the predetermined event by using this managed information. Can be performed. In addition, since the predetermined information is stored and held by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification to the predetermined information.

  Further, using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means, the aspect information corresponding to the game result in the predetermined period is calculated in the gaming machine. Thereby, for example, it becomes possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period, or it is possible to externally output the aspect information that is the result of calculation using the predetermined information Become.

Feature B2. The predetermined storage executing means is means for causing the predetermined storage means to store information that can specify whether the occurrence of the predetermined event is in a predetermined situation (in the first to seventh embodiments, The function of the management CPU 112 to execute the processing of steps S804 and S809, the function of the management CPU 112 to execute the processing of step S3004 in the eighth embodiment, and the function of the management CPU 112 to perform the processing of step S3103 in the ninth embodiment. Function to execute)
The information calculating means extracts or excludes the predetermined information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event in the predetermined situation and calculates the mode information (first, second, sixth, eighth, and eighth modes). In the ninth, tenth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of steps S1008, S1013, and S1017 in the management CPU 112, and in the third embodiment, the processing of steps S2308, S2313, and S2317 in the management CPU 112. In the fourth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S2502 in the management-side CPU 112, in the fifth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S2702 in the management-side CPU 112, and in the seventh embodiment, the management Execute the process of step S2905 in the side CPU 112 Feature gaming machine according to features B1 in the eleventh embodiment, characterized in that a function) for executing the process of step S3503 in the main side CPU 63.

  According to the feature B2, it is possible to calculate the mode information corresponding to the game result in a predetermined period by distinguishing whether or not the situation is a predetermined situation.

  Feature B3. Means for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means when the aspect information is calculated by the information calculation means (first, second, eighth, ninth, tenth, and twelfth implementations); The feature B1 or B2, which has a function of executing the processing of step S1019 in the management-side CPU 112 in the embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S2505 in the management-side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature B3, when the mode information is calculated, it is difficult to generate an event that the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage unit is erased and the predetermined information exceeds the storage capacity of the predetermined storage unit. It becomes possible to make it.

  Feature B4. Even if the mode information is calculated by the information calculation unit, the state in which the predetermined information used when calculating the mode information is stored in the predetermined storage unit is maintained B1 Or the gaming machine described in B2.

  According to the feature B4, even if the aspect information is calculated, the predetermined information used when calculating the aspect information is stored and held in the predetermined storage unit, so that the aspect information is read and a game in a predetermined period When analyzing the result, it is possible to refer not only to the mode information but also to the predetermined information that is the basis for the calculation of the mode information.

  Feature B5. The information calculation means calculates the mode information when supply of operating power to the control means (MPU 62) is stopped or supply of operating power to the control means is started. Thru | or the game machine of any one of B4.

  According to the feature B5, since the mode information is calculated when the supply of the operating power to the control unit is stopped or the supply of the operating power to the control unit is started, the mode information is calculated for each business day. It becomes possible to manage.

  Feature B6. Any of the characteristics B1 to B5, wherein the information calculation means calculates the mode information when a calculation opportunity that can repeatedly occur in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means (MPU 62) is generated. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature B6, since the mode information is calculated every time the calculation trigger that repeatedly occurs in the situation where the operating power is supplied to the control means, the mode information is managed in detail within the range of one business day. Is possible.

Feature B7. The information calculation means calculates the mode information every time the period measured by the period measurement means (measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65) becomes a predetermined period,
The period measuring means stops the measurement of the period when the game is not executed, and restarts the measurement of the period from the state before the stop when the game is started in the state where the measurement of the period is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, characterized in that:

  According to the feature B7, since the aspect information is calculated every time the predetermined period elapses, it is possible to easily adjust the calculation frequency of the aspect information simply by adjusting the predetermined period. In this case, in a situation where the game is not being executed, the measurement for a predetermined period is stopped, and when the game is started, the measurement for the predetermined period is resumed from the state before the stop. As a result, it is possible to exclude a situation in which a game is not being executed from the calculation target of the aspect information, and it is possible to appropriately derive aspect information in a situation in which a game is being executed.

  Feature B8. Features B1 to B7, comprising external output means (function for executing external output processing in the management CPU 112) for outputting the mode information calculated by the information calculation means to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature B8, it is possible to easily grasp the entrance mode of the game ball by outputting the mode information to a device outside the game machine.

  Feature B9. The gaming machine according to Feature B8, wherein the external output means outputs the predetermined information to a device outside the gaming machine when the mode information is output to a device outside the gaming machine.

  According to the feature B9, not only the mode information but also the predetermined information is output to a device outside the gaming machine, so that when the mode information is read and the game ball entering mode is analyzed, It is possible to refer to the predetermined information that is the basis for the calculation of the mode information.

Feature B10. First control means (main-side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
Second control means (management CPU 112) having the external output means;
With
The external output means outputs the mode information to a device outside the gaming machine when the second control means receives the output instruction information transmitted from the first control means. A gaming machine according to B9.

  According to the feature B10, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control unit is reduced by providing the second control unit having the external output unit separately from the first control unit, the mode is based on an instruction from the first control unit. It is possible to output information to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature B11. The information calculation means calculates the mode information every time a predetermined calculation opportunity occurs,
Result storage execution means (in the third embodiment, steps S2310, S2314 and S2318 in the management CPU 112 in the third embodiment) for sequentially storing the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means in a calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 131). The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B10, further comprising a function of executing the processing of step S2504 in the management-side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment.

  According to the feature B11, the mode information can be accumulated in the gaming machine. This makes it possible to read out a plurality of pieces of mode information collectively when managing the mode of game results in a predetermined period.

  Feature B12. The result storage execution means includes means for storing the aspect information in the operation result storage means when the aspect information is storage target information (a function of executing the process of step S2504 in the management-side CPU 112). The gaming machine according to Feature B11, wherein the gaming machine is characterized in that:

  According to the feature B12, when the mode information of the calculated result corresponds to the storage target information, the mode information is stored in the calculation result storage unit. Thereby, it is possible to limit the mode information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and it is possible to suppress the storage capacity necessary for the calculation result storage means.

  Feature B13. The game according to Feature B11 or B12, wherein the result storage execution unit causes the calculation result storage unit to store information that can identify a time when the mode information is calculated, in association with the mode information. Machine.

  According to the feature B13, information that can specify the time when the mode information is calculated is attached to the mode information. Thereby, it becomes possible to analyze each aspect information, grasping | ascertaining the time when each aspect information was calculated.

Feature B14. First control means (main-side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
Second control means (management CPU 112) having the information calculation means;
With
The information calculation unit calculates the mode information when the second control unit receives the calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control unit, according to any one of the features B1 to B13, Game machines.

  According to the feature B14, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control unit is reduced by providing the second control unit having the information calculation unit separately from the first control unit, the mode is based on an instruction from the first control unit. Information can be calculated by the second control means.

  Feature B15. A notification control unit (a function of executing the processes of steps S3505, S3507, and S3508 in the main CPU 63) that controls the notification unit (the notification light emitting unit 151) so as to notify the content corresponding to the aspect information. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B14.

  According to the feature B15, the content corresponding to the mode information is notified by the gaming machine itself. Thereby, the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp the management result of the game in a predetermined period without reading out the mode information from the gaming machine.

Feature B16. The control board (main control board 61) provided with the notification control means is housed in a board box,
The game machine according to Feature B15, wherein the notification means is provided on the control board.

  According to the feature B16, it is possible to make it difficult to perform unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control unit and the notification unit.

Feature B17. First control means (main-side CPU 63) having the information calculation means and the notification control means;
Second control means (management CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
A gaming machine according to Feature B15 or B16, characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B17, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control unit is reduced by providing the second control unit having the predetermined storage unit separately from the first control unit, the function of calculating the aspect information and the calculation result thereof It is possible to consolidate functions for executing notification corresponding to the first control means.

  Feature B18. The notification control unit controls the notification unit so that the first notification is executed when the aspect information is information of the first range, and when the aspect information is information of the second range. The gaming machine according to any one of features B15 to B17, wherein the notification unit is controlled so that the second notification is executed.

  According to the feature B18, the aspect information is not notified as it is, but the content corresponding to the range including the aspect information is notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of notification patterns in the notification unit from becoming excessive, and to reduce the load for controlling the notification unit.

Feature B19. Predetermined ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special prize winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the storage of information corresponding to the game ball is stored in the predetermined storage means (the history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the tenth embodiment). In this case, the predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, and numerical information measured by a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is executed by executing the information in the main RAM 65). Is stored in the predetermined storage means (a function of executing a history setting process in the management-side CPU 112 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, a function of the tenth embodiment) The processes of steps S3202, S3205, S3208, S3212, S3216, S3220 and S3223 in the main CPU 63 are executed. To function),
An information calculating means (first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, ninth, and nineteenth) for calculating aspect information corresponding to an entering mode of a game ball in the gaming area during a predetermined period by using the predetermined information; In the tenth and twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of steps S1008, S1013, and S1017 in the management CPU 112, and in the third embodiment, the processing of steps S2308, S2313, and S2317 in the management CPU 112 are executed. Function, in the fourth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S2502 in the management CPU 112, in the fifth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S2702 in the management CPU 112, and in the seventh embodiment, the function of the management CPU 112 Function for executing the processing of step S2905, the eleventh And functions) for executing the process of step S3503 in the main side CPU63 in facilities form,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B19, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the corresponding information is stored in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. Become. As a result, it becomes possible to store and hold information for managing the number of game balls entering or the frequency of entering the predetermined ball entry means in the game machine. By using this managed information, it is possible to store and hold information. It becomes possible to appropriately manage the manner of entering the game ball into the ball entry means. In addition, since the predetermined information is stored and held by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification to the predetermined information.

  In addition, using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means, the mode information corresponding to the entrance mode of the game ball is calculated in the gaming machine. Thereby, for example, it becomes possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the entrance mode of the game ball, or it is possible to externally output the mode information that is a result of calculation using predetermined information. .

  Feature B20. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B19, wherein the predetermined storage execution unit or the second control unit is provided as a dedicated circuit.

  According to the feature B20, it is possible to achieve the above-described excellent effects in a configuration in which the predetermined storage execution unit or the second control unit is provided as a dedicated circuit.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features B1 to B20, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C4, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F45, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or more of H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. Program output means (a function for executing the process of step S903 in the main CPU 63) for outputting a control program to a device outside the gaming machine using the information output unit (reading terminal 102);
Information output means for outputting special information using the information output unit (function for executing external output processing in the management CPU 112);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature C1, it is possible to externally output the special information by using the information output unit for externally outputting the control program. This makes it possible to output special information to the outside while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

  Feature C2. Selection means (step S902 in the main CPU 63) for specifying whether the information to be output from the information output unit is the special information or the control program, and outputting information corresponding to the specified result. The gaming machine according to feature C1, further comprising a function of executing the processing of (1).

  According to the feature C2, in a configuration in which the special information is externally output using the information output unit for externally outputting the control program, the information to be externally output is either the control program or the special information. Is determined on the gaming machine side, and the specified information is externally output. As a result, only necessary information can be read out even when the information output unit is also used.

  Feature C3. The selection means determines whether the information to be output from the information output unit is the special information or the control program based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the information output unit. The gaming machine according to Feature C2, wherein the gaming machine is specified.

  According to the feature C3, information to be output from the information output unit is specified based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the information output unit. Thereby, it becomes possible to prevent the configuration related to selection of information to be output from becoming complicated.

  Feature C4. Any one of characteristics C1 to C3, wherein a chip (MPU 62) having a program storage unit (main ROM 64) for storing the control program in advance has the information output unit and the information output unit. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature C4, signal paths to the information output unit can be integrated in the chip. As a result, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while making it difficult to illegally access the signal path to the information output unit.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features C1 to C4, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C4, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F45, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or more of H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Comprising first control means (main CPU 63) and second control means (management CPU 112),
The first control means includes:
A privilege granting means (a function for executing the process of step S217 in the main CPU 63, a function for executing the process of step S408 in the payout CPU 92) so that a privilege is granted to the player when a predetermined event occurs,
Information transmitting means for transmitting predetermined event information corresponding to the predetermined event when it occurs (function to execute management output processing in the main CPU 63);
With
When the predetermined event information is received, the second control means stores the information corresponding to the predetermined event information in the predetermined storage means (the history memory 117, the tenth and tenth embodiments in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments). In the embodiment, by executing the predetermined event in the main RAM 65), predetermined information (first to eighth) that enables the number of occurrences or the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event to be specified by the gaming machine or a device external to the gaming machine. , A predetermined storage executing means (first to ninth embodiments) for storing history information in the twelfth embodiment and numerical information measured by a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments. In the eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the history setting process in the management CPU 112, and in the tenth embodiment, steps S3202, S3205, and S3 in the main CPU 63. 08, step S3212, step S3216, the gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of step S3220 and step S3223).

  According to the feature D1, a privilege is given to the player when a predetermined event occurs. As a result, the player plays a game while expecting a predetermined event to occur. In this configuration, when a predetermined event occurs, storage of information corresponding to the predetermined event is executed in the predetermined storage means, and the number of occurrences or the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event can be specified by the gaming machine or a device outside the gaming machine. The predetermined information to be stored is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the occurrence frequency or occurrence frequency of a predetermined event in the gaming machine, and appropriately manage the occurrence mode of the predetermined event by using this managed information. Can be performed. In addition, since the predetermined information is stored and held by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification to the predetermined information.

  In addition, the second control means provided separately from the first control means having the privilege granting means has the predetermined storage execution means so that the processing load of the first control means does not increase excessively. However, it is possible to achieve excellent effects as described above.

  Feature D2. The gaming machine according to Feature D1, wherein the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip.

  According to the feature D2, since the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip, unauthorized access to the communication path between the first control means and the second control means can be prevented. It is possible to prevent.

Feature D3. The predetermined storage execution unit executes the storage process of information corresponding to the occurrence of a specific event in the predetermined storage unit, so that the number of occurrences or the occurrence frequency of the specific event is determined outside the gaming machine or the gaming machine. Specific information that can be specified by the device (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured by the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is stored in the predetermined storage means. To be
The first control means includes:
First transmission means for transmitting first information to the second control means using the first signal path when the predetermined event occurs (function to output any one of first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) )When,
Second transmission means for transmitting second information to the second control means using the second signal path when the specific event occurs (function to output one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) )When,
The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, comprising:

  According to the feature D3, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined event but also the specific information corresponding to the specific event is stored in the predetermined storage unit. As a result, it is possible to manage not only the occurrence mode of the predetermined event but also the occurrence mode of the specific event. Further, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it is possible to manage the ratio of the occurrence frequency between the predetermined event and the specific event.

  Further, when a predetermined event occurs, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and when the specific event occurs, the second information is transmitted using the second signal path. It is transmitted to the second control means. As a result, the type of information to be transmitted corresponds to the signal path, and the configuration for distinguishing the type of each information by the second control means can be simplified.

  Feature D4. A third transmission unit configured to transmit, using a third route, identification information that enables the second control unit to identify whether or not a predetermined situation is present; (In the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, and in the second embodiment, the open / close execution mode signal in the main CPU 63, The gaming machine according to Feature D3, further comprising a function of outputting either the high-frequency support mode signal or the door open signal.

  According to the feature D4, it is possible to manage the occurrence mode of the predetermined event and the occurrence mode of the specific event while distinguishing whether or not the situation is the predetermined situation. In addition, since the information for identification that can identify whether or not the predetermined situation is present is transmitted to the second control means using the third route, the information for identification is transmitted to the second information by the second control means. It is possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing from other information such as two information.

  Feature D5. The first control means transmits identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and the second information corresponds to the specific event to the second control means. The gaming machine according to Feature D3 or D4, further comprising transmission means (a function of executing a recognition process in the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature D5, identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and the second information corresponds to the specific event is transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit. There is no need to store the correspondence between these pieces of information in the second control means in advance. Thereby, the versatility of a 2nd control means can be improved.

  Feature D6. The gaming machine according to Feature D5, wherein the identification information transmitting unit transmits the identification information to the second control unit when the supply of the operating power to the first control unit is started.

  According to the feature D6, when the supply of the operating power to the first control unit is started, the identification information is transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit, so that a predetermined event and a specific event can occur. In this situation, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means can be specified by the second control means.

  Feature D7. The apparatus according to claim D5 or D6, wherein said identification information transmitting means transmits said identification information to said second control means using at least one of said first signal path and said second signal path. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature D7, since the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, a configuration is provided in which a dedicated signal path for transmitting the identification information is provided. It is possible to simplify the configuration related to communication as compared with.

  Feature D8. The second control means, when receiving the identification information, correspondence information enabling to specify that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and the second information corresponds to the specific event. (A function of executing a correspondence setting process in the management-side CPU 112) for storing the information in the correspondence storage means (correspondence memory 116). Gaming machine.

  According to the feature D8, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control unit and the type of event is stored in the second control unit. As a result, information that enables the second control means to specify the type of event corresponding to the information to be transmitted is provided to the second control means each time the first information or the second information is transmitted from the first control means. There is no need to do it. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the information amount of the first information and the second information.

Feature D9. The first control means transmits third information enabling the second control means to specify whether or not a predetermined situation is present to the second control means using a third route. (In the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, and in the second embodiment, the open / close execution mode signal in the main CPU 63, High frequency support mode signal or door open signal output function)
The second control means is capable of recognizing that the third information is information that can specify whether or not the predetermined situation exists, without receiving the identification information. The characteristic D5 A gaming machine according to any one of D8 to D8.

  According to the feature D9, it is possible to manage the occurrence mode of the predetermined event and the occurrence mode of the specific event while distinguishing whether or not the situation is the predetermined situation. Further, the fact that the third information is information that can specify whether or not the predetermined situation is present can be specified by the second control means without receiving identification information from the first control means. . As a result, the information form of the identification information can be prevented from becoming complicated.

  Feature D10. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D9, wherein the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

  According to the feature D10, in the configuration in which the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects described above.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features D1 to D10, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C4, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F45, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or more of H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature group A, the feature group B, the feature group C, and the feature group D, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, the front of the gaming machine is provided with a dish storage unit that stores game balls given to the player, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launcher. It is fired toward the game area in accordance with the player's launch operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage portion, for example. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine is also known to have an upper dish storage part and a lower dish storage part as a dish storage part. In this case, the game balls stored in the upper dish storage part are released as game balls. The game balls that are guided by the apparatus and become surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Here, in gaming machines such as the above-described examples, management of gaming machines needs to be performed suitably, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. First control means (main CPU 63);
Second control means (management CPU 112) for receiving information transmitted from the first control means;
With
The first control means includes:
First transmission means for transmitting the first information to the second control means using the first signal path when the first event occurs (function to output one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) )When,
Second transmission means for transmitting the second information to the second control means using the second signal path when the second event occurs (function to output one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) )When,
Identification information transmission means (main side) for transmitting identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the first event and the second information corresponds to the second event to the second control means A function of executing recognition processing in the CPU 63);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature E1, when the first event occurs, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and when the second event occurs, the second information path is used. Then, the second information is transmitted to the second control means. As a result, the type of information to be transmitted corresponds to the signal path, and the configuration for distinguishing the type of each information by the second control means can be simplified.

  In addition, since the first information corresponds to the first event and the identification information indicating that the second information corresponds to the second event is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, these information This need not be stored in advance in the second control means. Thereby, the versatility of a 2nd control means can be improved.

  Feature E2. The gaming machine according to Feature E1, wherein the identification information transmitting unit transmits the identification information to the second control unit when supply of operating power to the first control unit is started.

  According to the feature E2, when the supply of the operating power to the first control means is started, the identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. In a situation where a game ball can enter the ball, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means can be specified by the second control means. Become.

  Feature E3. The feature according to Feature E1 or E2, wherein the identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature E3, since the identification information is transmitted to the second control unit using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, a configuration is provided in which a dedicated signal path for transmitting the identification information is provided. It is possible to simplify the configuration related to communication as compared with.

  Feature E4. The second control unit, when receiving the identification information, can specify that the first information corresponds to the first event and that the second information corresponds to the second event. Any one of the features E1 to E3, further including a unit (a function of executing a correspondence setting process in the management-side CPU 112) for storing the relationship information in the correspondence storage unit (correspondence memory 116). The described gaming machine.

  According to the feature E4, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means is stored in the second control means. Thus, it is necessary to provide the second control means with information that enables the second control means to specify an event corresponding to the information to be transmitted every time the first information or the second information is transmitted from the first control means. Disappears. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the information amount of the first information and the second information.

Feature E5. The first control means transmits third information enabling the second control means to specify whether or not a predetermined situation is present to the second control means using a third route. (In the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, and in the second embodiment, the open / close execution mode signal in the main CPU 63, High frequency support mode signal or door open signal output function)
The feature E1 is characterized in that the second control means can recognize that the third information is information that can specify whether or not the predetermined situation exists, without receiving the identification information. The gaming machine according to any one of to E4.

  According to the feature E5, it is possible to manage the occurrence mode of the first event and the occurrence mode of the second event while distinguishing whether or not the situation is the predetermined situation. Further, the fact that the third information is information that can specify whether or not the predetermined situation is present can be specified by the second control means without receiving identification information from the first control means. . As a result, the information form of the identification information can be prevented from becoming complicated.

  Feature E6. As a signal path through which information can be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, a signal path of a number larger than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, wherein a signal path is provided.

  According to the feature E6, the number of signal paths that is larger than the number of types of information that needs to be transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit is provided, so that the information can be transmitted in accordance with the type of gaming machine. Even when the number of types increases or decreases, it is possible to cope without changing the configuration related to the signal path. Therefore, the versatility of the second control means can be improved.

  Feature E7. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, wherein said second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

  According to the feature E7, in the configuration in which the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects described above.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features E1 to E7, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C4, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F45, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or more of H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature group E, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, the front of the gaming machine is provided with a dish storage unit that stores game balls given to the player, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launcher. It is fired toward the game area in accordance with the player's launch operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage portion, for example. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine is also known to have an upper dish storage part and a lower dish storage part as a dish storage part. In this case, the game balls stored in the upper dish storage part are released as game balls. The game balls that are guided by the apparatus and become surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Here, in the gaming machine such as the above-described example, it is necessary to make the configuration related to communication suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. A first state in which a game ball is provided or is provided in a game area (game area PA) in which a game ball flows down, or in which the game ball can easily enter, or the game ball cannot be entered or the game ball is difficult to enter. Variable ball entry means provided to be switchable to each of the second state (special power winning device 32 in the first to fourteenth and eighteenth embodiments, first special power winning device 261 and second power device in the fifteenth embodiment) Tokuden winning device 262),
Special control means (special power open setting processing and special power close setting processing in the main CPU 63 for executing special control for setting the variable ball input means to the first state and then to the second state. Function),
Transition means (a function of executing a special figure finalizing process in the main CPU 63) for transiting a game state to a special control state (open / close execution mode) in which the special control is executed;
Special ball entry means (first to thirteenth and eighteenth implementations) in which the entry of game balls is restricted in a predetermined game state other than the special control state and the game balls can enter in the special control state In the embodiment, the through gate 35, the first special entrance 251 and the second special entrance 252 in the fourteenth embodiment, the first through gate 263 and the second through gate 264 in the fifteenth embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature F1, the game state shifts to the special control state, so that the game ball can enter or become easy to enter the variable ball entry means, and the game ball enters the special ball entry means. Can be entered. As a result, it is possible to increase the profit of the game state shifting to the special control state, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature F2. The gaming machine according to Feature F1, characterized in that a game ball can enter the special ball entry means when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the special control state.

  According to the feature F2, even if the game state shifts to the special control state, the game ball does not enter the special ball entry means unless the predetermined condition is satisfied. Thereby, the player expects that the predetermined condition is satisfied in addition to the ball entering the variable ball-in means in the special control state, and can enhance the interest of the game in the special control state. It becomes.

  Feature F3. The gaming machine according to Feature F1 or F2, wherein at least one condition necessary to generate the special control state is established based on a game ball having entered the special ball-in means.

  According to the feature F3, when the special control state occurs, the game ball can enter the special ball entry unit, and when the game ball enters the special ball entry unit, the special control state can be generated again. . As a result, it is possible to create a situation where the special control state occurs continuously, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature F4. The shifting means is means for generating the special control state irrespective of the entering of a game ball into the special entering means (result of executing the hit / fail judgment processing of step S1405 on the first suspension information in the main CPU 63) The gaming machine according to Feature F3, further comprising: a function of shifting to an open / close execution mode.

  According to the feature F4, the special control state can be generated even when the game ball does not enter the special ball entry means. The special control state is provided by providing the configuration of the above-described feature F3, and the special control state is generated, so that the game ball can enter the special ball entry means. It can happen again. In this case, the player expects the special control state to be started in a situation other than the special control state, and expects the special control state to be continuously executed in the special control state. .

Feature F5. At least a predetermined ball entry means (first operating port 33) that allows game balls to enter in the predetermined game state;
At least one of the at least one necessary to generate the special control state based on the fact that a game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means even if the game ball has not entered the special ball entry means. The gaming machine according to Feature F3 or F4, wherein the condition is satisfied.

  According to the feature F5, in a predetermined game state that is not the special control state, a special control state can be generated based on a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means. The special control state is provided by providing the configuration of the above-described feature F3, and the special control state is generated, so that the game ball can enter the special ball entry means. It can happen again. In this case, in a predetermined game state that is not the special control state, the player expects the game ball to enter the predetermined ball entry means. In the special control state, not only the variable ball entry means but also the special ball entry means The player expects the game ball to enter the means.

  Feature F6. Rather than the probability that the special control state occurs based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means, the probability that the special control state occurs based on the game ball entering the special ball entry means The gaming machine according to Feature F5, wherein the gaming machine is higher.

  According to the feature F6, in the predetermined game state that is not the special control state, the probability that the game ball enters the predetermined ball-in means and the special control state occurs and the game ball enters the special ball-in means in the special control state. There is a higher probability that the special control state will occur continuously after entering the ball. This makes it possible to increase the player's expectation that the game ball will enter the special ball entry means in the special control state.

Feature F7. A means for acquiring special opportunity information when a game ball enters the special ball entry means (a function of executing the process of step S1101 in the main CPU 63 in the first to fifteenth embodiments, a function of the eighteenth embodiment) (The function of executing the process of step S4404 in the main CPU 63).
When the special occasion information is acquired, at least one condition required to generate the special control state is satisfied,
The gaming machine according to any one of features F3 to F6, wherein an expectation value at which the special control state occurs after the acquisition of the special occasion information does not change according to a game state.

  According to the feature F7, since the expected value at which the special control state occurs after the special opportunity information is acquired does not change according to the gaming state, the expected value is changed according to the gaming state. In addition to simplifying the processing configuration, it becomes easier to manage the expected value. However, in such a configuration in which the expected value does not fluctuate according to the game state, it becomes difficult to give the game intonation. On the other hand, since the configuration of the above-mentioned feature F1 is provided and it is possible to enter the game ball into the special ball entry means in the special control state, the inflection is given at the opportunity to acquire the special opportunity information. Is possible, and as a result, it is possible to give inflection to the game.

Feature F8. A ball input means (second operation port) for enabling the game ball to enter based on the game ball entering the special ball entry means;
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F7, wherein a transition trigger to the special control state is generated based on a game ball having entered the opportunity ball input means.

  According to the feature F8, when the game ball enters the special ball entry means, the game ball can enter the opportunity ball means, and the game ball enters the opportunity ball means, and the special control state is obtained. There is an opportunity to move to. Thereby, in order to continuously generate the special control state, it is necessary to cause the special ball entry means to enter the game ball in the special control state, and further cause the game ball to enter the opportunity ball entry means. Become. Therefore, the uncertainty to the continuous occurrence of the special control state is increased, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Feature F9. The feature F8 is characterized in that the variable ball entry means, the special ball entry means, and the opportunity ball entry means are provided in an area where the game ball flows down when the shooting operation is performed in a predetermined mode. The described gaming machine.

  According to the feature F9, by continuing the firing operation in the predetermined mode, the game ball enters the variable ball entry unit, the game ball enters the special ball entry unit, and the game enters the opportunity ball entry unit. It is possible to aim for the ball to enter.

Feature F10. Means for controlling the triggering ball means to be in a ball-enterable state in which game balls can be pitched, with at least one condition that a game ball has hit the special ball-filling means (main CPU 63 Function for executing the processing of steps S1108 to S1110) in
The feature F8 or F9 is characterized in that the frequency at which the opportunity ball entry means enters the ball enterable state with respect to the entry of game balls into the special ball entry means is constant regardless of the game state. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature F10, the frequency at which the triggering ball means enters the ball-enterable state with respect to the entry of a game ball into the special ball-filling means is constant regardless of the playing state, so that the game The expected value at which the special control state occurs after the ball enters does not fluctuate according to the game state. As a result, the processing configuration can be simplified as compared with a configuration in which the expected value is changed according to the game state, and the expected value can be easily managed. However, in such a configuration in which the expected value does not fluctuate according to the game state, it becomes difficult to give the game intonation. On the other hand, since the configuration of the above-mentioned feature F1 is provided and the game ball can enter the special ball entry means in the special control state, the game ball can enter the special ball entry means at an opportunity. Inflection can be given, and as a result, it is possible to give inflection to the game.

Feature F11. The special control state includes a first special control state (for example, 2R high accuracy result) and a second special control state (for example, 16R high accuracy result),
The game according to any one of Features F1 to F10, wherein the first special control state and the second special control state are different in the ease with which game balls enter the special ball entry means. Machine.

  According to the feature F11, the ease of entry of the game ball into the special ball entry means differs between the first special control state and the second special control state, so that the game ball enters the special ball entry means. Is expected to generate a special control state in which it is easy for game balls to enter the special ball entry means. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature F12. When the variable ball entry means switches from one of the first state and the second state to the other, it is possible to enter a game ball into the special ball entry means,
The gaming machine according to Feature F11, wherein the number of times the special control is executed is different between the first special control state and the second special control state.

  According to the feature F12, when the variable ball entry means switches from one of the first state and the second state to the other, the game ball can enter the special ball entry means. It is possible to increase the player's attention to the state switching timing. Therefore, in the special control state, it is possible to diversify the target that the player should pay attention to, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special control state.

  In this case, the number of times the state is switched by the variable ball entry means is different between the first special control state and the second special control state. As a result, the ease with which the game ball enters the special ball entry means differs between the first special control state and the second special control state, and it is expected that the game ball will enter the special ball entry means. The player expects the occurrence of a special control state in which game balls are likely to enter the special ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature F13. When the variable ball entry means switches from one of the first state and the second state to the other, it is possible to enter a game ball into the special ball entry means,
The gaming machine is
Means for executing the round game in which the special control is executed a predetermined number of times in the special control state (the function of executing the special power starting process, the special power opening process, and the special power closing process in the main CPU 63);
Means for terminating the round game when a predetermined number of game balls have entered the variable ball entry means in one round game (function of making an affirmative determination in step S3703 in main CPU 63);
A plurality of execution means for executing the special control a plurality of times in a predetermined round game (a function of executing the process of step S3707 when the round counter = 1 in the main CPU 63);
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F12, comprising:

  According to the feature F13, when the variable ball entry means switches from one of the first state and the second state to the other, the game ball can enter the special ball entry means. The player's attention to the switching timing of this state can be increased. Therefore, in the special control state, it is possible to diversify the target that the player should pay attention to, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special control state.

  In this case, in the predetermined round game, the switching of the state in the variable ball entry means occurs a plurality of times. As a result, it is possible to generate a predetermined round game in which a game ball easily enters the special ball entry means as a round game. Therefore, the player expects the occurrence of a predetermined round game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature F14. As the execution mode of the special control, at least a high expectation mode and a low expectation mode in which the degree of expectation of game balls entering the variable ball entry means is relatively high and low are set,
The plurality of execution units may be configured to execute the special control in the high expectation mode after the special control in the low expectation mode is executed in the predetermined round game. The gaming machine according to Feature F13.

  According to the feature F14, in the predetermined round game, the special control in the low expectation mode is executed, and then the special control in the high expectation mode is executed. It is possible to make it possible for a plurality of game balls to enter the variable ball entry means in the predetermined round game while ensuring that the switching of a plurality of times occurs.

  Feature F15. The feature F14 is characterized in that the high expectation degree mode is a mode in which an upper limit period in which the variable ball entry means is in the first state is a period equal to or longer than a product of a launch cycle of game balls and the predetermined number. The described gaming machine.

  According to the feature F15, a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable ball entry means in the predetermined round game while ensuring that the state switching in the variable ball entry means occurs a plurality of times in the predetermined round game. It is possible to obtain.

  Feature F16. When the variable ball entry means switches from one of the first state and the second state to the other, it is configured such that game balls can enter the special ball entry means. The gaming machine according to any one of F1 to F15.

  According to the feature F16, when the variable ball entry means switches from one of the first state and the second state to the other, the game ball can enter the special ball entry means. It is possible to increase the player's attention to the state switching timing. Therefore, in the special control state, it is possible to diversify the target that the player should pay attention to, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special control state.

  Feature F17. The special ball entry means is located downstream of the variable ball entry means in the downflow direction of the game ball in the game area, and the variable ball entry means is one of the first state and the second state. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F16, wherein the gaming machine is provided at a position where a game ball can flow in at a timing of switching to the game machine.

  According to the feature F17, the special ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball can flow in at the timing when the variable ball entry means switches from one of the first state to the other of the second state, When the variable ball entry means switches from one of the first state and the second state to the other, game balls can enter the special ball entry means. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the switching timing of this state. Therefore, in the special control state, it is possible to diversify the target that the player should pay attention to, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special control state. In addition, the above-described excellent effects can be achieved only by setting the positional relationship of the special ball entry means with respect to the variable ball entry means as described above.

Feature F18. The variable ball-in means includes a game ball that is in a first corresponding state in one of the first state and the second state when the variable ball-in means has flowed down from the upstream side of the variable ball-in means. In this state, the game ball is prevented from flowing down in a predetermined direction, and the variable ball-in means becomes the second corresponding state in the other of the first state and the second state. A displacement portion (guide plate portion 214) that allows the game ball to flow down in the predetermined direction,
The special ball entry means is configured such that, in a state where a game ball is placed on the displacement portion, when the displacement portion switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, the game ball flows down in the predetermined direction. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F17, wherein the gaming machine is provided at a position where the gaming ball can flow.

  According to the feature F18, when the displacement portion switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, the game ball placed on the displacement portion can enter the special ball entry means. In this way, in the special control state, the player not only determines whether or not a ball is inserted into the variable ball-in means, but also performs the first response when the game ball is placed on the displacement portion. Attention is paid to whether the state is switched from the state to the second corresponding state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the special control state.

  Feature F19. The gaming machine according to Feature F18, wherein said one state is said first state of said variable ball-in means, and said other state is said second state of said variable ball-in means.

  According to the feature F19, at the timing when the variable ball entry means switches from the first state to the second state, the opportunity for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means is generated. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention not only when the variable ball-in means is in the first state but also at the timing when the variable ball-in means is switched to the second state.

Feature F20. The displacement portion is formed such that a game ball placed on the displacement portion in the first corresponding state flows down in a specific direction along the displacement portion,
The special ball entry means is provided when the displacement portion switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state in a state where a game ball is placed in a predetermined range that is a part of the displacement portion. The gaming machine according to Feature F18 or F19, wherein the gaming ball is provided at a position where the gaming ball can flow by flowing down in the predetermined direction.

  According to the feature F20, in order for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means, not only the game ball is placed on the displacement portion in the first corresponding state, but also the game on which the ball is placed. It is necessary to switch the displacement portion from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state at an exquisite timing when the ball exists in the predetermined range. As a result, the player pays attention to the relationship between the position of the game ball placed on the displacement section and the switching timing of the state of the displacement section, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the special control state.

Feature F21. A means (guide nail group 241) for guiding a game ball flowing down the game area toward a specific range of the displacement portion is provided on the upstream side of the displacement direction of the game ball with respect to the displacement portion,
The gaming machine according to Feature F20, wherein the predetermined range exists on the side in the specific direction with respect to the specific range.

  According to the feature F21, the predetermined range, which is a range in which the special ball can enter the special ball entry means in the displacement portion, is more than the specific range in which the game ball first reaches in the displacement portion, on the displacement portion. It exists on the downstream side of the game ball. Accordingly, in order for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means, the displacement portion is moved from the first correspondence state to the second correspondence state at an exquisite timing while the game ball is flowing down on the displacement portion. Need to switch to state. Therefore, the player pays attention to the movement of the game ball on the displacement portion, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the special control state.

Feature F22. The one state is the first state of the variable ball-in means, the other state is the second state of the variable ball-in means,
The gaming machine according to Feature F21, wherein the ball entry portion (entrance portion 45b) of the variable ball entry means exists on the side in the specific direction with respect to the predetermined range.

  According to the feature F22, at the timing when the variable ball entry means switches from the first state to the second state, the opportunity for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means is generated. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention not only when the variable ball-in means is in the first state but also at the timing when the variable ball-in means is switched to the second state.

  In this case, the ball entry portion of the variable ball entry means is located at a position closer to the downstream side of the game ball on the displacement portion than a predetermined range which is a range in which the special ball entry device can enter the ball at the displacement portion. Existing. As a result, game balls placed on the displacement portion but not reaching the ball entry portion of the variable ball entry device enter the special ball entry device. Therefore, the disadvantage of the player that the game ball placed on the displacement portion did not enter the variable ball entry means, and conversely, the sense of profit that the ball entered the special ball entry means occurred. It can be changed.

  Feature F23. The predetermined range is a range in which, when game balls are supplied to the specific range at a predetermined firing cycle, one game ball reaches the ball entry portion and a game ball of the next firing order exists at the timing. The gaming machine according to Feature F22, wherein the gaming machine is set to:

  According to the feature F23, at the timing when the game ball enters the ball entry portion of the variable ball entry means and the displacement portion switches to the second corresponding state, the game ball may be present in a predetermined range of the displacement portion. Will be higher. Therefore, when the displacement section changes from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, it is possible to increase the possibility that a game ball enters the special ball entry means.

Feature F24. A first special ball entry means (first special ball entrance 251) and a second special ball entry means (second special ball entrance 252) are provided as the special ball entry means,
The gaming machine includes a means for providing a first profit when a game ball enters the first special ball entry means (a function of executing the processing of step S3902 in the main CPU 63),
Means for providing a second profit when a game ball enters the second special entering means (function of executing the processing of step S3904 in the main CPU 63);
With
When the first condition is satisfied in the special control state, game balls can enter the first special ball entry means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F23, wherein when the second condition is satisfied in the special control state, a game ball can enter the second special ball entry means.

  According to the feature F24, the special ball entry means to be entered according to whether the condition satisfied in the special control state is the first condition or the second condition is the first special ball entry means and the second special ball entry means Will be different. Then, the profit provided differs when the game ball enters the first special ball entry means and when the game ball enters the second special ball entry means. This allows the player not only to expect either of the first condition or the second condition to be satisfied in the special control state, but also to allow the game ball to enter the more profitable special ball entry means. That is, it is expected that the following condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the special control state.

Feature F25. The variable ball-in means includes a game ball that is in a first corresponding state in one of the first state and the second state when the variable ball-in means has flowed down from the upstream side of the variable ball-in means. In this state, the game ball is prevented from flowing down in a predetermined direction, and the variable ball-in means becomes the second corresponding state in the other of the first state and the second state. A displacement portion (guide plate portion 214) that allows the game ball to flow down in the predetermined direction,
The displacement portion is formed such that a game ball placed on the displacement portion in the first corresponding state flows down in a specific direction along the displacement portion,
The first special ball entry means is configured such that, in a state where a game ball is placed in a first predetermined range (first range X1) which is a partial range of the displacement portion, the displacement portion moves from the first corresponding state to the second position. The game ball is provided at a position where the game ball can flow in by flowing down in the predetermined direction when the game ball is switched to the two correspondence state,
The second special ball entry means is configured such that, when a game ball is placed in a second predetermined range (a second range X2) that is a partial range of the displacement portion, the displacement portion moves from the first corresponding state to the second position. The gaming machine according to Feature F24, wherein the gaming ball is provided at a position where the gaming ball can flow in by flowing down in the predetermined direction when the game ball is switched to the two correspondence state.

  According to the feature F25, when a game ball is placed on the displacement portion in the first corresponding state, the displacement is performed in a state in which the ball can enter the special ball entry means with higher profit. Expecting the unit to switch from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, attention will be paid to the position of the game ball placed on the displacement unit.

Feature F26. The one state is the first state of the variable ball-in means, the other state is the second state of the variable ball-in means,
It is more advantageous for a player that a game ball enters the first special ball entry means than a game ball enters the second special ball entry means,
A means (guide nail group 241) for guiding a game ball flowing down the game area toward a specific range of the displacement portion is provided on the upstream side of the displacement direction of the game ball with respect to the displacement portion,
The second predetermined range exists on the side in the specific direction with respect to the specific range,
The first predetermined range exists on the side in the specific direction with respect to the second predetermined range,
The gaming machine according to Feature F25, wherein the ball entry portion of the variable ball entry means exists on the side in the specific direction with respect to the first predetermined range.

  According to the feature F26, at the timing when the variable ball entry means switches from the first state to the second state, the opportunity to enter the game ball into the special ball entry means is generated. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention not only when the variable ball entry means is in the first state, but also at the timing when the variable ball entry means is switched to the second state.

  In this case, the first predetermined range, which is a range in which the displacement portion can enter the first special ball entry means, is a range in which the displacement portion can enter the second special ball entry device. (2) The ball is present on the forward side of the downflow direction of the game ball on the displacement section above the predetermined range, and the ball entry section of the variable ball entry means is located ahead of the downflow direction of the game ball on the displacement section above the first predetermined range Exists on the side. And it is more advantageous for the player that the game ball enters the first special ball entry means than the game ball enters the second special ball entry means. Then, the game ball existing at a position close to the ball entry portion of the variable ball entry means on the displacement portion is more likely to enter the first special ball entry device which is advantageous to the player. It is possible to increase the profit for the player in a situation where the disadvantage that the game ball does not enter the ball entry section unfortunately increases.

  Feature F27. The configuration according to any one of features F1 to F26, wherein a configuration is such that a game ball can enter the special entry unit when the variable entry unit is in the first state. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature F27, when the variable ball entry means is in the first state, it is possible to enter a game ball into the special ball entry means. Therefore, when the variable ball entry means is in the first state. Therefore, the player expects both the entry of the game ball into the variable entry means and the entry of the game ball into the special entry means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in a situation where the variable ball entry means is in the first state.

Feature F28. The variable ball entry means,
A ball entry portion (first large winning opening 265, second large winning opening 266) into which a game ball can enter;
A guiding state in which a game ball flowing down from the upstream side can be placed and the loaded game ball can be guided to the entry ball section, and a game ball flowing down from the upstream side is positioned in front of Guidance means (first guidance plate 271, second guidance plate 281) provided so as to be switchable to each of a non-guidance state not guided to the writing ball part;
With
When the guiding means is in the guiding state, the variable ball-in means is in the first state, and when the guiding means is in the non-guiding state, the variable ball-in means is in the second state,
When the guiding means is in the guiding state, the special ball is placed at a position where a game ball placed on the guiding means and which can flow into a different area different from the ball-entering portion can enter the ball. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F27, wherein means are provided.

  According to the feature F28, when the variable pitching means is in the first state due to the guiding means being in the guiding state, the game ball placed on the guiding means is either the variable pitching means or the special pitching means. Crab is guided. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the game ball placed on the guidance means, and to improve the interest of the game.

Feature F29. Means for guiding the game balls flowing down the game area toward the guidance start range of the guide means (first guide nail group 267, second guide nail) Group 268),
The guiding means is formed such that, in the guiding state, a game ball mounted on the guiding means flows down in a predetermined guiding direction along the guiding means,
The gaming machine according to Feature F28, wherein the entering ball portion and the different area are present on the side in the predetermined guidance direction with respect to the guidance start range.

  According to the feature F29, both the entering ball portion and the different area exist at the leading end of the guiding ball in the flowing direction of the game ball in the guiding device, relative to the guiding start range in which the gaming ball first reaches in the guiding device. I have. This allows the player to pay attention to the state in which the game ball flows down in the guiding means.

  Feature F30. The gaming machine according to Feature F29, wherein the different area is present on the side of the predetermined guiding direction with respect to the ball entry section.

  According to the feature F30, the game ball that has been put on the guiding means in the guiding state but has passed without entering the ball entry portion enters the special ball entry device. As a result, the disadvantage of the player that the game ball placed on the guiding means does not enter the variable ball entry means is reduced, and conversely, the profit feeling that the ball is entered into the special ball entry means is increased. It can be changed.

Feature F31. As the variable ball entry means, there are provided a first variable ball entry means (first special power winning device 261) and a second variable ball entry means (second special power winning device 262),
As the special ball entry means, a first special ball entry means (first through gate 263) and a second special ball entry means (second through gate 264) are provided,
When the first guiding means (first guiding plate 271), which is the guiding means of the first variable ball entering means, is in the guiding state, it is a game ball loaded on the first guiding means, and The first special ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball flowing down to a first different area different from the first ball entry section which is the variable ball entry means can enter the ball,
When the second guiding means (the second guiding plate 281), which is the guiding means of the second variable ball-in means, is in the guiding state, it is a game ball placed on the second guiding means and the second guiding means. The second special ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed down to a second different area different from the second ball entry section that is the variable ball entry means of the variable ball entry means can enter the ball. The gaming machine according to any one of features F28 to F30.

  According to the feature F31, there is a combination of the first variable pitching means and the first special pitching means and a combination of the second variable pitching means and the second special pitching means. This makes it possible to make the entering ratios of the game balls into the variable ball entry means and the special ball entry means different by changing the types of the combinations for which the special control is executed in the special control state. .

  Feature F32. The probability that the game ball loaded on the first guiding means in the guiding state enters the first special ball entry means and the game ball loaded on the second guiding means in the guiding state is The gaming machine according to Feature F31, wherein the probability of entering the second special entering means is different.

  According to the feature F32, it is possible to change the probability of entering a game ball into the special ball entry means by changing the type of the combination to be subjected to the special control in the special control state. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the execution target of the special control.

Feature F33. The special control state includes a first special control state (for example, 2R low accuracy result) and a second special control state (for example, 2R high accuracy result),
In the first special control state and the second special control state, the type of the variable ball entry means to be subjected to the special control or the selection mode of the variable ball entry means to be the special control executed is The gaming machine according to Feature F32, wherein the gaming machine is different.

  According to the feature F33, it is possible to vary the probability of the game ball entering the special ball entry means according to the type of the special control state. In this case, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the type of the special control state.

  Feature F34. The gaming machine according to any one of features F31 to F33, wherein the second special ball entry means is provided downstream of the first special ball entry means in the direction in which game balls flow down.

  According to the feature F34, since the second special ball entry means is provided downstream of the first special ball entry means with respect to the downflow direction of the game ball, the first variable ball entry means is a target of execution of the special control. When this happens, not only the game ball can enter the first special ball entry means, but also the game ball can enter the second special ball entry means. Therefore, the player expects that the first variable ball entry means is to be subjected to the special control.

  Feature F35. The same privilege is provided regardless of whether a game ball enters the first special ball entry unit or a game ball enters the second special ball entry unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features F31 to F34.

  According to the feature F35, the same privilege is provided regardless of whether a game ball enters the first special ball entry unit or a game ball enters the second special ball entry unit. Even if the execution target of the special control is any one of the first variable pitching means and the second variable pitching means, it is possible to suppress the disadvantageous feeling felt by the player.

  Feature F36. The number of game balls that can be used by a player is increased based on a game ball having entered the variable ball entry means, and the player can be used based on a game ball having entered the special ball entry means. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F35, further comprising means for increasing the number of gaming balls (the function of executing the processing in steps S3902 and S3904 in the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature F36, when a game ball enters the variable ball entry means, the number of game balls that can be used by the player increases, and when the game ball enters the special ball entry means, the player Increases the number of game balls that can be used. And, by providing the configuration of the above-described feature F1, the game state shifts to the special control state, so that the game ball can enter the variable ball entry means or can easily enter, It is possible to enter a game ball into the special ball entry means. Therefore, the amount of increase in the number of game balls that can be used by the player in the special control state can be increased, and the advantage in the special control state can be increased.

Feature F37. At least an acquisition corresponding ball entry means (sudden gate 311) that allows entry of a game ball in the predetermined game state;
Information acquisition means (main CPU 63) for acquiring special opportunity information when a game ball enters the special ball entry means, and acquiring the special opportunity information when a game ball enters the acquisition corresponding ball entry means. A function of executing the process of acquiring the hold information on the general-purpose side shown in FIG.
Trigger ball entry means (second operation port 34) which enters a ball-enterable state in which game balls can be entered based on the acquisition of the special trigger information,
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F36, wherein a transition trigger to the special control state is generated based on a game ball having entered the opportunity ball input means.

  According to the feature F37, even in a predetermined game state that is not a special control state, special opportunity information is acquired by the game ball entering the acquisition corresponding entry means, and the special opportunity information is acquired by acquiring the special opportunity information. The transition to the special control state is triggered based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entry means that has entered the ball possible state. As a result, not only in the special control state, but also in a predetermined game state, the opportunity ball means becomes available for entry upon the acquisition of the special opportunity information, and the game ball enters the opportunity ball means. It is possible to cause a situation in which a special control state occurs based on.

  Feature F38. A regulating means (restriction nail 312) is provided to make a probability of a game ball entering the acquisition corresponding ball entry means lower than a probability of a game ball entering the special ball entry means in the special control state. The gaming machine according to Feature F37, wherein:

  According to the feature F38, it is possible to suppress the probability that the transition to the special control state occurs based on the entry of the game ball into the acquisition corresponding entry means in the predetermined game state. This makes it possible to increase the player's satisfaction with the transition to the special control state based on the entry of the game ball into the acquisition corresponding entry means in the predetermined game state.

Feature F39. At least a predetermined ball entry means (first operating port 33) that allows game balls to enter in the predetermined game state;
A transition trigger to the special control state occurs without the special trigger information being obtained based on the game ball having entered the predetermined ball entry means,
The characteristic means wherein the regulating means sets the probability of a game ball entering the acquisition corresponding ball entry means to be lower than the probability that a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature F39, it is possible to enter the game ball in the predetermined game state, and the occurrence of the game ball enters the acquisition corresponding ball entry means rather than the predetermined ball entry means which triggers the transition to the special control state. The lower the probability of entering a game ball. This makes it possible to increase the player's satisfaction with the transition to the special control state based on the entry of the game ball into the acquisition corresponding entry means in the predetermined game state.

  Feature F40. Acquisition notification is performed in a situation in which the opportunity entry means is in the enterable state based on the fact that the special opportunity information is acquired by a game ball entering the acquisition correspondence entry means. The gaming machine according to any one of features F37 to F39, further comprising a notification execution unit (a function of executing the process of step S4413 in the main CPU 63, a display control device 82).

  According to the feature F40, the execution of the acquisition correspondence notification indicates that the entry of the game ball into the acquisition correspondence entry means and the acquisition of the special opportunity information causes the opportunity entry ball means to enter the ball enterable state. It is possible to notify the player through. Thereby, despite the fact that a game ball has been entered into the acquisition corresponding ball entry means and the opportunity ball entry means has entered the ball-enterable state, the game balls are not noticed to the opportunity ball entry means. It is possible to make it difficult to cause an event that a ball entry opportunity is lost.

  Feature F41. The notification execution unit is configured to execute the acquisition corresponding notification on condition that the special opportunity information is acquired by a game ball entering the acquisition corresponding ball entry unit in a state other than the special control state. The gaming machine according to Feature F40, wherein

  In the special control state, it is possible that game balls can enter the special ball entry means, so it is highly likely that the player is conscious that the opportunity ball means will be in a ball entry possible state. In a predetermined game state other than the state, the game ball does not enter the special ball entry means, so that the player may be less conscious of the opportunity ball entry means being able to enter the ball. In this case, according to the feature F41, the acquisition correspondence notification is executed when the special trigger information is acquired by the game ball entering the acquisition correspondence entry means in a situation other than the special control state. It becomes possible to direct the player's consciousness to the state where the ball-entering means enters the ball-entering state. In addition, in the special control state in which there is a high possibility that the player is conscious of the opportunity ball entry means being in a ball-enterable state, the acquisition correspondence notification is prevented from being executed. It is possible to prevent the player from being bothered.

  Feature F42. The notification execution means, the condition that the special opportunity information has been acquired by a game ball entering the acquisition corresponding ball entry means in a situation where the special opportunity information has not been acquired, the acquisition correspondence notification is The gaming machine according to feature F40 or F41, wherein the gaming machine is executed.

  According to the feature F42, it is possible to execute the acquisition correspondence notification in a situation in which the player has low awareness that the opportunity ball entry means is in a ball entry possible state.

  Feature F43. The variable ball input means, the special ball input means, and the acquisition corresponding ball input means are provided in an area where the game ball flows down when the shooting operation is performed in a predetermined mode. A gaming machine according to any one of F42 to F42.

  According to the feature F43, by continuing the firing operation in the predetermined mode, the game ball enters the variable ball entry unit, the game ball enters the special ball entry unit, and the acquisition corresponding ball entry unit enters. It is possible to aim for a game ball to enter.

  Feature F44. The opportunity input ball means is provided at a position where the game ball can easily reach the opportunity input ball means when the firing operation is performed in a specific mode than when the firing operation is performed in the predetermined mode. The gaming machine according to Feature F43, wherein the gaming machine is provided.

  According to the feature F44, when the opportunity ball input means enters the ball-enterable state in a state other than the special control state, the launch operation is performed in a specific mode, so that the game ball enters the opportunity ball input means. It becomes possible to make it easy for a ball to be generated.

Feature F45. Opportunity ball entry means (second operation port 34) for enabling game balls to enter based on the entry of game balls into the special entry means;
Grant determining means (a function of executing the process of step S1405 in the main CPU 63) for performing a grant determination based on a game ball having entered the opportunity ball means;
Based on the result of the grant determination being the first grant corresponding result, the game is shifted to the special control state, and the game state after the end of the special control state is the game state before the start of the special control state. Means (functions for executing the processing of steps S1904 and S1905 in the main CPU 63) capable of setting different game states;
Based on the result of the giving determination being the second giving correspondence result, the special control means shifts to the predetermined game state in which the special control is executed, and the game state after the end of the predetermined game state is Means for maintaining the game state before the predetermined game state is executed (a function of making a negative determination in step S1902 in the main CPU 63);
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F44, wherein a probability that the result of the assignment determination is the second assignment corresponding result is higher than a probability that the result of the assignment determination is the first assignment corresponding result.

  According to the feature F45, when a game ball enters the trigger ball means, not only the first granting result but also the second granting result can be obtained, and the probability of becoming the second granting result is better. It is higher than the probability of the first assignment corresponding result. Thereby, it is possible to generate a large number of opportunities for the variable ball entry means to be in the first state by causing the game ball to enter the opportunity ball entry means. In this case, the configuration of the above-mentioned feature F1 is provided so that the game ball can enter the special ball entry means in the special control state. Can be brought into a first state.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features F1 to F45, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C4, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F45, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or more of H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. It is provided in a game area (game area PA) in which game balls flow down, in which the first state in which game balls can enter or in which game balls are easy to enter, and in which game balls cannot enter or game balls are difficult to enter. Variable ball entry means provided to be switchable between the second state and the second state (the special special winning device 32 in the first to thirteenth and eighteenth embodiments, the first special winning device 261 and the second special winning device in the fifteenth embodiment). Tokuden winning device 262),
Special control means (special power open setting processing and special power close setting processing in the main CPU 63 for executing special control for setting the variable ball input means to the first state and then to the second state. Function),
Special ball entry means (through gate 35 in the first to thirteenth and eighteenth embodiments, and first and second through gates 263 and 263 in the fifteenth and fifteenth embodiments) in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter. Gate 264),
An opportunity ball entry means (a second operating port 34) which enters a ball enterable state in which game balls can be entered based on the entry of the game ball into the special ball entry means;
Grant determining means (a function of executing the process of step S1405 in the main CPU 63) for performing a grant determination based on a game ball having entered the opportunity ball means;
Based on the result of the assignment determination being the first assignment corresponding result, the control is shifted to a special control state in which the special control is executed (opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result), and Means for allowing the game state after the end of the control state to be a game state different from the game state before the start of the special control state (a function of executing the processing of steps S1904 and S1905 in the main CPU 63);
A predetermined game state in which the special control is executed by the special control means based on a result of the giving determination being a second giving correspondence result (opening / closing execution mode triggered by a small hit result) Means for maintaining the game state after the end of the predetermined game state in the game state before the execution of the predetermined game state (a function of making a negative determination in step S1902 in the main CPU 63);
With
In the assignment determination, the probability of the second assignment corresponding result is higher than the probability of the first assignment corresponding result,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to enter a game ball into the special ball entry means in a predetermined situation.

  According to the feature G1, when a game ball enters the opportunity ball unit, not only the first grant correspondence result but also the second grant correspondence result can be obtained, and the probability of the second grant correspondence result is higher. It is higher than the probability of the first assignment corresponding result. Thus, it is possible to generate an opportunity for the variable ball entry means to enter the first state by causing the game ball to enter the opportunity ball entry means. In this case, it is possible to enter the ball into the special ball entry means that causes the opportunity ball entry means to enter the ball enterable state in a predetermined situation. As a result, a player who expects a game ball to enter the opportunity ball input means expects a predetermined situation to occur. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature G2. The game according to Feature G1, wherein the frequency with which the opportunity ball entry means enters the ball enterable state with respect to the entry of game balls into the special ball entry means is constant regardless of the game state. Machine.

  According to the feature G2, the frequency at which the triggering ball means enters the ball ready state for entering the game ball into the special ball-filling means is constant regardless of the game state. An expected value at which a state in which the special control is executed after the ball has entered does not fluctuate according to the gaming state. As a result, the processing configuration can be simplified as compared with a configuration in which the expected value is changed according to the game state, and the expected value can be easily managed. However, in such a configuration in which the expected value does not fluctuate according to the game state, it becomes difficult to give the game intonation. On the other hand, since the configuration of the above-mentioned feature G1 is provided, and the game ball can enter the special ball entry means in a predetermined situation, the game ball is thrown into the special ball entry means at an opportunity to enter the ball. Can be given, and consequently it is possible to give the game intonation.

Feature G3. A predetermined ball entry means (first operation port 33) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
The giving determination means executes the giving determination based on a game ball having entered the opportunity entering ball means, and executes the giving determination based on a game ball having entered the predetermined entering means. And
As a state in which the assignment determination of the assignment determination unit is performed, a high probability state and a low probability state are set such that the probability of the first assignment corresponding result in the assignment determination is relatively high and low,
The gaming machine starts the game replay operation based on the determination of the grant, and controls the game replay execution means so as to end the game replay operation when the operation continuation period has elapsed. Time control means (a function of executing the special figure change start processing, the special figure change processing, and the special figure fixed processing in the main CPU 63);
A period determining means for determining the operation continuation period (a function of executing the process of step S1414 in the main CPU 63);
With
The period determining means is the game replay operation triggered by the giving determination executed based on the entering of a game ball to the opportunity entering ball means in the low probability state, and the result of the giving determination is the The average period of the operation continuation period of the game round operation in the case where the result does not become the first provision corresponding result is the provision determination performed based on the entering of the game ball to the predetermined entering means in the low probability state. It is the same as, approximately the same as, or less than the average period of the operation continuation period of the game round operation in the case where the game round operation as a trigger and the result of the grant determination is not the first grant corresponding result. Configuration
The gaming machine according to Feature G2, wherein the predetermined situation is a situation different from a situation in which the giving determination is made in the low probability state.

  According to the feature G3, in the low-probability state, the game is a game turning operation triggered by an award determination performed based on the entry of a game ball into the opportunity ball means, and the result of the award determination is a first grant corresponding result. The average period of the operation continuation period of the game replay operation in the case where the game replay operation is not performed is the game replay operation triggered by the giving determination performed based on the entry of the game ball to the predetermined ball entry means in the low probability state, It is the same as, approximately the same as, or less than or equal to the average period of the operation continuation period of the game replay operation when the result of the assignment determination does not become the first assignment corresponding result. Thus, it is possible to prevent the digestion rate of the former game repetition operation from being extremely worse than the digestion rate of the latter game repetition operation. However, it is provided with the above-mentioned configuration and a configuration such as the feature G2, in which the frequency at which the opportunity ball-inputting means is able to enter the ball when the game ball enters the special ball-in means is constant irrespective of the game state. If so, it is assumed that the game is played in the low probability state with the aim of entering the game ball into the opportunity ball means. On the other hand, in the situation where the determination is made in the low probability state, it is impossible to enter the game ball into the special ball entry means. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to play a game aiming at entering a game ball into the predetermined ball entry means.

  Feature G4. The feature that the variable ball entry means, the special ball entry means, and the opportunity ball entry means are provided in an area where the game ball flows down when the shooting operation is performed in a predetermined mode. The gaming machine according to any one of G3.

  According to the feature G4, by continuing the firing operation in the predetermined mode, the game ball enters the variable ball entry unit, the game ball enters the special ball entry unit, and the game enters the opportunity ball entry unit. It is possible to aim for the ball to enter.

  Feature G5. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G4, wherein the predetermined situation is a state in which the special control is executed.

  According to the feature G5, the transition to the state in which the special control is executed not only enables or facilitates the entry of the game ball into the variable ball entry means, but also enables the game into the special ball entry means. The ball can be entered. As a result, it is possible to increase the benefit of shifting to the state where the special control is executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature G6. The gaming machine according to Feature G5, wherein a game ball can enter the special ball entry means when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a state where the special control is executed.

  According to the feature G6, even if the state shifts to the state where the special control is executed, the game ball does not enter the special ball entry means unless the predetermined condition is satisfied. Thereby, the player expects that a predetermined condition is satisfied in addition to the game ball entering the variable ball entry means in the state where the special control is executed, and the game in the state where the special control is executed It is possible to improve the interest of the people.

  Feature G7. The gaming machine according to Feature G5 or G6, wherein the special control state and the predetermined game state are different in ease of entering a game ball into the special ball entry means.

  According to the feature G7, since the ease of entry of the game ball into the special ball entry means is different between the special control state and the predetermined game state, the game expecting the game ball to enter the special ball entry means The player expects the occurrence of a state in which game balls easily enter the special ball entry means. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature G8. When the variable ball entry means switches from one of the first state and the second state to the other, it is possible to enter a game ball into the special ball entry means,
The gaming machine according to Feature G7, wherein the number of times the special control is executed is different between the special control state and the predetermined game state.

  According to the feature G8, when the variable ball entry means switches from one of the first state and the second state to the other, the game ball can enter the special ball entry means. It is possible to increase the player's attention to the state switching timing. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the target that the player should pay attention to in the state where the special control is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the state where the special control is executed.

  In this case, the number of times the state is switched by the variable ball entry means differs between the special control state and the predetermined game state. As a result, the ease with which the game ball enters the special ball entry means differs between the special control state and the predetermined game state, and the player who expects the game ball to enter the special ball entry means is specially provided. It is expected that the execution state of the special control in which the game balls enter the ball entry means easily occurs. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature G9. The first corresponding state is set, and the game ball that has flowed down from the upstream side is placed thereon, so that the game ball is prevented from flowing down in a predetermined direction. Has a displacement portion (guide plate portion 214) that can flow down to
The special ball entry means is configured such that, in a state where a game ball is placed on the displacement portion, when the displacement portion switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, the game ball flows down in the predetermined direction. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G8, wherein the gaming machine is provided at a position where the gaming ball can flow.

  According to the feature G9, when the displacement section switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, the game ball placed on the displacement section can enter the special ball entry means. This allows the player to pay attention to whether or not the displacement unit switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state in a state where the game ball is placed on the displacement unit, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature G10. The displacement portion is formed such that a game ball placed on the displacement portion in the first corresponding state flows down in a specific direction along the displacement portion,
The special ball entry means is provided when the displacement portion switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state in a state where a game ball is placed in a predetermined range which is a partial range of the displacement portion. The gaming machine according to Feature G9, wherein the gaming ball is provided at a position where the game ball can flow in by flowing down in the predetermined direction.

  According to the feature G10, in order for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means, not only the game ball is placed on the displacement portion in the first corresponding state, but also the game on which the ball is placed. It is necessary to switch the displacement portion from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state at an exquisite timing when the ball exists in the predetermined range. As a result, the player pays attention to the relationship between the position of the game ball placed on the displacement portion and the timing of switching the state of the displacement portion, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature G11. A means (guide nail group 241) for guiding a game ball flowing down the game area toward a specific range of the displacement portion is provided on the upstream side of the displacement direction of the game ball with respect to the displacement portion,
The gaming machine according to Feature G10, wherein the predetermined range exists on the side in the specific direction with respect to the specific range.

  According to the feature G11, the predetermined range, which is a range in which the special ball can be entered into the special ball entry means in the displacement portion, is higher on the displacement portion than the specific range in which the game ball first reaches in the displacement portion. It exists on the downstream side of the game ball. Accordingly, in order for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means, the displacement portion is moved from the first correspondence state to the second correspondence state at an exquisite timing while the game ball is flowing down on the displacement portion. Need to switch to state. Therefore, the player pays attention to the movement of the game ball on the displacement portion, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature G12. The target ball entry means, which is one of the variable ball entry means and another ball entry means,
A ball entry portion (first large winning opening 265, second large winning opening 266) into which a game ball can enter;
A guiding state in which a game ball flowing down from the upstream side can be placed and the loaded game ball can be guided to the entry ball section, and a game ball flowing down from the upstream side is positioned in front of Guidance means (first guidance plate 271, second guidance plate 281) provided so as to be switchable to each of a non-guidance state not guided to the writing ball part;
With
When the guiding means is in the guiding state, the special ball is placed at a position where a game ball placed on the guiding means and which can flow into a different area different from the ball-entering portion can enter the ball. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G11, wherein means are provided.

  According to the feature G12, when the guiding unit is in the guiding state, the game ball placed on the guiding unit is guided to any one of the ball entry part of the target ball entry unit and the special ball entry unit. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the game ball placed on the guidance means, and to improve the interest of the game.

Feature G13. Means for guiding the game balls flowing down the game area toward the guidance start range of the guide means (first guide nail group 267, second guide nail) Group 268),
The guiding means is formed such that, in the guiding state, a game ball mounted on the guiding means flows down in a predetermined guiding direction along the guiding means,
The gaming machine according to Feature G12, wherein the entering ball portion and the different region are present on the side in the predetermined guidance direction with respect to the guidance start range.

  According to the feature G13, both the entry section and the separate area that allows entry to the special entry section are more in the guidance section than in the guidance start range in which the game ball first arrives in the guidance section. It exists on the downstream side of the game ball. This allows the player to pay attention to the state in which the game ball flows down in the guiding means.

  Feature G14. The gaming machine according to Feature G13, wherein the different area is located on the side of the predetermined guiding direction with respect to the ball entry section.

  According to the feature G14, the game ball that has been put on the guiding means in the guiding state but has passed without entering the ball entry portion enters the special ball entry device. Thereby, the player's disadvantageous feeling that the game ball placed on the guiding means did not enter the ball entry part is changed to a profitable feeling that the ball is entered into the special ball entry means. It becomes possible.

Feature G15. As the target ball entry means, there are provided a first target ball entry means (first special power winning device 261) and a second target ball entry means (second special power winning device 262),
As the special ball entry means, a first special ball entry means (first through gate 263) and a second special ball entry means (second through gate 264) are provided,
When the first guiding means (first guiding plate 271), which is the guiding means of the first target ball inputting means, is in the guiding state, the game ball is loaded on the first guiding means, and The first special ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed to a first different area different from the first ball entry section that is the ball entry section of the target ball entry means can enter the ball,
When the second guiding means (second guiding plate 281), which is the guiding means of the second target ball input means, is in the guiding state, it is a game ball placed on the second guiding means, and The second special ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed down to a second different area different from the second ball entry part which is the target ball entry part of the target ball entry means can enter the ball. The gaming machine according to any one of features G12 to G14.

  According to the feature G15, there is a combination of the first target ball entry unit and the first special ball entry unit, and a combination of the second target ball entry unit and the second special ball entry unit. By changing the type of the combination for which the guidance control is executed in the state where the guidance control is performed, the ratio of the game balls entering the target ball entry means and the special ball entry means is made different. Becomes possible.

  Feature G16. The probability that the game ball loaded on the first guiding means in the guiding state enters the first special ball entry means and the game ball loaded on the second guiding means in the guiding state is The gaming machine according to Feature G15, wherein the probability of entering the second special entering means is different.

  According to the feature G16, it is possible to make the probability of entering a game ball into the special ball entry means different by changing the type of the combination for which the guidance control is executed in the state where the guidance control is executed. . Thereby, it is possible to increase the degree of attention of the player on the execution target of the guidance control.

  Feature G17. The gaming machine according to feature G15 or G16, wherein the second special ball entry means is provided downstream of the first special ball entry means in the downflow direction of the game ball.

  According to the feature G17, since the second special ball entry means is provided on the downstream side of the downflow direction of the game ball with respect to the first special ball entry means, the first target ball entry means determines whether or not the special control is to be performed. When this happens, not only the game ball can enter the first special ball entry means, but also the game ball can enter the second special ball entry means. Therefore, the player expects that the first target ball entry means is to be subjected to the guidance control.

  Feature G18. The same privilege is provided regardless of whether a game ball enters the first special ball entry unit or a game ball enters the second special ball entry unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features G15 to G17.

  According to the feature G18, the same privilege is provided regardless of whether a game ball enters the first special ball entry unit or a game ball enters the second special ball entry unit. Even if the execution target of the guidance control is any one of the first target ball entry means and the second target ball entry means, it is possible to suppress the disadvantageous feeling felt by the player.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features G1 to G18, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C4, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F45, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or more of H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. The first corresponding state is set, and the game ball that has flowed down from the upstream side is placed thereon, so that the game ball is prevented from flowing down in a predetermined direction, and the second corresponding state is set, whereby the game ball is set in the predetermined direction. A displacement portion (guide plate portion 214) that can flow down to
When the displacement ball switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state in a state where the game ball is placed on the displacement part, the game ball flows down in the predetermined direction when the displacement part switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state. (A through gate 35 in the first to thirteenth and eighteenth embodiments, a first special entrance 251 and a second special entrance in the fourteenth embodiment) 252, the first through gate 263 and the second through gate 264 in the fifteenth embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature H1, when the displacement portion switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, the game ball placed on the displacement portion can enter the special ball entry means. This allows the player to pay attention to whether or not the displacement unit switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state in a state in which a game ball is placed on the displacement unit, thereby improving the interest of the game. Becomes possible.

Feature H2. The displacement portion is formed such that a game ball placed on the displacement portion in the first corresponding state flows down in a specific direction along the displacement portion,
The special ball entry means is provided when the displacement portion switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state in a state where a game ball is placed in a predetermined range that is a part of the displacement portion. The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein the gaming ball is provided at a position where the gaming ball can flow by flowing down in the predetermined direction.

  According to the feature H2, in order for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means, not only the game ball is placed on the displacement portion in the first corresponding state, but also the game on which the ball is placed. It is necessary to switch the displacement portion from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state at an exquisite timing when the ball exists in the predetermined range. As a result, the player pays attention to the relationship between the position of the game ball placed on the displacement portion and the timing of switching the state of the displacement portion, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature H3. A means (guide nail group 241) for guiding a game ball flowing down the game area toward a specific range of the displacement portion is provided on an upstream side of the displacement direction of the game ball with respect to the displacement portion,
The gaming machine according to Feature H2, wherein the predetermined range exists on the side in the specific direction with respect to the specific range.

  According to the feature H3, the predetermined range, which is a range in which the special ball can be entered into the special ball entry means in the displacement portion, is larger than the specific range in which the game ball first reaches in the displacement portion, on the displacement portion. It exists on the downstream side of the game ball. Accordingly, in order for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means, the displacement portion is moved from the first correspondence state to the second correspondence state at an exquisite timing while the game ball is flowing down on the displacement portion. Need to switch to state. Therefore, the player pays attention to the movement of the game ball on the displacement portion, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature H4. The gaming machine according to Feature H3, wherein the predetermined ball entry portion (entrance portion 45b) exists on the side in the specific direction with respect to the predetermined range.

  According to the feature H4, the predetermined ball entry portion is located on the forward side of the downward flow direction of the game ball on the displacement portion with respect to the predetermined range which is a range that allows the special ball entry means to enter the ball at the displacement portion. are doing. As a result, the game ball that has been placed on the displacement portion but has not reached the predetermined ball entry portion enters the special ball entry means. Therefore, the disadvantage of the player that the game ball placed on the displacement portion did not enter the predetermined entry portion, and conversely, the sense of profit that the entry into the special entry means occurred. Can be changed to

  Feature H5. The predetermined range is such that when a game ball is supplied to the specific range at a predetermined firing cycle, at the timing when one game ball reaches the predetermined ball entry portion, a game ball in the next firing order exists. The gaming machine according to feature H4, wherein the gaming machine is set in a range.

  According to the feature H5, there is a high possibility that the game ball exists in the predetermined range of the displacement unit at the timing when the game ball enters the predetermined entry unit and the displacement unit switches to the second corresponding state. . Therefore, when the displacement section changes from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, it is possible to increase the possibility that a game ball enters the special ball entry means.

Feature H6. A first special ball entry means (first special ball entrance 251) and a second special ball entry means (second special ball entrance 252) are provided as the special ball entry means,
The gaming machine includes a means for providing a first profit when a game ball enters the first special ball entry means (a function of executing the processing of step S3902 in the main CPU 63),
Means for providing a second profit when a game ball enters the second special entering means (function of executing the processing of step S3904 in the main CPU 63);
With
The first special ball entry means is configured such that, in a state where a game ball is placed in a first predetermined range (first range X1) which is a partial range of the displacement portion, the displacement portion moves from the first corresponding state to the second position. The game ball is provided at a position where the game ball can flow in by flowing down in the predetermined direction when the game ball is switched to the two correspondence state,
The second special ball entry means is configured such that, when a game ball is placed in a second predetermined range (a second range X2) that is a partial range of the displacement portion, the displacement portion moves from the first corresponding state to the second position. The game device according to any one of the features H1 to H5, wherein the game ball is provided at a position where the game ball can flow by flowing down in the predetermined direction when the game ball is switched to the two correspondence state. The described gaming machine.

  According to the feature H6, when the game ball is placed on the displacement portion in the first corresponding state, the displacement is performed in a state where the ball can enter the special ball entry means with higher profit. Expecting the unit to switch from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, attention will be paid to the position of the game ball placed on the displacement unit.

Feature H7. The displacement portion is formed such that a game ball placed on the displacement portion in the first corresponding state flows down in a specific direction along the displacement portion,
It is more advantageous for a player that a game ball enters the first special ball entry means than a game ball enters the second special ball entry means,
A means (guide nail group 241) for guiding a game ball flowing down the game area toward a specific range of the displacement portion is provided on an upstream side of the displacement direction of the game ball with respect to the displacement portion,
The second predetermined range exists on the side in the specific direction with respect to the specific range,
The first predetermined range exists on the side in the specific direction with respect to the second predetermined range,
The gaming machine according to Feature H6, wherein the predetermined ball entry portion exists on the side in the specific direction with respect to the first predetermined range.

  According to the feature H7, the first predetermined range, which is a range in which the displacement portion can enter the first special ball entry means, is a range in which the displacement portion can enter the second special ball entry device. The ball is located on the forward side of the downward flow direction of the game ball on the displacement portion over a certain second predetermined range, and the predetermined ball-in portion is on the forward side of the downward flow direction of the game ball on the displacement portion over the first predetermined range. Exists. And it is more advantageous for the player that the game ball enters the first special ball entry means than the game ball enters the second special ball entry means. Then, the game ball existing at a position close to the predetermined ball entry portion on the displacement portion is more likely to enter the first special ball entry means that is advantageous to the player, so that the predetermined ball entry portion is regretted. It is possible to make the profit for the player higher as the disadvantage becomes stronger that the game ball has not entered.

  Feature H8. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H7, wherein a plurality of types of operation modes of the displacement unit are set.

  According to the feature H8, since a plurality of types of operation modes of the displacement unit are set, there are a plurality of types of predetermined situations in which the frequency of entering the special entering means is different.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features H1 to H8, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C4, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F45, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or more of H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature I group>
Feature I1. A first state in which a game ball is provided or is provided in a game area (game area PA) in which a game ball flows down, or in which the game ball can easily enter, or the game ball cannot be entered or the game ball is difficult to enter. Variable ball entry means provided to be switchable to each of the second state (special power winning device 32 in the first to fourteenth and eighteenth embodiments, first special power winning device 261 and second power device in the fifteenth embodiment) Tokuden winning device 262),
Special control means (special power open setting processing and special power close setting processing in the main CPU 63 for executing special control for setting the variable ball input means to the first state and then to the second state. Function),
Transition means (a function of executing a special figure finalizing process in the main CPU 63) for transiting a game state to a special control state (open / close execution mode) in which the special control is executed;
In a predetermined game state other than the special control state, the entering of game balls is restricted, and special ball entry means (first special ball entrance 251 and second Special entrance 252),
The number of game balls that can be used by a player is increased based on a game ball having entered the variable ball-in means, and the player can be used based on a game ball having entered the special ball-in means. Means for increasing the number of important game balls (the function of executing the processing of steps S3902 and S3904 in the main CPU 63);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature I1, when the game state shifts to the special control state, the game ball can enter or become easy to enter the variable entering means, and the game ball enters the special entering means. Can be entered. As a result, it is possible to increase the profit of the game state shifting to the special control state, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In this case, if a game ball enters the variable ball entry means, the number of game balls available to the player increases, and the player also uses the game ball when the special ball entry means enters the ball. The number of possible game balls increases. And by having the above-mentioned configuration, the game state shifts to the special control state, so that the game ball can enter the variable ball entry means or can be easily entered, as well as special entry. It becomes possible for game balls to enter the means. Therefore, the amount of increase in the number of game balls that can be used by the player in the special control state can be increased, and the advantage in the special control state can be increased.

  Feature I2. The special ball entry means is located downstream of the variable ball entry means in the downflow direction of the game ball in the game area, and the variable ball entry means is one of the first state and the second state. The gaming machine according to Feature I1, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided at a position where a game ball can flow in at the timing of switching to.

  According to the feature I2, when the variable ball entry means switches from one of the first state and the second state to the other, a game ball that has not entered the variable ball entry means enters the special ball entry means. It becomes possible. As a result, game balls that have leaked as variable ball entry means enter the special ball entry means, and the number of available game balls increases as the game balls enter the special ball entry means. In addition, it is possible to suppress the player's disadvantageous feeling that a game ball that has leaked from the ball entry target of the variable ball entry means has occurred.

Feature I3. The variable ball-in means includes a game ball that is in a first corresponding state in one of the first state and the second state when the variable ball-in means has flowed down from the upstream side of the variable ball-in means. In this state, the game ball is prevented from flowing down in a predetermined direction, and the variable ball-in means becomes the second corresponding state in the other of the first state and the second state. A displacement portion (guide plate portion 214) that allows the game ball to flow down in the predetermined direction,
The special ball entry means is configured such that, in a state where a game ball is placed on the displacement portion, when the displacement portion switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, the game ball flows down in the predetermined direction. The gaming machine according to Feature I1 or I2, wherein the gaming machine is provided at a position where the gaming ball can flow.

  According to the feature I3, when the displacement section switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, the game ball placed on the displacement section can enter the special ball entry means. In this way, in the special control state, the player not only determines whether or not a ball is inserted into the variable ball-in means, but also performs the first response when the game ball is placed on the displacement portion. Attention is paid to whether the state is switched from the state to the second corresponding state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the special control state.

  Feature I4. The gaming machine according to feature I3, wherein the one state is the first state of the variable ball-in means, and the other state is the second state of the variable ball-in means.

  According to the feature I4, at the timing when the variable ball entry means switches from the first state to the second state, the opportunity to enter the game ball into the special ball entry means is generated. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention not only when the variable ball entry means is in the first state, but also at the timing when the variable ball entry means is switched to the second state.

Feature I5. The displacement portion is formed such that a game ball placed on the displacement portion in the first corresponding state flows down in a specific direction along the displacement portion,
The special ball entry means is provided when the displacement portion switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state in a state where a game ball is placed in a predetermined range that is a part of the displacement portion. The gaming machine according to feature I3 or I4, wherein the gaming ball is provided at a position where the gaming ball can flow by flowing down in the predetermined direction.

  According to the feature I5, in order for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means, not only the game ball is placed on the displacement portion in the first corresponding state, but also the game on which the ball is placed. It is necessary to switch the displacement portion from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state at an exquisite timing when the ball exists in the predetermined range. As a result, the player pays attention to the relationship between the position of the game ball placed on the displacement section and the switching timing of the state of the displacement section, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the special control state.

Feature I6. A means (guide nail group 241) for guiding a game ball flowing down the game area toward a specific range of the displacement portion is provided on the upstream side of the displacement direction of the game ball with respect to the displacement portion,
The gaming machine according to Feature I5, wherein the predetermined range exists on the side in the specific direction with respect to the specific range.

  According to the feature I6, the predetermined range, which is a range in which the special ball can be entered into the special ball entry means in the displacement portion, is larger than the specific range in which the game ball first reaches in the displacement portion, on the displacement portion. It exists on the downstream side of the game ball. Accordingly, in order for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means, the displacement portion is moved from the first correspondence state to the second correspondence state at an exquisite timing while the game ball is flowing down on the displacement portion. Need to switch to state. Therefore, the player pays attention to the movement of the game ball on the displacement portion, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the special control state.

Feature I7. The one state is the first state of the variable ball-in means, the other state is the second state of the variable ball-in means,
The gaming machine according to Feature I6, wherein a ball entry portion (entrance portion 45b) of the variable ball entry means exists on the side in the specific direction with respect to the predetermined range.

  According to the feature I7, at the timing when the variable ball entry means switches from the first state to the second state, the opportunity to enter the game ball into the special ball entry means is generated. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention not only when the variable ball entry means is in the first state, but also at the timing when the variable ball entry means is switched to the second state.

  In this case, the ball entry portion of the variable ball entry means is located at a position closer to the downstream side of the game ball on the displacement portion than a predetermined range which is a range in which the special ball entry device can enter the ball at the displacement portion. Existing. As a result, game balls placed on the displacement portion but not reaching the ball entry portion of the variable ball entry device enter the special ball entry device. Therefore, the disadvantage of the player that the game ball placed on the displacement portion did not enter the variable ball entry means, and conversely, the sense of profit that the ball entered the special ball entry means occurred. It can be changed.

  Feature I8. The predetermined range is a range in which, when game balls are supplied to the specific range at a predetermined firing cycle, one game ball reaches the ball entry portion and a game ball of the next firing order exists at the timing. The gaming machine according to feature I7, wherein the gaming machine is set to:

  According to the feature I8, at the timing when the game ball enters the ball entry portion of the variable ball entry means and the displacement portion switches to the second corresponding state, the game ball may be present in a predetermined range of the displacement portion. Will be higher. Therefore, when the displacement section changes from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, it is possible to increase the possibility that a game ball enters the special ball entry means.

Feature I9. A first special ball entry means (first special ball entrance 251) and a second special ball entry means (second special ball entrance 252) are provided as the special ball entry means,
The gaming machine includes a means for providing a first profit when a game ball enters the first special ball entry means (a function of executing the processing of step S3902 in the main CPU 63),
Means for providing a second profit when a game ball enters the second special entering means (function of executing the processing of step S3904 in the main CPU 63);
With
When the first condition is satisfied in the special control state, game balls can enter the first special ball entry means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I8, wherein when the second condition is satisfied in the special control state, a game ball can enter the second special ball entry means.

  According to the feature I9, the special ball entry means to be entered according to whether the condition satisfied in the special control state is the first condition or the second condition is the first special ball entry means and the second special ball entry means Will be different. Then, the profit provided differs when the game ball enters the first special ball entry means and when the game ball enters the second special ball entry means. This allows the player not only to expect either of the first condition or the second condition to be satisfied in the special control state, but also to allow the game ball to enter the more profitable special ball entry means. That is, it is expected that the following condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the special control state.

Feature I10. The variable ball-in means includes a game ball that is in a first corresponding state in one of the first state and the second state when the variable ball-in means has flowed down from the upstream side of the variable ball-in means. In this state, the game ball is prevented from flowing down in a predetermined direction, and the variable ball-in means becomes the second corresponding state in the other of the first state and the second state. A displacement portion (guide plate portion 214) that allows the game ball to flow down in the predetermined direction,
The displacement portion is formed such that a game ball placed on the displacement portion in the first corresponding state flows down in a specific direction along the displacement portion,
The first special ball entry means is configured such that, in a state where a game ball is placed in a first predetermined range (first range X1) which is a partial range of the displacement portion, the displacement portion moves from the first corresponding state to the second position. The game ball is provided at a position where the game ball can flow in by flowing down in the predetermined direction when the game ball is switched to the two correspondence state,
The second special ball entry means is configured such that, when a game ball is placed in a second predetermined range (a second range X2) that is a partial range of the displacement portion, the displacement portion moves from the first corresponding state to the second position. The gaming machine according to feature I9, wherein the gaming ball is provided at a position where the gaming ball can flow in by flowing down in the predetermined direction when the game ball is switched to the two correspondence state.

  According to the feature I10, when a game ball is placed on the displacement portion in the first corresponding state, the displacement is performed in a state where the ball can enter the special ball entry means with higher profit. Expecting the unit to switch from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, attention will be paid to the position of the game ball placed on the displacement unit.

Feature I11. The one state is the first state of the variable ball-in means, the other state is the second state of the variable ball-in means,
It is more advantageous for a player that a game ball enters the first special ball entry means than a game ball enters the second special ball entry means,
A means (guide nail group 241) for guiding a game ball flowing down the game area toward a specific range of the displacement portion is provided on the upstream side of the displacement direction of the game ball with respect to the displacement portion,
The second predetermined range exists on the side in the specific direction with respect to the specific range,
The first predetermined range exists on the side in the specific direction with respect to the second predetermined range,
The gaming machine according to Feature I10, wherein a ball entry portion of the variable ball entry means is located on the side in the specific direction with respect to the first predetermined range.

  According to the feature I11, at the timing when the variable ball entry means switches from the first state to the second state, the opportunity to enter the game ball into the special ball entry means is generated. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention not only when the variable ball entry means is in the first state, but also at the timing when the variable ball entry means is switched to the second state.

  In this case, the first predetermined range, which is a range in which the displacement portion can enter the first special ball entry means, is a range in which the displacement portion can enter the second special ball entry device. (2) The ball is present on the forward side of the downflow direction of the game ball on the displacement section above the predetermined range, and the ball entry section of the variable ball entry means is located ahead of the downflow direction of the game ball on the displacement section above the first predetermined range Exists on the side. And it is more advantageous for the player that the game ball enters the first special ball entry means than the game ball enters the second special ball entry means. Then, the game ball existing at a position close to the ball entry portion of the variable ball entry means on the displacement portion is more likely to enter the first special ball entry device which is advantageous to the player. It is possible to increase the profit for the player in a situation where the disadvantage that the game ball does not enter the ball entry section unfortunately increases.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features I1 to I11, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C4, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F45, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or more of H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature J group>
Feature J1. A first state in which a game ball is provided or is provided in a game area (game area PA) in which a game ball flows down, or in which the game ball can easily enter, or the game ball cannot be entered or the game ball is difficult to enter. Variable ball entry means provided to be switchable to each of the second state (special power winning device 32 in the first to fourteenth and eighteenth embodiments, first special power winning device 261 and second power device in the fifteenth embodiment) Tokuden winning device 262),
Special control means (special power open setting processing and special power close setting processing in the main CPU 63 for executing special control for setting the variable ball input means to the first state and then to the second state. Function),
Transition means (a function of executing a special figure finalizing process in the main CPU 63) for transiting a game state to a special control state (open / close execution mode) in which the special control is executed;
The special ball entry means (first to thirteenth and eighteenth embodiments) in which entry of game balls is restricted in a predetermined game state and game balls can enter in a game state other than the predetermined game state. Then, the through gate 35, the first special entrance 251 and the second special entrance 252 in the fourteenth embodiment, the first through gate 263 and the second through gate 264 in the fifteenth embodiment),
At least an acquisition corresponding ball entry means (sudden gate 311) that allows entry of a game ball in the predetermined game state;
Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the special ball entry means, it becomes possible to enter a game ball based on that the game ball has entered the acquisition corresponding entry means. An opportunity ball entry means (a second operating port 34) for entering a possible ball entry state;
With
A gaming machine, wherein a transition trigger to the special control state is generated based on a game ball having entered the opportunity ball input means.

  According to the feature J1, it is possible to enter a ball into the special ball entry means that causes the opportunity ball entry means to enter the ball enterable state in a game state other than the predetermined game state. As a result, a player expecting a ball to enter the opportunity ball input means expects a game state other than the predetermined game state to occur. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In this case, even in the predetermined game state, the opportunity ball entry means can enter the ball based on the fact that the game ball enters the acquisition corresponding ball entry means. Then, the opportunity to shift to the special control state occurs based on the fact that the game ball has entered the opportunity entry means which has entered the enterable state. As a result, in the predetermined game state as well as in the game state which is not the predetermined game state, the opportunity ball entry means can enter the ball, and the special control state is generated based on the entry of the game ball into the opportunity ball entry means. Can be created.

  Feature J2. The gaming machine according to Feature J1, wherein the special control state is included in a gaming state other than the predetermined gaming state.

  According to the feature J2, when the game state shifts to the special control state, the game ball can enter or become easy to enter the variable ball entry means, and the game ball enters the special ball entry means. Can be entered. As a result, it is possible to increase the profit of the game state shifting to the special control state, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature J3. Regulation means (restriction means) for setting the probability of game balls entering the acquisition corresponding ball entry means to be lower than the probability of game balls entering the special ball entry means in a game state other than the predetermined game state. A gaming machine according to feature J1 or J2, comprising a nail 312).

  According to the feature J3, it is possible to suppress the probability that the transition to the special control state occurs based on the entry of the game ball into the acquisition corresponding entry means in the predetermined game state. This makes it possible to increase the player's satisfaction with the transition to the special control state based on the entry of the game ball into the acquisition corresponding entry means in the predetermined game state.

Feature J4. At least a predetermined ball entry means (first operating port 33) that allows game balls to enter in the predetermined game state;
A transition trigger to the special control state is generated based on a game ball having entered the predetermined ball entry means,
The regulating means sets the probability that a game ball enters the acquisition corresponding ball entry means to be lower than the probability that a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means. J3. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature J4, it is possible to enter the game ball in the predetermined game state, and the acquisition corresponding ball entry means is more than the predetermined ball entry means in which the occurrence of the game ball entry triggers the transition to the special control state. Has a lower probability of entering a game ball. This makes it possible to increase the player's satisfaction with the transition to the special control state based on the entry of the game ball into the acquisition corresponding entry means in the predetermined game state.

  Feature J5. Notification execution means (main-side CPU 63) for executing acquisition-related notification in a situation where the opportunity ball-inputting means enters the ball-enterable state based on the fact that a game ball has entered the acquisition-corresponding ball-in means. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J4, further comprising a function of executing the process of step S4413 in (1) and a display control device 82).

  According to the feature J5, it is possible to notify the player through the execution of the acquisition correspondence notification that the game ball enters the acquisition correspondence entrance means and the opportunity entry ball means enters the ball-enterable state. It becomes. Thereby, despite the fact that a game ball has been entered into the acquisition corresponding ball entry means and the opportunity ball entry means has entered the ball-enterable state, the game balls are not noticed to the opportunity ball entry means. It is possible to make it difficult to cause an event that a ball entry opportunity is lost.

  Feature J6. The notification execution means is configured to execute the acquisition correspondence notification on condition that a game ball enters the acquisition correspondence entry means in the predetermined game state. Gaming machine.

  In the game state other than the predetermined game state, it is possible that the game ball can enter the special ball entry means. Although it is high, in a predetermined game state, there is no possibility that the player's consciousness that the opportunity ball entry means will be able to enter the ball is low because no game ball enters the special ball entry means. In this case, according to the characteristic J6, the acquisition correspondence notification is executed on condition that the game ball has entered the acquisition correspondence ball entry means in the predetermined game state, so that the opportunity ball entry means changes to the ball entry possible state. It becomes possible to direct the player's consciousness to what will happen. In addition, the acquisition corresponding notification is prevented from being executed in a game state other than the predetermined game state in which the player is more likely to be aware that the opportunity ball entry means is in a ball-enterable state, so that acquisition is not performed. It is possible to prevent the execution of the corresponding notification from being bothersome for the player.

Feature J7. A means for acquiring special opportunity information based on a game ball having entered the special ball entry means, and acquiring the special opportunity information based on a game ball having entered the acquisition corresponding ball entry means; ,
The opportunity entry means is configured to enter the entry possible state based on that the special opportunity information is obtained,
The notification execution means, the condition that the special opportunity information has been acquired by a game ball entering the acquisition corresponding ball entry means in a situation where the special opportunity information has not been acquired, the acquisition correspondence notification is The gaming machine according to feature J5 or J6, wherein the gaming machine is executed.

  According to the feature J7, it is possible to execute the acquisition correspondence notification in a situation where the player has low awareness that the opportunity ball entry means is in a ball entry possible state.

  Feature J8. The feature J1 wherein the variable ball entry means, the special ball entry means, and the acquisition corresponding ball entry means are provided in an area where the game ball flows down when the shooting operation is performed in a predetermined mode. A gaming machine according to any one of claims J7.

  According to the feature J8, by continuing the firing operation in the predetermined mode, entering the game ball into the variable ball entry unit, entering the game ball into the special ball entry unit, and entering the acquisition corresponding ball entry unit It is possible to aim for a game ball to enter.

  Feature J9. The opportunity input ball means is provided at a position where the game ball can easily reach the opportunity input ball means when the firing operation is performed in a specific mode than when the firing operation is performed in the predetermined mode. The gaming machine according to feature J8, wherein the gaming machine is provided.

  According to the feature J9, when the opportunity ball entry means enters the ball enterable state in the predetermined game state, the launch operation is performed in a specific mode, whereby the entry of the game ball into the opportunity ball entry means is enabled. It is possible to make it easily occur.

  In addition, for the configuration of the features J1 to J9, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C4, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F45, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or more of H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the inventions relating to the feature F group, the feature G group, the feature H group, the feature I group, and the feature J group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as a kind of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, there is known a configuration in which a game state is shifted to a special control state based on a predetermined shift condition being satisfied, thereby giving a profit to a player.

  For the pachinko machine, specifically, a configuration in which a special control state is entered when a winning result is obtained by an internal lottery based on a game ball entering a ball entry portion provided in the game area, or a predetermined ball entry There is known a configuration in which a special control state is entered based on a game ball having entered a section. Then, when the state shifts to the special control state, for example, the opening and closing of a ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and game balls are paid out based on the ball entry into the ball entry device.

  Here, in the gaming machines such as the above-described examples, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. A first state in which a game ball is provided or is provided in a game area (game area PA) in which a game ball flows down, or in which the game ball can easily enter, or the game ball cannot be entered or the game ball is difficult to enter. A first variable ball entry means (first special electric winning device 291) provided so as to be switchable to each of the second state and
A first state provided downstream of the first variable ball entry means, in which game balls can be entered or game balls are easily entered, and a second state in which game balls cannot be entered or game balls are difficult to enter. A second variable pitching means (second special power winning device 292) provided switchably for each of
In the unit control state, a unit control means (FIG. 85 (a) in the main CPU 63) for controlling so as to generate a period in which both the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are in the first state. (A function of executing a special power opening setting process shown in FIG. 85 and a function of executing a special power closing setting process shown in FIG. 85 (b)).
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature K1, a game ball that has failed to enter the first variable ball entry means in the first state in the unit control state can enter the second variable ball entry means in the first state. This makes it easier for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means in the unit control state.

Feature K2. Means for shifting the game state to a special control state (opening / closing execution mode) in which the unit control state is executed a plurality of times (a function of executing a special figure finalizing process in the main CPU 63);
When the unit control state of one execution round ends, the game ball that has started flowing down from the position of the first variable ball entry section toward the second variable ball entry section is the unit control state of the next execution cycle. The gaming machine according to Feature K1, wherein the game machine is configured to enter the second variable ball entry means in the first state.

  According to the feature K2, the game ball that has not reached the first variable ball-in means even though it has reached the position of the first variable ball-in means at the timing when the unit control state ends, In the unit control state of the next execution time, the ball enters the second variable ball entry means. Accordingly, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls that do not enter the variable ball-in means even though the shooting operation is performed in order to enter the game ball in the variable ball-in means in the special control state.

  Feature K3. The unit control means performs control so that when the unit control state is started, both the first variable pitching means and the second variable pitching means enter the first state. The gaming machine according to K1 or K2.

  According to the feature K3, when the unit control state is started, both the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are controlled to be in the first state. The processing load can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which the timing of the first state is individually set. Further, a game ball that has leaked into the first variable ball entry means in the unit control state of one execution time can enter the second variable ball entry means in the unit control state of the next execution time.

  Feature K4. The unit control means is configured such that when the unit control state is started, both the first variable pitching means and the second variable pitching means are in the first state, and when the unit control state is ended, The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K3, wherein both the first variable ball-in means and the second variable ball-in means are controlled to be in the second state.

  According to the feature K4, it is possible to reduce the processing load for controlling each variable ball entry means in the unit control state. Further, according to the present configuration, while the target of entering the game ball in the unit control state is basically the first variable ball entry means, the game ball enters the first variable ball entry means in the unit control state of one execution time. The game ball that has leaked can enter the second variable ball entry means in the unit control state of the next execution time.

Feature K5. Means for shifting the gaming state to a special control state in which the unit control state is executed a plurality of times (a function of executing a special figure fixing process in the main CPU 63);
In the special control state, the period from the end of the unit control state of one execution cycle to the start of the unit control state of the next execution cycle is determined from the position of the first variable pitching means to the second control mode. The gaming machine according to feature K3 or K4, wherein the period is shorter than a period required for the game ball to reach the position of the variable ball-in means.

  According to the feature K5, a game ball that has leaked into the first variable ball-in means in the unit control state of one execution time can enter the second variable ball-in means in the unit control state of the next execution time. It becomes. In addition, it is possible to realize such a configuration that it is difficult to cause such a ball entry leak by adjusting the positional relationship between the first variable ball entry unit and the second variable ball entry unit.

Feature K6. The first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are configured such that game balls flowing down a predetermined game area can enter,
The first variable ball-in means, when the first variable ball-in means is in the first state, a game ball flowing down the predetermined game area is guided to a ball-in portion of the first variable ball-in means. The feature K5 is characterized by having a first displacement portion (guide plate portion 214 of the first special electric winning device 291) for preventing a game ball from flowing toward the second variable ball entry means. The described gaming machine.

  According to the feature K6, when the first variable ball-in means is in the first state, it is possible to prevent the game ball from leaking into the first variable ball-in means. In addition, even if a ball is leaked into the first variable ball-in means at the end timing of the unit control state of one execution cycle by having the configuration of the above-described feature K5, the game ball is changed to the second variable ball-ball. Easy to enter the ball entry means. Therefore, it is difficult for the ball to leak into the variable ball-in means in the special control state.

  Feature K7. The second variable ball entry means is a game ball flowing down the predetermined game area when the second variable ball entry means is in the first state, and flows into the downstream side of the first variable ball entry means. The game ball that has been guided to the ball entry portion of the second variable ball entry means, and a second displacement portion (second special power winning device 292) that prevents the game ball from flowing downstream of the second variable ball entry device. The gaming machine according to feature K6, characterized by having a guide plate portion 214).

  According to the feature K7, even if the first variable ball entry means leaks a ball at the end timing of the unit control state of one execution cycle, the game ball enters the second variable ball entry means. It will be.

  Feature K8. A blocking state provided downstream of the first variable ball-in means and upstream of the second variable ball-in means to prevent further inflow of gaming balls flowing down from the upstream side to the downstream side; Any of the features K1 to K7, characterized in that a blocking means (flow-down blocking member 303) is provided so as to be switchable between a non-blocking state and a blocking state in which the gaming ball does not flow further downstream. 2. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature K8, even if a ball leaks into the first variable ball-filling means, it is possible to prevent the leaked game ball from flowing into the downstream side by the blocking means. Then, when the blocking means is switched from the blocking state to the non-blocking state in a state where the second variable ball-in means is in the first state, the game ball whose flow to the downstream side is blocked by the blocking state is removed. It is possible to make the ball enter the second variable ball entry means.

  Feature K9. The blocking means is brought into the blocking state at a timing before the first variable ball-taking means is switched from the first state to the second state, and the second variable ball-taking means is switched to the second state. A blocking control unit (a function of executing a flow-down blocking control process in the main CPU 63) that causes the blocking unit to enter the non-blocking state at a timing after the timing of switching from the state to the first state. The gaming machine according to feature K8, wherein

  According to the feature K9, since the blocking means is in the blocking state at a timing before the timing at which the first variable ball-taking means is switched from the first state to the second state, the first variable ball-taking means is in the second state. At the timing when the state is switched from the first state to the second state, it is possible to prevent the inflow of the game ball that has leaked into the first variable ball input means to the further downstream side by the blocking means. Then, when the blocking means enters the non-blocking state at a timing later than the timing at which the second variable ball entry means is switched from the second state to the first state, the game ball blocked by the blocking means becomes the second variable. The player will enter the ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from leaking into the variable ball-in means by the blocking means.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features K1 to K9, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C4, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F45, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or more of H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature K group, the following problem can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as a kind of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, there is known a configuration in which a game state is shifted to a special control state based on a predetermined shift condition being satisfied, thereby giving a profit to a player.

  For the pachinko machine, specifically, a configuration in which a special control state is entered when a winning result is obtained by an internal lottery based on a game ball entering a ball entry portion provided in the game area, or a predetermined ball entry There is known a configuration in which a special control state is entered based on a game ball having entered a section. Then, when the state shifts to the special control state, for example, the opening and closing of a ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and game balls are paid out based on the ball entry into the ball entry device.

  Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to make the execution mode of the special control state suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which the above features can be applied or applied to each feature is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

  Revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably starting display of the plurality of pictures due to the operation of the start operation means, and due to the operation of the stop operation means In addition, the game machine is configured such that the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped when a predetermined time elapses and a privilege is given to the player according to the pattern after the stop.

  Reference numeral 10: Pachinko machine, 32: Special prize winning device, 33: First operating port, 34: Second operating port, 35: Through gate, 45b: Inlet, 63: Main CPU, 82: Display control device, 214: Guidance Plate part, 241, guide nail group, 251: first special entrance, 252: second special entrance, 261: first special electric winning device, 262: second special electric winning device, 263: first through gate, 264: second through gate, 265: first winning opening, 266: second winning opening, 267: first guiding nail group, 268: second guiding nail group, 271: first guiding plate, 281: second Guide plate, 291: first special electric winning device, 292: second special electric winning device, 303: flow-down preventing member, 311: sudden gate, 312: restricted nail, PA: game area.

Claims (1)

A first state is provided in a game area where a game ball flows down, in which a game ball can enter or a game ball can easily enter and a second state in which a game ball cannot enter or a game ball is difficult to enter. Variable ball entry means provided switchably for each,
Special control means for executing special control for setting the variable ball-in means to the second state after setting the variable ball-in means to the first state;
Transition means for transitioning the gaming state to a special control state in which the special control is executed,
Acquisition corresponding ball entry means capable of entering a game ball at least in the predetermined game state,
Triggering ball entry means that enters a ball-enterable state in which a game ball can be entered based on that a game ball has entered the acquisition-compatible ball entry means,
With
A transition trigger to the special control state is generated based on a game ball having entered the trigger ball input means,
The gaming machine is configured to execute the notification corresponding to the acquisition corresponding notification in a situation where the opportunity ball inputting means is in the ball enterable state based on a game ball having entered the acquisition corresponding ball inputting means. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means.

Images